<<

MEMORANDUM OF FOR THE INTERNATIONAL SWAPS AND DERIVATIVES ASSOCIATION, INC.

Collateral Provider Insolvency: Validity and Enforceability under English Law of Collateral Arrangements under the ISDA Credit Support Documents

13 November 2018

Allen & Overy LLP One Bishops Square London E1 6AD United Kingdom Tel +44 (0)20 3088 0000 Fax +44 (0)20 3088 0088

Allen & Overy LLP is a limited liability partnership registered in England and Wales with registered number OC306763. It is authorised and regulated by the Solicitors Regulation Authority of England and Wales. The term partner is used to refer to a member of Allen & Overy LLP or an employee or consultant with equivalent standing and qualifications. A list of the members of Allen & Overy LLP and of the non-members who are designated as partners is open to inspection at its registered office, One Bishops Square, London E1 6AD. Allen & Overy LLP or an affiliated undertaking has an office in each of: Abu Dhabi, Amsterdam, Antwerp, Bangkok, Barcelona, Beijing, Belfast, Bratislava, Brussels, Bucharest (associated office), Budapest, Casablanca, Doha, Dubai, Düsseldorf, Frankfurt, Hamburg, Hanoi, Ho Chi Minh City, Hong Kong, Istanbul, Jakarta (associated office), Johannesburg, London, Luxembourg, Madrid, Milan, Moscow, Munich, New York, Paris, Perth, Prague, Riyadh (cooperation office), Rome, São Paulo, Seoul, Shanghai, Singapore, Sydney, Tokyo, Warsaw, Washington, D.C. and Yangon. ICM:28162951.19

[This page left intentionally blank.]

TABLE OF CONTENTS

I. INTRODUCTION ...... 3 II. FINANCIAL COLLATERAL ARRANGEMENTS ...... 20 III. SECURITY INTEREST – NON-IM SECURITY DOCUMENTS ...... 48 IV. SECURITY INTEREST – IM SECURITY DOCUMENTS ...... 93 V. SECURITY INTEREST – CLEARING SYSTEM IM DOCUMENTS ...... 107 VI. TITLE TRANSFER ...... 112 VII. ENFORCEABILITY IN THE ABSENCE OF INSOLVENCY PROCEEDINGS ...... 122 VIII. CLOSE-OUT AMOUNT PROTOCOL ...... 126 IX. COLLATERAL AGREEMENT NEGATIVE INTEREST PROTOCOL ...... 126 X. INDEPENDENT AMOUNT (IA) PROVISIONS ...... 127 XI. PENDING DEVELOPMENTS ...... 127 XII. RELIANCE ...... 134

EXHIBIT 1 - DEFINITIONS USED IN THIS MEMORANDUM ...... 135 APPENDIX A - CERTAIN TRANSACTIONS UNDER THE ISDA MASTER AGREEMENT .... 139 APPENDIX B - CERTAIN COUNTERPARTY TYPES ...... 145 APPENDIX C - EXCLUDED ENGLISH COMPANIES ...... 150 APPENDIX D - RECOURSE TO THE ASSETS OF A TRUST ...... 151

ANNEX 1 - BANKS ...... 154 ANNEX 2 - ENGLISH INVESTMENT FIRM ...... 184 ANNEX 3 - ENGLISH BUILDING SOCIETY ...... 189 ANNEX 4 - BANKING GROUP COMPANIES AND BANK HOLDING COMPANIES ...... 199 ANNEX 5 - TRUSTEE OF AN ENGLISH TRUST ...... 205 ANNEX 6 - FRIENDLY SOCIETY ...... 217 ANNEX 7 - C/CB SOCIETY ...... 220 ANNEX 8 - STATUTORY CORPORATION ...... 223 ANNEX 9 - CHARTERED CORPORATION ...... 226 ANNEX 10 - ENGLISH INSURANCE COMPANY ...... 230 ANNEX 11 - STANDARD CHARTERED BANK ...... 250 ANNEX 12 - ENGLISH CHARITY – TRUSTEE OF AN ENGLISH CHARITABLE TRUST ...... 254 ANNEX 13 - ENGLISH CHARITY – OTHER FORMS OF ENGLISH CHARITY ...... 256 ANNEX 14 - TRUSTEE OF AN ENGLISH PENSION FUND ...... 258 ANNEX 15 - ENGLISH INVESTMENT FUND – OPEN-ENDED INVESTMENT COMPANY .. 270 ANNEX 16 - ENGLISH INVESTMENT FUND – TRUSTEE OF AN AUTHORISED UNIT TRUST ...... 275 ANNEX 17 - ENGLISH PARTNERSHIP ...... 279 ANNEX 18 - BANK OF ENGLAND ...... 286 ANNEX 19 - THE UNITED KINGDOM ACTING THROUGH HER MAJESTY'S TREASURY . 288

2

I. INTRODUCTION

1. Overview and scope of issues covered by this memorandum

In this memorandum we consider the validity and enforceability under English law1 of a collateral or margin arrangement2 entered into in connection with an agreement between two parties based on the ISDA Master Agreement (as defined in Exhibit 1).

In Exhibit 1 to this memorandum we set out various definitions that are used in this memorandum. A capitalised term used and not defined in Exhibit 1 or elsewhere in this memorandum has the meaning given to that term in the ISDA Master Agreement or the relevant Credit Support Document, according to context.

In this memorandum we assume that each collateral arrangement entered into in connection with an ISDA Master Agreement is documented under one3 of the following standard form documents:

(a) the 1994 NY Annex4;

(b) the VM NY Annex;

(c) the IM NY Annex;

(d) the 1995 Deed;

(e) the IM Deed;

(f) the 1995 Transfer Annex; and

(g) the VM Transfer Annex.

In addition, you have asked us to advise in relation to initial margin arrangements in connection with an ISDA Master Agreement documented pursuant to the Clearing System IM Documents.

We refer to the update request email that you sent to us on 16 July 2018 attaching the instruction letter headed "Collateral Provider Insolvency" (July 2018 version). The issues that you have asked us to address are set out below in italics, followed in each case by our analysis

1 England and Wales form a single legal jurisdiction. In this memorandum, a reference to "English law" is a reference to the law of England and Wales (other than legislation passed by the Welsh Assembly) and, unless context indicates otherwise, a reference to "England" is a reference to the legal jurisdiction of England and Wales. 2 "Collateral arrangement" and "margin arrangement" are commercial terms, used interchangeably in the market. In this memorandum, we use the term "collateral arrangement", which appears to be the more commonly used term. We also use the term "financial collateral arrangement", but note that this term has a specific meaning under UK legislation, as explained in Part II below. 3 There are various situations in which more than one Credit Support Document might be used in connection with an ISDA Master Agreement between two parties. One example would be where the parties have entered into an IM NY Annex in relation to initial margin and a VM NY Annex in relation to variation margin in connection with an ISDA Master Agreement. As a general rule, the fact that more than one Credit Support Document has been entered into in connection with an ISDA Master Agreement does not affect our conclusions as to each Credit Support Document provided, of course, that the ISDA Master Agreement, each Credit Support Document and the Confirmation for each relevant Transaction are, collectively, drafted sufficiently clearly so that there is no ambiguity as to which party is acting in which role (Collateral Provider or Collateral Taker) in relation to each item of Collateral and in relation to each Transaction. We assume for the purposes of this memorandum that that is the case. 4 The 1994 NY Annex is drafted on the premise that Eligible Credit Support is denominated in United States Dollar (USD) and the Termination Currency of the relevant ISDA Master Agreement is USD. If the parties expand the scope of Eligible Credit Support beyond Cash and USD denominated securities, we assume appropriate amendments are made to the 1994 NY Annex to allow the Collateral to be valued.

3

and conclusions. In particular, we consider certain issues in our responses to questions 16 to 18 (in Parts III, IV and V in respect of the Security Documents) and to questions 26 and 27 (in Part VI in respect of the Transfer Annexes) in the event of insolvency proceedings in England in relation to an English Company.

This memorandum (other than Part XI in which we describe certain pending developments which we are aware may occur in the future) is limited to matters of English law as in effect on today's date. We have assumed that no foreign law qualifies or affects our analysis or conclusions set out below. No opinion is expressed on matters of fact.

In this memorandum:

(A) the term "Collateral", subject to relevant assumptions at Parts III.2, IV.2, V.2 and VI.2 of this memorandum, means, in the case of each Security Document, any securities or cash in respect of which a security interest is created by the Collateral Provider in favour of the Collateral Taker and, in the case of a Transfer Annex, any securities or cash transferred by the Collateral Provider to the Collateral Taker, in each case as credit support for the obligations of the Collateral Provider under the relevant ISDA Master Agreement;

(B) in relation to the NY Annexes and the Deeds, the term (i) "Eligible Collateral" shall include Eligible Collateral (VM), Eligible Collateral (IM) and/or (in respect of the IM Deed) Eligible Credit Support (IM) and (ii) "Posted Collateral" shall include Posted Collateral (VM), Posted Collateral (IM) and/or (in respect of the IM Deed) Posted Credit Support (IM), according to context, and similarly, in relation to the Transfer Annexes, the term (i) "Eligible Credit Support" shall include Eligible Credit Support (VM) and (ii) "Equivalent Credit Support" shall include Equivalent Credit Support (VM), according to context;

(C) the terms "Collateral Provider" and, in Part II of this memorandum where used in respect of the Credit Support Documents, "collateral-provider", mean the Security Collateral Provider in respect of the Security Documents or the Transferor in respect of the Transfer Annexes, and the term "Security Collateral Provider" means: (i) the Pledgor under each NY Annex; (ii) the Chargor under each Deed; and (iii) the Security-provider under the Clearing System IM Documents;

(D) the terms "Collateral Taker" and, in Part II of this memorandum where used in respect of the Credit Support Documents, "collateral-taker", mean: (i) the Secured Party under each NY Annex and each Deed; (ii) the Transferee under each Transfer Annex; and (iii) the Security-taker under the Clearing System IM Documents; and

(E) the term "security interest" means any form of security interest that may be created under a Security Document, although the precise nature of the interest will vary according to the governing law, the nature of the assets over which security is created, and other relevant circumstances.

As used in this memorandum, the term "enforceable" means that each obligation or document is of a type and form enforced by the English courts. It is not certain, however, that each obligation or document will be enforced in accordance with its terms in every circumstance, enforcement being subject to, among other things, the non-conclusivity of certificates and the nature of the remedies available in the English courts. The power of an English court to grant an equitable remedy such as an injunction or specific performance is discretionary, and accordingly an English court might make an award of damages where an equitable remedy is sought. Enforcement is also subject to the discretion of the courts in the acceptance of

4

jurisdiction, the power of such courts to stay proceedings, the provisions of the Limitation Act 1980, doctrines of good faith and fair conduct and based on those doctrines and other principles of law and equity of general application. The term does not address the extent to which a judgment obtained in a court outside England will be enforceable in England.

For the purposes of our analysis below, we make reference to our Memorandum of Law dated 23 June 2017 for ISDA on the validity and enforceability under English law of close-out netting under the 2002, 1992 and 1987 ISDA Master Agreements (the ISDA Netting Opinion).

We also refer to our Memorandum of Law dated 13 November 2018 for ISDA on the rights of the Collateral Provider under the IM Documents under English Law upon the occurrence of an Event of Default under Section 5(a)(vii) of the ISDA Master Agreement in respect of the Collateral Taker (the ISDA Collateral Taker Opinion).

2. Scope of Counterparty types covered by this memorandum

In this memorandum, we consider the enforceability of each Credit Support Document (except as specified below) against each type of English entity specified below and, to the extent indicated in Part I.4 below, certain foreign entities, in each case, as Collateral Provider.

(a) English entities

You have asked us to consider in this memorandum the following types of entities described in Appendix B (together, where applicable with a Foreign Entity, a Counterparty):

(i) a Corporation, if registered as a company in England under the Companies Act 20065 other than a company falling within Appendix C (an English Company);

(ii) a friendly society incorporated under the Friendly Societies Act 1992 with its registered office in England (a Friendly Society);6

(iii) a registered society under the Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014 with its registered office in England (a C/CB Society);7

(iv) a body corporate established by private Act of Parliament with its principal place of business in England (a Statutory Corporation);8

5 As provided in section 1 of the Companies Act 2006, this includes companies formed and registered under the Companies Act 2006, as well as companies formed and registered under a prior Companies Act or, in certain cases, formed under other English legislation or letters patent. This does not include branches of foreign corporations (referred to as "overseas companies" in the Companies Act 2006) registered as such under Part 34 of the Companies Act 2006. 6 A friendly society may also be unincorporated and registered under the Friendly Societies Act 1974, however, such friendly societies are excluded from the scope of this memorandum. In addition, there are some unincorporated and unregistered friendly societies to which the legislation relating to friendly societies has no direct application. These friendly societies are associations of individuals with commonly vested in trustees. An unincorporated and unregistered friendly society may not be authorised to conduct insurance business under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 and so are also excluded from the scope of this memorandum. 7 This includes societies previously registered or treated as registered under the Industrial and Provident Societies Act 1965 and societies formed and registered under the Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 1965 as either co-operative or community benefit societies. 8 Note that this definition does not include a statutory corporation established under a public general Act of Parliament. Excluding English Companies (which are not normally referred to as "statutory corporations" in England), a corporation established under a public general Act of Parliament is normally established for a governmental, regulatory or other public purpose. Examples of statutory corporations with a public purpose not covered by this memorandum include local authorities (for example, the county councils and county borough councils established by the Local Government Act 1888), and the Olympic Delivery Authority (established by the London Olympic Games and Paralympic Games Act 2006). We do, however, separately consider the Board of the Pension Protection Fund (as to which see Annex 14) in the context of our analysis of an English Pension Fund.

5

(v) a body corporate established by royal charter granted by the Crown with its principal place of business in England (a Chartered Corporation);

(vi) a Bank/Credit Institution, if established as an English Company, having its head office in England and permitted under Part 4A of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 to carry on the regulated activity of accepting deposits (an English Bank);

(vii) an Investment Firm/Broker Dealer, if established as an English Company (an English Investment Firm);

(viii) a building society registered in England under the Building Societies Act 1986, having its head office in England and permitted under Part 4A of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 to carry on the regulated activity of accepting deposits (an English Building Society);9

(ix) a Banking Group Company and a Bank Holding Company (each as defined in Annex 4 by reference to the Banking Act 2009 (the Banking Act));10

(x) a trustee (the Trustee) of a trust governed by English law (an English Trust) that is not subject to a special regulatory regime;

(xi) an Insurance Company, if authorised by the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) under Part 4A of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 with permission to carry on insurance business, that is, to effect and carry out contracts of insurance (which includes reinsurance) as principal and established as a body corporate under English law in one of the following forms (in each case, an English Insurance Company):

(i) an English Company;

(ii) a Friendly Society;

(iii) a C/CB Society;

(iv) a Statutory Corporation; or

(v) a Chartered Corporation;

(xii) an English registered charity within the meaning of section 1 of the Charities Act 201111 and established either as an English Trust (an English Charitable Trust) or as a body corporate under English law in one of the following forms (each, an English Charity, which term includes the Trustee(s) of an English Charitable Trust, unless context indicates otherwise):

(i) an English Company;12

(ii) a Friendly Society;

9 This includes building societies formed under the Building Societies Act 1986 and building societies formed and registered under prior building societies legislation that are deemed to be registered under the Building Societies Act 1986 by virtue of section 5 of that Act. 10 The full definition of each of these terms in the Banking Act is complex and is set out in Annex 4. 11 Section 1 of the Charities Act 2011 defines "charity" as "an institution which: (a) is established for charitable purposes only; and (b) falls to be subject to the control of the High Court in the exercise of its jurisdiction with respect to charities". 12 An English Charity established as an English Company is normally established as a company limited by guarantee, that is, without share capital.

6

(iii) a C/CB Society;13

(iv) a Statutory Corporation; or

(v) a Chartered Corporation;

(xiii) the Trustee of an occupational pension scheme established as an English Trust (an English Pension Fund);

(xiv) an Investment Fund organised under English law in one of the following forms:

(i) an open-ended investment company with variable capital (Open-Ended Investment Company) incorporated and authorised under the Open-Ended Investment Company Regulations 200114 (the OEIC Regulations) by the Financial Conduct Authority (the FCA) established and domiciled in England; or

(ii) an English Trust authorised as a unit trust scheme15 (an Authorised Unit Trust) by the FCA for the purposes of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 by an authorisation order in force under section 243 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000;

(an Open-Ended Investment Company and the Trustee of an Authorised Unit Trust, being each, an English Investment Fund);16

(xv) a Partnership, if established as either:

(i) a firm of partners subsisting pursuant to the Partnership Act 1890 (a General Partnership);17 or

(ii) a firm of partners which is registered in England under the Limited Partnerships Act 1907 (a Limited Partnership);18

13 Note that C/CB Societies that were societies previously registered or treated as registered under the Industrial and Provident Societies Act 1965 and community benefit societies registered under the Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014 can be charities but co-operative societies cannot be charities. Charitable C/CB Societies are currently exempt from registration with the Charity Commission until the transitory modifications in paragraph 4 of Schedule 9 to the Charities Act 2011 are brought to an end at which time it is expected that only non-profit private registered providers of social housing or registered social landlords will continue to be exempt (note that such entities are outside the scope of this memorandum) (see paragraphs 26 and 27 of Schedule 3 of the Charities Act 2011). 14 SI 2001/1228. 15 By unit trust scheme we mean a single trust created in favour of a single defined pool of beneficiaries rather than a scheme that is an umbrella (as such term is used in the COLL). 16 We do not consider Investment Funds organised as authorised contractual schemes in this memorandum. 17 While a General Partnership is not a legal person and the correct terminology to refer to two or more partners acting together is a "firm", the phrase "General Partnership" is used in this memorandum for ease of reference. 18 A Limited Partnership (that is not a private fund limited partnership – see below) is a partnership with one or more limited partners with liability limited to the amount of capital or property they have advanced to the firm and one or more general partners with unlimited liability for the debts of the firm. Notwithstanding the definition of "Partnership" in Appendix B of this memorandum, for the purposes of this memorandum, a Limited Partnership may be a "collective investment scheme" under section 235 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 and, therefore, constitute an "Investment Fund" as defined in Appendix B, and the Limited Partnership may also be designated a "private fund limited partnership" under the Limited Partnerships Act 1907 as amended by the Legislative Reform (Private Fund Limited Partnerships) Order 2017, SI 2017/514. A limited partner in a private fund limited partnership is under no obligation to contribute any capital or property to the partnership unless otherwise agreed between the partners and is not liable for the debts or obligations of the firm beyond the amount of the partnership property which is available to the general partners to meet such debts or obligations (see Limited Partnerships Act 1907, section 4). Further to note 16, however, we assume that the Limited Partnership is not an authorised contractual scheme under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000. Subject to the foregoing, we assume that the Limited Partnership is not subject to a special regulatory regime. Again, while a Limited Partnership is not a legal person and the correct terminology to refer to two or more partners acting together is a "firm", the phrase "Limited Partnership" is used in this memorandum for ease of reference. We also cover a "Hedge Fund/Proprietary Trader" that is an English Partnership as indicated in Appendix B.

7

(a General Partnership and a Limited Partnership, being each, an English Partnership);

(xvi) Standard Chartered Bank, which is a Bank/Credit Institution that is a Chartered Corporation, having its head office and principal place of business in England and permitted under Part 4A of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 to carry on the regulated activity of accepting deposits;

(xvii) the Bank of England (in respect of the Non-IM Security Documents and Transfer Annexes only), which is a Central Bank; and

(xviii) the United Kingdom acting through Her Majesty's Treasury (in respect of the Transfer Annexes only), which is a Sovereign,

(each, an English Counterparty).

(b) Trusts and trustees under English law

(i) Nature of a trust and the personal liability of the Trustee

In relation to an English Trust, it is important to note that a trust is not a legal person under English law. The trust is not capable therefore of entering into contracts or of suing or being sued in relation to any contract or other matter. Therefore one contracts with one or more Trustees on behalf of the trust. Each Trustee is personally liable for any obligations it incurs under the contract, but is not, in its capacity as a Trustee, beneficially entitled to any rights under the contract, such rights being held by each Trustee for the benefit of the beneficiaries of the trust.

For this reason, where we analyse an English Trust in this memorandum, we consider the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against the Trustee of the English Trust, rather than against the relevant trust.

(ii) Trustee's right of recourse to the assets of a trust

Although the Trustee is personally liable for its obligations under a contract it enters into on behalf of the English Trust, it may seek to limit that personal liability to the extent of its right of recourse against the assets of the trust. Note that the Trustee is not able to exclude its personal liability entirely. The effect of such a limitation in a contract is simply to exclude the right of the other party to enforce the contract against its personal assets should the trust assets be insufficient to satisfy a claim against the Trustee arising under the contract.

Even in the absence of such a limitation on the liability of the Trustee, a creditor of the Trustee normally relies on the assumption that the Trustee has a right of recourse to the assets of the trust to fulfil its obligations incurred under a contract made on behalf of the trust. The personal assets of the Trustee are often wholly inadequate to cover such obligations, particularly in the context of a trust that is of a size justifying recourse to the wholesale derivatives market for risk management purposes.

Accordingly, it is important for a party to ensure as far as possible that the Trustee will be entitled to have recourse to the trust assets in order to meet its liabilities under a Credit Support Document between the party and the Trustee. There are ways, however, in which the Trustee may lose, partially or wholly, its right of access to the trust assets.

8

This is not, strictly speaking, a question of enforceability of the contract against the Trustee, and so any such impairment of the Trustee's right of recourse does not affect our analysis of the enforceability of a Credit Support Document (discussed in Annex 5 in relation to the Trustee of an English Trust that is not subject to a special regulatory regime, in Annex 12 in relation to the Trustee of an English Charitable Trust, in Annex 14 in relation to the Trustee of an English Pension Fund and in Annex 16 in relation to the Trustee of an Authorised Unit Trust).

In Appendix D to this memorandum, we set out various issues that are relevant to dealing with the Trustee of an English Trust that do not go to the enforceability of the Trustee's contractual obligations under a Credit Support Document but to the question of whether the Trustee (or, in certain circumstances, the other party directly) has recourse to the assets of the trust in order to meet its liabilities and certain other issues of importance when dealing with the Trustee.

(iii) Trustees within the scope of this memorandum

An English Trust may have a single Trustee, which may be a private individual or a corporate Trustee, or it may have two or more Trustees, which may be private individuals, corporate Trustees or a combination of the two.

Where an English Trust has a single Trustee, it will ordinarily be a corporate Trustee, at least for a trust of a size justifying recourse to the wholesale derivatives market for risk management purposes. If such a trust has more than one Trustee, then normally at least one will be a corporate Trustee.

Where an English Trust has two or more Trustees, it is not normally necessary under the relevant trust deed that all Trustees enter into each contract. Accordingly, a party may enter into an ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document with a corporate Trustee to which other Trustees (whether corporate entities or private individuals) of the same trust are not a party. This is not a problem if the Trustee with whom it has entered into the ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document has the necessary power and authority to enter into the ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document and each Transaction under the relevant trust deed.

In relation to the Trustee of an English Pension Fund, under section 32 of the Pensions Act 1995, a majority of the Trustees acting properly will bind the minority, unless the rules of the English Pension Fund provide otherwise. The effect of this is that (in the absence of a provision to the contrary in the English Pension Fund's governing documentation), as long as a majority of the Trustees have entered into the ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document, all of the Trustees will be bound, and the other party will have a personal claim against each individual Trustee.19

When a party deals with a private individual, including a private individual acting as Trustee, there are a number of additional considerations, both legal and commercial, that arise that would not apply when dealing with a corporate entity. For example, the death or incapacity of a private individual would potentially affect the enforceability of obligations against the private individual or his . Additionally,

19 Only the Trustees at the time the ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document is executed will be bound. Any Trustee appointed after the date the ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document is executed will not be bound unless the new Trustee expressly agrees to assume the obligations of the Trustees under ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document.

9

unfair contract terms legislation and other consumer protection legislation, such as that relating to consumer credit, may affect the relationship between the party and the private individual.

Such matters are not specific to private individuals acting in their capacity as Trustee, but apply to dealings with private individuals generally. For this reason, and as is customary for opinions of this type, we have assumed for the purposes of this memorandum that the Trustee is an English Company, that is, is a corporate Trustee that is registered as a company under the Companies Act 2006 other than a company falling within Appendix C.

It does not, however, affect our analysis of the enforceability of a Credit Support Document against a particular corporate Trustee, that there may be one or more private individual Trustees for the relevant English Trust who may or may not be a party to the relevant ISDA Master Agreement or Credit Support Document on behalf of that trust. In relation to an English Pension Fund, however, we understand it is not customary to have individual trustees where there is also a corporate Trustee and, where there is a corporate Trustee, it will typically be a sole corporate Trustee.

Except in relation to an Authorised Unit Trust, we also assume that the Trustee is not subject to special regulatory regime (for example that it is not also a bank). In relation to an Authorised Unit Trust we assume that the Trustee may also be an English Bank or an English Investment Firm.

It is important to bear in mind (except in the case of an English Pension Fund under section 32 of the Pensions Act 1995 as discussed above) that only a Trustee that has entered into, or subsequently has expressly agreed to assume contractual obligations under, a Credit Support Document is contractually bound to the other party to a Credit Support Document. Although the ISDA Master Agreement and the Credit Support Document may state that Party A or Party B consists of "the Trustees of the Trust acting on behalf of the Trust", this language does not impose legal liability on any Trustee that has not entered into the ISDA Master Agreement and the Credit Support Document either directly or through an agent.

Therefore, a Trustee appointed after the date a Credit Support Document has been entered into will not be bound unless the new Trustee specifically contracts with the other party to the Credit Support Document to assume the obligations of a Trustee under the Credit Support Document.

A retiring Trustee is not, by virtue of its retirement as a Trustee, relieved of its contractual obligations incurred on behalf of an English Trust, unless expressly relieved of those contractual obligations by the other party to the contract (regarding which, see further below). Those contractual obligations remain personal obligations of the retiring Trustee. A retiring Trustee will not, however, be liable for any subsequent contractual obligations incurred by a continuing or new Trustee on behalf of the trust, including, for example, any further Transaction entered into under the ISDA Master Agreement and the Credit Support Document. Similar principles apply in relation to the removal of a Trustee.

Customarily, to the extent that it has continuing contractual obligations incurred on behalf of the trust, a retiring Trustee would be indemnified in relation to its remaining contractual obligations by the continuing Trustee(s) (if any) as well as the new Trustee (if any) appointed in its place. In addition, the retiring Trustee will still have the benefit of its indemnity against and lien over the trust assets, as described in

10

Appendix D, to the extent that it is called upon, despite its retirement, to perform any such contractual obligation and it has not been indemnified by the continuing or new Trustee(s) and provided also that it has not impaired or lost its recourse to the trust assets, for any of the reasons discussed in Appendix D.

As a matter of practice, it is common in an ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document with one or more Trustees for a particular English Trust that the Trustees agree that they shall procure that any replacement, successor or new Trustee shall assume and undertake to the other party all obligations and liabilities of the Trustees under the ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document and that the new Trustee provide a letter, typically executed by deed, to that effect, to the other party. Upon satisfaction of this obligation, the ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document will typically provide that either (i) the retiring Trustee will automatically be released from liability under the ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document or (ii) upon request, the other party will execute a deed of release in a form satisfactory to the other party and the retiring Trustee.

In a case where a Trustee retires and no new Trustee is appointed but there is one or more continuing Trustees, and assuming that at least one of the continuing Trustees is a corporate Trustee that is a party to the ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document, then the ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document may provide for the release of the retiring Trustee upon confirmation by the retiring Trustee to the other party, typically in a letter executed by deed, that the retiring Trustee has transferred all his or its rights and title to the property and assets of the trust to the remaining Trustees in their capacity as Trustees of the trust.

In this memorandum, when we refer to the ''Trustee'', we are referring to each Trustee that is bound by the terms of a given Credit Support Document from time to time.

Although we will generally below, for clarity and unless context otherwise requires (for example, in Annex 5 where we discuss Full Trustee Insolvency), refer to the Trustee in the singular (on the assumption, mentioned above, that there is a single corporate Trustee that is an English Company), our analysis applies mutatis mutandis to a Credit Support Document under which there is more than one Trustee that has entered into, or subsequently assumed obligations and liabilities under, the Credit Support Document on behalf of the relevant English Trust.

(iv) Trusts within the scope of this memorandum

We note that an English Charitable Trust, an English Pension Fund and an Authorised Unit Trust are each subject to a specific and detailed regulatory regime. In relation to an English Trust, other than an English Charitable Trust, an English Pension Fund or an Authorised Unit Trust, however, we assume that it is not subject to a specific regulatory regime that may affect the enforceability of a Credit Support Document against the Trustee of the English Trust.

(c) Legal forms of an English Insurance Company, English Charity, English Investment Fund, English Partnership and certain other English entities that are outside the scope of this memorandum

In this memorandum, aside from the English Counterparties, we do not consider any other type of entity organised under English law, whether or not falling within any description in Appendix B.

11

This memorandum covers an English Insurance Company established in one of the five legal forms indicated above. This memorandum does not extend to an English insurance company established in any other form, for example, as a form of partnership. It also does not extend to an underwriting member of Lloyd's of London, as a separate insolvency regime would be applicable.20

This memorandum covers an English Charity established in one of the six forms indicated above. This memorandum does not extend to an English charity established in any other form, for example, as an unincorporated association or a charitable incorporated organisation established under the Charities Act 2011 and nor does it extend to charitable common investment funds, charitable common deposit funds or other charitable investment funds.

This memorandum covers an English Investment Fund established in one of the two forms indicated above.21 This memorandum does not extend to an English investment fund established in any other form including authorised contractual schemes, unauthorised unit trusts, investment trusts, common investment funds or common deposit funds (relating to charities, pension funds or any other sector).

This memorandum covers General Partnerships and Limited Partnerships but does not extend to limited liability partnerships. We assume, for the purposes of this memorandum, that each of the individual partners in a General Partnership and the general and limited partners in a Limited Partnership are English Companies.

For the avoidance of doubt, and without limiting the generality of the above, the following types of entity that may be established under English law are also outside the scope of this memorandum: a private registered provider of social housing or a registered social landlord (commonly known as a housing association), a credit union, a local authority,22 an educational establishment established under the Further and Higher Education Act 1992 or other further education body and a Societas Europaea.23 We also do not consider ISDA Master Agreements entered into on a joint, several or joint and several basis (for example, where a bank is one party to the ISDA Master Agreement and the other named party is in fact two separate entities).

Finally, we do not consider in this memorandum the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against a natural person (private individual), whether acting for his or her own account or as a trustee in relation to any form of trust or in any other capacity.

(d) Legal capacity and regulatory issues generally and other excluded matters

Each of the Counterparty types you have asked us to consider in this memorandum is potentially subject to requirements under its constitutional documents (including, without limitation, the trust deed in relation to an English Trust and the partnership agreement in relation to an English Partnership) or to legal or regulatory requirements/restrictions (for example in respect of credit institutions, investment firms, investment funds and insurance companies) that may affect the legality or validity of its entering into certain types of Transaction under an ISDA Master Agreement or a Credit Support Document in connection with an ISDA Master Agreement. It may be, for example, that a Counterparty of that type is only permitted to enter into Transactions for hedging purposes or for the purposes of efficient

20 Insurers (Reorganisation and Winding Up) (Lloyd's) Regulations 2005, SI 2005/1998. 21 See, however, note 18 in respect of Limited Partnerships. 22 This exclusion includes a local authority acting in relation to its local authority pension scheme, administered by the local authority under specific legislation in connection with the national Local Government Pension Scheme. 23 A European public limited-liability company incorporated under Council Regulation (EC) 2157/2001 of 8 October 2001 on the Statute for a European Company (SE) [2001] OJ L294/1.

12

portfolio management. We do not consider such issues in this memorandum.24 The list of Transactions in Appendix A should therefore be read accordingly – the inclusion of a Transaction in Appendix A does not mean that a particular English Counterparty has capacity to enter into that Transaction.25

Therefore, issues of the legal capacity and authority of a Counterparty to enter into any specific type of Transaction or the Credit Support Documents are outside the scope of this memorandum.

More generally, we do not advise in this memorandum on regulatory issues relating to dealings with any Counterparty type falling within the scope of this memorandum nor do we consider the effect of a breach of or non-compliance with applicable regulation on the conclusions in this memorandum.

Without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing, we do not consider any issues relating to Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 4th July 2012 on OTC derivatives, central counterparties and trade repositories (EMIR) or the relevance of the Regulation on reporting and transparency of securities financing transactions26 (the SFTR) to the operation of the Credit Support Documents. The SFTR requires, inter alia, that the providing counterparty under a security collateral arrangement with a right of use or a title transfer collateral arrangement is informed in writing by the receiving counterparty of the risks and consequences that may be involved in granting the right of use or entering into the title transfer collateral arrangement.27

Furthermore, again without prejudice to the foregoing, we do not consider any issues relating to the application of CASS and, in particular, we assume, in relation to any Credit Support Document that constitutes a Title Transfer Collateral Agreement, that the relevant Counterparty28 has not been categorised as a retail client (as defined in the FCA Rules) by the other party to the ISDA Master Agreement and relevant Credit Support Document(s) such that the latter is prohibited under CASS 6.1.6(3)R and/or CASS 7.11.1(3)R to enter into a Title Transfer Collateral Agreement in respect of an asset and/or money belonging to the Counterparty. For these purposes:

24 We note, however, that when considering these issues in relation to the Trustee of an English Trust, one should bear in mind the distinction between the capacity of the Trustee in its own right (for example, its capacity to act as a trustee), which will be governed by its own corporate constitution, and the capacity of the Trustee to act on behalf of the trust, which will be governed by statute and the relevant trust deed. Similarly, in the case of an English Partnership, as discussed further at Annex 17, a firm acts through its members as agents. Accordingly, without limitation, the assumption at Part I.3(b) below should, insofar as an English Partnership is concerned, be construed to mean that the general partner in respect of a Limited Partnership and the relevant partner in respect of a General Partnership entering into the relevant Credit Support Document on behalf of the English Partnership has the necessary capacity (power) to act as partner and to enter into the Credit Support Document, possesses the requisite authority to bind the firm and has taken all corporate and other action necessary (including, but not limited to, any action required in accordance with any partnership agreement) to authorise entry by it into the Credit Support Document on behalf of the English Partnership. Linked to the question of authority we also assume that, in entering into the Credit Support Document: (i) the general partner of the Limited Partnership is expressly described in the Credit Support Document as acting "in its capacity as general partner on behalf of" the Limited Partnership, or words to similar effect; and (ii) the relevant partner of a General Partnership is expressly described in the Credit Support Document as acting "in its capacity as partner on behalf of" the General Partnership, or words to similar effect. As discussed above, in relation to an English Trust, we consider the enforceability of each Credit Support Document against the Trustee of the trust and we discuss the position regarding the Trustee's recourse to the assets of the trust at Appendix D. For completeness, however, we assume that the Trustee has the necessary capacity to act as trustee and to enter into the relevant Credit Support Document on behalf of the English Trust and has taken all action necessary to authorise entry by it into the relevant Credit Support Document on behalf of the English Trust. 25 For example, in respect of English Building Societies, see the restrictions in section 9A of the Building Societies Act 1986 (as amended by the Building Societies (Restricted Transactions) (Amendment to the Prohibition on Entering into Derivatives Transactions) Order 2018, SI 2018/314). 26 Regulation (EU) 2015/2365 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 25 November 2015 on transparency of securities financing transactions and reuse amending Regulation (EU) No 648/2012. 27 See Article 15. 28 In relation to the Trustee of an English Trust, we assume that neither the Trustee, acting in its capacity of the English Trust, nor the English Trust have been categorised as retail such that the entry into a Title Transfer Collateral Agreement in respect of assets or money held by the Trustee in its capacity as such for the account of the beneficiaries of the English Trust is prohibited.

13

CASS means the FCA's Client Assets sourcebook (forming part of the FCA Handbook);

FCA Rules means any rules promulgated by the FCA under Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (as amended), as amended or replaced from time to time, including as contained in the FCA Handbook; and

Title Transfer Collateral Agreement means (1) for the purposes of CASS 6 (Custody rules) an arrangement by which a client transfers full ownership of a safe custody asset (or an asset which would be a safe custody asset but for the arrangement) to a firm for the purpose of securing or otherwise covering present or future, actual, contingent or prospective obligations and (2) for the purposes of CASS 7 (Client money rules) an arrangement by which a client transfers full ownership of money to a firm for the purpose of securing or otherwise covering present or future, actual, contingent or prospective obligations.

Note that we also do not consider the various powers that may be available in respect of a type of Counterparty to transfer all or part of its assets to another entity or convert itself into another type of entity.29 In this memorandum, we do, however, consider the transfer powers in Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 given the focus on transfers in the context of English Banks and English Insurance Companies and the related stay on termination following a Part VII transfer.

Finally, we do not consider public law issues in this memorandum such as duties that may apply to a Counterparty as a result of such Counterparty being a public body.

3. Assumptions

We indicate where relevant any assumptions that you have asked us to make.

In addition, we make the following assumptions throughout this memorandum:

(a) To the extent that any obligation arising under the ISDA Master Agreement or any Credit Support Document falls to be performed in any jurisdiction outside England, its performance will not be illegal or ineffective by virtue of the laws of that jurisdiction.

(b) Each party (i) is able lawfully to enter into the ISDA Master Agreement, the Transactions thereunder and the relevant Credit Support Documents under the laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation and under its relevant constitutional documents, (ii) has taken all corporate action necessary to authorise its entry into the ISDA Master Agreement, the Transactions thereunder and the relevant Credit Support Documents, and (iii) has duly executed and delivered the ISDA Master Agreement, each Transaction and the relevant Credit Support Documents.

(c) If the ISDA Master Agreement is governed by English law, the ISDA Master Agreement (except, when used with a Transfer Annex, to the extent that the Transfer Annex relies on provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement for its effectiveness) would, when duly entered into by each party, constitute legally binding, valid and enforceable obligations of each party under English law. In respect of an ISDA Master Agreement and any Credit Support Document governed by any law other than

29 For instance, in relation to a Friendly Society, we do not consider the powers under Part VIII of the Friendly Societies Act 1992 to transfer engagements of the Friendly Society. Similarly, in relation to a C/CB Society, we do not consider the powers under Part 9 of the Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014 to transfer engagements of the C/CB Society. In the latter case, the power is expressly stated to not prejudice the rights of creditors (see the Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014, s 110(4)).

14

English law (even in part), the ISDA Master Agreement and any Credit Support Document governed by any law other than English law would, when duly entered into by each party, constitute legally binding, valid and enforceable obligations of each party under such other law.

(d) Each of the parties is acting as principal and not as agent in relation to its rights and obligations under the ISDA Master Agreement and the relevant Credit Support Documents, and no third party has any right to, interest in, or claim on any right or obligation of either party under any such document.

(e) Each of the parties to the ISDA Master Agreement and the relevant Credit Support Documents who is carrying on, or purporting to carry on, any regulated activity in the United Kingdom is an authorised person permitted to carry on that regulated activity or an exempted person in respect of that regulated activity under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 and neither the ISDA Master Agreement nor any Credit Support Document was entered into in consequence of a communication made in breach of section 21(1) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000.

(f) The terms of the ISDA Master Agreement, including each Transaction under the ISDA Master Agreement, and the relevant Credit Support Documents are agreed at arms' length by the parties so that no element of gift or undervalue from one party to the other party is involved.

(g) In deciding to enter into the ISDA Master Agreement, including each Transaction, and the relevant Credit Support Documents or to make any payment or delivery in accordance with the ISDA Master Agreement, including each Transaction, and the relevant Credit Support Documents, neither party was influenced by a desire to put the other party into a position which, in the event of the former party going into insolvent liquidation, would be better than the position the latter party would have been in if the ISDA Master Agreement, such Transaction or the relevant Credit Support Documents had not been entered into or such payment or delivery had not been made.

(h) At the time of entry into the ISDA Master Agreement, including each Transaction under the ISDA Master Agreement, and the relevant Credit Support Documents, no insolvency, administration, rescue, compulsory management or composition proceedings have occurred, no receivership has commenced, no voluntary arrangement has been made and no resolution action has been taken, in each case, in respect of either party, and neither party is insolvent at the time of entering into the ISDA Master Agreement, including each Transaction under the ISDA Master Agreement, or the relevant Credit Support Documents or becomes insolvent as a result of entering into such documents.

(i) Each Security Collateral Provider, when transferring Collateral in the form of securities as part of a Delivery Amount, Delivery Amount (IM) or Delivery Amount (VM) (as applicable) under a Security Document, will have full legal (except in the case of intermediated securities) and beneficial title to such securities at the time of transfer, free and clear of any lien, claim, charge or encumbrance or any other interest of the transferring party or of any third person (other than (i) a lien routinely imposed on all securities in a relevant clearance or settlement system and (ii) in the case of the IM Security Documents, any lien applicable to all Collateral held in the Segregated Account in favour of the Custodian (IM)).

15

(j) Each party, when transferring Collateral in the form of securities as part of a Delivery Amount or Delivery Amount (VM) or Return Amount or Return Amount (VM) (as applicable) under a Transfer Annex, will have full legal (except in the case of intermediated securities) and beneficial title to such securities at the time of transfer, free and clear of any lien, claim, charge or encumbrance or any other interest of the transferring party or of any third person (other than a lien routinely imposed on all securities in a relevant clearance or settlement system).

(k) Each English Counterparty has its centre of main interests (COMI) for purposes of the Recast Insolvency Regulation30 in England. We make this assumption because if the Recast Insolvency Regulation applies and the COMI is in another member state of the European Union, then that other member state has primary insolvency jurisdiction under the Recast Insolvency Regulation (that is, it has, in the terminology of the Recast Insolvency Regulation, jurisdiction to open "main insolvency proceedings") and the jurisdiction of the English courts is limited to opening either "secondary insolvency proceedings" or "territorial insolvency proceedings", in either case, only if there is an establishment in the United Kingdom.31

(l) To the extent applicable, each Foreign Entity has its COMI for the purposes of the Recast Insolvency Regulation outside of England.

(m) No English Counterparty or Foreign Entity is able to avail itself of immunity.32

(n) None of the ISDA Master Agreement, the Transactions subject to the ISDA Master Agreement or any Credit Support Documents have as their predominant purpose or one of their main purposes the deprivation of the property of one of the parties on insolvency.

To the extent that any relevant documents are governed by foreign laws, we have reviewed such documents on the basis of a plain reading of the relevant terms. To the extent that the documents include either (i) technical legal terms as applied in a legal system other than English law; or (ii) terms in another language, such as Japanese, we assume such technical or foreign language terms do not affect our conclusions below.

4. Fact patterns

You have asked us, when responding to each question, to distinguish between the following three fact patterns:

(a) The Location of the Collateral Provider is in England and the Location of the Collateral is outside England.

30 Regulation (EU) 2015/848 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 20 May 2015 on insolvency proceedings (recast) [2015] OJ L 141/19, which came into effect for insolvency proceedings opened on or after 26 June 2017. Council Regulation (EC) 1346/2000 of 29 May 2000 on insolvency proceedings [2000] OJ L 160/1 continues to apply to insolvency proceedings opened before 26 June 2017. 31 The Recast Insolvency Regulation, Article 3. If main insolvency proceedings have been opened in another EU member state, only secondary insolvency proceedings may be opened in England. Secondary insolvency proceedings would not be conducted on a universal basis but would be limited in effect to assets of the English Company in the United Kingdom. Prior to the opening of main insolvency proceedings, "territorial insolvency proceedings" may be opened in England, subject to certain additional conditions set out in Article 3(4) of the Recast Insolvency Regulation. See further our answer to question 20 in Part III. Note that not all of the English Counterparty types are within the scope of the Recast Insolvency Regulation – for example a separate regime is applicable to EU credit institutions, which is discussed separately. 32 We discuss immunity and political risk in the context of our analysis in respect of the Bank of England and the United Kingdom acting through Her Majesty's Treasury at Annexes 18 and 19, respectively.

16

(b) The Location of the Collateral Provider is in England and the Location of the Collateral is in England.

(c) The Location of the Collateral Provider is outside England and the Location of the Collateral is in England.

For the foregoing purposes:

(i) the Location of the Collateral Provider is in England if it is an English Counterparty;

(ii) the Location of the Collateral Provider is outside England if it is a Foreign Entity; and

(iii) the Location of Collateral is the place where an asset of that type is located under the private international law rules of England. See our answer to question 2 in Part III of this memorandum for further details in this regard.33

A Foreign Entity is a corporate entity that is a Corporation, Bank/Credit Institution, Investment Firm/Broker Dealer or Hedge Fund/Proprietary Trader organised/incorporated in a foreign jurisdiction under a foreign law.

In respect of a Foreign Entity, we assume that no insolvency proceedings have been commenced, or resolution action taken, against the Foreign Entity in England or elsewhere and therefore only consider a Foreign Entity in respect of the questions that do not relate to insolvency proceedings or resolution action.

However, in Annex 1 we discuss the consequences of the commencement of insolvency proceedings in England in respect of the English branch of a Foreign Entity incorporated outside of the UK that is a Bank/Credit Institution (an English Branch) where such English Branch is providing the Collateral. We also briefly consider the application of the resolution regime in the Banking Act in these circumstances.

Although we do not expressly refer to each fact pattern in our answer to each question, we have taken the fact patterns into consideration in developing our analysis. It should generally be clear from the context which of the fact patterns is being discussed in each case. For example, the use of the defined term "English Company" or "English Counterparty" to refer to a Counterparty clearly excludes a Foreign Entity under fact pattern (c). In addition, it should generally be clear from our answers where the position depends on whether the Collateral is to be considered as located in England or in a foreign jurisdiction.

Note that, as a general rule, neither the location nor the form of organisation of the Collateral Taker is relevant to consideration of the enforceability of a collateral arrangement against a Collateral Provider in the event of insolvency proceedings in England in respect of the Collateral Provider.

5. Structure of this memorandum

Part II considers the treatment of the Credit Support Documents as financial collateral arrangements and the applicable legislation.

33 Unless otherwise indicated, when we talk of the "location" of Collateral in this memorandum, we mean the legal jurisdiction the law of which governs the proprietary aspects of a transfer of the Collateral, determined in accordance with our answer to question 2 in Part III.

17

Part III considers the issues relating to the creation, perfection, and enforcement of security interests created in respect of Collateral delivered under each of the Non-IM Security Documents.

Part IV considers the issues relating to the creation, perfection and enforcement of security interests created in respect of Collateral delivered under each of the IM Security Documents.

Part V considers issues relating to a security interest created pursuant to the Clearing System IM Documents in respect of Collateral held in a Clearstream account or a Euroclear account where the Collateral Provider is an English Counterparty.

Part VI considers the issues relating to the use of the transfer of title approach in respect of Collateral transferred under each of the Transfer Annexes.

Part VII addresses the validity and enforceability under English law of the English law governed Credit Support Documents in the absence of insolvency proceedings or resolution action in relation to either party.

Parts VIII to XI of this memorandum deal with additional matters you have asked us to consider.

Exhibit 1 to this memorandum, as already noted, sets out certain definitions used in this memorandum.

Appendices A to D to this memorandum are described in this memorandum, in each case, where the first cross-reference to such Appendix is made.

Annexes 1 to 19 to this memorandum deal with the additional counterparty types you have asked us to cover as set out above.

6. The Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016

The Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 201634 came into force35 on 6 April 2017, replacing the Insolvency Rules 1986. In the ISDA Netting Opinion we stated that there was a degree of uncertainty surrounding how various insolvency procedures considered in that memorandum, that operate or did operate by reference to the Insolvency Rules 1986, or by reference to rules in analogous terms, should be interpreted following the introduction of the new Rules and that the same uncertainty also existed in relation to other secondary legislation that makes reference to the Insolvency Rules 1986. Some subordinate legislation36 had been brought into force that explicitly maintained the application of the Insolvency Rules 1986 and the Insolvency Act 1986 (as in force on 5 April 2017) to certain specialist insolvency regimes that are outside the scope of that memorandum and amended other secondary and primary legislation to replace references to the Insolvency Rules 1986 with references to the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016. It was, at the time, however, generally unclear whether further amending legislation would be made or if reliance was to be placed on the Interpretation Act 1978 to supplant the new Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 into relevant legislation.

34 SI 2016/1024. The Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 were amended by the Insolvency Amendment (EU 2015/848) Regulations 2017, SI 2017/702 to facilitate the application of the Recast Insolvency Regulation. 35 Subject to transitional and savings provisions. 36 See the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 (Consequential Amendments and Savings) Rules, SI 2017/369 and the Deregulation Act 2015 and Small Business, Enterprise and Employment Act 2015 (Consequential Amendments) (Savings) Regulations, SI 2017/540.

18

In the ISDA Netting Opinion we made reference to the "Dear Insolvency Practitioner" letter (Issue 76 – April 2017) concerning the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 (the Dear IP Letter) issued by the Insolvency Service, which stated, in relation to "financial institutions", that the intention of the Government was to bring forward a further statutory instrument to take account of the general corporate insolvency reforms which came into force in April 2017 and that such statutory instrument would disapply the reforms for the majority of HM Treasury's modified insolvency regimes while their impact was assessed and decisions were made about implementation.

The Small Business, Enterprise and Employment Act 2015 (Consequential Amendments, Savings and Transitional Provisions) Regulations 201837 are now in force and provide, amongst other things, for the continued application of the Insolvency Rules 1986 for the purposes of the Bank Insolvency Procedure, the Bank Administration Procedure, the Building Society Insolvency Procedure and the Building Society Special Administration Procedure, as envisaged by the Dear IP Letter. The Insolvency Rules 1986 are also stated as continuing to apply for the purposes of a voluntary arrangement in relation to, or the administration of, a C/CB Society. The Regulations also make further changes to the Winding Up Rules and to the RWU Regulations and amend regulation 12(2) of the FCA Regulations to refer to notice that a statement as to the affairs of the other party had been sent to the other party's creditors under section 99(1) of the Insolvency Act 1986.38 Beyond the confines of specific amending legislation, however, a degree of ambiguity remains. This ambiguity, though unwelcome, does not in our view affect the conclusions reached in this memorandum.

We return to this theme in context at various points throughout this memorandum.

37 SI 2018/208. 38 The Regulations do not update all references in the FCA Regulations to the Insolvency Rules 1986 (e.g. at regulations 12(4) and 14 of the FCA Regulations).

19

II. FINANCIAL COLLATERAL ARRANGEMENTS

1. Introduction

Before turning to the specific questions you have asked us to address, we consider Directive 2002/47/EC of the European Parliament and Council of 6 June 2002 on financial collateral arrangements (the Collateral Directive). The Collateral Directive was implemented in the United Kingdom, including England and Wales, by the Financial Collateral Arrangements (No. 2) Regulations 2003 (the FCA Regulations),39 which came into effect on 26 December 2003.

The purpose of the Collateral Directive was to strengthen the legal certainty and enforceability of collateral arrangements involving the delivery of financial assets to secure financial obligations by creating a common set of principles applicable to such arrangements under the laws of each member state of the European Union, including the elimination of formalities for the creation, perfection and enforcement of such an arrangement and its protection from the effects of certain insolvency rules that might otherwise apply to restrict or prevent its creation or enforcement.

In other words, the Collateral Directive was intended to strengthen the legal certainty of collateral arrangements in common use in the financial markets and to create a protective regime or "safe harbour" to ensure the enforceability of such arrangements notwithstanding the insolvency of the collateral-provider.

The FCA Regulations have a number of important effects in relation to "financial collateral arrangements", consistent with the purposes of, and policy underlying, the Collateral Directive. The FCA Regulations cut across a number of issues discussed in this memorandum, and therefore we think it is important to discuss the scope and effects of the FCA Regulations at the outset of this memorandum, before turning to your specific questions.

For the purpose of this discussion, we make each of the assumptions in Parts I.3, III.2, IV.2, V.2 and VI.2, as applicable.

2. Each Credit Support Document constitutes a financial collateral arrangement

In our view, on the assumptions in Parts I.3, III.2, IV.2, V.2 and VI.2 and in this Part II, subject to the analysis below, a collateral arrangement entered into under any of the Credit Support Documents in connection with an ISDA Master Agreement on or after 26 December 200340 should constitute a "financial collateral arrangement" for purposes of the FCA Regulations.

3. Overview of the FCA Regulations

Under the FCA Regulations, there are two types of financial collateral arrangement, a security financial collateral arrangement and a title transfer financial collateral arrangement. The party providing collateral is a "collateral-provider" under the FCA Regulations, and the party receiving collateral is a "collateral-taker". The collateral-provider provides financial collateral to secure or otherwise cover "relevant financial obligations" owed to the collateral-taker depending on the type of financial collateral arrangement.

39 SI 2003/3226. The "(No. 2)" in the title of the FCA Regulations reflects the fact that the original set of implementing regulations were revoked before coming into effect due to technical errors in the text. 40 26 December 2003 was the date that the FCA Regulations (other than the Regulation 2) came into force. Briggs J also stated that the FCA Regulations do not have retroactive effect in Re Lehman [2012] EWHC 2997 (Ch) [159]-[160].

20

"relevant financial obligations" are defined in the FCA Regulations as "the obligations which are secured or otherwise covered by a financial collateral arrangement …". This definition immediately presents a degree of circularity in the analysis because we are seeking to determine whether the arrangements constituted by the Credit Support Documents are each a "financial collateral arrangement", and yet the definition of "relevant financial obligations" uses the term "financial collateral arrangement".

Under a security financial collateral arrangement, the collateral-provider (as defined in the FCA Regulations) creates a security interest in the financial collateral in favour of the collateral-taker to secure "relevant financial obligations".

Under a title transfer financial collateral arrangement, the collateral-provider transfers "legal and beneficial ownership" of the financial collateral to the collateral-taker to "secure or otherwise cover" the relevant financial obligations owed to the collateral-taker.

The FCA Regulations have a more significant effect in relation to security arrangements under English law than in relation to title transfer arrangements, as discussed in more detail in this Part II and in Parts III and VI of this memorandum. In either case, however, a collateral arrangement has to fall within the terms of the relevant definition in order to benefit from the protective effects of the FCA Regulations. Accordingly, we look at each definition in turn as applied to the Credit Support Documents.

4. Application of the FCA Regulations to the Non-IM Security Documents

We are of the view that, on the assumptions we have made, that the collateral arrangements constituted by the Security Documents entered into in connection with an ISDA Master Agreement, if entered into on or after 26 December 2003, should each be a security financial collateral arrangement as defined in the FCA Regulations. In this Part II.4 we consider the Non-IM Security Documents. We discuss the position with regard the IM Security Documents and the Clearing System IM Documents in the sections that follow.

The definition in the FCA Regulations of a "security financial collateral arrangement" is an agreement or arrangement evidenced in writing, where:

(a) the purpose of the agreement or arrangement is to secure "the relevant financial obligations" owed to the collateral-taker;

(b) the collateral-provider creates or there arises a security interest in "financial collateral" to secure those obligations;

(c) the financial collateral is delivered, transferred, held, registered or otherwise designated so as to be in "the possession or under the control of the collateral-taker or a person acting on its behalf" (any right of the collateral-provider to substitute financial collateral of the same or greater value or withdraw excess financial collateral or to collect the proceeds of credit claims until further notice shall not prevent the financial collateral being in the possession or under the control of the collateral-taker); and

(d) the collateral-provider and the collateral-taker are both "non-natural persons".

In order to constitute a security financial collateral arrangement for the purposes of the FCA Regulations, it is necessary to ensure that the Non-IM Security Documents satisfy each of the limbs set out above.

21

The first requirement is satisfied given that each Non-IM Security Document is an arrangement evidenced in writing. The Non-IM NY Annex is an annex to the Schedule to the ISDA Master Agreement and is expressed to supplement, form part of and be subject to the ISDA Master Agreement. The 1995 Deed is a stand-alone agreement between the parties and is expressed to be a Credit Support Document in relation to the related ISDA Master Agreement.41 This aspect of the definition is, therefore, satisfied in relation to each Non-IM Security Document.

We will now consider each of limbs (a) to (d) in turn.

4.1 Is the purpose of the Security Document to secure "relevant financial obligations"?

As noted above, the term "relevant financial obligations" is defined in the FCA Regulations as "the obligations which are secured or otherwise covered by a financial collateral arrangement ...". That said, on reflection, we do not believe that this circularity in the definitions would trouble an English court or prevent it from concluding that the Obligations (as defined in Paragraph 12 of each Non-IM Security Document) fall within the broad scope of "relevant financial obligations".

The drafting of the Non-IM Security Documents, in particular Paragraph 2 of each of the Non-IM Security Documents, clarifies that the security interests in the collateral granted to the collateral-taker are given to secure the Obligations. As such we believe that the purpose of the Non-IM Security Documents is to secure "relevant financial obligations".

The amount of financial collateral to be provided by the collateral-provider under Paragraph 3 of each of the Non-IM Security Documents to the collateral-taker is determined by reference to the Exposure of the collateral-taker to the collateral-provider under the ISDA Master Agreement. Roughly speaking, this is the amount that would be owed by the collateral- provider to the collateral-taker if an Early Termination Date were designated or deemed to occur on the relevant Valuation Date.42 In other words, the amount of financial collateral to be provided by the collateral-provider is primarily determined by reference to the credit exposure of the collateral-taker to the collateral-provider under the ISDA Master Agreement as of the Valuation Date.

4.2 Is a security interest in "financial collateral" created?

Regarding condition (b) of the definition, Paragraph 2 of the Non-IM NY Annex expressly creates "a first priority continuing security interest in" Posted Collateral (or Posted Collateral (VM) in respect of the VM NY Annex) transferred to or received by the Secured Party under

41 The related ISDA Master Agreement is identified on the first page of the 1995 Deed by reference to the date of the ISDA Master Agreement and the identities of the parties. 42 The definition of "Exposure" in Paragraph 12 of the 1995 Deed is determined by reference to Section 6(e)(ii)(1) of the ISDA Master Agreement, which applies following a Termination Event with one Affected Party subject to the proviso that (i) in respect of a 1992 Agreement, Market Quotations will be determined at mid-market of the amounts that would be paid for Replacement Transactions; and (ii) in respect of a 2002 Agreement, the Close-out Amount will be determined using "estimates at mid-market of the amounts that would paid for transactions providing the economic equivalent of (x) the material terms of the Transactions…. and (y) the option rights of the parties in respect of the Transactions." The definition of "Exposure" in Paragraph 12 of the Non-IM NY Annex is determined by reference to (x) Section 6(e)(ii)(2)(A) of the 1992 Agreement, which applies following a Termination Event with two Affected Parties and (y) Section 6(e)(ii)(1) of the 2002 Agreement, which applies following a Termination Event with one Affected Party subject in each case to the same provisos that apply to the 1995 Deed. Both definitions yield a calculation that is slightly more favourable to the collateral-provider than would be the case if the determination were simply made by reference to Section 6(e)(i). That, however, is essentially a matter of mechanics and was, presumably, considered more appropriate commercially for an on-going collateral arrangement in the absence of default by the ISDA working groups that drafted the Non-IM Security Documents. Other factors, in particular, the specification of Independent Amount(s) in relation to the collateral-provider can be set to ensure that the collateral-taker is not likely to be undercollateralised in the event of a default occurring on or shortly after the settlement of the Delivery Amount (or Delivery Amount (VM) in respect of the VM NY Annex) determined in respect of that Valuation Date. Note that Exposure under the VM NY Annex is determined by reference to Covered Transactions only; this is discussed further below.

22

the Non-IM NY Annex. As the Non-IM NY Annex is governed by New York law and we are not opining on that law in this memorandum, we assume that the Non-IM NY Annex is effective under New York law to create a security interest in Posted Collateral. Paragraph 2(b) of the 1995 Deed also creates security over Posted Collateral.

In relation to each Non-IM Security Document, we have assumed in Part III.2 of this memorandum that Eligible Collateral is in the form of cash credited to an account (as opposed to physical notes and coins) denominated in a freely convertible currency and held in an account under the control of the Secured Party43 or securities described and held in one of the forms specified in assumption (g) in Part III.2 below.

The term "financial collateral" is defined in the FCA Regulations as being "either cash, financial instruments or credit claims" and "financial instruments" is defined as:

"(a) shares in companies and other securities equivalent to shares in companies;

(b) bonds and other forms of instruments giving rise to or acknowledging indebtedness if these are tradeable on the capital market; and

(c) any other securities which are normally dealt in and which give the right to acquire any such shares, bonds, instruments or other securities by subscription, purchase or exchange or which give rise to a cash settlement (excluding instruments of payment);

and includes units of a collective investment scheme within the meaning of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, eligible debt securities within the meaning of the Uncertificated Securities Regulations 2001, money market instruments, claims relating to or rights in or in respect of any of the financial instruments included in this definition and any rights, privileges or benefits attached to or arising from any such financial instruments;"

Prima facie the Collateral contemplated by our assumptions in Part III.2 will constitute "financial collateral". However, it is a question of fact whether any particular debt obligation would indeed constitute financial collateral (i.e. being "tradeable on the capital market").

4.3 Is the financial collateral in the "possession or under the control" of the collateral-taker?

"Possession or control"

The question then is whether the collateral is "in the possession or under the control of" the collateral-taker or a person acting on its behalf. The only cases on this point that have been decided by the English courts44 are (i) Gray v G-T-P Group Ltd.45, where the collateral- provider had a free right to withdraw collateral under the arrangement and (ii) Re Lehman Brothers International (Europe) (in administration)46, in which the court considered, among other matters, whether an interest expressed as a general lien gave rise to a security financial collateral arrangement for the purposes of the FCA Regulations.

43 Assumptions (f) and (h) in Part III.2 below. 44 The judgment of the of the European Court of Justice dated 10 November 2016 in Case C-156/15 Private Equity Insurance Group SIA v Swedbank AS EU:C:2016:851, [2017] 1 WLR 1602 in relation to the "possession or control" test was consistent with the English case law. See also Case C-107/17 Aviabaltika UAB v Ūkio bankas AB [2018] EU:C:2018:600 concerning the interpretation of Article 4 and Article 8 of the Collateral Directive. 45 [2010] EWHC 1772 (Ch). 46 [2012] EWHC 2997 (Ch).

23

Definition of "possession"

In Gray, Vos J concluded that "possession" was not possible in the context of intangible property and considered what was required to constitute "control" for the purposes of the FCA Regulations. He distinguished between (a) administrative control, whereby a collateral-taker may merely hold the financial collateral (for example, as a custodian) and (b) legal control, which would entitle the collateral-taker to prevent the collateral-provider "from using or dissipating the assets in the ordinary course of business"47 and held that legal control is required for the security to be a security financial collateral arrangement under the FCA Regulations (so administrative control without legal control would be insufficient for the security to be a security financial collateral arrangement under the FCA Regulations).

An amendment to the FCA Regulations was made after the decision in Gray, to introduce a definition of "possession" as follows:

"For the purposes of these Regulations "possession" of financial collateral in the form of cash or financial instruments includes the case where financial collateral has been credited to an account in the name of the collateral-taker or a person acting on his behalf (whether or not the collateral-taker, or person acting on his behalf, has credited the financial collateral to an account in the name of the collateral-provider on his, or that person's, books) provided that any rights the collateral-provider may have in relation to that financial collateral are limited to the right to substitute financial collateral of the same or greater value or to withdraw excess financial collateral".

While the amendment to the FCA Regulations detailed above clarified that the concept of "possession" could apply to intangibles, as noted by the Financial Markets Law Committee (FMLC) in their post-Re Lehman paper,48 the exact requirements needed to satisfy the "possession or control test" are still subject to uncertainty.

However, the express reference to rights of substitution and withdrawal of excess collateral in the definition of "possession", indicates that legal control is required for possession; and in Re Lehman, Briggs J held that "…both "possession" and "control" mean something more than mere custody of financial collateral by the collateral-taker under an agreement giving the custodian no more dominion over it [the collateral] than that of a pure nominee."49 In other words, the collateral-taker must have rights over the collateral in addition to holding (or having had delivered or transferred to it) the relevant collateral.

"Dispossession" as the key question

It is not clear whether "possession" and "control" are intended to be distinct concepts. While the language used in the FCA Regulations suggests that they are, in Re Lehman, Briggs J indicated that the key question to establish whether the "possession or control" test has been satisfied is whether the collateral-provider been sufficiently dispossessed by virtue of the degree of administrative and legal control accorded to the collateral-taker, thus conflating the two tests.50 In determining whether the collateral-provider has been sufficiently

47 Gray (n 45) [54]. 48 Financial Markets Law Committee, "Analysis of uncertainty regarding the meaning of "possession or … control" and "excess financial collateral" under the Financial Collateral Arrangements (No. 2) Regulations 2003" (December 2012 accessed 12 November 2018. 49 Re Lehman (n 46) [131]. 50 Re Lehman (n 46), [136]: Briggs J: "In my judgment what needs to be shown (in order to bring a particular collateral arrangement within the protection of the FCARs), is that the terms upon which it is "provided" (art 2.2) or "delivered, transferred, held, registered or otherwise designated" (Regulation 3) are such that there is shown to be sufficient possession or

24

"dispossessed" of the collateral, the scope and purpose of the Directive should be considered and emphasis should be placed on the extent of residual risk of fraud by the collateral- provider.51 The purpose of the Directive is set out in the Recitals. Recital 10 (cited by Briggs J in Re Lehman)52 provides that there must be a "balance between market efficiency and the safety of the parties to the arrangement and third parties, thereby avoiding inter alia the risk of fraud".

It is not certain what features of a collateral arrangement are essential to establish that the collateral-provider has been sufficiently "dispossessed". This may depend on the nature of the financial collateral (for example, the requirements for establishing "possession or control" in relation to financial collateral in the form of credit claims may well be different to the requirements for establishing "possession or control" in relation to financial collateral in the form of book entry securities). However:

(i) it is clear from the statements of Vos J in Gray and Briggs J in Re Lehman that "legal control" is required, so it is necessary to consider to what extent the legal agreement permits the collateral-provider to deal with the Collateral. If the terms of the agreement are that the collateral-provider can demand, at any time, the return of the collateral (other than pursuant to a right of substitution or a right to withdraw excess, as to which see below) without any right for the collateral-taker to refuse, the "possession or control" test will not be satisfied because the collateral-provider cannot be said to have been dispossessed of the collateral to a meaningful degree53;

(ii) it is not clear to what extent other rights in relation to the Collateral (for example, voting rights and rights to receive distributions) are relevant to the question of whether the collateral-provider has been sufficiently "dispossessed". There is no case law of which we are aware which addresses the question of the extent to which the allocation of entitlement to exercise voting rights arising with respect to financial collateral is a relevant factor in determining whether the collateral-provider can be said to have been sufficiently "dispossessed" and, in our view, the fact that a collateral-provider retains voting rights prior to an enforcement event should not mean that the collateral provider is not sufficiently "dispossessed"54;

(iii) the better view is that the conduct of the parties to the collateral arrangement is also relevant when determining whether the collateral-provider has been sufficiently "dispossessed"55. So if legal rights of control are set out in the documentation but are not exercised by the collateral-taker there may be a risk that the possession or control test will not be satisfied; and

control in the hands of the collateral taker for it to be proper to describe the collateral provider as having been "dispossessed" (Recital 10)…" 51 ibid [92] and [128]: Briggs J stated that it is for the national court to construe the domestic legislation (here the FCA Regulations) as far as possible in a manner which does not derogate from the intended scope of the Directive and that any interpretation of the Directive must be "purposive". 52 ibid [78]: Briggs J considers the inclusion of a requirement for "possession or control" against the backdrop of the Directive, and states: "But the need to balance the protection of the contracting parties, and third parties, from the risk of fraud meant that the new regime should extend only to financial collateral arrangements which provide some form of dispossession of the grantor in relation to the property provided as collateral: see Recital 10". 53 ibid [134]. 54 This is consistent with the view submitted by the legal author Beale - see Hugh Beale, Michael Bridge, Louise Gullifer and Eva Lomnicka, The Law of Security and Title-Based Financing (3rd edn OUP 2018), para 3.69. 55 Re Lehman (n 46) [149-152]: Briggs J discussed conduct and concluded that it is relevant where the documents are silent as to the parties rights (otherwise the parties rights should be taken into account). However, in light of the principles established in Re Spectrum Plus [2005] UKHL 41 and Brumark Investments Limited [2005] 2 AC 680 the better view (supported by the legal author Beale, see Beale and others, (n 54) para 3.59) is that conduct should be taken into account even where the parties' rights are set out in the legal documentation.

25

(iv) while the precise degree of "administrative" or "practical" control required in order to establish "possession or control" was not considered in detail in Gray or Re Lehman, in practice, it is our view that in cases where there is a third party custodian which has opened a secured account in the name of the collateral-provider (although this is not envisioned by the Non-IM Security Documents), the collateral-taker would also need to retain administrative control in respect of the collateral in order to reduce residual risk of fraud by the collateral-provider, as contemplated by the concept of "dispossession".

It should be noted that the definition of "security financial collateral arrangement" in the FCA Regulations provides that "any right of the collateral-provider to substitute financial collateral of the same or greater value or withdraw excess financial collateral…shall not prevent the financial collateral being in the possession or under the control of the collateral taker". So the FCA Regulations expressly contemplate that it is possible to have a "security financial collateral arrangement" where the collateral-provider retains such rights and so the charge is potentially a floating charge.

However, if the terms of the arrangement are such that the collateral-taker has no right to confirm any valuation of the collateral-provider and, if such valuation cannot be verified, to veto any substitution or withdrawal of the collateral, then, in light of the discussion above, it is our view that there would be a risk that the collateral-provider will not have been sufficiently "dispossessed" of the collateral to satisfy the "possession or control" test (because he will be lacking the requisite administrative control).

4.4 Characterisation of the Non-IM Security Documents as a "security financial collateral arrangement"

Our analysis therefore needs to consider if and how the Non-IM Security Documents permit the collateral-provider to deal with the Collateral.

Turning to the provisions of the Non-IM Security Documents, we note that:

(i) Subject to the satisfaction of any eligibility criteria in Paragraph 13, the collateral- taker may either hold the Collateral itself or appoint a Custodian (or Custodian (VM) under the VM NY Annex) to hold the Collateral on its behalf (rather than on behalf of the collateral-provider – even if the eligibility criteria are breached, then the remedy is to transfer to an alternative custodian on behalf of the collateral-taker).

(ii) Following an Event of Default or Specified Condition or the occurrence of an Early Termination Date as a result of such event, the collateral-taker may unilaterally sell or otherwise dispose of the Collateral.

(iii) The collateral-taker is obliged to return to the collateral-provider (A) the Return Amount (or Return Amount (VM) under the VM NY Annex); (B) Distributions and (under the 1995 Deed or 1994 NY Annex) any Interest Amount (to the extent a Delivery Amount (or Delivery Amount (VM) under the VM NY Annex) would not be created or increased by the transfer),56 in each case, provided no Event of Default, Potential Event of Default or Specified Condition has been designated with respect to the collateral-provider and no Early Termination Date has occurred or been designated for which any unsatisfied payment obligations exist as a result of an Event of Default or Specified Condition with respect to the collateral-provider; and (C) all Posted Credit Support (or Posted Credit Support (VM) under the VM NY Annex), if

56 We assume that all Distributions and Interest Amounts take the form of Eligible Collateral and are therefore ascribed a Value.

26

no amounts are or may thereafter become payable by the collateral-provider with respect to any Obligations. We assume that the Return Amount (or Return Amount (VM)) will be rounded down in accordance with Paragraph 13.

The fact that the Valuation Agent is the party making the demand under Paragraph 3 should not give rise to a problem from a control perspective as the collateral-taker would be able to decline to transfer such portion of a Return Amount (or Return Amount (VM)) demanded by the collateral-provider that did not constitute excess and activate the dispute resolution procedures in Paragraph 5 (i.e. in circumstances where the collateral-provider incorrectly or fraudulently makes a demand). However, it should be noted that the Valuation Agent for the purposes of the dispute resolution procedures is still the collateral-provider (assuming the standard Paragraph 13 election is made).

(iv) Under the VM NY Annex, Exposure is calculated by reference to Covered Transactions only. Due to the definition of Covered Transaction under the VM NY Annex, the Exposure under the VM NY Annex will differ from the exposure arising under the ISDA Master Agreement in respect of all Transactions – the Exposure under the VM NY Annex could potentially be higher or lower. The FCA Regulations do not define what constitutes "excess" but the better view is that it is an excess over a contractually agreed amount rather than an excess over the secured obligations.57

(v) Under Paragraph 6(d) of the VM NY Annex there are two options in respect of interest (where interest is positive); these are "Interest Transfer" and "Interest Adjustment".

If the parties elect for "Interest Transfer" to apply and "Interest Payment Netting", then the Interest Payment (VM) is applied first to discharge any Delivery Amount (VM) due on the same day. Only the excess of the Interest Payment (VM) is returned to the collateral-provider and accordingly it should constitute "excess" for the purpose of the FCA Regulations. If, however, "Interest Transfer" is specified as applicable but "Interest Payment Netting" is not applicable, the Secured Party must Transfer the interest payment to the Pledgor at the times specified in Paragraph 13. What is determinative for the analysis under the FCA Regulations is that the accrued interest amount does not form part of the Posted Collateral (unless the Secured Party fails to comply with its obligation to pay such amount) and therefore is not taken into account in the calculation of Value. Accordingly, the obligation to pay the interest amount to the Pledgor is simply a supplemental payment obligation imposed on the Secured Party and does not represent a release of Collateral to the Pledgor. It should also be noted when analysing the interest provisions that the Valuation Dates under the VM NY Annex are daily and therefore any deficits will be cured daily (assuming the appropriate demands are made). Note also that the Secured Party's Transfer obligation under Paragraph 6(d) is subject to the conditions precedent at Paragraph 4(a) (that (1) no Event of Default, Potential Event of Default or Specified Condition has occurred and is continuing with respect to the Pledgor and (2) no Early Termination date for which any unsatisfied payment obligations exist has occurred or been designated as the result of an Event of Default or Specified Condition with respect to the Pledgor).

Alternatively, if the parties elect for "Interest Adjustment" then positive interest constitutes Posted Collateral (VM) and accordingly will only be released to the extent that it is a Return Amount (VM) and accordingly "excess".

57 See further the discussion at Part II.5 below.

27

(vi) Posted Collateral and Posted Collateral (VM) includes all Distributions and any Interest Amount (or Interest Amount (VM) in respect of the VM NY Annex) that have not been transferred by the collateral-taker. Those items will be ascribed a Value and will accordingly only be released to the extent that they are excess.58 Under the VM NY Annex, Posted Collateral (VM) that consists of items that are not eligible (for example, because of a failure to satisfy the Legal Eligibility Requirements under the VM NY Annex) and therefore are ascribed a Value of zero are only required to be transferred pursuant to Paragraph 11(h) to the extent that, as of the date of such transfer, the collateral-provider has satisfied all of its transfer obligations and accordingly such items should be excess.

(vii) Pursuant to Paragraph 4(d) of the Non-IM Security Documents the collateral-provider may propose, by notice to the collateral-taker, the substitution of new Collateral for existing Collateral. Under the 1995 Deed the consent of the collateral-taker is required under Paragraph 4 itself whereas under the Non-IM NY Annex the parties may specify in Paragraph 13 that the Pledgor must obtain the consent of the Secured Party to any substitution pursuant to Paragraph 4(d) of the Non-IM NY Annex. The collateral-taker is only obliged to transfer Posted Credit Support or Posted Credit Support (VM) with a value equal to the Substitute Credit Support or Substitute Credit Support (VM) (as applicable).

(viii) Paragraph 6(e) of the 1995 Deed provides that prior to a Relevant Event or Specified Condition, the collateral-provider may exercise or direct the Secured Party to exercise any voting rights attached to securities forming part of the Collateral. The fact that, under the 1995 Deed, the collateral-taker effectively only retains "possession or control" of the voting rights on and from the occurrence of a Relevant Event may be a relevant consideration for an English court in determining whether the collateral-taker has the requisite level of "possession or control" under the FCA Regulations. However, as mentioned above, we consider the better view to be that retention of voting rights prior to the occurrence of a Relevant Event would not preclude the collateral-taker from exerting the necessary level of "possession or control" to comply with the FCA Regulations.59 The Non-IM NY Annex is silent as to voting and, therefore, we assume does not contractually entitle the collateral-provider to exercise voting rights in respect of securities forming part of the Posted Credit Support or Posted Credit Support (VM) (as applicable).

(ix) The Non-IM NY Annex includes certain Pledgor's Rights and Remedies at paragraph 8(b). Below, in the context of the IM Security Documents, we discuss the rights of the collateral-provider upon the default of a collateral-taker and its impact on the financial collateral analysis. Our primary concern is fraud risk (in accordance with the aims of the Collateral Directive) - i.e. the risk that the collateral-provider fraudulently informs the Custodian (IM) that the collateral-taker has defaulted and is able to recover its Collateral unilaterally. In the case of the Non-IM NY Annex, however, the collateral-taker inherently has sufficient administrative control to block a fraudulent attempt to access the Collateral as the collateral-taker (or its custodian) is holding the Collateral and would need to take positive action to release the Collateral. The conditions that must be met to enable a Pledgor to recover the Collateral are less onerous than in the IM Security Documents. In particular, there is no obligation in the Non-IM NY Annex to ensure that any amount due to the collateral-taker under Section 6(e) has been satisfied prior to the release of the Collateral. In our view, there are good arguments that the parties have agreed in advance that the security

58 See note 56. 59 See further the discussion at Part II.5 below.

28

period ends in the circumstances specified in Paragraph 8(b) of the Non-IM NY Annex (the occurrence of which circumstances are outside of the control of the collateral-provider) and accordingly the release of Collateral in such circumstances would qualify as "excess". For the avoidance of doubt, we do not express an opinion on the validity or enforceability of the collateral-provider's rights under these provisions – see the ISDA Collateral Taker Opinion in respect of issues relating to anti-deprivation which would also be relevant to the Non-IM NY Annex.

(x) The collateral-provider also makes a number of representations in the Non-IM Security Documents including that the Collateral is free of other security interests and the collateral-taker has a valid security interest in the Collateral and, in respect of the Non-IM NY Annex, that this is a first priority security interest.

On the basis of the above and the assumptions we have made we believe that there are good arguments that the collateral-provider under the Non-IM Security Documents has been sufficiently dispossessed of the Collateral in order to satisfy the "possession or control" test, as the Collateral is posted to the collateral-taker itself or a Custodian (or Custodian (VM)) holding the Collateral on behalf of the collateral-taker and the circumstances in which the collateral-provider is entitled to have the Collateral returned are limited to situations where the withdrawal relates to excess collateral or substitute collateral (in the case of the Non-IM NY Annex, absent an Event of Default or Specified Condition with respect the collateral- taker).

4.5 Are the collateral-provider and the collateral-taker non-natural persons?

Moving onto the final limb of the definition of "security financial collateral arrangements", under the FCA Regulations a "non-natural person" is "any corporate body, unincorporated firm, partnership or body with legal personality except an individual …". We assume that both parties to the Non-IM Security Documents are non-natural persons.

5. Application of the FCA Regulations to the IM Security Documents

We set out below our analysis as to whether the four limbs of a "security financial collateral arrangement" described above are met with respect to the IM Security Documents. In respect of the IM Security Documents additional analysis to that set out at Part II.4 above with respect to the Non-IM Security Documents is required in respect of the "possession and control" test as the Collateral is held in an account in the name of the collateral-provider and is subject to a Control Agreement.

We have not reviewed any particular Control Agreement for the purpose of this memorandum and so the analysis below is generic in nature. We assume that the Control Agreement constitutes legal, valid and binding obligations under its governing law and each party has duly authorised, executed and delivered, and has the capacity to enter into, the Control Agreement.

Whether an IM Security Document when entered into in connection with an ISDA Master Agreement should be characterised as a "security financial collateral arrangement" for the purposes of the FCA Regulations depends on whether the collateral-taker enjoys the requisite degree of legal and administrative control over the Collateral. This will depend to a large extent on the terms of the relevant Control Agreement. We assume that the Control Agreement has been drafted to comply with the analysis below.

Below we consider limbs (a)-(d) of the definition of "security financial collateral arrangement" by reference to the IM Security Documents. The requirement that the

29

arrangement be evidenced in writing is satisfied. The IM NY Annex is an annex to the Schedule to the ISDA Master Agreement and is expressed to supplement, form part of and be subject to the ISDA Master Agreement. The IM Deed is a stand-alone agreement between the parties and is expressed to be a Credit Support Document in relation to the relevant ISDA Master Agreement.60

The impact of the IM Deed Japanese Amendments and the IM NY Annex Japanese Amendments on the FCA Regulations analysis is discussed separately at Part IV.

5.1 Is the purpose of the IM Security Document to secure "relevant financial obligations"?

We have discussed the circularity in this definition and, as with the Non-IM Security Documents, we do not believe that this would trouble an English court or prevent it from concluding that the Obligations (as defined in Paragraph 12 of each IM Security Document) fall within the broad scope of "relevant financial obligations".

The drafting of the IM Security Documents, in particular Paragraph 2 of each of the IM Security Documents, clarifies that the security interests in the Collateral granted to the collateral-taker are given to secure the Obligations. As such we believe that the purpose of the IM Security Documents is to secure "relevant financial obligations".

The amount of financial collateral to be provided by the collateral-provider under Paragraph 3 of each of the IM Security Documents to the collateral-taker is determined by reference to the amount of initial margin required to satisfy each of the specified Regimes (calculated either by using ISDA SIMMTM or the relevant Regime's Schedule based method). In other words, the amount of financial collateral to be provided by the collateral-provider under the IM Security Documents is primarily determined by reference to the potential future credit exposure of the collateral-taker to the collateral-provider under the ISDA Master Agreement as of the Calculation Date (IM). The definition of "relevant financial obligations" includes present or future, actual or contingent or prospective obligations (including such obligations arising under a master agreement or similar arrangement). Accordingly, the method of calculating the amount of financial collateral to be provided by the collateral-provider under the IM Security Documents does not affect the analysis.

5.2 Is a security interest in "financial collateral" created?

Paragraph 2 of the IM NY Annex expressly creates "a first priority continuing security interest in" the Segregated Account and all Posted Collateral (IM) transferred to the Segregated Account. As the IM NY Annex is governed by New York law and we are not opining on that law in this memorandum, we assume that the IM NY Annex is effective under New York law to create a security interest in Posted Collateral (IM). Paragraph 2(b) of the IM Deed also creates security over Posted Credit Support (IM).

Prima facie the Collateral (as contemplated by our assumptions in Part III.2 and Part IV.2) will constitute "financial collateral". However, in respect of debt securities, it is a question of fact whether any particular debt obligation would indeed constitute financial collateral (i.e. by being "tradeable on the capital market").

60 The related ISDA Master Agreement is identified on the first page of the IM Deed by reference to the date of the ISDA Master Agreement and the identities of the parties.

30

5.3 Is the financial collateral in the "possession or under the control" of the collateral-taker?

As the IM Security Documents relate to Segregated Accounts in the name of the Collateral Provider, the terms of both the relevant IM Security Document and the Control Agreement will be key to establishing sufficient legal and administrative control. As noted above, where there is a third party custodian which has opened a secured account in the name of the collateral-provider, it is our view that the collateral-taker would also need to retain administrative control in respect of the collateral in order to reduce residual risk of fraud by the collateral-provider, as contemplated by the concept of "dispossession". As we have not reviewed any particular Control Agreement for the purpose of giving this opinion, the below analysis is generic in nature (set out by theme) and focuses on features commonly found in Control Agreements.

We discuss below various possible rights of the Collateral Provider with respect to the Collateral and how such rights could affect the possession or control analysis.

Right to instruct the Custodian (IM) – Third Party

If the custody arrangement involves the Custodian (IM) following the manual instructions given in accordance with the Control Agreement (the market term for this type of arrangement is "third party"), then instructions to the Custodian (IM) must either be (i) joint matching instructions of both parties; or (ii) given solely by the collateral-taker (although we discuss some exceptions to this below that we believe do not prejudice the analysis). This is necessary to establish administrative control and prevent the collateral-provider from submitting a fraudulent instruction.

Right to instruct the Custodian (IM) – Tri-party Custody Arrangements

Certain Custodians (IM) offer what are known as "tri-party" custody services where the Custodian (IM) is responsible for movements of the Collateral using automated systems. The parties will notify the Custodian (IM) of the total amount of Collateral that is required and the Custodian (IM) will (i) deliver additional Collateral to the Segregated Account on behalf of the collateral-provider when required; (ii) release excess Collateral from the Segregated Account; and (iii) substitute Collateral in order to achieve an efficient allocation of Collateral and, in some cases, remove Collateral from the Segregated Account in advance of income being distributed.

In our view, tri-party services are compatible with the "possession or control" test if the notice to the Custodian (IM) of the total amount of Collateral required is given either by (i) both parties; or (ii) solely by the Collateral Taker. Paragraphs 13(n)(vi)(A)(3) and (4) of the IM NY Annex and Paragraphs 13(n)(v)(A)(3) and (4) of the IM Deed acknowledge that the right to instruct the Custodian (IM) will be determined by the terms of the relevant Control Agreement.

Whilst the collateral-taker is not directly involved in each movement of Collateral into or out of the Segregated Account, the Custodian (IM) has given contractual undertakings under the Control Agreement to the collateral-taker. The Custodian (IM)'s valuations should be determined independently of the collateral-provider and, accordingly, the collateral-provider will not be able to force the Custodian (IM) to release Collateral that does not qualify as "excess". Accordingly, in our view, the collateral-provider should be sufficiently dispossessed.

31

Excess Collateral

The Collateral Directive and the FCA Regulations do not define what constitutes "excess" but, as stated above, the better view is that it is an excess over a contractually agreed amount rather than an excess over the secured obligations. The purpose of the possession or control test under the Collateral Directive is to minimise fraud risk and treating "excess" as an excess over a contractually agreed amount does not introduce fraud risk. Similarly, the fact that the contractually agreed amount fluctuates in an initial margin arrangement because the Credit Support Amount (IM) is determined in accordance with either (i) ISDA SIMMTM or (ii) under the relevant methodology set out in the relevant Regime (absent the use of an initial margin model), does not introduce fraud risk.61

Under the IM Security Documents, the collateral-provider has a contractual right under Paragraph 3 to require the collateral-taker to release the Return Amount (IM) from the Segregated Account (being the excess of the Value of the Posted Credit Support (IM) over the Credit Support Amount (IM)) and we assume that such Return Amount (IM) will be rounded down in accordance with Paragraph 13.

The fact that the Calculation Agent (IM) is the party making the demand under Paragraph 3 (i.e. the collateral-provider in respect of a Return Amount (IM)) should not give rise to a problem from a control perspective (subject to the discussion below as to the terms of the Control Agreement) as the collateral-taker would be able to (i) decline to issue the appropriate instructions to the Custodian (IM) to effect the transfer of the relevant disputed amount and (ii) activate the dispute resolution procedures in Paragraph 5 of the relevant IM Security Document (i.e. in circumstances where the collateral-provider incorrectly or fraudulently makes a demand). However, it should be noted that the Calculation Agent (IM) for the purpose of the dispute resolution procedures is still the collateral-provider (assuming the standard Paragraph 13 election is made).

In respect of the Control Agreement, in third party custody, the collateral-taker must have the right to (i) confirm any valuation of the Posted Credit Support (IM) and the Credit Support Amount (IM); and (ii) veto any release of Collateral which is not in fact "excess". This can be achieved by requiring matching joint instructions or giving the collateral-taker the sole right to instruct the Custodian (IM) to release the Collateral.

To the extent that the Control Agreement provides for tri-party custody, Paragraph 13(n)(vi) of the IM NY Annex and Paragraph 13(n)(v) of the IM Deed provide, inter alia, that (i) the parties will give such instructions to the Custodian (IM) as may be necessary and are not required to serve demands under Paragraph 3(b) if such demands are effectively made under the terms of the Control Agreement; and (ii) that determinations of Value made by the Custodian (IM) will apply for the purpose of the relevant IM Security Document.

We assume that under the terms of the tri-party service, the collateral-provider and the collateral-taker will notify the Custodian (IM) of the quantum of the Credit Support Amount (IM) in respect of each Calculation Date (IM) and the Custodian (IM) will then independently value the Posted Credit Support (IM) and determine whether either a Delivery Amount (IM) or a Return Amount (IM) arises. Assuming that the Custodian determines that a Return Amount (IM) is due, the Custodian (IM) will release the relevant portion of the Posted Credit

61 This is also the basis on which we believe that Thresholds do not undermine the "possession or control" analysis. Note that the FMLC in its "Analysis of uncertainty regarding the meaning of "possession or ... control" and "excess financial collateral" under the Financial Collateral Arrangements (No. 2) Regulations 2003" also argued that this approach is consistent with the Collateral Directive on the basis that recital 10 focuses on balancing market efficiency with the risk of fraud (which is not raised by adopting this approach). See also Geoffrey Yeowart and Robin Parsons (eds), Yeowart and Parsons on The Law of Financial Collateral (Edward Elgar Publishing 2016), paras 8.11 – 8.18.

32

Support (IM) from the Segregated Account. To the extent that a dispute arises as to quantum, then matched instructions would only be submitted as to the undisputed amount. Accordingly, the relevant portion of the Posted Credit Support (IM) released by the Custodian (IM) would constitute "excess".

We are of the view that the collateral-provider should still be sufficiently dispossessed notwithstanding that the Custodian (IM) is responsible for valuing the Posted Credit Support (IM) since the Custodian (IM) has given contractual undertakings to the collateral-taker and the collateral-provider does not have administrative control over the Custodian (IM)'s valuations.

It would also be acceptable for the Custodian (IM) to rely on valuations of the Posted Credit Support (IM) given by the collateral-taker alone or both parties by matching instructions. It would of course be problematic for the dispossession analysis if the Custodian (IM) relied upon valuations given by the collateral-provider alone as the collateral-provider could submit incorrect valuations resulting in the release of Posted Credit Support (IM) other than as "excess" and increasing fraud risk.

Paragraph 13 of the IM Security Documents also provide for Ineligibility Notices to facilitate compliance with WGMR Regimes. Following the delivery of an Ineligibility Notice, the items specified in the relevant notice will be deemed to have a Value of zero from and including the relevant Ineligibility Date (which shall be no earlier than the fifth Local Business Day following effective delivery of the Ineligibility Notice) and provided the relevant failure to meet the Eligibility Requirements is continuing. Under the terms of the IM Security Document, assets deemed to have a Value of zero are released but only where at such time the collateral-provider has satisfied all of its transfer obligations and accordingly such assets with a Value of zero would be excess.

The bilateral position under the IM Security Documents should be straightforward to reflect in the case of a third party Control Agreement. In the case of tri-party, notwithstanding the bilateral position, until such time as the tri-party Control Agreement or the eligible asset schedule is updated, the Custodian (IM) may continue to ascribe the relevant ineligible items with a value and may, therefore, release other Posted Credit Support (IM). However, each party is under an obligation to use reasonable endeavours, as soon as reasonably practicable following the delivery of the Ineligibility Notice to update the Control Agreement and/or the eligible asset schedule to remove the relevant ineligible assets. Furthermore, a release of Collateral following the Ineligibility Date based on the value of the ineligible credit support would likely result in a shortfall and (depending on the facts) potentially an Event of Default. Such shortfall would arise because under Paragraph 13(n)(vi) of the IM NY Annex and Paragraph 13(n)(v) of the IM Deed (as an exception to the general position) the valuations of the Custodian (IM) do not override the definition of Value in the IM Security Document in respect of items that have a Value of zero resulting from delivery of an Ineligibility Notice. Accordingly, we are of the view that this scenario does not prejudice the possession or control analysis.

Distributions and Income

The IM Security Documents are silent on the issue of distributions in respect of Posted Credit Support (IM) in the form of securities and interest on Posted Credit Support (IM) in the form of cash other than (i) Paragraph 6(d) of the IM NY Annex and 6(e) of the IM Deed, which reflect the fact that the Segregated Account is an account in the name of the Collateral Provider; and (ii) the definition of Posted Collateral (IM) in the IM NY Annex and the definition of Posted Credit Support (IM) in the IM Deed includes "…other property, Distributions and all proceeds thereof". As a result, absent any specially negotiated position,

33

income and Distributions should ultimately flow into Return Amount (IM) as "excess". However, this will depend on the terms of the Control Agreement.

In respect of income, at least in the case of tri-party Control Agreements, we understand that the accrual of interest on cash balances is unlikely as cash will be substituted out for securities in the normal course. To the extent that cash is credited to the Segregated Account and subsequently released as excess by way of a Return Amount (IM) under either a tri-party or third party Control Agreement, that will not be problematic for possession or control for the reasons given above.

In respect of Distributions, we understand that the tri-party Control Agreements in common use in the market by collateral-providers that are English Counterparties (i) attempt to substitute securities out of the Segregated Account ahead of an income or distribution or dividend payment date; and (ii) if the substitution fails (or if the relevant service does not offer a "full substitution" facility such that no substitution ahead of a record date takes place), provide for the crediting of the distribution to the relevant account (in respect of distributions representing both capital and income). Such distributions would then be released as "excess" by way of a Return Amount (IM) (as discussed above). In the case of third-party Control Agreements we also assume that only Distributions that qualify as "excess" would be released (by way of a Return Amount (IM)).62

We express no view on arrangements that release Distributions other than by way of "excess".

Voting

The IM Security Documents are silent as to voting rights in respect of the Posted Credit Support (IM). As a result, the Control Agreement will regulate the right to vote.

There is no case law of which we are aware which addresses the question of the extent to which the allocation of the entitlement to exercise voting rights arising with respect to financial collateral is a relevant factor in determining whether the collateral-provider can be said to have been sufficiently "dispossessed" and, in our view, the fact that a collateral provider retains voting rights prior to an enforcement event should not mean that the collateral provider is not sufficiently "dispossessed" since the right to vote does not affect the risk of fraud. We note that voting rights could ultimately be used to (i) transform the Posted Credit Support (IM) into assets that no longer qualify as financial collateral; or (ii) diminish the value of the Posted Credit Support (IM). However, we do not believe that a court would construe the FCA Regulations on the assumption that a party would act irrationally or contrary to its own interests. Furthermore, even if the Posted Credit Support (IM) could in future be transformed into non-financial collateral, at the outset the relevant assets would qualify and that future risk should not affect the initial characterisation as a security financial collateral arrangement. Accordingly, we are of the view that the risk of "extreme" voting does not go to the question of possession or control.

Substitution

Paragraph 4 of the IM Security Documents permit the collateral-provider to substitute replacement Eligible Credit Support (IM) for Posted Credit Support (IM) and the collateral- taker is required to release the Posted Credit Support (IM) with a Value as close as practicable to, but not more than, the Value of the replacement Eligible Credit Support (IM).

62 Note that, to the extent that interest or distributions were deemed to have a value of zero, such interest or distributions could also be returned by way of the provisions relating to Posted Credit Support (IM) with a Value of zero.

34

The standard election in Paragraph 13 of the IM Security Documents provides that the prior consent of the collateral-taker to substitution is required except that each party consents upfront to any substitutions of Posted Credit Support (IM) for replacement Eligible Credit Support (IM) that are made by the Collateral Provider and/or the Custodian (IM) in accordance with the terms of the Control Agreement (i.e. no further consent is required on a substitution by substitution basis).

As noted above, the FCA Regulations provide that any right of the collateral-provider to substitute financial collateral of the same or greater value does not prevent the financial collateral being in the possession or under the control of the collateral-taker. As a result substitution is permissible and prior consent is not crucial to the possession or control analysis (although it may impact the question of whether the arrangement constitutes a floating charge).

However, the Control Agreement must ensure that administrative control over substitutions is retained (i.e. to prevent a collateral-provider fraudulently substituting one security for another of lower value). In the case of third party Control Agreements, administrative control can be achieved by the Custodian (IM) acting only on matched joint instructions or sole instructions given by the collateral-taker. In the case of tri-party Control Agreements, the Custodian (IM) is likely to make frequent substitutions on its own initiative (as noted above the collateral- taker provides upfront consent to such substitutions in the relevant IM Security Document). We do not think this is problematic from a possession or control perspective for the same reasons that apply to the release of Return Amounts (IM) under tri-party Control Agreements (in respect of which see "Excess Collateral" above).

Notice to Contest and Collateral Taker Insolvency

The Control Agreement will likely include the right for the collateral-provider to serve a Chargor Access Notice or Pledgor Access Notice upon certain conditions including the default of the collateral-taker. Please refer to the ISDA Collateral Taker Opinion for a discussion as to the enforceability of these rights from the perspective of a Collateral Provider.

Under the IM Security Documents, the collateral-provider covenants that it will not (i) give a Pledgor Access Notice or Chargor Access Notice (as applicable) under the Control Agreement or (ii) exercise any rights or remedies arising from the delivery of such notice with respect to Posted Credit Support (IM) unless and until a Pledgor Rights Event or Chargor Rights Event (as applicable) occurs (except where it does so to exercise the Delivery in Lieu Right, if applicable, or in order to exercise its right to return of Posted Credit Support (IM) pursuant to Paragraph 8(d) of the relevant IM Security Document).

In our view, if the occurrence of a Pledgor Rights Event or Chargor Rights Event (as applicable) entitles the collateral-provider to serve a Pledgor Access Notice or Chargor Access Notice (as applicable) on the Custodian (IM), then in order to satisfy the requirements for administrative control, the Control Agreement should include provisions such that (i) the Custodian (IM) must provide a copy of the Pledgor Access Notice or Chargor Access Notice to the collateral-taker63 and there must be a delay before the collateral-provider is entitled to withdraw the Posted Credit Support (IM); (ii) if the Pledgor Access Notice or Chargor Access Notice (as applicable) has been incorrectly given (e.g. because it has been given fraudulently), the collateral-taker must be able to deliver a notice to the Custodian blocking the Pledgor Access Notice or Chargor Access Notice (as applicable) (such notice, the Notice to Contest);

63 Or at the very least the Custodian (IM) must notify the Secured Party that a Pledgor Access Notice or Chargor Access Notice has been received by it.

35

and (iii) if no Notice to Contest is given prior to the expiry of the delay period, then the Custodian (IM) may accept the sole instructions of the collateral-provider with respect to the Posted Credit Support (IM). The delay period should be sufficiently long to enable the collateral-taker to verify whether the Obligations have been satisfied – this will depend on the identity of the relevant parties and their sophistication.

Under the IM Security Documents, the collateral-provider is contractually permitted to serve a Pledgor Access Notice or Chargor Access Notice (as applicable) to exercise the Delivery in Lieu Right. We assume that a collateral-taker that is a party to an IM Security Document would serve a Notice to Contest in any circumstances where it was not able to determine that the exercise of the Delivery In Lieu Right would result in satisfaction of the Obligations. Accordingly, we are of the view that the inclusion of the Delivery in Lieu Right would not prejudice the possession or control analysis.

Custodial liens and rights of set-off

There is no case law of which we are aware which addresses the question of the extent to which a competing lien or security interest over the Posted Credit Support (IM) in favour of the Custodian (IM) arising under the terms of the Control Agreement or the related custody agreement could affect the possession or control analysis.

Given the requirements of the WGMR Regimes, we would expect that the lien or security interest is limited to de minimis amounts (i.e. fees and expenses) arising in relation to the specific Segregated Account and the holding of the Posted Credit Support (IM). Such liens or security interests should not be problematic as the Posted Credit Support (IM) is held by the Custodian (IM) on behalf of the collateral-taker subject to the terms of the Control Agreement and the collateral-provider is still dispossessed versus the collateral-taker.

In our view, the position with respect to a right of set-off in favour of the Custodian (IM) (for example with respect to cash balances and the payment of fees and expenses) is the same.

Right of Custodian (IM) to Resign

The Control Agreement and/or the related custody agreement is likely to permit the Custodian (IM) to resign by notice. The Control Agreement may oblige the parties to agree at the relevant time to put a new initial margin structure in place and transfer the Posted Credit Support (IM) to the replacement Segregated Account. However, the right of the Custodian (IM) to resign is unlikely to be contingent on a replacement structure being put in place and the obligation on the parties to negotiate a replacement structure may be an agreement to agree and unenforceable in any event.

Upon the resignation of the Custodian (IM) in such circumstances, the Posted Credit Support (IM) could be transferred to either the collateral-provider or the collateral-taker. Whether the ability of a Custodian (IM) to resign (of its own volition and not following an instruction of the collateral-provider) affects the possession or control analysis is not totally clear. The collateral-provider is not able to force the resignation of the Custodian (IM) and accordingly, in the normal course, the collateral-provider is dispossessed. However, particularly where the Collateral is returned to the collateral-provider, upon the resignation of the Custodian (IM), the collateral-provider regains the ability to deal in the Collateral.

Accordingly to minimise the risk to the extent possible, the IM Security Documents contain an Additional Termination Event in respect of each Covered Transaction (IM) triggered by a Custodian Event continuing after the CE End Date. When parties are entering into an IM Security Document, they should ensure that the time periods inserted in the definition of CE

36

End Date are selected such that it is possible to (i) close-out the Covered Transactions (IM) and (ii) if necessary, following a failure to pay the Early Termination Amount in respect of the prior close-out, close-out the remaining Transactions and enforce the security interest prior to the Custodian (IM)'s resignation becoming effective.

Other features of the IM Security Documents

Note that in addition, from a legal control perspective:

(i) upon the occurrence of a Secured Party Rights Event, the collateral-taker is able to exercise the relevant enforcement remedies;

(ii) the IM Deed includes a negative pledge at Paragraph 2(c) and each of the IM Security Documents includes representations as to the status of the security interest at Paragraph 9; and

(iii) the obligations of the collateral-taker to release Posted Credit Support (IM) are subject to the conditions precedent specified in Paragraph 4, including that no Event of Default or Potential Event of Default has occurred and is continuing with respect to the collateral-provider.

5.4 Are the collateral-provider and the collateral-taker non-natural persons?

We assume that both parties to the IM Security Documents are non-natural persons.

6. Application of the FCA Regulations to the Clearing System IM Documents

The Clearstream Account is in the name of the collateral-provider64 and the Euroclear Accounts are opened in the Euroclear System in the name of Euroclear acting in its own name but for the account of the collateral-taker (as pledgee).

In our view, the issues highlighted above in respect of the IM Security Documents and a tri- party Control Agreement will be equally applicable to a Clearstream or Euroclear initial margin arrangement. References in Part II.5 above to provisions of the IM Security Documents should be read as references to the equivalent provision of the relevant Clearing System IM Documents for this purpose. Note that in our view, as per the analysis in respect of the IM Security Documents above, tri-party services are compatible with satisfying the requirements for administrative control under the "possession and control" test if the relevant instructions are given either (i) by both parties; or (ii) solely by the collateral-taker.65

We consider certain aspects of the "possession or control" analysis in more detail below taking into account the terms of the relevant Clearing System IM Documents. As requested, we have not reviewed or considered the Relevant Tri-party Documents for the purpose of the below discussion (even where such documentation is expressly referred to in the Clearing System IM Documents). Therefore, the generic analysis above in this Part II, as supplemented by the below, should be considered together with the terms of the Relevant Tri- party Documents in order to determine whether an arrangement is a security financial collateral arrangement.

64 As discussed at Part V.2, where the 2017 Clearstream Security Agreement is used, the Clearstream Account is in fact an account in the name of the collateral-taker. We discuss the impact of this structure on the financial collateral analysis in the context of the analysis of the Clearstream Japanese Amendments at Part V.5. 65 The collateral-taker should of course be able to serve unilateral instructions post default of the collateral-provider.

37

The impact of the Clearing System Japanese Amendments on the FCA Regulations analysis is addressed separately at Part V.

Excess Collateral

Paragraph 2.2 of each of the Clearstream CTA and Euroclear CTA follows the approach of the IM Security Documents. The Return Amount is calculated by reference to the amount by which the Value of all Posted Collateral exceeds the applicable Credit Support Amount and the Collateral Taker is obliged to transfer Posted Collateral having a Value as close as practicable to the applicable Return Amount. Accordingly, the Return Amount should qualify as "excess" for the reasons given in Part II.5 above.

The Credit Support Amount is calculated by both parties in respect of a posting leg and joint instructions are required to notify Clearstream or Euroclear under Paragraph 3.3(b) and 3.3(c). As a result, a fraudulent or incorrect calculation of the Credit Support Amount by the collateral-provider resulting in the release of Collateral other than as "excess" should not be possible. To the extent that a dispute arises as to the Credit Support Amount, the collateral- taker would be able to refuse to submit a matched instruction in respect of the relevant disputed amount and trigger the dispute resolution procedures in Paragraph 4.

The Value of the Posted Collateral for the purpose of Return Amounts is determined by the Collateral Valuation Agent – this will usually be Clearstream or Euroclear but may also be the collateral-taker. Our analysis at Part II.5 above in respect of valuations by the Custodian (IM) would be equally applicable to valuations by Euroclear or Clearstream.

Note that under Paragraph 2.3, each of the Clearstream CTA and Euroclear CTA envisage that additional transfers may take place on days which do not qualify as Transfer Dates under the agreements but are days on which the tri-party system operates. In such cases the Credit Support Amount notified to Clearstream or Euroclear for the preceding Transfer Date will continue to apply and the automated systems will continue to either top up or release the Collateral. Such Credit Support Amount is still the contractually agreed amount required to be collateralised for the purpose of the FCA Regulations and therefore any Collateral released 66 would constitute "excess" for the reasons given above.

Each of the Clearstream CTA and the Euroclear CTA include provisions relating to Ineligible Credit Support which require the parties to use reasonable endeavours, as soon as reasonably practicable, following effective delivery of an Ineligibility Notice to provide matching instructions to update the relevant eligible collateral schedules with effect from the applicable Ineligibility Date, which would trigger an automated substitution (in respect of which see below).

If the parties failed to update the relevant eligible collateral schedules, the analysis set out in Part II.5 above would apply mutatis mutandis.

Distributions and Income

We assume that, as tri-party systems, Clearstream or Euroclear (as applicable) will seek to substitute securities out of the relevant Clearstream Account or Euroclear Accounts (as applicable) ahead of the relevant income or distribution or dividend date. To the extent that substitution does not occur (either because of a lack of eligible replacement assets in the relevant source account or because a "full substitution" service is not offered), we have

66 This scenario could arise in other tri-party scenarios as described in Part II.5 above. The logic above would also apply in such circumstances.

38

assumed that parties will have made any relevant elections to ensure that Distributions are trapped in the relevant account or that the terms of the Relevant Tri-party Documentation are such that Distributions are only ever released to the extent they constitute excess collateral.

In respect of Euroclear, Paragraph 5.6 (Transfer of Distributions) of the 2016 versions of the Euroclear CTAs provides that Distributions credited to the relevant Secured Account will be released to the extent that a Delivery Amount would not be created or increased and all of the collateral-provider's transfer obligations have been satisfied. The Value of Distributions is determined by the collateral-taker for this purpose and the 2016 versions of the Euroclear CTAs contemplate a manual release process. Accordingly, Distributions would be "excess". Paragraph 5.6 of the 2016 versions of the Euroclear CTAs is consistent with an election by the parties to apply "income trapping" in the Relevant Tri-party Documents, as referred to in the assumption at Part V.2(g).

The reason for this assumption is that we understand that Euroclear was historically unable as an operational matter to check whether there was any margin deficit subsisting before reversing back income to the collateral-provider and this would cause a concern from the perspective of the FCA Regulations on the basis that such income would not necessarily have constituted excess collateral. However, on the basis that Euroclear was able or would become able to perform a margin deficit check before releasing income back to the collateral- provider, the 2017 versions of the Euroclear CTAs included an amended Paragraph 5.6 pursuant to which the parties agree to migrate to a new automatic income reversal approach (known as the "Excess Income Automatic Return Mechanism" in the 2017 versions of the Euroclear CTAs) once such procedure is operationally effective, without further action by either party, in the event that Euroclear has undertaken to the parties to check that income constitutes excess and to transfer such income automatically to the collateral-provider pursuant to the Relevant Tri-party Documents.67 Importantly, if there is any identified deficit, then such release of income will not take place. This is the genesis of the final element of the assumption at Part V.2(g).

For the avoidance of doubt, for so long as the new automatic release mechanism is not engaged, we assume the manual approach (known as the "Excess Income Manual Return Mechanism" in the 2017 versions of the Euroclear CTAs) applies (in other words, in such circumstances, we continue to make the assumption that the parties to the Relevant Tri-party Documents have made the "income-trapping" election).

The Clearstream CTA is silent on Distributions so we assume Distributions would be released through the automated Return Amount process. Accordingly the release of the Distributions would constitute "excess" for the reasons set out above.

We express no view on arrangements that release Distributions other than by way of excess.

Our analysis in respect of interest on cash balances in Part II.5 is equally applicable to the Clearing System IM Documents.

Voting

The Euroclear CTA provides that unless and until an Enforcement Event occurs with respect to a collateral-provider, it can exercise voting rights attached to the Posted Collateral. The Clearstream CTA is silent as to voting rights prior to the occurrence of an Enforcement Event

67 The footnote at Paragraph 5.6 of the 2017 versions of the Euroclear CTAs explains that the new provisions of Paragraph 5.6 are provided for circumstances where the parties have applied the mechanism for the automatic release of income by Euroclear once the secured accounts are otherwise fully collateralised by virtue of elections contained in their triparty schedule or as otherwise jointly elected to Euroclear.

39

(following the occurrence of an Enforcement Event with respect to the Security-provider which is continuing the Clearstream CTA (like the Euroclear CTA) provides that only the Security-taker may exercise voting rights). For the reasons given in Part II.5 above, we are of the view that retention of voting rights prior to an Enforcement Event should not mean that a Collateral Provider is not sufficiently "dispossessed".

Substitution

The parties agree in the Clearstream CTA and Euroclear CTA that substitution will take place in accordance with the Relevant Tri-party Documents. See Part II.5 above in respect of substitutions in a tri-party context.

Notice to Contest and Collateral Taker Insolvency

Each of the Clearstream Security Agreement and the Euroclear Security Agreement envisage the ability of a collateral-provider to serve a Security-provider Access Notice. The ability to serve the notice is conditional on the same factors as under the IM Security Documents.

To ensure administrative control, the Relevant Tri-party Documents must comply with the conditions set out in Part II.5 above including providing the collateral-taker with the ability to serve a Notice of Contest. As set out above, the collateral-taker should be aware of the need to serve a Notice of Contest if it is not able to determine that the exercise of the Delivery in Lieu Right would result in satisfaction of the Secured Liabilities.

Clearstream Event/Euroclear Event

The circumstances in which a Clearstream Event or a Euroclear Event, such as a resignation or a termination of the relevant service, could occur will depend in part on the terms of the Relevant Tri-party Documents.

To the extent that a Clearstream Event or Euroclear Event occurs and is continuing on the CE End Date or EE End Date, as applicable, the Clearstream CTA and Euroclear CTA include an Additional Termination Event. As with the IM Security Documents, parties should ensure that the time periods inserted in the definition of CE End Date or EE End Date are selected such that it is possible to (i) close-out the Covered Transactions and (ii) if necessary following a failure to pay the Early Termination Amount in respect of the prior close-out, close-out the remaining Transactions and enforce the security interest prior to the resignation or termination becoming effective (particularly in cases where the Collateral would be returned to the collateral-provider under the Relevant Tri-party Documents).

Other features of the Clearstream IM Documents and Euroclear IM Documents

Note that, in addition, from a legal control perspective:

(i) upon the occurrence of an Enforcement Event, the collateral-taker is able to enforce its rights under the Clearstream Security Agreement or Euroclear Security Agreement (as applicable);

(ii) each of the Clearstream Security Agreement and Euroclear Security Agreement include a negative pledge and representations as to the status of the security interest;

(iii) the transfer obligations of the collateral-taker are subject to the conditions precedent in Paragraph 3 including that no Event of Default or Potential Event of Default has occurred with respect to the collateral-provider; and

40

(iv) certain unilateral rights of each party with regard to Clearstream or Euroclear under the Relevant Tri-party Documents are restricted under Paragraph 7.

7. Application of the FCA Regulations to the Transfer Annexes

We are of the view that, on the assumptions we have made, a collateral arrangement constituted by a Transfer Annex entered into in connection with an ISDA Master Agreement, if entered into on or after 26 December 2003, would be a title transfer financial collateral arrangement as defined in the FCA Regulations.

The definition in the FCA Regulations of a "title transfer financial collateral arrangement" is as follows:

"'title transfer financial collateral arrangement' means an agreement or arrangement, including a repurchase agreement, evidenced in writing, where –

(a) the purpose of the agreement or arrangement is to secure or otherwise cover the relevant financial obligations owed to the collateral-taker;

(b) the collateral-provider transfers legal and beneficial ownership in financial collateral to a collateral-taker on terms that when the relevant financial obligations are discharged the collateral-taker must transfer legal and beneficial ownership of equivalent financial collateral to the collateral- provider; and

(c) the collateral-provider and collateral-taker are both non-natural persons;"

Considering each of the elements of this definition in turn:

(i) The Transfer Annex is an arrangement evidenced in writing. The Transfer Annex is an annex to the Schedule to the ISDA Master Agreement and is expressed to supplement, form part of and be subject to the ISDA Master Agreement. This aspect of the definition is, therefore, satisfied.

(ii) Regarding condition (a) of the definition, the principal purpose of the Transfer Annex is to provide financial collateral in order to reduce the credit exposure of the collateral-taker to the collateral-provider under the ISDA Master Agreement. In our view, this purpose falls clearly within the words "to secure or otherwise cover the relevant financial obligations owed to the collateral-taker". There are two parts of this definition to consider, namely, the phrase "to secure or otherwise cover" and the phrase "relevant financial obligations owed to the collateral-taker".

(A) The word "secure" in the phrase "to secure or otherwise cover" should be interpreted in a broad commercial sense rather than in the narrower legal sense of creating a security interest. This is clear from the definition viewed as a whole, which makes no mention of the creation of a security interest (leaving aside the words "to secure"), and also sub-clause (b), which sets out the central mechanism of a title transfer financial collateral arrangement without reference to the creation of a security interest. The phrase "to secure or otherwise cover", therefore, plainly means to reduce the credit exposure of the collateral-taker to the collateral-provider by virtue of the obligations owed by the latter to the former under the related ISDA Master Agreement.

41

(B) The question then arises whether the obligations of the collateral-provider to the collateral-taker under the ISDA Master Agreement are "relevant financial obligations". We have already referred above to the circularity of the definition of "relevant financial obligations" and to our view that this would include obligations owed by the collateral-provider to the collateral-taker under the related ISDA Master Agreement.

The amount of financial collateral to be provided by the collateral-provider under Paragraph 2 to the collateral-taker is determined by reference to the Exposure of the collateral-taker to the collateral-provider under the ISDA Master Agreement. The Exposure is determined in the same manner as is the case under the 1995 Deed. As with the VM NY Annex, the VM Transfer Annex determines Exposure by reference to the Covered Transactions only.

Condition (a) of the definition is, therefore, satisfied in relation to the Transfer Annex.

(iii) Regarding condition (b) of the definition, this condition is clearly satisfied by the provisions in Paragraphs 2 and 3 of the Transfer Annex relating to the transfer between the parties of Eligible Credit Support and Equivalent Credit Support where that Eligible Credit Support or Equivalent Credit Support, as the case may be, is transferred in the form of securities (subject to the discussion below regarding the meaning of "financial collateral"). Where the Eligible Credit Support or Equivalent Credit Support is in the form of cash, the analysis is less straightforward. Condition (b) would never apply literally to cash collateral as defined in the FCA Regulations. This condition was clearly drafted with financial instruments in mind, the definition of "financial collateral" for purposes of the FCA Regulations being "either cash or financial instruments". Under a title transfer financial collateral arrangement, cash collateral is transferred to the collateral-taker by payment of an amount of currency, creating a conditional debt owed by the collateral-taker to the collateral-provider, which debt is then available for inclusion within the scope of a "close out netting provision" in the financial collateral arrangement or in an arrangement, such as a master agreement, of which a financial collateral arrangement forms part. The collateral-provider does not "transfer[…] legal and beneficial title" to a specific asset previously owned by the collateral-provider. Instead, the collateral-taker receives a credit in one of its bank accounts, effected through a payment system, that credit representing a debt owed to the collateral-taker by its bank. The collateral-provider was not the prior "legal and beneficial owner" of that debt. Accordingly, although in the banking system we would refer to the payment of cash as a "transfer" through a payment system, it is not a transfer in the sense used in condition (b) of the definition. Notwithstanding this, we have no doubt, that an English court would give a sensible and purposive interpretation to condition (b) of the definition in relation to financial collateral in the form of cash transferred as Eligible Credit Support or Equivalent Credit Support under Paragraph 2 of the Transfer Annex. Otherwise, the clear purpose of the FCA Regulations, and indeed of the Collateral Directive, would be defeated in relation to cash collateral under a title transfer financial collateral arrangement.

Prima facie the Collateral in the form of securities contemplated by our assumptions in Parts III.2 and VI.2 will constitute "financial collateral". However, it is a question of fact whether any particular debt obligation would indeed constitute financial collateral (i.e. being "tradeable on the capital market").

42

Condition (b) of the definition is, therefore, satisfied in relation to the Transfer Annex.

The 1995 Transfer Annex (on which the VM Transfer Annex is based) was drafted primarily with debt securities in mind. Notwithstanding this, the inclusion of equity securities would not negatively impact our conclusions. Eligible Credit Support would capture the original equity securities and "the proceeds of any redemption in whole or in part of such securities by the relevant issuer". A number of other corporate events may occur in respect of equity securities (e.g. mandatory tender offers where the cash amount would be paid by an entity other than the issuer and stock splits). Equivalent Credit Support (which is returned by way of Return Amount or Return Amount (VM), as the case may be) requires that the asset be of the same type, nominal value, description and amount as that Eligible Credit Support and does not envisage the potential transformation of the equity security into something else.

However, "Distributions" (which form part of the Credit Support Balance or Credit Support Balance (VM), as the case may be, to the extent not transferred) is sufficiently wide to capture "all principal, interest, and other payments and distributions of cash or other property" to which a holder of securities of the same type, nominal value, description and amount as such Eligible Credit Support would be entitled from time to time.

Distributions will be transferred to the collateral-provider under the terms of Paragraph 5(c) of the Transfer Annex and, if the Distributions are still Eligible Credit Support and are ascribed a Value, they will only be transferred to the extent that a Delivery Amount or Delivery Amount (VM), as the case may be, would not be created or increased by such transfer.

(iv) Regarding condition (c) of the definition, we assume that both parties to the Transfer Annex are non-natural persons.

8. Effects of the FCA Regulations

In relation to a security financial collateral arrangement, the principal effects of the FCA Regulations are:

(a) the elimination of the need of an English Company to register a security financial collateral arrangement as a charge under the registration of charges provisions in Part 25 of the Companies Act 2006 or, in the case of a Foreign Entity that executed a Security Document prior to 1 October 2011, relevant secondary legislation made under the Companies Act 2006 (the Registration Provisions);68

68 Companies Act 2006, ss 859A and 859H, in relation to a charge executed on or after 6 April 2013 by an English Company, in respect of which see Part III below. The position in relation to Foreign Entities is somewhat complicated. The applicable registration regime varies according to whether the charge was created prior to 1 October 2009 (governed by the registration of charges provisions in Part XII of the Companies Act 1985), during the period from 1 October 2009 to 30 September 2011 (governed by the Overseas Companies (Execution of Documents and Registration of Charges) Regulations 2009 (SI 2009/1917)) or on or after 1 October 2011 (governed by the Overseas Companies (Execution of Documents and Registration of Charges) (Amendments) Regulations 2011 (SI 2011/2194), which amended the prior regulations). A charge created prior to 1 October 2009 was registrable under the first regime if it fell within one of the categories of registrable charge, the charged asset was located in England and the entity had, at the time of creation of the charge, an established place of business in England. A charge created between 1 October 2009 and 30 September 2011 was registrable if it fell within one of the categories of registrable charge, the charged asset was located in the United Kingdom and the entity was registered as an "overseas company" with the Registrar of Companies under the Companies Act 2006. A Foreign Entity, whether or not registered as an "overseas company" with the Registrar of Companies, is no longer required to register a charge created on or after 1 October 2011 with the Registrar of Companies. A full discussion of the various regimes applicable to Foreign Entities is outside the scope of this memorandum.

43

(b) the elimination of certain doubts that would otherwise apply where the parties have included a right of use in a Security Document (such as under Paragraph 6(c) of the 1994 NY Annex);

(c) the elimination of the effective prohibition on a Collateral Taker appropriating the Collateral as a means of realising its security following a default; and

(d) the disapplication of the statutory freeze on enforcement of security that arises in connection with administration proceedings in England.

In relation to a title transfer financial collateral arrangement, the FCA Regulations have less practical effect as English law prior to the coming into effect of the FCA Regulations already reflected the principles in the Collateral Directive to be applied by each EU member state to a title transfer financial collateral arrangement. However, regulation 12 provides that a close- out netting provision shall take effect in accordance with its terms notwithstanding that the collateral-provider or collateral-taker under the arrangement is subject to winding-up proceedings under the Insolvency Act 1986 or reorganisation measures (i.e. administration, a company voluntary arrangement (CVA) or an interim order on an administration application). This means (on the basis of the assumptions we have made) that the Transfer Annexes which rely for their effectiveness on the close-out netting provision of Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement would be protected by regulation 12. This is discussed further in our answer to question 25 below in Part VI.

The effect of the FCA Regulations on a collateral arrangement governed by each type of Credit Support Document is discussed in more detail below in Parts III, IV, V and VI of this memorandum.

In this memorandum we consider English law as it would apply to a collateral arrangement under a Credit Support Document, both in a case where the FCA Regulations apply and in a case where the FCA Regulations do not apply. We take this approach for the following reasons:

(a) the FCA Regulations are not retrospective in effect, and therefore in relation to a Credit Support Document entered into before 26 December 2003 certain issues (such as whether a Credit Support Document was registrable under the Registration Provisions and, if so, the effect of a failure to register it) may continue to be determined by the law that applied at the relevant time, without regard to the effect of the FCA Regulations; and

(b) with some foreseeable variants to the facts assumed in this memorandum (for example, where Collateral used falls outside the definition of "financial collateral" in the FCA Regulations or the collateral arrangement is structured so that the collateral- taker under a security financial collateral arrangement does not have "possession or ... control" of the Collateral in the sense required by the FCA Regulations), a collateral arrangement constituted by the Credit Support Documents could fall outside the FCA Regulations.

9. Legal basis of the FCA Regulations

In the case of R (Cukurova Finance International Limited) v HM Treasury,69 an attempt was made to challenge the legal basis and therefore validity of the FCA Regulations in the Administrative Court. In Cukurova, the claimant argued that the FCA Regulations were

69 [2008] EWHC 2567 (Admin).

44

invalid due to their implementation being ultra vires on the basis that the FCA Regulations exceed the scope of the Collateral Directive in certain respects.70

The FCA Regulations are subordinate legislation made by the executive branch of government under section 2(2) of the European Communities Act 1972. Section 2(2) allows a designated Minister or government department to make appropriate subordinate legislation for the purpose of implementing an EU directive or other EU obligation requiring implementation in English law.

The FCA Regulations are, in certain respects, wider in scope than the Collateral Directive, most notably in extending the benefits of the regime to financial collateral arrangements between two corporate entities, without the restriction in Article 1(2) of the Collateral Directive that at least one of the parties must fall within one of the other categories enumerated in that Article, namely, a public sector body, central bank, central counterparty or clearing house, or "financial institution subject to prudential supervision" (such as a bank or insurance company) and certain other similar bodies.

The other principal areas in which the FCA Regulations are arguably broader than the Collateral Directive are in relation to (1) the definition of "cash" (the inclusion of "sums due or payable to, or received between the parties in connection with the operation of a financial collateral arrangement or a close-out netting provision"), (2) the definition of "financial instruments" in relation to shares (the Collateral Directive appearing to require that shares, as well as bonds, included within this definition should be "negotiable on the capital market", while the FCA Regulations impose no such restriction on shares but require that bonds should be "tradeable on the capital market"71) and (3) the definition of "relevant financial obligations" (which is somewhat broader under the FCA Regulations than under the Collateral Directive).

The application in Cukurova was rejected on the ground that the application was out of time and that the claimant had failed to establish any of the grounds necessary for the grant of an extension of time. Having reviewed the grounds on which an extension of time could be granted, Moses LJ rejected the claimant's arguments in relation to each of them.

One of the grounds considered by Moses LJ was where a cause is so clearly meritorious that, notwithstanding the hardship of invalidating longstanding legislation, a serious injustice would be done if the application were not heard. This gave Moses LJ the opportunity to review the merits. He ultimately decided that he did not need to express a firm view on the merits, but he indicated why he thought that the claimant's arguments on the merits were doubtful, and therefore to his satisfaction demonstrated that their cause was not clearly meritorious, eliminating this final ground for granting an extension of time in order to hear their application for judicial review.72

However, we note in this context the comments made obiter in the Supreme Court in The United States of America v Nolan73 in relation to the "gold-plating" in the FCA Regulations and the Cukurova decision, which raise some doubt about the level of comfort that may be taken from the case. The Supreme Court was of the view that, in relation to the extension of

70 See also the case Oakley Inc. v Animal Limited [2005] EWCA Civ 1191, 20 October 2005, which considered similar issues outside the context of the financial markets. 71 The FCA Regulations use "tradeable" in preference to the word "negotiable" used in the English language version of the Collateral Directive given the narrow technical meaning of "negotiable" under English law, since clearly a broader concept was intended by the Collateral Directive. 72 For a fuller account of the case and discussion of its implications, see Geoffrey Yeowart, "Validity of the Financial Collateral Regulations" (2008) 2 LFMR 493. See also Yeowart and Parsons (n 61), ch 12. 73 [2015] UKSC 63.

45

the financial collateral regime to two non-natural persons, it is difficult to see how that could be regarded as having been for the purpose of implementing or enabling the implementation of the Collateral Directive and it was, on its face, a policy decision by HM Treasury. The Nolan case suggested therefore that the FCA Regulations go beyond the scope of the Collateral Directive and may be ultra vires in this regard. Although these comments were made obiter they raise the possibility of a future challenge to the validity of the FCA Regulations on this point.

If an English court were to take the view that the FCA Regulations are ultra vires to the extent that they exceed the scope of the Collateral Directive, we believe that the English court would sever the relevant provisions if and only to the extent that they exceed, in the opinion of the court, the scope of the Collateral Directive.

In this regard, we believe that the court would apply a "substantial severability" test rather than a "textual severability" as discussed by Lord Bridge in his judgment in DPP v Hutchinson.74 Textual severability means, in effect, that a provision is only severable if one could literally or metaphorically run a "blue pencil" through it and the remaining text would nonetheless be coherent and operate effectively without it. Substantial severability permits a court to read and enforce a statute as though rewritten to remove the offending elements, provided that in doing so "it is effecting no change in the substantial purpose and effect of the impugned provision".

Accordingly, we believe that, even if the court were to decide that certain aspects of the FCA Regulations were ultra vires for exceeding the scope of the Collateral Directive, the court could and would apply the substantial severability test, which would allow it to continue to give effect to all of the provisions of the FCA Regulations that, narrowly construed, fall within the scope of the Collateral Directive.75

As discussed above, on the basis of our assumptions in this memorandum, we are of the view that a financial collateral arrangement entered under a Credit Support Document in connection with an ISDA Master Agreement would fall entirely within a narrow construction of the FCA Regulations assuming that one of the parties was within the scope of the list set out at Article 1(2)(a) - (d) of the Collateral Directive.

In the event that the FCA Regulations were successfully challenged as described above, any arrangement falling outside the scope of the Collateral Directive would lose the protection of the regime, and so for example a security interest may be rendered void by section 859H of the Companies Act 2006 for want of registration in circumstances where the Registration Provisions have not been complied with in reliance on the FCA Regulations.

Partly, we believe, prompted by the concerns raised by the Cukurova case, the Banking Act included provisions empowering the Treasury by statutory instrument to, inter alia, (i) make regulations regarding financial collateral arrangements76 and (ii) provide for the FCA Regulations and anything done under or in reliance on the FCA Regulations to be treated as

74 [1990] 2 AC 783. 75 In Cukurova (n 69) the claimants altered their original case and argued that the FCA Regulations should be quashed only to the extent they extend the personal scope of the Collateral Directive (and not in their entirety, which would put the UK in breach of its EU obligations to implement the Collateral Directive). Moses LJ did not have to resolve this issue. See Yeowart and Parsons (n 61), para 2.29. 76 The regulations may make any provision necessary to implement the Collateral Directive but the Treasury is expressly not restricted to provision required in connection with the Directive and "may make any provision that the Treasury think necessary or desirable for the purpose of enabling financial collateral arrangements, whether or not with an international element, to be commercially useful and effective."

46

having had effect despite any lack of vires.77 These provisions were brought into force on 25 May 2016 and, if used, would provide a statutory basis in primary legislation independent of the constrictions of Article 2(2) of the European Communities Act 1972. No regulations have yet been issued under these provisions. We would expect this power to be to be exercised should a judicial review action concerning the vires of the FCA Regulations be successful.

77 The Banking Act, ss 255 and 256. Note that, under s 256, any regulations under s 255 shall lapse unless approved by resolution of each House of Parliament during the period of 28 days (ignoring periods of dissolution, prorogation or adjournment of either House for more than 4 days) beginning with the day on which the regulations are made. Such a lapse does not invalidate anything done under or in reliance on the regulations before the lapse and at a time when neither House has declined to approve the regulations and does not prevent the making of new regulations (in new terms).

47

III. SECURITY INTEREST – NON-IM SECURITY DOCUMENTS

1. Introduction

In this Part III we consider issues relating to the creation, perfection, and enforcement against an English Company of a security interest created in respect of Collateral delivered under each of the Non-IM Security Documents under fact patterns (a) and (b) as set out in Part I.4 of this memorandum.

Our conclusions in this respect in relation to an English Company apply in relation to:

(a) an English Bank, as modified and supplemented by Annex 1;

(b) an English Investment Firm, as modified and supplemented by Annex 2;

(c) an English Building Society, as modified and supplemented by Annex 3;

(d) a Banking Group Company or Bank Holding Company, as modified and supplemented by Annex 4;

(e) the Trustee of an English Trust (other than the Trustee of an English Charitable Trust, an English Pension Fund, an English Authorised Unit Trust or any English Trust excluded from the scope of this memorandum under Part I.2(b) above), as modified and supplemented by Annex 5;

(f) a Friendly Society, as modified and supplemented by Annex 6;

(g) a C/CB Society, as modified and supplemented by Annex 7;

(h) a Statutory Corporation, as modified and supplemented by Annex 8;

(i) a Chartered Corporation, as modified and supplemented by Annex 9;

(j) an English Insurance Company, as modified and supplemented by Annex 10;

(k) Standard Chartered Bank, as modified and supplemented by Annex 11;

(l) an English Charity acting through the Trustee of an English Charitable Trust, as modified and supplemented by Annex 12;

(m) an English Charity established in one of the other forms indicated above, as modified and supplemented by Annex 13;

(n) the Trustee of an English Pension Fund, as modified and supplemented by Annex 14;

(o) an English Investment Fund that is an Open-Ended Investment Company, as modified and supplemented by Annex 15;

(p) an English Investment Fund acting through the Trustee of an Authorised Unit Trust, as modified and supplemented by Annex 16; and

(q) an English Partnership, as modified and supplemented by Annex 17.

48

You have also asked us to consider such issues in respect of the Bank of England, which is a Central Bank and requires separate analysis given its unique nature. We do this in Annex 18.

This Part III does not apply in respect of the United Kingdom acting through Her Majesty's Treasury.

In this Part III we also consider issues relating to the creation, perfection and enforcement of a security interest created in respect of Collateral delivered under each of the Non-IM Security Documents by a Foreign Entity where the Collateral is located in England under fact pattern (c) as set out in Part I.4 of this memorandum.

2. Assumptions

For the purpose of this Part III, in addition to the assumptions set out at Part I.3, you have asked us to make the following assumptions:

(a) The Security Collateral Provider has entered into an ISDA Master Agreement and a Non-IM Security Document with a Secured Party. The parties have entered into either (i) an ISDA Master Agreement governed by New York law and a Non-IM NY Annex, or (ii) an ISDA Master Agreement governed by English law and a 1995 Deed.

(b) Although each Non-IM Security Document is a bilateral form in that it contemplates that either party may be required to post Collateral to the other depending on movements of exposure under the relevant Non-IM Security Document, we assume, for the sake of simplicity, that the same party is the Security Collateral Provider at all relevant times under the applicable Non-IM Security Document.

(c) We assume that each party is either an English Company or a Foreign Entity as defined above.

(d) If the ISDA Master Agreement is governed by New York law, the ISDA Master Agreement and related Non-IM NY Annex would, when duly entered into, constitute legal, valid and binding obligations of each party under New York law.

(e) No provision of the ISDA Master Agreement or relevant Non-IM Security Document has been altered in any material respect. The making of standard elections in Paragraph 13 of any Non-IM Security Document (consistently with the other assumptions in this memorandum) would not in our view constitute material alterations, except where expressly indicated in the discussion below.78

(f) Pursuant to the Non-IM Security Document, the counterparties agree that Eligible Collateral will include cash credited to an account (as opposed to physical notes and coins) and certain types of securities (as further described below) that are located or deemed located either (i) in England or (ii) outside England.79

(g) Any securities80 provided as Eligible Collateral are denominated in either sterling or any freely convertible currency and consist of (i) debt securities issued by (A) a

78 See also note 4. 79 The eligibility of collateral for the purposes of margin rules made under EMIR or similar rules applicable in jurisdictions outside of the EU is a separate matter and is not considered in this memorandum. We also do not consider Other Eligible Support or Other Eligible Support (VM) under the 1995 Deed or the Non-IM NY Annex or Other Eligible Support (IM) under the IM NY Annex in this memorandum. 80 We assume that any securities are freely transferable and not subject to restrictions. In particular, we do not consider in this memorandum any regulatory requirements that may arise in the context of transferring or taking security over equity securities or

49

corporate (regardless of whether or not the issuer is organised or located in England), (B) the government of the United Kingdom (commonly referred to as "UK Government Stock", "gilt-edged securities", or "gilts") or another jurisdiction and (C) multilateral development banks and international organisations and (ii) publically listed and traded corporate equity securities issued by a corporate (regardless of whether or not the issuer is organised or located in England), in each case, in one of the following forms:81

(1) directly held bearer securities: by this we mean securities issued in certificated form in bearer form (meaning that ownership is transferable by delivery of possession of the certificate) and, when held by a Secured Party as Collateral under a Non-IM Security Document, held directly in this form by the Secured Party (that is, not held by the Secured Party indirectly with an Intermediary (as defined below));

(2) directly held registered securities: by this we mean securities issued in registered form and, when held by a Secured Party as Collateral under a Non- IM Security Document, held directly in this form by the Secured Party so that the Secured Party is shown as the relevant holder in the register for such securities (that is, not held by the Secured Party indirectly with an Intermediary);

(3) directly held dematerialised securities: by this we mean securities issued in dematerialised form and, when held by a Secured Party as Collateral under a Non-IM Security Document, held directly in this form by the Secured Party so that the Secured Party is shown as the relevant holder in the electronic register for such securities (that is, not held by the Secured Party indirectly with an Intermediary); or

(4) intermediated securities:82 by this we mean a form of interest in securities recorded in fungible book-entry form in an account maintained by a financial intermediary (which could be a central securities depositary (CSD) or a custodian, nominee or other form of financial intermediary, in each case an Intermediary) in the name of the Secured Party where such interest has been credited to the account of the Secured Party in connection with a transfer of

corporate events that may restrict transferability of the relevant equity securities. We also assume that any transfer or stamp taxes are satisfied to the extent that non-payment would affect the validity of the transfer or the grant of the security interest. 81 Article 3(2) of Regulation (EU) No 909/2014 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 July 2014 on improving securities settlement in the European Union and on central securities depositories (the CSDRs) suggests that where "transferable securities" are transferred pursuant to a financial collateral arrangement (as defined in the Collateral Directive) those securities must be in book-entry form in a CSD on or before the intended settlement date. Under Recital 11 and Article 3(1), immobilisation and dematerialisation both qualify as methods for book-entry recording. The full implications of this provision are not clear but, in addition to the seemingly obvious application to title transfer financial collateral arrangements such as the Transfer Annexes, it is possible that this requirement in the CSDRs could also have implications in relation to a security financial collateral arrangement, such as the 1995 Deed or Non-IM NY Annex, where the nature of the security interest effects a "transfer" of the relevant securities. As a matter of English law this would be the case where a legal mortgage over those securities is taken and could, ostensibly, also include an equitable mortgage. The CSDRs appear less directly relevant to collateral arrangements of the type envisioned by the IM Security Documents – the grant of the security interest will not itself constitute a "transfer" (although of course the securities will need to be transferred into the Segregated Account as a pre-condition to becoming subject to the financial collateral arrangement). Article 3(2) refers to securities being transferred following a financial collateral arrangement but Recital 11 refers to the collateral being "provided" pursuant to a financial collateral arrangement which suggests that the requirement relates to a transfer at the time of creation rather than enforcement (see also Yeowart and Parsons (n 61), ch 16). As the CSDRs provide, at Article 8(3), that an infringement of Article 3(2) shall not affect the validity of the relevant contract, we do not consider the CSDRs further in this memorandum. However, ISDA members should be aware that failure to comply could result in liability for regulatory breach. 82 Intermediated securities are also referred to as "indirectly held" securities. The terms are interchangeable. In this memorandum for clarity we use only the term "intermediated".

50

Collateral by the Security Collateral Provider to the Secured Party under a Non-IM Security Document.

The Intermediary in such a holding pattern will either itself hold the underlying security directly (for example, in certificated bearer or registered form (which securities may be "immobilised"), or dematerialised form) or indirectly through a chain (composed of one or more tiers) of other financial intermediaries (sub-custodians).83 At the top of the multi-tiered holding structure,84 the underlying security would typically be held by a financial intermediary or other person in certificated bearer, registered, or dematerialised form in a direct relationship with the issuer of the security.

(h) Any cash Collateral provided under the Non-IM Security Document is denominated in a freely convertible currency and is held in an account under the control of the Secured Party.

(i) Pursuant to the ISDA Master Agreement, the Security Collateral Provider enters into a number of Transactions with the Secured Party. Such Transactions include only Transactions of a type falling within one or more of the types of transaction described in Appendix A.85 Under the terms of each Non-IM Security Document, the security interest created in the relevant Collateral secures the Obligations of the Collateral Provider arising under the ISDA Master Agreement as a whole.

(j) In the case of questions 12 to 15 below, that after entering into the Transactions and prior to the maturity thereof, the rights of the Collateral Taker under Paragraph 8 of the relevant Non-IM Security Document have become exercisable following the occurrence of any of the relevant pre-conditions specified in the Non-IM Security Document (which shall comprise solely of the events listed in Paragraph 8 or as an election in the pro-forma Paragraph 13) which are then continuing, but that an insolvency proceeding has not been instituted (which is addressed separately in assumption (k) and questions 16 to 18 below).

(k) In the case of questions 16 to 18 below, which apply in respect of an English Counterparty only, that an Event of Default under Section 5(a)(vii) of the ISDA Master Agreement with respect to the Security Collateral Provider has occurred and formal bankruptcy, insolvency, liquidation, reorganisation, administration or comparable proceedings (collectively, insolvency proceedings) have been instituted in respect of the Security Collateral Provider. In addition we assume that, upon the commencement of insolvency proceedings in respect of the Security Collateral Provider, the Secured Party seeks to enforce the financial collateral arrangement constituted by the relevant Non-IM Security Document in accordance with its terms and that no further Collateral will be delivered to the Secured Party. We make this assumption because any disposition of an insolvent party's property made after the commencement of the winding up is, unless the court orders otherwise, void: section 127 of the Insolvency Act 1986. The court has the discretion to validate a disposition

83 The method through which the Intermediary will itself hold the underlying security will depend on the particular security and jurisdictions involved. 84 It has become conventional in the international literature on indirectly held securities to apply a vertical metaphor to these holding patterns, so that "upper-tier" intermediaries are considered to be closer to the intermediary or other person in a direct relationship with the issuer of the relevant security while "lower-tier" intermediaries are closer to the financial intermediary with a direct relationship with the ultimate holder of the interest. We follow this convention in this memorandum. 85 Please note that the list of Transaction types set out in Appendix A is extensive. We do not advise as to whether all Transactions within the scope of Appendix A are capable of inclusion within the "netting set" for the purposes of the calculation of regulatory margin pursuant to the EMIR rules (or analogous rules in other jurisdictions outside of the EU).

51

if it was made honestly in the ordinary course of business and prior to the winding up order being made.

3. Questions relating to the Non-IM Security Documents

Validity of Security Interests: Creation and Perfection

1. Under the laws of your jurisdiction, what law governs the contractual aspects of a security interest in the various forms of Eligible Collateral deliverable under the Security Documents? Would the courts of your jurisdiction recognise the validity of a security interest created under each Security Document assuming it is valid under the governing law of such Security Document?

Under English law, the law governing the contractual aspects of a security interest in the various forms of Eligible Collateral identified above is the governing law of the relevant Non- IM Security Document. By "contractual" in this context we mean the personal rights and obligations of the Collateral Provider and Collateral Taker.

Assuming that the choice of law in the relevant Non-IM Security Document is a valid and proper choice of law, the English courts would recognise the validity of the contractual aspects of a security interest created under a Non-IM Security Document if that security interest was valid under the governing law of the Non-IM Security Document.

See our answer to question 19 below in respect of whether the choice of law would be respected by the English courts.

2. Under the laws of your jurisdiction, what law governs the proprietary aspects of a security interest (that is, the formalities required to protect a security interest in Collateral against competing claims) granted by the Security Collateral Provider under each Security Document (for example, the law of the jurisdiction of incorporation or organisation of the Security Collateral Provider, the jurisdiction where the Collateral is located, or the jurisdiction of location of the Secured Party's Intermediary in relation to Collateral in the form of indirectly held securities)? What factors would be relevant to this question? Where the location (or deemed location) of the Collateral is the determining factor, please briefly describe the principles governing such determination under the law of your jurisdiction with respect to the different types of Collateral. In particular, please describe how the laws of your jurisdiction apply to each form in which securities Collateral may be held as described in the relevant assumptions) above.

Under English rules of private international law, the law applicable to the proprietary aspects of a transfer (including transfer by way of security) of a tangible asset is the law of the place where the tangible asset is located (the lex situs).86 This is a longstanding rule, no doubt founded on the simple policy that the courts of the place where a species of property is located, whether it is real or personal property, is best placed to determine its legal nature and the rights and obligations of persons dealing with it. Each type of Collateral with which we are concerned is, however, an intangible asset in the form of a claim.87

Strictly speaking, a claim has no location, and therefore it is necessary to consider the nature of the claim in order to determine which law applies to the proprietary aspects of a transfer of that claim. This has led to some uncertainty and academic debate in relation to the

86 Lawyers from the civil code tradition prefer the term "lex rei sitae", which is why the term appears in the heading of certain articles in EU Directives dealing with these matters, as discussed in more detail below. 87 A directly held bearer debt security has a tangible manifestation, although it represents an intangible claim.

52

appropriate analysis for certain types of claim, for example, the claim represented by an indirectly held debt security.

There are two main approaches to determining the law that governs the proprietary effect of transactions involving intangible assets: (a) the law of the place where the intangible asset is located at the time of the transaction (the lex situs)88; or (b) the law which governs the intangible asset (i.e. the law that governs the contract that created the intangible asset).89 The applicable approach will be dictated by the type of Collateral in question and broadly there is a distinction to be drawn between cash and securities. Accordingly, we consider cash and securities Collateral separately in the analysis that follows.

Cash

Dicey's Rule 135 currently provides (1) as a general rule the mutual obligations of an assignor and assignee are governed by the law of the contract between them and the law governing the right to which the assignment relates determines its assignability, the relationship between the assignee and the debtor, the conditions under which the assignment can be invoked against the debtor and any question as to whether a debtor's obligations have been discharged and (2) in other cases the validity and effect of an assignment of an intangible may be governed by the law with which the right assigned has its most significant connection.90

Article 14(2) of Regulation 593/2008 of 17 June 2008 on the law applicable to contractual obligations (Rome I) reflects the position stated by the first limb of Dicey's Rule 135. Article 14 of Rome I relates to the voluntary assignment of a "claim" and provides rules for determining the law applicable to certain aspects of the assignment. Article 14(3) clarifies that Article 14 applies to "transactions of claims by way of security and pledges and to other security rights over claims" and the Court of Appeal in the leading case of Raiffeisen Zentralbank Österreich v Five Star Trading91 (which was decided in relation to the equivalent provision of the Rome Convention) confirmed that Article 14(2) provides that the rights of an assignee are determined by the law governing that asset and not by its lex situs.92

On its face Article 14(2) "governs the question of the transfer or creation of proprietary rights in most types of intangible."93 However, some commentators have argued that the Rome Convention and Rome I do not purport to govern the transfer of property rights and therefore (in respect of the Rome Convention) "it was erroneous to assume that article 12 of the Convention governed all aspects of the assignment."94 Article 12 was the analogous provision in the Rome Convention to Article 14 of Rome I. It has even been suggested that "it appears that the current position under English law is that the question of the proprietary effect of a voluntary assignment lies outside the Rome I Regulation."95 Indeed the Giuliano-Lagarde

88 As intangible assets by definition do not have a natural lex situs, this involves deeming lex situs for this purpose. We discuss below how, in our view, lex situs would be determined in the context of the relevant intangibles. Broadly speaking, however, there are two approaches insofar as securities are concerned. The first and more traditional approach is to attempt to identify a physical manifestation of the intangible claim, such as a certificate representing the claim or a physical register in which the interest is recorded, and then to ascribe a fictional "location" to the claim by reference to the physical manifestation. The lex situs is then identified as the law of the place of the location of the physical manifestation. The more modern approach, taken in relation to dematerialised and intermediated securities, seeks to consider the nature of the claim in its commercial context and to identify the rule that best meets the commercial expectations of the parties to a transaction dealing with that claim and protects third parties with a legitimate interest in the claim. 89 For a fuller discussion of the issues see Beale and others (n 54), ch 22, and Richard Calnan, Taking Security, (4th edn, Jordans, Bristol 2018), ch 14. See also Yeowart and Parsons (n 61), ch 13. 90 Lawrence Collins and Jonathan Harris (eds), Dicey, Morris and Collins on the Conflict of Laws (15th edn, 2012), ch 24. 91 [2001] EWCA Civ 68. 92 Calnan (n 89), para 14.162. 93 ibid, para 13.152. 94 Dr Ying Khai Liew, Guest on the Law of Assignment (3rd edn, Sweet and Maxwell, 2018), para 10-07. 95 Yeowart and Parsons (n 61), para 13.49.

53

Report96 commented generally that the Rome Convention does not cover property rights and the Court of Appeal in Raiffeisen, in resolving that Article 12(2) of the Rome Convention did apply, characterised the issue of the bank lender's rights against the insurers under an assignment of the benefit of an insurance policy as contractual ("but this was to some extent prompted by the way in which the parties put their cases"97).

Certainly Article 14(2) does not make any specific mention of the effectiveness of the assignment against third parties or matters of priority.98 The Commission's final proposal for what became Rome I did include a provision to deal with the effectiveness of a voluntary assignment against third parties (applying the law of the assignor's habitual residence to this issue) but it proved controversial and was removed. It should also be noted that, while Article 14(3) makes it clear that the relevant assignment need not be absolute but can be by way of security, such as a mortgage, it is doubtful whether a mere charge, which does not purport to effect a transfer of the claim from the chargor to the chargee but which merely grants the chargee the right on default to have the claim, in whole or in part, appropriated to the satisfaction of the obligation owed to him would be caught by the scope of Article 14.99

However, as Article 14(2) "is dealing not with the relationship between the assignor and the assignee but with their relationship with a third party (the debtor), it necessarily has a proprietary effect"100 or at least Article 14(2) (like Article 12(2) of the Rome Convention) straddles awkwardly the boundary between contract and property101. The Raiffeisen case does suggest that conflict of laws principles peculiar to property are not to be employed to displace the law governing the assigned claim applicable to the matters referred to in Article 14(2).102

We believe the law of the assigned claim represents the best option for the applicable proprietary law in relation to a transaction in respect of a chose in action as it provides a rule that is both consistent over time and corresponds to the law governing the effectiveness of an assigned claim against the relevant debtor (pursuant to Rome I). One of the key arguments for this approach is that the lex situs of an intangible is generally the country in which it is properly recoverable or can be enforced but this is often uncertain and may result in an artificial determination of lex situs.

Where Article 14 does not apply, whether as a matter of English conflict of laws rules the proprietary effect of the transfer of a claim would fall to be determined by the law of the assigned claim or by its lex situs, appears to be somewhat ambiguous. As discussed, in our view, the former is preferable. The lex situs would ordinarily be the residence of the debtor.103

Were the law of the relevant claim to apply then, in respect of the 1995 Deed, assuming that the security interest in the cash is characterised as a chargeback of the debt owed by the Secured Party (being the contingent obligation to transfer a Return Amount), then the relevant law would be English law (being the governing law of the 1995 Deed which governs the debt). In respect of the Non-IM NY Annex, the precise nature of the security interest over the underlying asset is a question of New York law. On the basis of the above discussion, from

96 Report on the Rome Convention by Professors M. Giuliano and P. Lagarde [1980] OJ C282/1, 10. See further our answer to question 19 in Part IV. 97 Calnan (n 89), para 14.160. 98 Article 27(2) of Rome I required the Commission to prepare a report on these issues. 99 Khai Liew (n 94), para 10-04. 100 Calnan (n 89), para 14.155. 101 Beale and others (n 54), para 22.25. 102 Khai Liew (n 94), para 10-07. 103 Yeowart and Parsons (n 61), para 13.49.

54

an English law perspective, the relevant law that governs the proprietary aspects of the security interest under the Non-IM NY Annex will be the law that governs the creation of the underlying interest of the Security Collateral Provider in the cash which is secured in favour of the Secured Party.

In Part XI of this memorandum, we highlight the Commission consultation on conflict of laws rules for third party effects of transactions in securities and claims104 in the context of pending developments and it is worth mentioning here that the Commission consultation document acknowledges the gap in the coverage of uniform conflict of laws rules at the EU level for the assignment of claims, as described above, and presents three possible harmonisation solutions, being: (1) the law of the contract between assignor and assignee, (2) the law of the assignor's habitual residence, and (3) the law governing the assigned claim. The perceived advantages and disadvantages of each approach are discussed in the September 2016 report from the Commission105 under Article 27(2) of Rome I. We note that the ISDA response to the consultation advocates for the law of the assigned claim arguing, inter alia, that a rule based on the assignor's habitual residence would mean that a different law would apply to successive assignments of the same claim where the habitual residence of the successive assignor is different to the original assignor, which would lead in turn to a potential conflict as to the law that applies to govern the rights of a third party in relation to the assigned claim.

Securities

An alternative approach is taken in respect of securities; it appears safe to conclude that Article 14 of Rome I extends to debts and rights under contracts but not further.106 Dicey also accepts that a different analysis may be called for in respect of securities, particularly immobilised and dematerialised securities.107 Title to a bearer bond, for example, passes by physical delivery of the certificate unlike other intangibles and a bearer bond may be a negotiable instrument. Article 1(2)(d) of Rome I excludes from its scope "negotiable instruments to the extent the obligations under such … negotiable instruments arise out of their negotiable character". Macmillan v Bishopsgate Investment Trust108 suggests that the proprietary effect of a transfer of shares is governed by the lex situs, however, the Court of Appeal was not in complete agreement as to how to determine lex situs for these purposes. Broadly two options were contemplated: (i) the place of incorporation of the company relating to the shares in question, or (ii) the place where the register is kept.

It has been suggested that, in the context of securities, general conflict of law principles look to the place of the root of title (i.e. the best evidence of title).109 This, in our view, is akin to the lex situs approach. If this approach is applied we believe the relevant law would be in respect of (i) a directly held dematerialized debt security, the law of the jurisdiction establishing the statutory regime under which such dematerialized debt securities are issued or, if different, the law of such other jurisdiction as is specified in that statutory regime to govern the proprietary aspects of transfers of such securities;110 (ii) a directly held bearer debt

104 See further at Part XI where we discuss the Commission's proposed regulation and its bifurcated approach to the issue. 105 Commission, "Report from the Commission to the European Parliament, the Council and the European Economic and Social Committee on the question of the effectiveness of an assignment or subrogation of a claim against third parties and the priority of the assigned or subrogated claim over the right of another person" COM(2016) 626 final. 106 Yeowart and Parsons (n 61), para 13.39. 107 Dicey (n 90), para 24-071. 108 [1996] 1 WLR 387. 109 See discussion in Louise Gullifer (ed), Goode and Gullifer on Legal Problems of Credit and Security, (6th edn, Sweet & Maxwell 2017), para 6-20. 110 In England the issuance, holding and transfer of dematerialised securities are governed by the Uncertificated Securities Regulations 2001 (SI 2001/3755). See Yeowart and Parsons (n 61), para 13.58.

55

security is the place the certificate is located in;111 and (iii) a directly held registered debt security is the place in which the register is located.112

In the case of intermediated securities, as discussed, there will frequently be a chain (or tiers) of intermediaries holding the "same" security or, more accurately, recording an interest in the security on their records in favour of the next intermediary down the chain down to the ultimate holder. The general rule in such circumstances is to look to the place of the account, register or other recording in book-entry form of the most immediate intermediary regardless of where other links in the chain may be located (e.g. the immediate intermediary's own custodian, the custodian's custodian and so on). This rule is sometimes referred to as the "place of the relevant intermediary approach" or "PRIMA". This approach also accords with the general principle of looking to the place of the root of title as the root of title is the securities account with the intermediary. PRIMA finds support in Dicey and is internationally the most widely supported view of the proper conflict of laws rule for intermediated securities.

The PRIMA approach applies under English law in various contexts by virtue of the implementation of certain EU instruments, such as, the Settlement Finality Directive,113 the Winding Up Directive114 and the Collateral Directive115 (although the rules that apply to the proprietary effect of a transfer of intermediated securities are formulated differently under these instruments as each was drafted at a different time and for a different purpose).116 The implementation of the latter Directive is particularly significant in the context of this memorandum. In the case of financial collateral arrangements under the FCA Regulations, regulation 19 of the FCA Regulations provides that, where book-entry securities are used as collateral and are held through one or more intermediaries, any question relating to the matters specified in paragraph (4) of the regulation shall be governed by the domestic law of the country in which the relevant account is maintained. The matters referred to in paragraph (4) include "the legal nature and proprietary effects of book entry securities collateral" as well as the requirements for perfection and the rules of priority. Accordingly, if, as discussed at Part II above, the relevant Non-IM Security Document is a financial collateral arrangement for the purposes of the FCA Regulations, it is clear that PRIMA is the relevant approach to be taken in respect of Collateral in the form of intermediated securities to ascertain the law governing the proprietary aspects of the security interest.

The Recast Insolvency Regulation also contains its own rules for determining the member state in which assets are situated for certain purposes of the Regulation discussed in our

111 Attorney-General v Bouwens (1838) 4 M&W 171, 150 ER 1390. 112 Attorney-General v Higgins (1857) 2 H&N 339, 157 ER 140. 113 Directive 98/26/EC on settlement finality in payment and securities settlement systems, Article 9(2). The Financial Markets and Insolvency (Settlement Finality) Regulations 1999 (SI 1999/2979) (the Settlement Finality Regulations) implemented the Settlement Finality Directive. See regulation 23 of the Settlement Finality Regulations in respect of the PRIMA approach. Note that the definition of "collateral security" in regulation 2 makes it clear that the scope of regulation 23 is limited to collateral arrangements arising "in connection with participation in a designated system" or, when given to a central bank "in connection with its operations . . . as a central bank". Accordingly, the United Kingdom has implemented the Settlement Finality Directive on a narrow basis, in contrast to the position in many other member states of the European Union. 114 Directive 2001/24/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 4 April 2001 on the reorganisation and winding up of credit institutions, see Article 24. The Credit Institutions (Reorganisation and Winding Up) Regulations 2004 (SI 2004/1045) implemented the Winding Up Directive in England. See regulation 33 in respect of the PRIMA approach in this context. 115 Collateral Directive, Article 9. 116 In this context see also the Communication from the Commission to the European Parliament, the Council, the European Economic and Social Committee and the Committee of the Regions on the applicable law to the proprietary effects of transactions in securities of 12 March 2018 (COM(2018) 89 final). The Communication is intended to clarify the Commission's views on "important aspects of the existing EU acquis with regard to the law applicable to the proprietary effects of transactions in securities". The Communication explains that the Commission is of the view that differences in the formulation of the conflicts of laws rules in the Settlement Finality Directive, the Winding Up Directive and the Collateral Directive do not imply a difference in substance.

56

answer to question 20 of this Part III. In relation to intermediated securities, the approach of the Recast Insolvency Regulation also reflects PRIMA.117

Outside these contexts, there is no statutory basis for PRIMA in English law and relatively little relevant case law, however, we believe that if an English court were called upon to determine the correct rule to apply to the proprietary aspects of security over intermediated securities outside these contexts, it is likely to conclude that PRIMA is the correct general approach as it is supported by logic, common sense and commercial practicality, as well as a growing body of authoritative commentary.118

However, note that PRIMA has attracted criticism on the grounds that the "location" of an account is an inadequate conceptual basis for a conflict of laws rule for the simple reason that an account is itself intangible and does not have a physical location and therefore PRIMA does not provide ex ante certainty. An account has a number of physical associations which may be located in different jurisdictions and which physical association should prevail is not necessarily clear.119 Some physical associations are clearly less suitable than others as a "connecting factor", for example, the location of the relevant branch would seem to have weight in the argument for privileged physical association but it may not be unambiguously identified in all instances. It is also argued that the assumed "location" of an account will become increasingly uncertain over time as account relationships become more and more virtual in nature.

The Hague Securities Convention,120 currently adhered to by the US, Switzerland and Mauritius (but importantly not the EU or any member state thereof) posits a modified approach to applicable law designed to provide the requisite ex ante certainty ostensibly lacking in PRIMA. Article 4 of the Convention states that the applicable law will be the law of the account agreement governing the account to which the securities are credited or, if the parties have agreed another law to govern the issues specified at Article 2(1), that other law. However, this is tempered by Article 4(1) which sets out a "qualifying office" test which restricts choice of law to the location where the intermediary maintains an office meeting certain conditions set out in Articles 4(1) and 4(2). Article 5 sets out fall-backs in situations where Article 4 does not yield a clear applicable law.

Note that the rules outlined above are general guidelines. The determination in any specific case will depend on the relevant facts.

It is also important to bear in mind that, in addition to any perfection requirements in the relevant jurisdiction in respect of the asset, the Registration Provisions will also apply in respect of an English Company in circumstances where, for whatever reason, the FCA

117 Article 2(9)(ii). Note, however, that for the purposes of the Recast Insolvency Regulation cash held in an account with a credit institution is situated in "the Member State indicated in the account's IBAN, or, for cash held in accounts with a credit institution which does not have an IBAN, the Member State in which the credit institution holding the account has its central administration or, where the account is held with a branch, agency or other establishment, the Member State in which the branch, agency or other establishment is located" (Article 2(9)(iii)). Also, in respect of registered shares in companies that are not book-entry securities, it is "the Member State within the territory of which the company having issued the shares has its registered office" (Article 2(9)(i)). 118 See, for example, the discussion in Dicey (n 90), at para 24-072. See also the proceedings of the Oxford Colloquium on Collateral and Conflict of Laws, held at St John's College, Oxford University in May 1998, published as a special supplement to Butterworths Journal of International Banking and Financial Law, September 1998. See also Goode and Gullifer (n 109). 119 For example, (i) where the account is administered by employees of the financial intermediary, (ii) where the account entries are recorded i.e. physically entered into a recording system by employees of the intermediary, (iii) where systems infrastructure such as servers are located, (iv) where customer queries related to the account may be dealt with by the customer in person, (v) where the customer call centre is located, (vi) where the branch of the financial intermediary with which the customer ordinarily deals is located, (vii) where the financial intermediary is incorporated, (viii) where the financial intermediary is centrally administered and/or has its principal place of business and (ix) where the financial intermediary is principally subject to prudential supervision and/or regulated for conduct of business purposes. 120 Convention of 5 July 2006 on the Law Applicable to Certain Rights in Respect of Securities held with an Intermediary.

57

Regulations do not apply to the Non-IM Security Documents. The Registration Provisions are described in the answer to question 5 below.

3. Would the courts of your jurisdiction recognise a security interest in each type of Eligible Collateral created under each Security Document? In answering this question, please bear in mind the different forms in which securities Collateral may be held, as described in the relevant assumptions above. Please indicate, in relation to cash Collateral, if your answer depends on the location of the account in which the relevant deposit obligations are recorded and/or upon the currency of those obligations.

In our opinion the English courts would recognise a security interest in each type of Eligible Collateral created under each Non-IM Security Document, provided the security interest was valid under the governing law of the Non-IM Security Document (if not English law) and provided also that any applicable requirements, including as to perfection, under the relevant proprietary law in relation to the Eligible Collateral (determined in accordance with the rules of English private international law, as to which see the answer to question 2 above) have been complied with. In respect of the right of use, see question 10 below.

In respect of securities, the 1995 Deed refers to the securities being mortgaged, charged and pledged. It is unlikely as a technical matter that intangible securities would be subject to a pledge as pledges require possession which is problematic in relation to intangible assets. However, it is clear that a security interest has been created and the precise terminology used is of less importance as the court is able to determine that the clear purpose of the parties is to create a security interest.121 We assume for these purposes that the Secured Party complies with its obligations under Paragraph 6(c) of the 1995 Deed in respect of the segregation of non-cash Posted Collateral.

Under the 1995 Deed, in the case of cash collateral, there is a transfer of title (there is no obligation to segregate the cash collateral from the Secured Party's own funds) and a chargeback to the Secured Party of the debt owed by it to the Security Collateral Provider in respect of the cash. Historically, following the decision in Re Charge Card Services Limited122, there was doubt about the ability of a bank to take a charge over its own indebtedness but this was, in effect, overruled by the decision of the House of Lords in Morris v Agrichemicals Limited.123 Accordingly, there is no longer any significant doubt under English law that a security interest may be taken over cash deposited with the Secured Party to secure a debt owed to the Secured Party.

The location of, and governing law of, the account in which the relevant deposit obligations are recorded is not directly relevant to the question of recognition. The currency of those obligations is not relevant to the question of recognition.

4. What is the effect, if any, under the laws of your jurisdiction of the fact that the amount secured or the amount of Eligible Collateral subject to the security interest will fluctuate under the ISDA Master Agreement and the relevant Security Document (including as a result of entering into additional Transactions under the ISDA Master Agreement from time to time)? In particular:

(a) would the security interest be valid in relation to future obligations of the Security Collateral Provider?

121 For example, see Re Lehman (n 46), paras 39 to 48, where the security interest in that case was characterised as a charge. 122 [1986] 3 All ER 289. 123 [1997] 4 All ER 568, sub nom. Re Bank of Credit & Commerce International SA (No 8) [1998] AC 214. The statement by the House of Lords overruling Charge Card is, strictly speaking, obiter dictum. For various reasons, we believe that it may be relied upon as a statement of the current law on the effectiveness of a charge-back.

58

(b) would the security interest be valid in relation to future Collateral (that is, Eligible Collateral not yet delivered to the Secured Party at the time of entry into the relevant Security Document)?

(c) is there any difficulty with the concept of creating a security interest over a fluctuating pool of assets, for example, by reason of the impossibility of identifying in the Security Documents the specific assets transferred by way of security?

(d) is it necessary under the laws of England for the amount secured by each Security Document to be a fixed amount or subject to a fixed maximum amount?

(e) is it permissible under the laws of England for the Secured Party to hold Collateral in excess of its actual exposure to the Security Collateral Provider under the related ISDA Master Agreement?

As a matter of English law there are no adverse consequences arising from the fact that the amount secured or the amount of Eligible Collateral subject to the security interest will fluctuate under the ISDA Master Agreement and the relevant Non-IM Security Document, provided it does so in accordance with the terms agreed between the parties.

Subject to the foregoing, in answer to the specific questions on this point:

(a) Yes, the security interest would be valid in relation to future obligations of the Security Collateral Provider, provided that the future obligations are able to be identified with certainty as and when they arise, by reference to the terms of the Non- IM Security Document (which will include future obligations arising under Section 6 of the ISDA Master Agreement). Of course, until future obligations of the Security Collateral Provider become present obligations of the Security Collateral Provider, the Secured Party is not able to enforce its Collateral and apply the results of such enforcement to discharge those obligations. It is possible, however, for the Security Collateral Provider and the Secured Party to agree that obligations arising in the future will be secured by Collateral given presently (or in the future, but regarding this see our response at (b) below) without any further action by either party. In other words, future obligations become secured obligations as and when they become present obligations without any further act by the parties, provided that they are obligations of a sort clearly contemplated by the terms of the relevant Non-IM Security Document. Any obligations arising under an ISDA Master Agreement (including under any Transaction) would clearly be contemplated by the terms of either of the Non-IM Security Documents, on the assumptions we have made.

(b) Yes, the security interest would be valid in relation to future Collateral (that is, Eligible Collateral not yet delivered to the Secured Party at the time of entry into the relevant Non-IM Security Document), provided that the future Collateral is able to be ascertained as and when it is provided as Collateral. Of course, until the relevant Collateral has been provided under the terms of the relevant Non-IM Security Document, no present security interest has been created in any specific assets. By saying that a "security interest is valid in relation to future Collateral", we simply mean that a security interest arises in Collateral delivered after the date of execution of the relevant Non-IM Security Document as and when the Collateral is delivered without any further action by either party, other than, of course, the provision of the Collateral and satisfaction of any perfection requirements in the locations discussed in our answer to question 2. No new grant of security, however, is necessary. The original Non-IM Security Document is sufficient in this respect for both Collateral

59

provided (if any) at the time of execution of the Non-IM Security Document and any Collateral provided in the future.

(c) No, there is not any difficulty with the concept of creating a security interest over a fluctuating pool of assets, provided that the pool of assets over which the security interest is to be created is identified with sufficient clarity so that the Collateral may be identified with sufficient certainty at any given time.

(d) No it is not necessary under the laws of England for the amount secured by each Non- IM Security Document to be a fixed amount or subject to a fixed maximum amount.

(e) Yes is it permissible under the laws of England for the Secured Party to hold Collateral in excess of its actual exposure to the Security Collateral Provider under the related ISDA Master Agreement, provided that it has been agreed by the parties that such excess Collateral may be held.

5. Assuming the courts of your jurisdiction would recognise the security interest in each type of Eligible Collateral created under each Security Document, is any action (filing, registration, notification, stamping, notarization or any other action or the obtaining of any governmental, judicial, regulatory or other order, consent or approval) required in your jurisdiction to perfect that security interest? If so, please indicate what actions must be taken and how such actions may differ depending upon the type of Eligible Collateral in question?

To perfect a security interest is to take the necessary steps to ensure the validity of the security interest as against third parties, such as a liquidator, administrator, creditor, or competing claimant to specific assets delivered to the Secured Party.

The steps necessary to perfect a security interest depend upon a number of factors, including the type of security interest created (mortgage, charge, pledge, contractual lien), the nature and/or location of the assets in which the security interest is created, and the nature and/or location of the grantor of the security interest.

On the assumptions we have been asked to make for the purposes of this memorandum, the only perfection requirement that may be relevant in some cases to a Non-IM Security Document is the requirement under the Registration Provisions to register charges created by an English Company (in addition to any perfection requirements in the relevant proprietary jurisdiction in respect of the asset).

One of the principal effects of the FCA Regulations is to disapply the Registration Provisions in relation to security financial collateral arrangements. We have discussed the FCA Regulations at Part II above and any Non-IM Security Document that constitutes or forms part of a security financial collateral arrangement will not require registration, even if otherwise registrable in accordance with the principles discussed below.124

Where, however, a Non-IM Security Document falls outside the FCA Regulations and an English Company is a party to the Non-IM Security Document, it is important to register. Failure to register a registrable charge within the prescribed period will result in (a) the Non- IM Security Document becoming void (as far as any security is created by it) against a liquidator, administrator or creditor of the Security Collateral Provider and (b) any obligations secured by the Non-IM Security Document becoming immediately payable.125

124 FCA Regulations, reg 4. 125 Companies Act 2006, s 859H. It is not clear, however, how the acceleration would apply in practice to the contingent obligations of the Security Collateral Provider under the related ISDA Master Agreement.

60

(1) Registration Provisions

We discuss below the Registration Provisions that apply to charges created by English Companies on or after 6 April 2013. Non-IM Security Documents executed prior to 6 April 2013 would have had to comply with the provisions applicable at the date of execution of the Non-IM Security Document.

Since 6 April 2013, any charge created by an English Company (but not a Foreign Entity) is registrable under the Registration Provisions (subject to limited exceptions of which the most important is a financial collateral arrangement as discussed above).126 The term "charge" for these purposes includes mortgages,127 including security interests governed by a foreign law that would be characterised for English law purposes as a mortgage or charge. In our view, the security interest created by the Non-IM NY Annex would be characterised by an English court as a mortgage or charge of Eligible Collateral delivered by the Security Collateral Provider to the Secured Party, and therefore the Registration Provisions apply to the Non-IM NY Annex in the same manner, and subject to the same conditions, as they apply to the 1995 Deed.

The basic requirement of the Registration Provisions in respect of English Companies is that the statement of particulars and a certified copy of the charging instrument must be delivered to the Registrar of Companies within 21 days of creation.128

The Registrar of Companies is a government official in the United Kingdom with various statutory responsibilities relating to English Companies.129 The particulars of the charge are to be set out on Form MR01, which is published by the Registrar of Companies.

The consequences of failure to present a registrable charge to the Registrar of Companies for registration within 21 days after the creation of the charge are that:

(i) the charge is void against a liquidator or administrator of the company creating the charge and against any creditor of the company; and

(ii) the liabilities secured by the charge become immediately payable (although how this latter consequence would apply to the ISDA Master Agreement is not clear).

A certificate of registration issued by the Registrar of Companies constitutes conclusive evidence that the requirements of the relevant part of the Companies Act as to registration have been satisfied. This means that the registration cannot be challenged, even if it subsequently appears that there was an error in the completion of Form MR01 setting out the particulars of the charge or even where the registration was, in fact, made out of time.130

Registration does not per se establish the priority of a security interest. In certain circumstances, however, a registration or failure to register can affect the priority of a

126 Companies Act 2006, s 859A. In respect of Foreign Entities, see note 68 above. 127 ibid, s 859A(7). 128 Companies Act 2006, ss 859A to 859H. 129 The Registrar of Companies maintains various offices throughout the United Kingdom. These offices are collectively (and severally) referred to as "Companies House". Hence, informally, one often speaks of registering a charge at Companies House. 130 Re CL Nye Ltd [1971] Ch 442, CA. In practice, of course, the Registrar will reject an application to register made out of time, so this route cannot be counted on as a way of "curing" a failure to register in time. See further discussion of this point below.

61

registrable charge where a priority question turns on the question of notice. Historically valid registration was not thought to serve as constructive notice of the detailed provisions of a security document.131 However, following reforms, the statement of particulars includes whether the charge contains a negative pledge and a copy of the charge is also available. It may therefore follow that at least some of the details of the charge are potentially within scope of constructive knowledge.

If a charge is not registered within the relevant 21-day period or if the details provided on Form MR01 are wrong or incomplete, registration may only be effected or the details rectified by obtaining a court order. The court will only issue such an order if it is satisfied that the failure to register in time was "accidental, or due to inadvertence or some other sufficient cause, or is not of a nature to prejudice the position of creditors or shareholders of the company, or that on other grounds it is just and equitable to grant relief".132 In practice, the court is normally reluctant to issue such an order.

Once a charge has been registered under the Registration Provisions, no further registration or renewal of the registration is needed while the charge remains in effect.

(2) Registrability of the Non-IM Security Documents

In light of the foregoing discussion, any Non-IM Security Document that is not a security financial collateral arrangement for the purposes of the FCA Regulations would be registrable in respect of an English Company.

6. If there are any other requirements to ensure the validity or perfection of a security interest in each type of Eligible Collateral created by the Security Collateral Provider under each Security Document, please indicate the nature of such requirements. For example, is it necessary as a matter of formal validity that the Security Document be expressly governed by the law of your jurisdiction or translated into any other language or for the Security Document to include any specific wording? Are there any other documentary formalities that must be observed in order for a security interest created under each Security Document to be recognized as valid and perfected in your jurisdiction?

There are no particular additional requirements or formalities to ensure the validity or perfection of a security interest in relation to each type of Eligible Collateral that may be delivered under a Non-IM Security Document. It is not necessary as a matter of formal validity that a Non-IM Security Document be expressed to be governed by English law. As the Non-IM Security Documents are drafted in the English language, the question of translation does not arise. No specific form of words is necessary to create a security interest under English law as long as the intention to create a security interest is clear from the terms of the document and other relevant circumstances. The Non-IM Security Documents are sufficiently clear in this regard (we assume, for these purposes, that such intention is clear as a matter of New York law in respect of the Non-IM NY Annex).

7. Assuming that the Secured Party has obtained a valid and perfected security interest in the Eligible Collateral under the laws of your jurisdiction, to the extent such laws apply, by complying with the requirements set out in the responses to questions 1 to 6 above, will the Secured Party or the Security Collateral Provider need to take any action thereafter to ensure that the security interest in the Eligible Collateral continues and/or remains perfected, particularly with respect to additional Collateral transferred by way of security from time to

131 Wilson v Kelland [1910] 2 Ch 306. 132 Companies Act 2006, s 859F.

62

time whenever the Credit Support Amount (or the amount of Collateral required to be delivered under the relevant Security Document, as applicable) exceeds the Value of the Collateral held by the Secured Party?

No additional actions of this kind will be required.

8. Assuming that (a) pursuant to the laws of your jurisdiction, the laws of another jurisdiction govern the creation and/or perfection of a security interest in the Eligible Collateral transferred by way of security pursuant to each Security Document and (b) the Secured Party has obtained a valid and perfected security interest in the Eligible Collateral under the laws of such other jurisdiction, will the Secured Party have a valid security interest in the Collateral so far as the laws of your jurisdiction are concerned? Is any action (filing, registration, notification, stamping or notarization or any other action or the obtaining of any governmental, judicial, regulatory or other order, consent or approval) required under the laws of your jurisdiction to establish, perfect, continue or enforce this security interest? Are there any other requirements of the type referred to in question 6 above?

As discussed in the answer to question 5 above, unless disapplied by the FCA Regulations, the Registration Provisions apply to English Companies, irrespective of where the Eligible Collateral is located or the governing law of the relevant Non-IM Security Document.133 There are no other requirements of the type referred to in question 6.

9. Are there any particular duties, obligations, or limitations imposed on the Secured Party in relation to the care of the Eligible Collateral held by it pursuant to each Security Document?

Under English law the Secured Party is under an obligation established by case law to take reasonable steps to ensure the safe custody of any charged property in its possession. Secured Parties that are regulated entities may also be subject to regulatory duties but such issues fall outside the scope of this memorandum.

10. Please note that pursuant to the terms of each Deed and the IM NY Annex, the Secured Party is not permitted to use any Collateral securities it holds. This is because (a) at the time that the 1995 Deed was published, it was thought, as a matter of English law, that any such use is or may be incompatible with the limited nature of the interest that the Secured Party has in the Collateral, and (b) the rules promulgated by various regulators prohibit the use of any Collateral securities held by the Secured Party as "initial margin". On the other hand, unless otherwise agreed to by the parties, Paragraph 6(c) of the Non-IM NY Annex grants the Secured Party broad rights with respect to the use of Collateral, provided that it returns equivalent Collateral when the Security Collateral Provider is entitled to the return of Collateral pursuant to the terms of the Non-IM NY Annex. Such use might include pledging or rehypothecating the securities, disposing of the securities under a securities repurchase (repo) agreement or simply selling the securities. Do the laws of your jurisdiction recognize the right of the Secured Party so to use such Collateral pursuant to an agreement with the Security Collateral Provider? In particular, how does such use of the Collateral affect, if at all, the validity, continuity, perfection or priority of a security interest otherwise validly created and perfected prior to such use? Are there any other obligations, duties or limitations imposed on the Secured Party with respect to its use of the Collateral under the laws of your jurisdiction?

As noted briefly above, one of the principal effects of the FCA Regulations in relation to security financial collateral arrangements is to eliminate certain doubts as a matter of English law that would otherwise apply where the parties have included in a Non-IM Security

133 In relation to Foreign Entities, see note 68.

63

Document (such as under Paragraph 6(c) of the Non-IM NY Annex) the right of the Secured Party to dispose of or otherwise use relevant Collateral. Specifically, regulation 16(1) of the FCA Regulations provides that "[i]f a security financial collateral arrangement provides for the collateral-taker to use and dispose of any financial collateral provided under the arrangement, as if it were the owner of it, the collateral-taker may do so in accordance with the terms of the arrangement".

Accordingly, the 1995 Deed could be amended to provide that the Secured Party has the right (a Right of Use) to deal with the Collateral provided under the 1995 Deed as though it were the owner.

In the case of Paragraph 6(c) of the Non-IM NY Annex, the validity of the Right of Use will be governed by New York law, and we do not believe there is any reason in principle why an English court would seek to interfere with such an arrangement if it is valid as a matter of New York law, subject to the discussion herein of the effect of regulation 16 of the FCA Regulations.134

In relation to the 1995 Deed, if parties are going to include a Right of Use, they will still need to draft the Right of Use carefully to ensure that the consequences of this inclusion are clear. For this reason, and also to address any case where, for whatever reason, a Non-IM Security Document falls outside the FCA Regulations, we believe it may be helpful to set out the issues that have traditionally been considered to be raised by the inclusion of a Right of Use in a mortgage or charge.

As a matter of English law, the inclusion in a mortgage or charge of a Right of Use,135 including the right to sell or charge the securities to a third party, has traditionally been considered inconsistent with the limited nature of a security interest. (The more specific objection that such a clause would constitute a "clog on the equity of redemption" is discussed below.)

The security interest of a Secured Party is a proprietary interest in favour of the Secured Party created out of the ownership interest of the Security Collateral Provider in the relevant Collateral. Permitting the Secured Party to deal with security assets as though they were the outright property of the Secured Party is therefore, at least prima facie, conceptually inconsistent with the limited nature of a security interest.

In practical terms, once the Security Collateral Provider ceases to own the security assets (or, more accurately, ceases to have an equity of redemption in those assets), the Secured Party's interest must also disappear, unless the third party purchaser of those assets agrees to purchase the assets subject to the security interest. In practice, this does not normally happen when securities are delivered as Collateral in the financial markets. Typically, such securities are sold or otherwise transferred outright (for example, under a securities repurchase (repo) or stock lending transaction), in connection with which the seller represents to the buyer that the securities are sold "free and clear" of any third party interest.

Thus, the Secured Party loses its security interest when it exercises its Right of Use to sell the Collateral. The Secured Party will normally, however, either (1) have to account to the Security Collateral Provider for the proceeds of the securities or (2) re-deliver fungible

134 See the answer to question 1 above and question 19 below for a discussion of the English position in relation to the recognition of New York law as the governing law of the Non-IM NY Annex. 135 This is often referred to loosely as a "right of rehypothecation", however it is better practice, especially when discussing these issues with local counsel in relation to a cross-border collateral arrangement, to avoid that term, which strictly speaking refers only to re-pledging. A number of jurisdictions allow re-pledging of pledged Collateral under certain conditions, but prohibit or severely limit other types of use by the Secured Party, for example, re-sale.

64

equivalent securities. These obligations would normally be personal obligations of the Secured Party, sounding in debt, and therefore capable of being discharged by set-off.

Accordingly, if the Secured Party has not yet re-acquired fungible equivalent securities for delivery to the Security Collateral Provider at the time of a default by the Security Collateral Provider, the Secured Party would seek to set off the secured liabilities against the value at that time of the Collateral. A well-drafted security document would normally include an appropriate contractual set-off provision for this purpose.

Similarly, if the Secured Party itself were to become insolvent, the Security Collateral Provider would be an unsecured creditor of the Secured Party in relation to the value of the securities sold by the Security Collateral Provider pursuant to the Right of Use. The Security Collateral Provider may, in such circumstances, seek to set off the value of the Collateral against its liabilities under an appropriate contractual set-off provision.

Where the FCA Regulations apply, paragraphs (2) to (4) of regulation 16 in essence provide for such a result. In other words, the effect of the inclusion of a Right of Use in a Non-IM Security Document, if such Right of Use is exercised by the Secured Party, is to convert the Non-IM Security Document into a title transfer financial collateral arrangement, at least as far as the mechanism of the arrangement is concerned.136

One final theoretical point, although now only of relevance where the FCA Regulations do not apply: as mentioned above, it has been suggested that the inclusion of a Right of Use in a mortgage or charge should be considered a clog on the equity of redemption, which would render the Right of Use void.137 Under this doctrine, which is a corollary of the long-established principle "once a mortgage, always a mortgage", a mortgagor's equity of redemption may not be extinguished by any covenant or agreement made at the time of the mortgage and as part of the mortgage transaction.138

Though we note academic arguments to the contrary, we believe it to be the better view that the clog doctrine would not apply to a security interest created over dematerialised or indirectly held securities in electronic form.139 In such a case, the security interest is created over co-proprietary rights in a fungible pool of securities. The assets in such a pool are, by their nature, shifting, and it is not possible for the Security Collateral Provider to receive back the identical securities it originally transferred as Collateral. There is therefore no clog preventing the mortgagor in such circumstances getting back exactly what he mortgaged.

There is a related rule that a mortgagee may not stipulate for additional advantages in a mortgage beyond the mortgagor's covenant to repay the secured debt with interest. This is generally referred to as the rule against collateral advantages (using the term "collateral" in its original sense of "by the side of" (in this case, by the side of the main advantage) or perhaps "connected but subordinate"). The rule against collateral advantages was particularly potent when the charging of interest was prohibited by the usury laws. In such circumstances, collateral advantages were often viewed as disguised interest. There was, moreover, a general

136 We make no comment here or anywhere else in this memorandum on the accounting or tax treatment of any collateral arrangements. 137 Some legal practitioners take the view that the inclusion of a clog on the equity of redemption would render the mortgage or charge itself void, however the better view is that the rule simply invalidates the contractual provision constituting the clog. Note also that although the clog doctrine arose originally in relation to legal mortgages, there is persuasive authority that the rule should apply to equitable mortgages, charges, and other security interests. G&C Kreglinger v New Patagonia Meat and Cold Storage Co [1914] AC 25, 31, HL. 138 Vernon v Bethell (1762) 2 Eden 110 [113]; 28 ER 838 [839]; Samuel v Jarrah Timber and Wood Paving Corp [1904] AC 323. 139 One of the counterarguments relates to the risk that the Security Collateral Provider is faced with a credit exposure to the Secured Party if the assets that have been reused constitute excess collateral. See for example the Australian case of Lift Capital Partners Pty Ltd v Merrill Lynch International (2009) 253 ALR 482 [140] - [151] where a right of use provision was struck down.

65

judicial concern at the time the doctrine first developed that mortgagees would seek to oppress or otherwise take advantage of mortgagors at a time when they were in straitened circumstances.

Since the abolition of the usury laws, the rule has been relaxed, and it is now established by a line of cases that a collateral advantage of a mortgagee will only be struck down if the advantage is unfair or unconscionable and not merely unreasonable.140 We do not believe that a Right of Use would, absent special circumstances, be considered unfair or unconscionable if freely agreed at arm's-length between commercial counterparties.

11. What is the effect, if any, under the laws of England on the validity, continuity, perfection or priority of a security interest in Eligible Collateral under each Security Document of the right of the Security Collateral Provider to substitute Collateral pursuant to Paragraph 4(d) of the NY Annexes and the 1995 Deed and Paragraph 4(e) of the IM Deed? How does the presence or absence of consent to substitution by the Secured Party affect your response to this question? Please comment specifically on whether the Security Collateral Provider and the Secured Party are able validly to agree in the Security Document that the Security Collateral Provider may substitute Collateral without specific consent of the Secured Party and whether and, if so, how this may affect the nature of the security interest or otherwise affect your conclusions regarding the validity or enforceability of the security interest.

(1) Fixed versus floating charges

Every charge created under English law is either fixed141 or floating in nature in relation to the asset over which it is created. It is, of course, possible for the same charging document to include a fixed charge in relation to one or more assets and a floating charge in relation to one or more other assets. But each charge will be either fixed or floating (but not both) in relation to any particular asset.

A fixed charge is a charge in relation to specifically identified property that applies immediately to that property or, if the Security Collateral Provider does not yet own the property, immediately upon the Security Collateral Provider's acquisition of the property.

A floating charge is somewhat more difficult to define, and this difficulty has generated a reasonable amount of case law. It is a concept not found in many legal systems outside the English common law tradition, but it has proved to offer a number of significant practical advantages, notably because of its great commercial flexibility, as well as certain important disadvantages, discussed below.

It is clear that it is not sufficient, in order to establish a fixed rather than a floating charge, that the parties describe the charge as "fixed" in the charging document. The courts have, in a number of cases, considered the substantive characteristics of a purported fixed charge and have, as a result, recharacterised the charge as floating.142

The key point is to determine the fundamental nature of the rights and the interest created in favour of the Secured Party. Romer LJ set out a classic description of a

140 Biggs v Hoddinot [1898] 2 Ch 307; Kreglinger v New Patagonia Meet and Cold Storage Co Ltd [1914] AC 25; Knightsbridge Estates Trust Ltd v Byrne [1939] Ch 441; Cityland and Property (Holdings) Ltd v Dabrah [1968] Ch 166; Multiservice Bookbinding Ltd v Marden [1979] Ch 84. 141 The term "specific charge" is also sometimes used, instead of "fixed charge", particularly in older case law. 142 Re Armagh Shoes Ltd. [1982] NI 59.

66

floating charge in the Court of Appeal decision in Re Yorkshire Woolcombers Association Ltd:143

"[I]f a charge has the three characteristics that I am about to mention it is a floating charge. (1.) If it is a charge on a class of assets of a company present and future; (2.) if that class is one which, in the ordinary course of the business of the company, would be changing from time to time; and (3.) if you find that by the charge it is contemplated that, until some future step is taken by or on behalf of those interested in the charge, the company may carry on its business in the ordinary way as far as concerns the particular class of assets I am dealing with."

Re Yorkshire Woolcombers Association Ltd reached the House of Lords under the name Illingworth v Houldsworth.144 In the House of Lords decision, Lord Macnaghten said:

"A specific charge, I think, is one that without more fastens on ascertained and definite property or property capable of being ascertained and defined; a floating charge, on the other hand, is ambulatory and shifting in its nature, hovering over and so to speak floating with the property which it is intended to affect until some event occurs or some act is done which causes it to settle and fasten on the subject of the charge within its reach and grasp."

The fact that assets which are subject to a charge which is expressed to be a fixed charge are of a shifting or fluctuating character will not in itself render the charge a floating charge if the chargor is restricted from dealing with the assets, for example, by means of a covenant not to dispose of or charge the assets in question and to pay the proceeds of such assets into a bank account which is blocked or subject to restrictions imposed and enforced by the chargee.145

The extent to which a chargor is able to deal in the assets has been subject to much judicial consideration, particularly in relation to receivables. It had in the past been suggested it was possible to separate a book debt from its proceeds and grant a fixed charge over the book debt and a floating charge over the proceeds. This was considered by the Privy Council in Agnew v The Commissioner of Inland Revenue (Re Brumark Investments Limited)146 and it was held in that case that it is not possible to separate a book debt and its proceeds for this purpose. Therefore a charge that purports to create a fixed charge on a book debt but a floating charge on the proceeds must be construed as a floating charge.

Lord Millet in the Brumark Investments case described a two stage process for determining whether a charge was a fixed or a floating charge. The first stage involved construing the security document to understand the intention of the parties. However, the object at this stage is not to discover whether the parties intended to create a fixed or a floating charge. The object is to ascertain the nature of the rights and obligations which the parties intended to grant each other in respect of the charged assets. The second stage of the process is one of categorisation. This is a matter of law and not of intention. If the intention of the parties, properly gathered

143 [1903] 2 Ch 284 (CA) p 295. 144 [1904] AC 355 (HL) p 358. 145 Re Keenan Brothers Ltd [1986] BCLC 242 and Re Atlantic Medical Ltd. [1992] BCC 653 which was confirmed by the Court of Appeal in Re ASRS Establishment Limited, D.Q Henriques v Buchler [2002] BCC 64. 146 [2001] UKPC 28 (Privy Council).

67

from the language of the security document, is to grant the chargor rights in respect of the charged assets which are inconsistent with the nature of a fixed charge, then the charge cannot be a fixed charge however the parties may have chosen to describe it. The decision in Brumark Investments confirms that it is inconsistent with the existence of a fixed charge that the assets subject to it can be released from the security at the will of the chargor without the consent of the chargee; there must be real, and not merely illusory, control provisions in respect of the charged assets.

The House of Lords also considered charges over book debts in Re Spectrum Plus Ltd147 and set out a specific test for determining whether a fixed or floating charge has been created. The House of Lords held that, where a security instrument prohibits a chargor from disposing of its book debts before they are collected and requires that the book debt proceeds be paid into an account with the chargee bank, the critical question in determining whether a fixed or floating charge has been created is whether the chargor is free to draw on the account pending notice otherwise from the chargee bank. The House of Lords held that a chargor having that right would be inconsistent with the charge being a fixed charge and that any label given to the charge by the parties would be irrelevant. In the words of Lord Scott: "the essential characteristic of a floating charge that distinguishes it from a fixed charged is, that the asset subject to the charge is not finally appropriated as a security for the payment of the debt until the occurrence of some future event. In the meantime the chargor is left free to use the charged asset and to remove it from the security."

The question of whether the security interests created under the Non-IM Security Documents would be characterised as fixed charges rather than floating charges will therefore depend, among other things, on whether the Secured Party under the Non- IM Security Documents, has the requisite degree of control over the Security Collateral Provider's ability to deal in the relevant assets and, if so, whether such control is exercised by the Secured Party in practice.

The control of the chargee must be legal (rather than purely administrative or practical) in order for an instrument to constitute a fixed charge. As per Goode148, "[i]t is clear that practical control alone is not sufficient for a charge to be fixed; it is critical that the charge agreement establishes the necessary legal control, although other matters may be relevant to its interpretation." Legal control requires that the charging instrument expressly prohibits the chargor from dealing with the charged property in the ordinary course of business without the consent of the chargee (i.e. as if there were no security interest in respect of such charged property).

We note that practical control (whether in the charging document or other documents) may be relevant, however, to the extent there is an inconsistency with the legal control achieved in the charging document itself, an example being a charging agreement containing an express prohibition on the chargor from dealing with the proceeds of a book debt and requiring the chargor to pay them into a blocked account with the chargee, but the terms of the account agreement permitting the chargor's free withdrawal of proceeds. The contractual position is internally inconsistent and therefore the apparent control of the chargee as set out in the charging document may be considered not to have been the true intention of the parties.149 Similarly, as mentioned above in the context of Brumark Investments, if the parties' actual conduct is contrary to the provisions establishing legal control in the charging agreement, the

147 [2005] UKHL 41. 148 See Goode and Gullifer (n 109), para 4-22. 149 ibid, para 4-22.

68

English court could intervene and hold that the charging agreement constitutes a sham or such conduct could amount to a variation or waiver of the terms or give rise to an estoppel, which could affect characterisation.150

Given the requirements to establish legal control, it is our view that the active concurrence of the chargee is required in respect of each disposition of the charged assets by the chargor and, ideally, the chargee would have discretion in granting or withholding its consent such that the consent constitutes "an independent exercise of will of the chargee".151

(2) Characterisation of mark-to-market collateral arrangements

The type of collateral arrangement set out in each of the Non-IM Security Documents may, in commercial terms, be characterised as a mark-to-market collateral arrangement. That means that periodically the current net exposure of one party to the other party under the ISDA Master Agreement is determined and compared, in an agreed base currency, to the value of Eligible Collateral then held by that party (if any). After various adjustments (for unsecured thresholds, minimum transfer amounts, valuation "haircuts", and so on (as applicable)), the Security Collateral Provider may be required to provide additional Eligible Collateral, if there is excess exposure, or be entitled to return of Eligible Collateral, if there is excess Collateral. The amount of Eligible Collateral held by the Secured Party normally therefore fluctuates. The question often arises whether a security interest over Collateral subject to a mark-to-market arrangement should be considered, for that reason alone, to be a floating charge.

Whilst leading academic authorities discuss the requirement for the consent of the chargee to dispositions (and that such consent should not be given in advance under the terms of the charging instrument), the issue of excess collateral is generally not an area that has been considered in detail and indeed case law has generally developed in circumstances where there was little genuine attempt by the parties to establish strict controls on disposals. In its 2014 paper on Secured Transactions Reform and Fixed and Floating Charges on Insolvency, the Financial Law Committee of the City of London Law Society noted that the extent to which a charge can remain fixed if the chargor can withdraw excess charged assets or substitute charged assets was an area that could usefully be addressed by clarificatory guidance.152

We note the remarks of Briggs J in Re Lehman, at paragraph 70 of the judgment, which refers to a concession made between the parties thereto that a term of the charge in question permitted the chargor "a right to substitute or withdraw excess property from the ambit of the charge (pending crystallisation) so that, pursuant to the analysis of the House of Lords in National Westminster Bank plc v Spectrum Plus Ltd [2005] 2 AC 680, it could not be a fixed charge". In our view, such statement is merely obiter and should not be construed as creating precedent regarding whether the right of the Security Collateral Provider to withdraw excess prevents the security from being a fixed charge; in Briggs J's own words he did not need to conduct a close examination of the extent of the parties' legal or administrative control over the

150 Beale and others (n 54), paras 6.119-6.121. 151 See further the discussion in Beale and others (n 54), para 6.113. 152 The City of London Law Society, "Secured Transactions Reform: Discussion Paper 2, Fixed and Floating Charges on Insolvency" (February 2014) accessed 12 November 2018.

69

property in order to determine whether the relevant charge was fixed or floating in nature since the parties had conceded the issue.

An alternative approach was adopted by Lightman J in the earlier case of Queen's Moat Houses plc v Capita IRG Trustees Ltd.153 In that case the chargor was entitled to require the trustee to release property where the value of the security exceeded 175 per cent. of the nominal value of the secured indebtedness. Lightman J held that "there is a critical difference between the right of a corporate chargor to deal with and dispose of property free from charge without reference to the chargee and the right of a corporate chargor to require the chargee to release the charged property from the charge. […] there is no inconsistency between the existence of a fixed charge and a contractual right to require the chargee to release property from the charge." The decision in Queen's Moat Houses was handed down before Re Spectrum Plus and the simple distinction between (i) being able to deal with the property and (ii) being able to require that the chargee consent to releases of excess seems more difficult in light of Re Spectrum Plus.154 However, leading counsel with whom we consulted following the judgment in Re Spectrum Plus was of the view that Queen's Moat Houses is still noteworthy in the context of release of surplus amounts as it suggested that it was not inconsistent with a fixed charge for a chargee to contractually agree to release surplus amounts if certain objective conditions are met.155

As noted above, rights to withdraw excess have not generally been considered in detail in academic works on taking security interests written post Re Spectrum Plus. One commentary we are aware of on point is that of Antony Zacaroli QC.156 Zacaroli notes the approach to the characterisation of charges as either fixed or floating adopted in Re Spectrum Plus focuses on each specific item of property and whether the chargor may unilaterally deal with the asset to remove it from the security and a narrow reading of Re Spectrum Plus would result in any charge that requires the release of excess collateral being a floating charge. However, Zacaroli rejects that it is necessarily correct, at least as a matter of principle, to regard every right of substitution or withdrawal as always being inconsistent with a fixed charge.157 Zacaroli states that "a perennial problem in this area is the difficulty in discerning an underlying rationale for distinguishing between a fixed and a floating security"158 and notes that if the rationale for the distinction between a fixed and floating charge focuses on the effect of the terms of the charge on the rights and interests of the chargee in the secured property (as opposed to the effect on or potential prejudice to third parties dealing with the chargor159), then if the chargee's interest is to ensure that there are at all times assets of sufficient value to cover the secured indebtedness,

153 [2004] EWHC 868 (Ch). 154 See discussion in Antony Zacaroli, "Taking Security over Intermediated Securities: Chapter V of the UNIDROIT (Geneva) Convention on Intermediated Securities" in L Gullifer and J Payne (eds) Intermediated Securities: Legal Problems and Practical Issues (Hart Publishing Ltd 2010) 167. 155 Note, however, that the reconciliation of Queen's Moat Houses with other authorities in this area notably Gray and Spectrum is not straightforward and Goode and Gullifer (n 109) go so far as to state that Queen's Moat Houses "cannot now be good law". 156 Zacaroli (n 154). 157 Note that certain cases before Re Spectrum Plus such as Re TXU Europe Group [2003] EWHC 3105, Re Cimex Tissues Ltd [1994] BCC 626 and Holroyd v Marshall (1862) 10 HL Cas 191, 11 ER 999 adopted a more practical approach to dealings with the charged assets. 158 Zacaroli (n 154), p 178. 159 Per contra Zacaroli agrees that if the purpose of the distinction is to protect third parties, strictly following the approach in Re Spectrum is justified and any right to withdraw surplus collateral without the consent of the chargee would cause the charge to be floating.

70

giving a chargor freedom to withdraw or substitute collateral where a minimum aggregate value is maintained should not be inconsistent with a fixed charge.160

The extent to which a chargee may contractually fetter its discretion in providing consent to the disposition of charged assets before the charge in question is characterised as floating is not settled and, post Re Spectrum Plus, the scope would indeed appear to be very narrow. Ultimately, however, in our view, there are strong arguments that the inclusion of objective criteria for the determination of excess collateral which, if met, require the chargee to release the relevant excess, should not necessarily be inconsistent with a charge being characterised as a fixed charge. It is important, however, that a release by the chargee at the relevant time is required as opposed to an automatic right for the chargor to dispose of the assets.161 As discussed above, it is crucial that the collateral may not be released from the security without the active concurrence of the collateral-taker, which would be the case under the Non- IM Security Documents.

(3) Substitution of Collateral

Turning, then, to the specific question of substitution of Collateral, if the Security Collateral Provider has an unrestricted right of substitution of Collateral (so that, in exchange for an equivalent amount of Collateral, it is entitled to the release of specific Collateral of its own choosing), then there is a risk that the relevant Non-IM Security Document constitutes a floating charge. This is because the Security Collateral Provider could be considered to direct the use of the assets held by the Secured Party prior, of course, to the occurrence of a default and is inconsistent with a view of a fixed charge as a charge attached to specific assets, where control relates to the assets themselves and not merely to their value.162

In this regard, Vaughan Williams LJ in Re Yorkshire Woolcombers said "if at the will of the mortgagor he can dispose of it and prevent its being any longer a security, although something else may be substituted more or less for it, that is not a specific security"163 and, more recently, the decision in Re Spectrum Plus renewed doubts about whether a power to make item-by-item substitutions, as opposed to a general power of disposition, is consistent with a charge being fixed.164

Such a right of substitution could exist in any collateral arrangement, whether or not it has been established on a mark-to-market basis. As a matter of practice, however, such a right of substitution is common in mark-to-market collateral arrangements.

160 Zacaroli goes onto state, in respect of securities, that it is strongly arguable that rights of withdrawal or substitution would need to take account of a range of factors (such as the differences in the volatility of the value of different securities) in addition to the aggregate value of the remaining or substituted securities so as not to deprive "the security holder of the ability to make qualitative decisions as to the mix of securities held in the portfolio" in order to avoid being characterised as floating. He explains that, on this argument, any right of withdrawal is inconsistent with a fixed charge unless the pool consists of precisely the same securities (which is unlikely in practice) and any right of substitution is inconsistent with a fixed charge unless the substituted securities are the same as the securities withdrawn. In relation to the question of release of excess, whilst we accept that not all securities are the same and future performance will vary, we believe this issue can also be addressed by criteria in the charging instrument. The chargee can specify the types of security it is willing to accept as collateral and the relative value it will ascribe to such securities at the outset of the transaction in order to protect itself. 161 In respect of the Non-IM Security Documents the Security Collateral Provider may be the Valuation Agent for the purposes of determining a Return Amount or Return Amount (VM), as applicable. However, this does not trouble the analysis; the legal right of the Security Collateral Provider is only a right to excess. Note also, as a practical matter, that the Secured Party may engage the dispute resolution provisions of the Non-IM Security Documents should it disagree with the assessment of the Security Collateral Provider. 162 Beale and others (n 54), para 6.129. 163 [1903] 2 Ch 284 (CA) 294. 164 Goode and Gullifer (n 109) para 4-12.

71

If the Secured Party has an unrestricted veto on any substitution or, in other words, an unrestricted right to refuse its consent, then the security interest should not be considered a floating charge.165

As discussed above, an important caveat is that this consent requirement should be a real one and not, in practice, ignored. In other words, it is not necessarily enough for the relevant Non-IM Security Document to specify that the Secured Party has an unrestricted veto or right to refuse consent. The parties must behave consistently with that requirement and should not have an unwritten, informal, or de facto understanding that substitutions will be permitted as a matter of course. This risk will, of course, turn on the specific facts and circumstances of each case, and the quality of the evidence produced by each side to any dispute on this question.

A final point to consider is the situation where the parties have agreed that any substitution requires the Secured Party's consent, but that the Secured Party may not refuse its consent in certain circumstances, for example, if certain conditions are fulfilled. While not all such clauses would necessarily result in the relevant Non-IM Security Document being characterised as a floating charge, it is difficult to say definitively how much the Secured Party's right of veto or right to refuse consent may be restricted before a material risk of recharacterisation arises. It has been suggested that "it would only be if the conditions for substitution were drawn very strictly that it might be held that there was sufficient control" and one example would be "if the chargor were obliged to add substitute assets (defined in a limited way, probably relating to function or value) to the charged assets before disposing of the assets to be substituted."166

The 1995 Deed contains in Paragraph 4(d)(ii) a requirement for the Secured Party to consent to any substitution. In our opinion, this should result in the Secured Party retaining a sufficient degree of control for the charge created by the 1995 Deed to be characterised as a fixed charge. The Non-IM NY Annex does not contain a requirement for such consent on the part of the Secured Party unless an appropriate election is made by the parties in Paragraph 13. In our opinion, if this election is not made, there is a strong presumption that a security interest created pursuant to the Non-IM NY Annex would be characterised by an English court as a floating charge.

Accordingly, we would recommend that parties using the Non-IM NY Annex make the election requiring consent to substitution where at least one of the parties is an English Company.

As explained below, even if the relevant charge is a security financial collateral arrangement some of the disadvantages of a floating charge will continue to apply (hence our recommendation that the parties agree that any substitution of Collateral should be subject to the consent of the Secured Party).

(4) The nature of book debts

Given the restatement of the orthodox approach to the characterisation of security as fixed or floating in cases on book debts167, in relation to the characterisation of the Non-IM Security Documents, we note the following:

165 See for example the discussion in Beale and others (n 54), para 6.129, which concludes that where the chargee's consent is needed for every substitution there is clearly sufficient restrictions on the chargor to qualify as a fixed charge. 166 Beale and others (n 54), para 6.129. 167 See the discussion of Brumark and Re Spectrum Plus at (1) above.

72

(i) We believe that it is the better view that cash deposits by way of security do not usually constitute book debts. However, there is uncertainty on the point and the cash deposits may be more likely to be treated as a book debt where the Security Collateral Provider is a financial institution. It has been suggested that debt securities may also potentially be book debts if the Security Collateral Provider is a financial institution.

(ii) The Non-IM Security Documents do not distinguish between book debts and their proceeds of collection.

(iii) The types of collateral arrangements set out in the Non-IM Security Documents typically do not allow the Security Collateral Provider freely to receive or withdraw the proceeds of a cash deposit (or debt security right) prior to default. Such proceeds are received by the Secured Party and continue to be held subject to the relevant security interest. They eventually pass back to a non-defaulting Security Collateral Provider on the same terms as any other Collateral is released in accordance with the mark-to-market mechanics of the Non-IM Security Document.168

Note that distributions of income and other rights received on debt securities held as Collateral do not in our view constitute proceeds (by which we mean amounts that the Secured Party must exert control in respect of in order to avoid its charge in respect of the debt securities being characterised as floating i.e. in the sense of the cases on book debts). It has been suggested that there are three main factors to consider with respect to income:

(i) how directly the assets generate the income;

(ii) how close the generation of income comes to being the sole value of the asset; and

(iii) whether the asset is destroyed by the generation of the income.169

The income and rights received on debt securities do not destroy the securities (the right to receive the principal amount is independent of the right to income). Therefore, only the monies received from the debtor of the relevant book debt in whole or partial payment of the principal of the debt should constitute proceeds. The same analysis applies in respect of equity securities and distributions of capital. Note also that payments of interest amounts on cash Collateral do not in our view constitute proceeds for the same reasons.

(5) Conclusion

On the basis of the above, it is our view that the Non-IM Security Documents should not be construed as creating a floating charge in respect of Collateral, provided that, in the case of the 1994 NY Annex, the parties specify in Paragraph 13(e)(ii) that the Security Collateral Provider must obtain the consent of the Secured Party to any substitution pursuant to Paragraph 4(d) of the 1994 NY Annex and, in the case of the VM NY Annex, the parties make the analogous election which is provided for at Paragraph 13(f)(ii).

168 See generally Part II for further discussion of the operation of the Non-IM Security Documents. 169 Beale and others (n 54), para 6.132.

73

(6) Disadvantages of floating charges

Floating charges have a number of disadvantages relative to fixed charges. These disadvantages include the following:

(A) Certain statutorily preferred claims (the main types are claims by employees and contributions to pension schemes and, for relevant entities, debts due to depositors170) take priority over a creditor with a floating charge in a liquidation or an administration whereas a fixed charge ranks ahead of such claims.

(B) In respect of a floating charge created on or after 15 September 2003 a receiver, liquidator or administrator must set aside a prescribed part of the floating charge realisations for the benefit of the unsecured creditors.171 The maximum amount of the ring-fenced fund is £600,000.172

(C) In an administration the remuneration and expenses of the administrator are payable out of assets subject to the floating charge.173 Liquidation expenses are now also payable out of assets subject to a floating charge.174

(D) In an administration, the administrator may deal with the property covered by the floating charge without the leave of the court and without any need, for example, to make up to the chargee any shortfall in market value on a sale.

(E) A floating charge is subject to wider powers of avoidance under the Insolvency Act 1986 than a fixed charge would be by virtue of section 245 of the Insolvency Act 1986.

(F) A floating charge has weak priority against purchasers and chargees of the assets concerned and against lien holders, judgment creditors (e.g. where a third party debt order is made in respect of the Security Collateral Provider), and creditors with rights of set-off.

(G) In relation to floating charges created on or after 15 September 2003, the holder of a floating charge is no longer entitled to appoint an administrative receiver of the Security Collateral Provider and thereby prevent the appointment of an administrator (unless one of a limited number of

170 Schedule 6 of the Insolvency Act 1986 sets out the categories of preferential debt. Preferential debts were previously limited, broadly, to unpaid contribution obligations to occupational pension schemes, certain claims of employees in relation to remuneration and unpaid levies on coal and steel production. This has now been significantly expanded in respect of credit institutions by the introduction of depositor preference (under the Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013) pursuant to which the insolvency hierarchy is altered to provide that deposits eligible for protection under the FSCS up to the level of the insurance and debts owed to the scheme manager of the FSCS are preferential debts ranking pari passu with other categories of "ordinary preferential debts" with the remainder constituting a separate class of preferential debt ("secondary preferential debts") ranking after the ordinary preferential debts (the Insolvency Act 1986, ss 175 and 386). The relevant depositors shall therefore rank ahead of unsecured creditors and floating charge holders. Para 15BB of Schedule 6 also provides as a category of preferential debt: an amount owed to one or more eligible persons in respect of a deposit that (a) was made through a non-EEA branch of a credit institution authorised by the competent authority of an EEA state and (b) would have been an eligible deposit if it had been made through an EEA branch of that credit institution. 171 Unless the realised value of the assets subject to floating charges is less than £10,000 and the relevant officeholder considers that the cost of distributing the prescribed part would be disproportionate to the benefit to unsecured creditors of doing so. See Insolvency Act 1986, s 176A(3). 172 Insolvency Act 1986, s 176A; Insolvency Act 1986 (Prescribed Part) Order 2003 (SI 2003/2097). 173 Insolvency Act 1986, Sch B1, paras 99(3) and (4). 174 ibid, s 176ZA.

74

exceptions applies).175 The ability of a Secured Party to appoint a receiver is discussed in the answer to question 12 below.

However, if a floating charge is constituted under a financial collateral arrangement under the FCA Regulations the disadvantages listed at (A) to (E) above will not apply.176 In our view given the nature of the arrangements contemplated by the Non- IM Security Documents we consider it unlikely that the disadvantage set forth at (F) would be a material concern.

175 Enterprise Act 2002, s 250. 176 FCA Regulations, regs 8 and 10.

75

Enforcement of rights under the Non-IM Security Documents by the Secured Party in the absence of an insolvency proceeding

Note the additional assumption in Part III.2(j) above which applies to questions 12 to 15 below.

12. Assuming that the Secured Party has obtained a valid and perfected security interest in the Eligible Collateral under the laws of your jurisdiction, to the extent such laws apply, by complying with the requirements contained in the responses to questions 1 to 6 above as applicable, what are the formalities (including the necessity to obtain a court order or conduct an auction), notification requirements (to the Security Collateral Provider or any other person) or other procedures, if any, that the Secured Party must observe or undertake in exercising its rights as a Secured Party under each Security Document, such as the right to liquidate Collateral? For example, is it free to sell the Collateral (including to itself) and apply the proceeds to satisfy the Security Collateral Provider's outstanding obligations under the ISDA Master Agreement? Do such formalities or procedures differ depending on the type of Collateral involved?

The issues raised by the question principally concern the proprietary effect of the Non-IM Security Documents. As discussed in our answer to question 2 above, the law applicable to those aspects will vary depending on the nature of the Collateral. The law applicable to the contractual aspects of the Non-IM Security Documents, discussed in our answer to question 1, will be relevant to the threshold issue of determining the rights and remedies the parties purport to grant themselves but the availability of those rights and remedies will be subject to the proprietary law of the Collateral.

As we are discussing the position under English law in this memorandum, we assume for the purposes of this question that the Collateral is governed by English law as determined by the applicable conflict of laws rules relevant to that category of Collateral. As New York law will govern the contractual aspects of the Non-IM NY Annex (subject to our answer to question 19 below), we focus below on the contractual position under the 1995 Deed, but the discussion below will also be relevant to the Non-IM NY Annex where the Collateral is governed by English law as determined by the applicable conflict of laws rules relevant to that category of Collateral, but as applied to the contractual remedies the parties have specified under the Non-IM NY Annex.177

There are four principal remedies for a mortgagee under English law. These are sale of the secured property, the appointment of a receiver, taking possession, and foreclosure. Of these, a mere chargee (that is, a holder of a charge that does not also constitute a mortgage) has only the remedies of sale of the secured property and appointment of a receiver.

Of these, in a financial markets context, the power of sale is the remedy typically exercised by a mortgagee or chargee in relation to Collateral in the form of securities. The appointment of a receiver is generally not thought to confer any practical advantage in this context, and the mortgagee or chargee may already have possession of the relevant securities (as would normally be the case under the 1995 Deed).

Foreclosure is the process under which the mortgagor's equitable right to redeem the mortgaged property is declared by the court to be extinguished or destroyed and the

177 An English court, if required to consider a right or remedy granted by the Non-IM NY Annex, would consider whether the right or remedy is of a type known to English law and would then apply English law relevant to that type of right or remedy to determine whether it is enforceable under English law and, if so, the manner of enforcement. See also Beale and others (n 54), para 22.90.

76

mortgagee is left as owner of the property both at law and in equity (subject only to prior encumbrances). The mortgagee is then free to sell the property or to retain title to it. Foreclosure is always an act of court, and a mortgagee cannot foreclose and keep the assets for itself without a court order.178 For this reason, it considered too time-consuming and cumbersome to be a practical remedy in the context of a financial market security arrangement of the type exemplified by the Non-IM Security Documents. In addition, in certain circumstances, the court may re-open the foreclosure order, restoring the mortgagor's equitable right to redeem. For these reasons, foreclosure is rarely, if ever, used by a mortgagee of securities.

The exercise by the Secured Party of its right to "liquidate" Collateral by selling it under the 1995 Deed is permitted by English law. It is not necessary for any particular formalities to be followed by the Secured Party in exercising its right of sale. Accordingly, the Secured Party may on enforcement of the 1995 Deed sell the Collateral.

In particular, a court order or auction is not required and notice of sale need not be given to the Security Collateral Provider, although in practice secured creditors do often give a short period of notice before selling Collateral. This does not differ depending on the type of Collateral involved.

In exercising its power of sale, the Secured Party is subject to a duty to take reasonable care to obtain the best price reasonably available at the time.179 This will normally be the current market value of Collateral comprising securities.180

Where the FCA Regulations do not apply, a Secured Party may not sell Posted Collateral to itself, either alone or with others, unless the sale is made by the court and the Secured Party has obtained leave to bid. This is because such a transaction would amount to foreclosure without the leave of the court. In addition, there is a broader policy basis for the rule, which is that a person should not put himself in a position where his duty (in this case, to obtain the best price reasonably available) and his interest (in this case, to pay as low a price as possible) conflict.181

It is established that a mortgagee may sell mortgaged property to a company in which the mortgagee has an interest, provided that it can prove that the sale was in good faith and that it had taken reasonable steps to obtain the best price reasonably obtainable at that time.182 A fortiori, a mortgagee may sell mortgaged property to an affiliated company, subject to the same proviso.

The policy underlying the traditional prohibition on a mortgagee appropriating mortgaged property without a foreclosure order has been overridden by the FCA Regulations, where they do apply. Regulations 17 and 18 of the FCA Regulations provide that a collateral-taker under a security financial collateral arrangement may appropriate financial collateral taken under a security financial collateral arrangement without a court order for foreclosure. This is subject

178 Re Farnol Eades Irvine & Co. [1915] 1 Ch 22. 179 Cuckmere Brick Co Ltd v Mutual Finance Ltd [1971] Ch 949; 2 All ER 633. See also discussion of this issue in (i) Wayne Clark (ed), Fisher and Lightwood's Law of Mortgage (14th edn, Butterworths Law 2014), para 30.23 and the cases cited there and (ii) Beale and others (n 54), para 18.53. 180 Downsview Nominees Ltd v First City Corporation Ltd [1993] AC 295, Privy Council (appeal from the New Zealand Court of Appeal); Freeguard v Royal Bank of Scotland plc The Times, 25 April 2002 (Ch). 181 Some of the case law appears to be based on the argument that a mortgagee cannot sell to itself, for the reason that "[a] sale by a person to himself is no sale at all". Obiter dictum of Lindley LJ in Farrars v Farrars Ltd (1888) 40 ChD 395, 409. This is, strictly speaking, a nonsensical argument as the mortgagee would simply be selling the equity of redemption to itself as agent for, and therefore on behalf of, the mortgagor. The true basis of the rule, as noted in the text above, is that a sale by a mortgagee to itself pursuant to its power of sale under the mortgage is, in effect, a foreclosure without authority of the court. It also offends the broader policy against self-dealing by a fiduciary. 182 Farrars v Farrars Ltd (1888) 40 ChD 395; Tse Kwong Lam v Wong Chit Sen [1983] 3 All ER 54.

77

to a duty of the collateral-taker to value the relevant financial collateral "in accordance with the terms of the arrangement and in any event in a commercially reasonable manner". Also, in contrast to the position in relation to foreclosure, the collateral-taker does not after appropriation lose its right to claim for any deficit in relation to its claim remaining after enforcement or its obligation to account to the collateral-provider for any excess it realises over its claim after enforcement. Note that it is possible for the collateral-provider to obtain relief in respect of appropriation but it is expected that any such relief would be rare.183 In order to be able to rely on the remedy of appropriation, the 1995 Deed would need to be amended to include the right to appropriate coupled with an appropriate valuation mechanism that was commercially reasonable.

Finally, in our opinion there would be a right of set-off available under Paragraph 8(a)(ii)(B) of the 1995 Deed. In certain circumstances rights of set-off can be subject to intervening claims and the issue of set-off against a deposit that has been attached or to which an intervener has made a claim is complex, but set-off will generally be available, provided that the Secured Party and the Security Collateral Provider have agreed that the claims arising between them shall be set off, and both claims were incurred prior to the Secured Party having notice of the attachment or intervention. A judicial enforcement order which operates as a restraining injunction may prohibit the exercise of a right of set-off, unless this right is excluded from the effect of the order, as is common only in the case of freezing injunctions.184

13. Assuming that (a) pursuant to the laws of your jurisdiction, the laws of another jurisdiction govern the creation and/or perfection of a security interest in the Eligible Collateral transferred by way of security pursuant to each Security Document (for example, because such Collateral is located or deemed located outside your jurisdiction), and (b) the Secured Party has obtained a valid and perfected security interest in the Eligible Collateral under the laws of such other jurisdiction, are there any formalities, notification requirements or other procedures that the Secured Party must observe or undertake in your jurisdiction in exercising its rights as a Secured Party under each Security Document?

No.

14. Are there any laws or regulations in your jurisdiction that would limit or distinguish a creditor's enforcement rights with respect to Collateral depending on (a) the type of transaction underlying the creditor's exposure, (b) the type of Collateral or (c) the nature of the creditor or the debtor? For example, are there any types of "statutory liens" that would be deemed to take precedence over a creditor's security interest in the Collateral?

In relation to a Collateral Taker dealing with an English Company as Collateral Provider, there are no rules or regulations of the kind mentioned in clauses (a), (b) or (c) of this question. The types of Eligible Collateral involved should not have any effect on enforcement rights. There are no "statutory liens" or preferred claims in relation to a fixed charge over Eligible Collateral of the kind under review, although as discussed in the answer to question 11 above certain claims take precedence over a floating charge.

183 For example, see Cukurova Finance International Ltd v Alfa Telecom Turkey Ltd. [2013] UKPC 2 and Cukurova Finance International Limited, Cukurova Holdings A.S. v Alfa Telecom Turkey Limited [2013] UKPC 20. Relief was granted where, inter alia, the collateral-provider had tendered what would have been a valid prepayment within one month of the appropriation but the prepayment was refused, the purpose of the appropriation of the shares had primarily been to obtain control of the issuer of the shares and the valuation of the shares did not take into account the value of the control over the issuer the shares would grant. 184 Under rule 25.1(1)(f) of the Civil Procedure Rules, where a plaintiff can show a good arguable claim to be entitled to money from a defendant, and there is a real risk that the defendant will remove assets from the jurisdiction, or dispose of them so as to render them untraceable, an English court may grant an injunction, known as a "freezing injunction", to restrain the defendant from disposing of the assets or removing them from the jurisdiction. Such injunctions were previously known as "Mareva injunctions" after the case Mareva Compania Naviera SA v International Bulk Carriers SA [1975] 2 Lloyd's Rep 509.

78

15. How would your response to questions 12 to 14 change, if at all, assuming that an Event of Default exists with respect to the Secured Party rather than or in addition to the Security Collateral Provider (for example, would this affect the ability of the Secured Party to exercise its enforcement rights with respect to the Collateral)?

If an Event of Default, Relevant Event or Specified Condition is subsisting in relation to the Secured Party rather than the Security Collateral Provider, the Secured Party will be able to exercise its enforcement rights if there is also an Event of Default, Relevant Event or Specified Condition subsisting in relation to the Security Collateral Provider or an Early Termination Date has occurred or been designated as the result of an Event of Default or Specified Condition in relation to the Security Collateral Provider. In any other case, the Secured Party may not enforce its security.

Note that in these circumstances Paragraph 8(b) of the Non-IM NY Annex applies to protect the Security Collateral Provider. An equivalent provision was not considered necessary in the 1995 Deed.

79

Enforcement of rights under the Non-IM Security Documents by the Secured Party after commencement of an English insolvency proceeding in respect of an English Company

Note the additional assumption in Part III.2(k) above which applies to questions 16 to 18 below. In respect of the commencement of insolvency proceedings in England in respect of an English Branch that is providing Collateral please see Annex 1.

16. How are competing priorities between creditors determined in your jurisdiction? What conditions must be satisfied if the Secured Party's security interest is to have priority over all other claims (secured or unsecured) of an interest in the Eligible Collateral?

The English law rules relating to priorities between creditors are complex, but the basic principles are as follows:

(a) Secured claims take precedence over unsecured claims.

(b) Subject to (c) below, secured claims take priority in the order in which the security interest was created.

(c) Where there is a competition between a legal interest (including a legal security interest) and an equitable interest (including an equitable security interest), the legal interest will take precedence over the equitable interest irrespective of the time of creation, provided the legal interest was taken without knowledge of the equitable interest.

In relation to (c), a legal security interest is one where the Secured Party has a security interest coupled with legal title to the Collateral (for example, it is registered as the owner of Collateral in the form of registered securities) while an equitable security interest is one where the Secured Party has a security interest without legal title (which, instead, continues to be held by the Security Collateral Provider or is held by a third party, for example, a nominee).

For the Secured Party's security interest to have priority over all other claims (secured or unsecured), the Secured Party will need to have obtained a security interest in the relevant Collateral prior to any other security interest being created (or without knowledge of other equitable interests if the Secured Party obtains a legal security interest).

To protect against the possibility of the Secured Party's security interest being defeated by a subsequent legal interest taken without knowledge of the Secured Party's interest, the Secured Party should wherever possible obtain a legal security interest, by taking legal title. Note that in respect of intermediated securities, it may not be possible for the Secured Party to take legal title because the interest of the Security Collateral Provider is itself only an equitable interest.

In the case of securities and other investments, this will involve the Secured Party or its nominee becoming registered as the holder of the securities in the books of the issuer or the relevant clearing system, as applicable. If the Secured Party is not so registered, then it will have an equitable security interest that could lose priority to a subsequent security interest taken by a third party, where that third party, without notice of the Secured Party's prior interest, became the registered holder of the Collateral and thereby acquired a legal security interest.

80

The rule in Dearle v Hall185 governs the priority of competing assignments of a debt. Under that rule, priority goes to the first assignee to give notice to the relevant debtor of its assignment, provided that such assignee only has priority over an earlier assignee if it does not have notice of the earlier assignment. However, the rule in Dearle v Hall will not apply to Collateral delivered directly to the Secured Party or to a Custodian for the account of the Secured Party (as opposed to for the account of the Security Collateral Provider).

Please see question 11 above, as to the differences between the position in respect of a fixed charge and a floating charge.

17. Would the Secured Party's rights under each Security Document, such as the right to liquidate the Collateral, be subject to any stay or freeze or otherwise be affected by commencement of the insolvency (that is, how does the institution of an insolvency proceeding change your responses to questions 12 and 13 above, if at all)?

Where an English Company is or is likely to become unable to pay its debts within the meaning of the Insolvency Act 1986, the court may make an administration order or one of the out-of-court routes into administration may be used by the holder of a qualifying floating charge or the shareholders or directors of a company. An administrator may be appointed by a qualifying floating charge holder on the basis that its security is enforceable, even if a party is not, or is not likely to become, unable to pay its debts.

The statutory purposes of administration are set out in a three-part test in paragraph 3(1) of Schedule B1 to the Insolvency Act 1986. The primary objective of administration is to rescue the company as a going concern. The secondary objective is to achieve a better result for the company's creditors as a whole than would be likely if the company were wound up (without going into administration) if the primary objective is not reasonably practicable or the secondary objective would achieve a better result for the creditors as a whole. The third objective, which only applies if neither of the other two objectives is reasonably practicable to achieve, is to realise property in order to make a distribution to one or more of the secured or preferential creditors but without "unnecessarily harming" the interests of the creditors of the company as a whole. The emphasis of the statutory purpose of administration is the rescue of the company in all cases – the enforcement of security is subordinate to this primary objective.

When an administrator is appointed, or in some cases at an earlier stage in the procedure, among other things no resolution may be passed or order made for the winding up of the company, no steps may be taken to enforce any security over the company's property, and no other proceedings and no execution or other legal process may be commenced or continued except with the leave of the court or the administrator's consent.

This would not prevent, however, the designation (or deemed occurrence) of an Early Termination Date under Section 6(a) of the ISDA Master Agreement or the operation of the close-out netting provisions of Section 6(e), even if the relevant Event of Default occurred after the date on which the administrator is appointed or the earlier date of this moratorium. This would also not prevent the exercise of contractual rights of set-off (see also the answer to question 26 in Part VI below in the context of the Transfer Annexes). This is because the close-out netting provisions are not a "proceeding", "execution" or "legal process" in the sense intended in paragraphs 43 and 44 of Schedule B1, but rather a contractual self-help remedy not involving court or arbitral process.186

185 (1828) 3 Russ 1; 38 ER 475 LC; [1824-34] All ER Rep 28. The rule in Dearle v Hall was enacted in statutory form in section 137(1) of the Law of Property Act 1925. 186 See Re Paramount Airways Ltd [1990] BCC 130; Re Olympia & York Canary Wharf Ltd [1993] B.C.C. 154.

81

Moreover, regulation 8 of the FCA Regulations disapplies the administration stay on enforcement of security in relation to any security financial collateral arrangement. Accordingly, a Non-IM Security Document will not be subject to the administration stay if it is a security financial collateral arrangement as discussed in Part II above.

Prior to the enactment of the Enterprise Act 2002 a secured creditor holding security over substantially all of the assets of the company, where such security included a floating charge, could block the appointment of an administrator and appoint an administrative receiver instead. This would not have applied in the case of the Non-IM Security Documents (assuming that the Eligible Collateral provided by the Security Collateral Provider does not comprise substantially all its assets). In any event, the Enterprise Act 2002 has severely restricted the circumstances in which a secured creditor could appoint an administrative receiver in order to prevent the appointment of an administrator. The statutory moratorium does not apply to administrative receivership.

A CVA binds all unsecured creditors but cannot affect the right of a secured creditor to enforce its security except with such creditor's consent. However, under section 1A and Schedule A1 of the Insolvency Act 1986 the directors of an "eligible company" may obtain a moratorium on creditor action, including the enforcement of claims against the company, in order to put together a proposal for a voluntary arrangement. The moratorium is for an initial period of up to 28 days with the option for the creditors to extend the moratorium for up to a further two months. An eligible company is a "small company", that is, a company that satisfies two out of three of various statutory size limitations set out in section 382(3) of the Companies Act 2006, subject to various exclusions from eligibility. The exclusions are designed to protect the financial markets, including deposit taking institutions, parties to various types of financial market contracts (essentially, contracts related to organised exchanges and clearing houses), and participants in payment and securities settlement systems.

Regulation 8 of the FCA Regulations also disapplies the moratorium described above in relation to any security financial collateral arrangement. Accordingly, a Non-IM Security Document will not be subject to the moratorium if it is a security financial collateral arrangement as discussed in Part II above.

Where the location of the Collateral is outside England but within the territory of a member state of the EU, the Recast Insolvency Regulation may be relevant to this question. The effect of the Recast Insolvency Regulation is discussed below at question 20.

18. Will the Security Collateral Provider (or its administrator, provisional liquidator, conservator, receiver, trustee, custodian or other similar official) be able to recover any transfers of Collateral made to the Secured Party during a certain "suspect period" preceding the date of the insolvency as a result of such a transfer constituting a "preference" (however called and whether or not fraudulent) in favour of the Secured Party or on any other basis? If so, how long before the insolvency does this suspect period begin? If such a period exists, would the substitution of Collateral by a Counterparty during this period invalidate an otherwise valid security interest if the substitute Collateral is of no greater value than the assets it is replacing? Would the posting of additional Collateral pursuant to the mark-to- market provisions (or the IM calculation provisions in the case of the IM Security Documents) of the Security Documents during the suspect period be subject to avoidance, either because the Collateral was considered to relate to an antecedent or pre-existing obligation or for some other reason?

82

Under the Insolvency Act 1986, a transaction may, by order of the court, be set aside or modified in the case of a winding-up or administration of a company:

(a) under section 238 (and related provisions), if (1) it constitutes a transaction at an undervalue with a person (that is, a gift to that person or a transaction under which the consideration received by the company is worth significantly less than the consideration given by the company to the other person), (2) the company is insolvent under the relevant test for insolvency in the Insolvency Act 1986 at the time of the transaction or is rendered insolvent by the transaction (this will be presumed to be the case unless the contrary is shown in relation to a transaction at an undervalue with a connected person), and (3) the transaction was entered into (i) within a prescribed period prior to the onset of insolvency (two years, regardless of whether or not the transaction is with a connected person), (ii) between the making of an administration application and the making of an administration order on that application, or (iii) between the filing with the court of a copy of the notice of intention to appoint an administrator under paragraph 14 or 22 of Schedule B1 and the making of an appointment under that paragraph;

(b) under section 239 (and related provisions), if (1) it constitutes a preference given to a person (which will only be the case if the company, in deciding to enter into the transaction, is influenced by a desire to put that person in a better position in the event of the company's going into insolvent liquidation than it would otherwise have been in), (2) the company is insolvent under the relevant test for insolvency in the Insolvency Act 1986 at the time of the transaction or is rendered insolvent by the transaction, and (3) the transaction was entered into in the same periods as apply to section 238 (except that the prescribed period in (i) is two years in the case of a preference given to a connected person and six months in any other case); or

(c) under section 423 (and related provisions), if it constitutes a transaction at an undervalue entered into intentionally to prejudice creditors other than the person benefiting from the transaction (note that, in the case of these provisions, there is no prescribed period and no requirement that the company be, or be made by the transaction, insolvent at the relevant time). Note that an administrative receiver could potentially bring an action under section 423 of the Insolvency Act 1986 as agent for the English Company (as the victim).187

These rules may affect:

(i) improvements in the value of Collateral for existing Transactions pursuant to a substitution (as a result of the substituted Collateral being more valuable than the Collateral it replaces); and

(ii) the provision of additional Collateral to maintain the required amount of Collateral in respect of Transactions that were in existence before the provision of the additional Collateral (that is, in commercial parlance, "top-up Collateral").

In relation to (i), Paragraph 4(d) of each Non-IM Security Document contemplates that the Security Collateral Provider will provide Substitute Credit Support (or, in the case of the VM NY Annex, Substitute Credit Support (VM)) of a value equivalent to the original Posted Credit Support (or, in the case of the VM NY Annex, Posted Credit Support (VM)) being replaced. It is, of course, possible that the Security Collateral Provider could provide Substitute Credit Support (or Substitute Credit Support (VM)) of a value greater than the

187 See Insolvency Act 1986, s 424(1)(c) and Sch 1, para 5.

83

original Posted Credit Support (or Posted Credit Support (VM)). If it can be established that in so doing the Security Collateral Provider was influenced by a desire to improve the position of the Secured Party in the event of the Security Collateral Provider's insolvent liquidation, then this could constitute a preference if the other conditions referred to in (b) above are also present.

In relation to (ii), the provision of additional Eligible Collateral would be required by Paragraph 3(a) of each Non-IM Security Document, and the Security Collateral Provider must comply in order to avoid a default. It is therefore unlikely that a court would find this arrangement preferential, even if the other conditions referred to in (b) above are present. For support for this view, see Re MC Bacon Ltd.188 Of course, it is conceivable that this fact pattern could give rise to a preference if the intention of the Security Collateral Provider was in fact to prefer one creditor over another (for example, if there were two Non-IM Security Documents each of which required the provision of top-up Collateral).

In the case of a transaction at an undervalue under (a) or (c) above, the Court of Appeal held in the case of Hill v Spread Trustee Company189 that the giving of security for an existing debt may be a transaction at an undervalue that can be set aside on the borrower's insolvency. This is notwithstanding that the grant of security does not actually deplete the assets of an insolvent chargor. Nevertheless, it is our view on the basis of our assumptions that the grant of security under the Non-IM Security Documents would be unlikely to constitute a transaction at an undervalue (although in relation to (i), if the Security Collateral Provider provides Substitute Credit Support (or Substitute Credit Support (VM)) of a value greater than the original Posted Credit Support (or Posted Credit Support (VM)) then this would potentially be problematic).

Section 244 of the Insolvency Act 1986 makes provision for the avoidance of certain transactions entered into by a company that are or were extortionate, within a period of three years prior to a company entering administration or the company going into liquidation. We believe that this rule is highly unlikely to apply to the Non-IM Security Documents on the assumptions we have been asked to make.

Finally, under section 245 of the Insolvency Act 1986, a separate avoidance provision applies to floating charges. In the answer to question 11 above, we considered whether the Non-IM Security Documents could constitute a floating charge. If a Non-IM Security Document were to be construed as a floating charge by an English court, section 245 provides that a floating charge is invalid if:

(i) the chargor is insolvent under the relevant test for insolvency in the Insolvency Act 1986 at the time of creation of the charge or becomes insolvent as a result of that transaction, although insolvency at the time of the creation of the charge is not a requirement for charges created in favour of connected persons; and

(ii) the charge is created:

(w) in the case of a charge which is created in favour of a person who is connected with the company, in the period of 2 years ending with the onset of insolvency; or

188 [1990] BCC 78. 189 [2006] EWCA Civ 542. While the decision in the Spread Trustee case considers transactions at an undervalue in the context of section 423, it is also relevant in the context of section 238.

84

(x) in the case of a charge which is created in favour of any other person, in the period of 12 months ending with the onset of insolvency; or

(y) in either case, at a time between the making of an administration application in respect of the company and the making of an administration order on that application; or

(z) in either case, at a time between the filing with the court of a copy of a notice of intention to appoint an administrator under paragraph 14 or 22 of Schedule B1 and the making of an appointment under that paragraph,

except that the charge is valid for money paid, the value of goods and services supplied or the discharge or reduction of the debt at or after the creation, and in consideration, of the floating charge, plus contractual interest.

The general effect of section 245 is that a floating charge for "new money" (that is, a new extension of credit at the time the floating charge is entered into) is not invalidated to the extent of the "new money" (or extension of credit) provided, but may be invalidated if granted for pre-existing debt if the tests in (i) and (ii) above are satisfied.

The effect of this in relation to the ISDA Master Agreement and a Non-IM Security Document is that if a Non-IM Security Document were characterised as a floating charge, the security interest under the Non-IM Security Document might be invalidated on the above-mentioned principles in respect of Transactions in existence at the time the Non-IM Security Document was executed but would probably survive in respect of Transactions entered into at or after the time the Non-IM Security Document was executed.

As briefly noted in our response to question 11, regulation 10(5) of the FCA Regulations disapplies section 245 in respect of any security financial collateral arrangement. Accordingly, a Non-IM Security Document that is a floating charge (e.g. because the right of substitution is not subject to the consent of the Secured Party) will not be subject to section 245 if it is a security financial collateral arrangement as discussed in Part II above.

Additional issues

19. Would the parties' agreement on governing law of each Security Document and submission to jurisdiction be upheld in your jurisdiction, and what would be the consequences if they were not?

Parties agreement on governing law

As a general rule, English law respects commercial parties' choice of law in respect of their contractual obligations whether the law chosen is English or foreign. Slightly different rules apply, however, depending on whether English or New York law is chosen as the governing law and when the ISDA Master Agreement and Non-IM Security Document was entered into.

The law applicable to a contract entered into after 1 April 1991 but prior to 17 December 2009 where there is a choice between the laws of different countries is determined by the Contracts (Applicable Law) Act 1990, which substantially incorporates the Rome Convention into English law.190 The law applicable to a contract entered into on or after 17 December

190 Convention on the law applicable to contractual obligations opened for signature in Rome on 19 June 1980. Some contractual obligations are outside the scope of (i) the Rome Convention (and therefore outside the scope of the Contracts (Applicable Law) Act 1990) and (ii) Rome I.

85

2009 where there is a choice between the laws of different countries is determined by Rome I. We discuss below the position under Rome I.

Rome I gives commercial parties the freedom to choose the law that applies to the contract - Rome I provides that the choice must be "made expressly or clearly demonstrated".191

A choice of (i) New York law as the governing law of the ISDA Master Agreement (and therefore the Non-IM NY Annex which forms part of the ISDA Master Agreement) or (ii) English law as the governing law of the 1995 Deed would normally be upheld by the English courts. However, where all the other elements relevant to the situation at the time of the choice are connected with one country only, the fact that the parties have chosen New York law or English law will not prejudice the application of any rules of law under the laws of that other country which cannot be derogated from by contract.192 It should also be noted that in relation to the manner of performance and the steps to be taken in the event of defective performance, the English court may have regard to the law of the country in which performance takes place.193 The English court may also give effect to the overriding mandatory provisions of the law of the country where the obligations arising out of the ISDA Master Agreement and the Non-IM Security Document have to be or have been performed, insofar as those overriding mandatory provisions render the performance of the contract unlawful.194 The chosen law may not be applied to determine certain questions in relation to the existence and validity (including formal validity) of the ISDA Master Agreement and Non-IM Security Document or any term of it.

Furthermore, in respect of a New York law governed ISDA Master Agreement and the Non- IM NY Annex, where all other elements relevant to the situation at the time of the choice are located in one or more EU member states, the fact that the parties have chosen New York law as the governing law of the ISDA Master Agreement (and therefore the Non-IM NY Annex) will not prejudice the application of provisions of European Union law, where appropriate as implemented in England, which cannot be derogated from by contract.195 Another exception is that the choice of New York law will not restrict the application of overriding mandatory provisions of English law.196 The chosen law (or a rule of that law) may also be disapplied if its application would be manifestly incompatible with the public policy of English law.197

We know no reason under the current laws of England as to why the choice of New York law as the governing law of an ISDA Master Agreement and the Non-IM NY Annex should be contrary to English public policy or incompatible with the mandatory rules of the laws of England.198

It is difficult to envisage a practical example where the English courts would entirely refuse to uphold an express choice of English law in respect of the 1995 Deed or New York law in respect of an ISDA Master Agreement and Non-IM NY Annex. A more likely scenario is that the effect of a contract might be modified, or the chosen law displaced, by overriding rules of foreign (or English law) which apply pursuant to the rules outlined above.

191 Rome I, art 3(1). 192 Rome I, art 3(3). 193 ibid, art 12(2). 194 ibid, art 9(3). 195 ibid, art 3(4). 196 ibid, art 9(2). 197 ibid, art 21. 198 The question as to whether any term of New York law (as opposed to the choice of New York law) is contrary to English public policy or incompatible with the mandatory rules of the laws of England is outside the scope of this memorandum.

86

Note that we give no opinion on whether the choice of law will be upheld as a valid choice by the courts of England if any contractual obligation arising is outside the scope of Rome I.

Submission to jurisdiction – 1995 Deed

The submission in the 1995 Deed of the parties to the jurisdiction of the English courts is effective. However, an English court may decline jurisdiction or stay or dismiss proceedings before it if it considers that:

(i) it is not the appropriate forum;

(ii) earlier or concurrent proceedings (including related proceedings) have been commenced elsewhere or the claimant has waived its right to rely on the jurisdiction clause;

(iii) another court has exclusive jurisdiction under Regulation (EU) No 1215/2012199, the Brussels Convention of 1968 or the Lugano Convention of 2007 (each as enacted into English law) or any other international or European regulations or conventions or as otherwise provided for under the Civil Jurisdiction and Judgments Act 1982; or

(iv) there is no effective jurisdiction agreement between the parties.

The jurisdiction clause in the 1995 Deed states that "With respect to any suit, action or proceedings relating to this Deed, each party irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of the English courts". Under Regulation (EU) No 1215/2012 or the Lugano Convention of 2007 unless the parties have specified that a jurisdiction clause is non-exclusive, the submission is generally deemed to be exclusive.200 The Brussels Convention now has a limited scope of applicability. Under the common law, if applicable, whether or not the submission to the jurisdiction in the 1995 Deed is exclusive is a question of construction.

Submission to jurisdiction – Non-IM NY Annex

In respect of a New York law governed ISDA Master Agreement (and therefore the Non-IM NY Annex), an English court will generally respect the submission by the parties to the jurisdiction of the New York courts. However, an English court may accept jurisdiction or refuse to stay or dismiss proceedings before it in relation to a New York law governed ISDA Master Agreement and Non-IM NY Annex if it considers that:

(i) it is the appropriate forum to hear the proceedings;

(ii) the defendant has taken steps in the proceedings or otherwise waived its right to rely on the jurisdiction clause;

(iii) it has jurisdiction under Regulation (EU) No 1215/2012, the Brussels Convention of 1968 or the Lugano Convention of 2007 (each as enacted into English law) or any other international or European regulations or conventions or as otherwise provided for under the Civil Jurisdiction and Judgments Act 1982 and, moreover, if it has jurisdiction under these instruments, there may be circumstances where it has no discretion to decline jurisdiction or, if it does have a discretion, where it may nevertheless decide to hear the proceedings; or

199 The Recast Brussels Regulation. 200 Article 25(1) of the Recast Brussels Regulation provides in relation to an Article 25 jurisdiction clause ''Such jurisdiction shall be exclusive unless the parties have agreed otherwise.''

87

(iv) there is no effective jurisdiction agreement between the parties.

Consequences if the parties' agreement on the governing law and their submission to jurisdiction were not upheld by an English court

Subject to the discussions above, if the parties' agreement on the governing law and their submission to jurisdiction were not upheld, the relevant Non-IM Security Document would have to be examined by an English court on the basis of English law.

20. Are there any other local law considerations that you would recommend the Secured Party to consider in connection with taking and realizing upon the Eligible Collateral from the Security Collateral Provider?

The Recast Insolvency Regulation

The Recast Insolvency Regulation applies to insolvency proceedings opened from 26 June 2017 replacing the EC Insolvency Regulation.201 Being a Regulation (rather than a Directive), it has direct applicability in all European Union member states202 without the need for implementing legislation, other than in Denmark, which opted out of relevant sections of the various European Treaties. The Recast Insolvency Regulation prevails over conflicting domestic legislation.

The Recast Insolvency Regulation applies to public collective proceedings, including interim proceedings, which are based on laws relating to insolvency and in which, for the purpose of rescue, adjustment of debt, reorganisation or liquidation: (a) a debtor is totally or partially divested of its assets and an insolvency practitioner is appointed; (b) the assets and affairs of a debtor are subject to control or supervision by a court; or (c) a temporary stay of individual enforcement proceedings is granted by a court or by operation of law, in order to allow for negotiations between the debtor and its creditors, provided that the proceedings in which the stay is granted provide for suitable measures to protect the general body of creditors, and, where no agreement is reached, are preliminary to one of the proceedings referred to in point (a) or (b).203 The relevant insolvency proceedings are set out at Annex A to the Recast Insolvency Regulation by reference to each member state and, in respect of an English Company, include compulsory liquidation, creditors' voluntary liquidation, administration and CVAs.

The Recast Insolvency Regulation applies to natural persons or legal persons other than credit institutions (banks and building societies), insurance undertakings, investment firms and other firms, institutions and undertakings to the extent they are covered by the Winding Up Directive (as defined below at paragraph 2.4 of Annex 1) and collective investment undertakings.204 Credit institutions, certain investment undertakings and insurance undertakings are the subject of separate European Directives with similar provisions. Note that certain group companies of such entities may also be subject to the separate regime (as discussed at Annex 4).

201 Council Regulation 1346/2000/EC on insolvency proceedings [2000] OJ L160/1. See note 30. 202 The member states of the European Union are: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Republic of Cyprus, the Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, the Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden and the United Kingdom. In relation to role of the Recast Insolvency Regulation in the allocation of jurisdiction between the countries of the United Kingdom see Bank Leumi (UK) Plc v Screw Conveyor Ltd [2017] CSOH 129. 203 The Recast Insolvency Regulation, art 1(1) and recitals (9)-(20). 204 ibid, art 1(2).

88

The Recast Insolvency Regulation is not intended to achieve a wholesale harmonisation of insolvency laws but instead to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of insolvency proceedings with a European cross-border element.

Where the Recast Insolvency Regulation applies, it will determine the European Union member state(s) in which insolvency proceedings can be commenced and the law that will generally govern those insolvency proceedings (subject to a number of exceptions). It envisages three different types of insolvency proceedings:

(a) "Main insolvency proceedings" (of which there can only be one set within the European Union) can be opened in the member state in which the debtor has its COMI. The legal effects of the main insolvency proceedings must be recognised in all other member states (unless "secondary insolvency proceedings" have been commenced in that member state). The office-holder appointed in the main insolvency proceedings must also be recognised and will be able to exercise his or her powers in other member states without the need for a further court order.

(b) "Secondary insolvency proceedings" can be opened in any member state in which the debtor has an "establishment" (see below). The effects of these types of proceedings will be limited to the assets in the member state where the secondary insolvency proceedings are opened.

(c) It may be possible to commence insolvency proceedings on the basis of an establishment before the main insolvency proceedings have been opened in which case the proceedings are referred to as "territorial insolvency proceedings". For example, territorial insolvency proceedings can be opened if a local creditor of the establishment so requests or where main insolvency proceedings cannot be opened under the law of the member state where the debtor has his centre of main interests. Territorial insolvency proceedings become secondary insolvency proceedings when main insolvency proceedings are subsequently opened.

Once it has been determined where insolvency proceedings should be commenced, the Recast Insolvency Regulation will also determine which law should apply in those proceedings. The general choice of law rule under the Recast Insolvency Regulation is that the law of the member state in which proceedings are opened will generally determine all the effects of those proceedings including the conditions for opening the proceedings, their conduct and closure. However, certain exceptions to this general rule (including for rights in rem (discussed further below) and set-off) are intended to "protect legitimate expectations and the certainty of transactions in member states". There are also provisions to regulate and co- ordinate parallel main and secondary insolvency proceedings in different member states. In particular, Article 36 of the Recast Insolvency Regulation formally provides "synthetic secondary proceedings" as a way of avoiding secondary insolvency proceedings pursuant to which the insolvency practitioner in the main insolvency proceedings gives an undertaking to comply with distribution and priority rights under national law that creditors would have if secondary insolvency proceedings were opened in the relevant member state.

The expressions "centre of main interests" and "establishment" referred to above are obviously key as they will determine whether insolvency proceedings can be commenced in a particular member state. The first test is to establish whether the COMI is in the European Union at all. If it is, it will be possible to commence main insolvency proceedings in the member state in which the debtor has its COMI and secondary (or, in certain limited cases, territorial) insolvency proceedings in any member state in which the debtor has an establishment.

89

Article 3(1) states that "[t]he centre of main interests shall be the place where the debtor conducts the administration of his interests on a regular basis and which is ascertainable by third parties". There is a rebuttable presumption in Article 3(1), in the case of a company, that the COMI is the place of the registered office.205

Prior to the EC Insolvency Regulation, it was generally believed that the English court did not have jurisdiction to make an administration order in relation to a company incorporated outside of England (unless that company was incorporated in a "relevant" country or territory - broadly commonwealth jurisdictions - and a request for assistance was made by the foreign court under section 426 of the Insolvency Act 1986). Cases decided since the EC Insolvency Regulation came into effect suggested that this had changed.206 The position was clarified by the Insolvency Act 1986 (Amendment) Regulations 2005,207 and a company incorporated in an EEA State other than the United Kingdom or a company not incorporated in an EEA State but having its centre of main interests in a member state other than Denmark may be placed into administration.

The Recast Insolvency Regulation introduces, at Chapter 5, a new framework for cooperation between insolvency practitioners, between courts and between insolvency practitioners and courts dealing with the insolvency of a corporate group and a procedure for the coordination of the insolvency proceedings across member states. If certain criteria are met, under Article 60 of the Regulation insolvency officeholders have a right to request "a stay of any measure related to the realisation of assets" in any relevant insolvency proceedings concerning any other group company by means of making an application to the local court. While the scope of the stay which may be requested is not clear, recital 69 indicates that any stay of enforcement proceedings granted under the provisions of the Regulation (which would include a stay requested under Article 60) should not affect the rights in rem of creditors or third parties, which rights should include most types of security rights. We note that the insolvency officeholder requesting the stay would need to demonstrate to the local court that, among other things, (i) there is a proposed restructuring plan for all or some members of the group for which insolvency proceedings have been opened which has a reasonable chance of success, (ii) the plan would be to the benefit of the creditors (which may include secured creditors) in the proceedings for which the stay is requested and (iii) the stay is necessary in order to ensure the proper implementation of the restructuring plan.

The Recast Insolvency Regulation does not have a material adverse impact on the collateral arrangements discussed in this memorandum, but is relevant, as outlined above, to the English private international law analysis of a security financial collateral arrangement in the context of a cross-border insolvency.

We have assumed, for the purposes of this memorandum, that each English Counterparty has its COMI in England for the purposes of the Recast Insolvency Regulation, where it applies. In relation to an English Company, therefore, the location of the main insolvency proceedings will be England and English law will govern those proceedings. As discussed above, however, the application of English law is subject to certain derogations one of which is particularly relevant208 in the context of our analysis of the enforceability of the Non-IM Security Documents against an English Company as set out in this Part III: Article 8 (Third

205 The Recast Insolvency Regulation makes changes designed to mitigate the risk of fraudulent or abusive "forum shopping" by providing that the presumption as to COMI being in the place of the registered office of a company shall not apply if the registered office has been moved to another member state within the 3-month period prior to the request for the opening of insolvency proceedings (Article 3(1)). 206 Re Enron Directo SA (Ch, 4 July 2002) and Re Brac Rent-A-Car International Inc [2003] 2 All ER 201. 207 SI 2005/879. 208 Other derogations that may be relevant to the issues considered in this memorandum include Article 9 (Set-off), Article 16 (Detrimental acts) and Article 17 (Protection of third-party purchasers).

90

parties' rights in rem) of the Recast Insolvency Regulation states that "[t]he opening of insolvency proceedings shall not affect the rights in rem of creditors or third parties in respect of tangible or intangible, moveable or immoveable assets, both specific assets and collections of indefinite assets as a whole which change from time to time, belonging to the debtor which are situated within the territory of another Member State at the time of the opening of proceedings." Article 8(2) clarifies that the rights referred to shall, in particular, mean the right to dispose of assets to obtain satisfaction from the proceeds of or income from those assets, by virtue of a lien or mortgage. Accordingly, where the location209 of the Collateral is outside England but within the territory of another member state, the adverse effects of English insolvency law on the rights in rem of the Collateral Taker will be avoided, although Article 8(4) expressly preserves actions for voidness, voidability or unenforceability of legal acts detrimental to the general body of creditors. In particular, this means that the stay on enforcement in administration under Schedule B1 to the Insolvency Act 1986 and under Schedule A1 of the Insolvency Act 1986, in relation to a CVA, will not be relevant.

The Cross-Border Insolvency Regulations

The Cross-Border Insolvency Regulations 2006210 (the Cross-Border Insolvency Regulations) implement the UNCITRAL Model Law on Cross-Border Insolvency into English law. As with the Recast Insolvency Regulation, the scope excludes certain entities including certain credit institutions (banks and building societies) and insurers.

Under the Cross-Border Insolvency Regulations a foreign representative may apply to the English courts for recognition of the foreign insolvency proceedings in which the foreign representative has been appointed. The foreign insolvency proceedings may be foreign main proceedings taken in the state in which the debtor has its centre of main interests or foreign non-main proceedings taking place in a state in which the debtor has an establishment.

Upon recognition of foreign main proceedings being granted there is an automatic stay on (i) the commencement or continuation of actions or proceedings concerning the debtor's assets, rights, obligations or liabilities; (ii) execution against the debtor's assets; and (iii) the transfer, encumbering or other disposal of the debtor's assets. However, the stay, among other things, (i) does not affect the right to enforce security so long as such rights could be exercised in a winding up in England; (ii) does not prevent the commencement of insolvency proceedings in England although such proceedings would be limited to assets in England; and (iii) is subject to the discretion of the court to modify or terminate the stay.

In addition to the automatic stay, discretionary relief may be granted in respect of main and non-main proceedings but the relief granted should be that which would be available to a court when dealing with domestic insolvency.211 In addition, no relief may be granted that would be prohibited under Part 3 of the FCA Regulations (Modification of insolvency law) in an English insolvency or would interfere with or be inconsistent with any rights of a collateral-taker under Part 4 of the FCA Regulations (Right of use and appropriation).212

209 In respect of the determination of location of Collateral for the purpose of the Recast Insolvency Regulation please refer to the discussion in our answer to question 2 of this Part. 210 SI 2006/1030. 211 Fibria Celulose S/A v Pan Ocean Co. Ltd [2014] EWHC 2124 (Ch). 212 The Cross-Border Insolvency Regulations, sch 1, art (1)(4) (which contains the UNCITRAL Model Law with certain modifications to adapt it for application in Great Britain). See also the discussion of regulation 15A of the FCA Regulations below.

91

Section 426 of the Insolvency Act 1986

Section 426 of the Insolvency Act 1986 also gives the English courts discretion to give assistance (applying either the English law or the foreign insolvency law) to certain designated countries. Regulation 15A of the FCA Regulations provides that a court shall not, in pursuance of section 426 of the Insolvency Act 1986 or any other enactment or rule of law, recognise or give effect to (a) any order made by a foreign court exercising jurisdiction in relation to insolvency law or (b) any act of a person appointed in such foreign country to discharge any functions under insolvency law in so far as the making of the order or the doing of the act would be prohibited by Part 3 of the FCA Regulations in the case of an English court or a relevant office holder. This provision appears to be intended to ensure that an insolvency order made by a foreign court, or an act by a foreign insolvency officeholder, cannot be enforced by a UK court if such an order or act could not be made by a UK court or office-holder in similar circumstances. However, there may be issues in working out whether the order or act would not have been available to a UK court or office-holder in similar circumstances as this will involve considering whether the foreign insolvency law provisions in question are analogous to the English insolvency law provisions that have been disapplied by the FCA Regulations. If the UK court concludes that they are, no assistance may be granted pursuant to section 426 of the Insolvency Act 1986 (or pursuant to the relevant provisions for recognising foreign insolvency judgments) and so the FCA Regulations may be of assistance. It is worth noting, however, that there is no case law yet on how Regulation 15A would be applied in practice.

Recognition of foreign judgments

The English regime for the recognition of foreign judgments may also be relevant. A foreign judgment would, of course, have no direct operation in England. However, a monetary judgment (i.e. a judgment requiring a party to pay a particular sum of money) would generally be enforceable, subject to certain conditions, in England by action at common law or under a relevant statutory provision by a more direct process of registration, for example under the Administration of Justice Act 1920 or the Foreign Judgments (Reciprocal Enforcement) Act 1933. The latter route is only available to certain countries, different statutes applying for historical reasons to different countries, primarily Commonwealth and European countries. If no statutory provision exists (for example, as is the case in relation to the United States), then the judgment must be enforced under common law principles. Whether a judgment from a country that can be registered under a statutory procedure can instead be enforced under the common law will depend on the relevant jurisdiction as some statutes are the exclusive means of enforcement whilst others may not be.

In these regards we draw your attention to assumptions (k) and (l) in Part I.3 above.

21. Are there any other circumstances you can foresee that might affect the Secured Party's ability to enforce its security interest in your jurisdiction?

No.

92

IV. SECURITY INTEREST – IM SECURITY DOCUMENTS

1. Introduction

By reference to Part III, in this Part IV we consider issues relating to the creation, perfection, and enforcement against an English Company of a security interest created in respect of Collateral delivered under each of the IM Security Documents under fact patterns (a) and (b) as set out in Part I.4 of this memorandum.

Our conclusions in this respect in relation to an English Company apply in relation to:

(a) an English Bank, as modified and supplemented by Annex 1;

(b) an English Investment Firm, as modified and supplemented by Annex 2;

(c) an English Building Society, as modified and supplemented by Annex 3;

(d) a Banking Group Company or Bank Holding Company, as modified and supplemented by Annex 4;

(e) the Trustee of an English Trust (other than the Trustee of an English Charitable Trust, an English Pension Fund, an English Authorised Unit Trust or any English Trust excluded from the scope of this memorandum under Part I.2(b) above), as modified and supplemented by Annex 5;

(f) a Friendly Society, as modified and supplemented by Annex 6;

(g) a C/CB Society, as modified and supplemented by Annex 7;

(h) a Statutory Corporation, as modified and supplemented by Annex 8;

(i) a Chartered Corporation, as modified and supplemented by Annex 9;

(j) an English Insurance Company, as modified and supplemented by Annex 10;

(k) Standard Chartered Bank, as modified and supplemented by Annex 11;

(l) an English Charity acting through the Trustee of an English Charitable Trust, as modified and supplemented by Annex 12;

(m) an English Charity established in one of the other forms indicated above, as modified and supplemented by Annex 13;

(n) the Trustee of an English Pension Fund, as modified and supplemented by Annex 14;

(o) an English Investment Fund that is an Open-Ended Investment Company, as modified and supplemented by Annex 15;

(p) an English Investment Fund acting through the Trustee of an Authorised Unit Trust, as modified and supplemented by Annex 16; and

(q) an English Partnership, as modified and supplemented by Annex 17.

93

This Part IV does not apply in respect of the Bank of England or the United Kingdom acting through Her Majesty's Treasury.

In this Part IV we also consider issues relating to the creation, perfection and enforcement of a security interest created in respect of Collateral delivered under each of the IM Security Documents by a Foreign Entity where the Collateral is located in England under fact pattern (c) as set out in Part I.4 of this memorandum.

We also consider at Parts IV.4 and IV.5 the impact of the inclusion of the IM NY Annex Japanese Amendments and the IM Deed Japanese Amendments in the relevant IM Security Document on our conclusions in Part II and Part IV.3.

2. Assumptions

For the purpose of this Part IV, in addition to the assumptions set out at Part I.3, you have asked us to make the assumptions set out in Part III, provided that references in those assumptions to the Non-IM Security Documents should be read for the purposes of this Part IV as references to the IM Security Documents (or an IM Security Document, according to context), except as modified and supplemented below:

(a) Each IM Security Document could be entered into in connection with either a New York law or English law governed ISDA Master Agreement and may be subject to a different governing law than the relevant ISDA Master Agreement (depending on whether the parties choose to align the governing law of the IM Security Document to (i) the location of the relevant Segregated Account; or (ii) the governing law of the ISDA Master Agreement). The IM NY Annex forms a part of the relevant ISDA Master Agreement and therefore in respect of an IM NY Annex entered into in connection with an English law governed ISDA Master Agreement, the parties will provide in Paragraph 13 of the IM NY Annex that the Annex is governed by and construed in accordance with New York law. The parties may also enter into separate IM Security Documents in respect of each collateral posting leg or may enter into arrangements described in Part V instead of entering into an IM Security Document in respect of a posting leg.213

(b) Both parties will be required to post Collateral to the other (either under the same IM Security Document or under separate IM Security Documents or the parties may enter into arrangements described in Part V instead of entering into an IM Security Document in respect of a posting leg) in an amount that depends on the IM calculation provisions. For the sake of simplicity we only consider the Collateral posting leg of one party – issues relating to the insolvency of the Collateral Taker in the context of the IM Security Documents are considered in the ISDA Collateral Taker Opinion.

(c) We assume that at least one party is subject to a regulatory requirement to post or collect initial margin with respect to derivatives or swaps.

(d) If the IM Security Document is an IM NY Annex, it would, when duly entered into, constitute legal, valid and binding obligations of each party under New York law.

213 This Part IV relates only to the IM Security Documents – see Part V in respect of the Clearing System IM Documents.

94

(e) Eligible Collateral consisting of debt or equity securities shall be in the form of intermediated securities in an account with a financial intermediary pursuant to assumption (f) below.214

(f) The Collateral provided under the IM Security Document is held in a cash or securities account (as applicable) (a Segregated Account) with a third party custodian (a Custodian (IM)) where (x) the Custodian (IM) holds the Collateral in the Collateral Provider's name pursuant to a custodial agreement between the Collateral Provider and the Custodian (IM); (y) the Segregated Account is used exclusively for the Collateral provided by the Collateral Provider in respect of the IM Security Document; and (z) the Collateral Provider, the Collateral Taker and the Custodian (IM) have entered into an agreement (which may be a separate control agreement or may be part of the custodial agreement) under which the Collateral Taker is able to issue instructions in respect of the Collateral to the Custodian (IM) in certain circumstances.

The agreement described at (z) above is referred to as the Control Agreement in the IM Security Documents and we assume that the Control Agreement constitutes legal, valid and binding obligations under its governing law and each party has duly authorised, executed and delivered, and has the capacity to enter into, the Control Agreement. For the avoidance of doubt we have not reviewed any particular Control Agreement for the purpose of giving this opinion.

(g) The Custodian (IM) will comply with its obligations and is not subject to any insolvency proceedings or resolution action and the Collateral is segregated from the proprietary assets of the Custodian (IM) in accordance with applicable law.

3. Questions relating to the IM Security Documents

Would any of the responses to questions 1 through 21 in Part III of this memorandum differ if such questions were asked in respect of the IM Security Documents and the assumptions set out above?

We set out each of the questions below and state where our conclusions would differ in respect of the IM Security Documents or otherwise state "As per Part III of this memorandum". Note that the holding structure for IM Security Documents is different and so our answers to Part III of this memorandum should be read with this fact in mind. Similarly any defined terms used in our answers in Part III of this memorandum that do not appear in the IM Security Documents should be read as referring to the equivalent provision of the IM Security Documents.

Please describe any requirements that the custodial arrangements described in assumption (f) above must meet to permit the Collateral Taker to exercise its rights as secured party.

214 As described in Part III, in general terms, securities may be issued in (i) bearer form; (ii) registered form; or (iii) dematerialised form. Bearer securities are typically immobilised through use of a "global security" (i.e. a single security representing all, or the relevant part, of the entire issue) which is held by or on behalf of the relevant national or international CSD enabling settlement through the relevant clearing system. Registered securities, including equity securities, can also be immobilised. Alternatively securities may be dematerialised such that the ultimate root of title is not recorded in a physical certificate or register – instead the electronic entry in the books of the central operator is determinative. In this Part IV, we assume that the Collateral Provider is holding its interest in the intermediated securities through a financial intermediary (referred to as the Custodian (IM)) who in turn may hold directly within the relevant clearing system or through the relevant settlement system or through a chain of other financial intermediaries.

95

This analysis is addressed separately in Part II as the terms of the Control Agreement will largely determine whether the arrangement will qualify as a security financial collateral arrangement.

Validity of Security Interests: Creation and Perfection

1. Under the laws of your jurisdiction, what law governs the contractual aspects of a security interest in the various forms of Eligible Collateral deliverable under the Security Documents? Would the courts of your jurisdiction recognise the validity of a security interest created under each Security Document assuming it is valid under the governing law of such Security Document?

As per Part III of this memorandum.

2. Under the laws of your jurisdiction, what law governs the proprietary aspects of a security interest (that is, the formalities required to protect a security interest in Collateral against competing claims) granted by the Security Collateral Provider under each Security Document (for example, the law of the jurisdiction of incorporation or organisation of the Security Collateral Provider, the jurisdiction where the Collateral is located, or the jurisdiction of location of the Secured Party's Intermediary in relation to Collateral in the form of indirectly held securities)? What factors would be relevant to this question? Where the location (or deemed location) of the Collateral is the determining factor, please briefly describe the principles governing such determination under the law of your jurisdiction with respect to the different types of Collateral. In particular, please describe how the laws of your jurisdiction apply to each form in which securities Collateral may be held as described in the relevant assumptions above.

We would expect that an IM Security Document entered into by an entity within the scope of the Collateral Directive would be structured as a security financial collateral arrangement. Therefore, although local law implementations of the Collateral Directive may differ between European jurisdictions, we would generally expect parties to structure the arrangement such that it qualifies as a security financial collateral arrangement under the FCA Regulations (at least in circumstances where an English Company is the Collateral Provider or the relevant Segregated Account is located in England).

Accordingly, as discussed in Part III of this memorandum, Regulation 19 of the FCA Regulations will be the primary conflicts of law rule that is relevant in respect of book-entry securities. Regulation 19 broadly provides that, with respect to book entry securities used as collateral under financial collateral arrangements and which are held through one or more intermediaries, any questions relating to the following matters shall be governed by the domestic law of the country in which the relevant account is maintained (for this purpose domestic law excludes any rule under which, in deciding the relevant question, reference should be made to the law of another country):

(a) the legal nature and proprietary effects of book-entry securities collateral;

(b) the requirements for perfecting a financial collateral arrangement relating to book- entry securities collateral and the transfer or passing of control or possession of book- entry securities collateral under such an arrangement;

(c) the requirements for rendering a financial collateral arrangement which relates to book-entry securities collateral effective against third parties;

96

(d) whether a person's title to or interest in such book-entry securities collateral is overridden by or subordinated to a competing title or interest; and

(e) the steps required for the realisation of book-entry securities collateral following the occurrence of any enforcement event.

See Part III of this memorandum in respect of (i) cash and (ii) arrangements that do not qualify as financial collateral arrangements.

3. Would the courts of your jurisdiction recognise a security interest in each type of Eligible Collateral created under each Security Document? In answering this question, please bear in mind the different forms in which securities Collateral may be held, as described in the relevant assumptions above. Please indicate, in relation to cash Collateral, if your answer depends on the location of the account in which the relevant deposit obligations are recorded and/or upon the currency of those obligations.

In our opinion the English courts would recognise a security interest in each type of Eligible Collateral created under each IM Security Document, provided the security interest was valid under the governing law of the IM Security Document (if not English law) and provided also that any applicable requirements, including as to perfection, under the relevant proprietary law in relation to the Eligible Collateral (determined in accordance with the rules of English private international law, as to which see the answer to question 2 above) had been complied with.

The location of the Segregated Account is not directly relevant to the question of recognition although see also our comments in our answer to question 12 below as to enforcement of an IM NY Annex where the Segregated Account is located in England. The currency in which the Collateral is denominated is not relevant to the question of recognition.

4. What is the effect, if any, under the laws of your jurisdiction of the fact that the amount secured or the amount of Eligible Collateral subject to the security interest will fluctuate under the ISDA Master Agreement and the relevant Security Document (including as a result of entering into additional Transactions under the ISDA Master Agreement from time to time)? In particular:

(a) would the security interest be valid in relation to future obligations of the Security Collateral Provider?

(b) would the security interest be valid in relation to future Collateral (that is, Eligible Collateral not yet delivered to the Secured Party at the time of entry into the relevant Security Document)?

(c) is there any difficulty with the concept of creating a security interest over a fluctuating pool of assets, for example, by reason of the impossibility of identifying in the Security Documents the specific assets transferred by way of security?

(d) is it necessary under the laws of England for the amount secured by each Security Document to be a fixed amount or subject to a fixed maximum amount?

(e) is it permissible under the laws of England for the Secured Party to hold Collateral in excess of its actual exposure to the Security Collateral Provider under the related ISDA Master Agreement?

As per Part III of this memorandum other than in respect of specific question (e) above.

97

In respect of (e), by entering into a variation margin arrangement under the relevant VM Document and a separate initial margin arrangement under the relevant IM Security Document, the Collateral Taker may hold Collateral in excess of its actual exposure. The parties have contractually agreed to this position and it is permissible under the laws of England.

5. Assuming the courts of your jurisdiction would recognise the security interest in each type of Eligible Collateral created under each Security Document, is any action (filing, registration, notification, stamping, notarization or any other action or the obtaining of any governmental, judicial, regulatory or other order, consent or approval) required in your jurisdiction to perfect that security interest? If so, please indicate what actions must be taken and how such actions may differ depending upon the type of Eligible Collateral in question?

As per Part III of this memorandum.

6. If there are any other requirements to ensure the validity or perfection of a security interest in each type of Eligible Collateral created by the Security Collateral Provider under each Security Document, please indicate the nature of such requirements. For example, is it necessary as a matter of formal validity that the Security Document be expressly governed by the law of your jurisdiction or translated into any other language or for the Security Document to include any specific wording? Are there any other documentary formalities that must be observed in order for a security interest created under each Security Document to be recognized as valid and perfected in your jurisdiction?

As per Part III of this memorandum.

7. Assuming that the Secured Party has obtained a valid and perfected security interest in the Eligible Collateral under the laws of your jurisdiction, to the extent such laws apply, by complying with the requirements set out in the responses to questions 1 to 6 above, will the Secured Party or the Security Collateral Provider need to take any action thereafter to ensure that the security interest in the Eligible Collateral continues and/or remains perfected, particularly with respect to additional Collateral transferred by way of security from time to time whenever the Credit Support Amount (or the amount of Collateral required to be delivered under the relevant Security Document, as applicable) exceeds the Value of the Collateral held by the Secured Party?

As per Part III of this memorandum.

8. Assuming that (a) pursuant to the laws of your jurisdiction, the laws of another jurisdiction govern the creation and/or perfection of a security interest in the Eligible Collateral transferred by way of security pursuant to each Security Document and (b) the Secured Party has obtained a valid and perfected security interest in the Eligible Collateral under the laws of such other jurisdiction, will the Secured Party have a valid security interest in the Collateral so far as the laws of your jurisdiction are concerned? Is any action (filing, registration, notification, stamping or notarization or any other action or the obtaining of any governmental, judicial, regulatory or other order, consent or approval) required under the laws of your jurisdiction to establish, perfect, continue or enforce this security interest? Are there any other requirements of the type referred to in question 6 above?

As per Part III of this memorandum

9. Are there any particular duties, obligations, or limitations imposed on the Secured Party in relation to the care of the Eligible Collateral held by it pursuant to each Security Document?

98

Not applicable - the Posted Collateral will be held by the Custodian (IM) rather than the Collateral Taker in accordance with the terms of the relevant custody agreement and the Control Agreement.

10. Please note that pursuant to the terms of each Deed and the IM NY Annex, the Secured Party is not permitted to use any Collateral securities it holds. This is because (a) at the time that the 1995 Deed was published, it was thought, as a matter of English law, that any such use is or may be incompatible with the limited nature of the interest that the Secured Party has in the Collateral, and (b) the rules promulgated by various regulators prohibit the use of any Collateral securities held by the Secured Party as "initial margin". On the other hand, unless otherwise agreed to by the parties, Paragraph 6(c) of the Non-IM NY Annex grants the Secured Party broad rights with respect to the use of Collateral, provided that it returns equivalent Collateral when the Security Collateral Provider is entitled to the return of Collateral pursuant to the terms of the Non-IM NY Annex. Such use might include pledging or rehypothecating the securities, disposing of the securities under a securities repurchase (repo) agreement or simply selling the securities. Do the laws of your jurisdiction recognize the right of the Secured Party so to use such Collateral pursuant to an agreement with the Security Collateral Provider? In particular, how does such use of the Collateral affect, if at all, the validity, continuity, perfection or priority of a security interest otherwise validly created and perfected prior to such use? Are there any other obligations, duties or limitations imposed on the Secured Party with respect to its use of the Collateral under the laws of your jurisdiction?

Not applicable – the IM Security Documents do not contain a right of use given the requirements of the WGMR Regimes.

11. What is the effect, if any, under the laws of England on the validity, continuity, perfection or priority of a security interest in Eligible Collateral under each Security Document of the right of the Security Collateral Provider to substitute Collateral pursuant to Paragraph 4(d) of the NY Annexes and the 1995 Deed and Paragraph 4(e) of the IM Deed? How does the presence or absence of consent to substitution by the Secured Party affect your response to this question? Please comment specifically on whether the Security Collateral Provider and the Secured Party are able validly to agree in the Security Document that the Security Collateral Provider may substitute Collateral without specific consent of the Secured Party and whether and, if so, how this may affect the nature of the security interest or otherwise affect your conclusions regarding the validity or enforceability of the security interest.

See Part III of this memorandum for a discussion of the analysis as to fixed versus floating charges.

Under tri-party Control Agreements, each party consents up front to the automated substitutions made by the Custodian (IM). This results in a significant risk that the arrangement constitutes a floating charge but does not prevent it qualifying as a security financial collateral arrangement. As noted in Part III of this memorandum, the FCA Regulations remove several of the limitations which would otherwise apply to a floating charge.

In relation to floating charge holders and purchasers, (x) the Control Agreement means that the Collateral Provider is not easily able to deal with the assets in the normal course whilst in the Segregated Account; (y) the relevant Custodian (IM) will likely declare that it is not aware of any adverse interest in the Segregated Account at the point that the Control Agreement is entered into; and (z) the Collateral Provider represents in the IM Security Document that upon transfer the Collateral is not subject to other security interests and in the case of the IM Deed gives a negative pledge at Paragraph 2(c). Given the custody structure we also assume that

99

the Custodian (IM) would be the most likely lien holder and therefore the Collateral Taker will likely be aware of the existence of the lien (see discussion in Part II).

In relation to third party custody, if the IM Security Document and the Control Agreement requires consent to substitution on a case-by-case basis, then the arrangement may constitute a fixed charge. Whether the arrangement in such cases is a fixed charge will primarily depend on the degree of control resulting from the IM Security Document and the Control Agreement.215 To the extent that the arrangement is not a fixed charge but is a security financial collateral arrangement then the position is as set out above.

Enforcement of rights under the IM Security Documents by the Collateral Taker in the absence of an insolvency proceeding

Note the additional assumption in (j) in Part III.2 which applies to questions 12 to 15 below.

12. Assuming that the Secured Party has obtained a valid and perfected security interest in the Eligible Collateral under the laws of your jurisdiction, to the extent such laws apply, by complying with the requirements contained in the responses to questions 1 to 6 above as applicable, what are the formalities (including the necessity to obtain a court order or conduct an auction), notification requirements (to the Security Collateral Provider or any other person) or other procedures, if any, that the Secured Party must observe or undertake in exercising its rights as a Secured Party under each Security Document, such as the right to liquidate Collateral? For example, is it free to sell the Collateral (including to itself) and apply the proceeds to satisfy the Security Collateral Provider's outstanding obligations under the ISDA Master Agreement? Do such formalities or procedures differ depending on the type of Collateral involved?

In respect of the IM Deed and Posted Credit Support (IM) located in England, as per Part III of this memorandum, except:

(A) (i) foreclosure (which is a remedy available to the holder of a legal mortgage or an equitable mortgage only); and (ii) the right of set-off will not be relevant given the IM Deed constitutes a charge and the Posted Credit Support (IM) is held by the Custodian (IM);

(B) the IM Deed includes an express contractual right to appoint a receiver reflecting the fact that the Posted Credit Support (IM) is held with a third party Custodian (IM);

(C) the IM Deed includes the right to appropriate and a valuation methodology for the appropriated collateral; and

(D) if "and the Chargor has not paid in full all of its Obligations that are then due" has been deleted from the definition of Secured Party Rights Event definition in Paragraph 13, then it would appear on a plain reading that it is possible for a Collateral Taker to enforce in circumstances where (i) the Collateral Taker has not terminated all Transactions under Section 6 of the ISDA Master Agreement and determined that an amount is payable by the relevant Collateral Provider under Section 6(e); and (ii) no amount is currently due and unpaid by the relevant Collateral Provider. We express no opinion in this memorandum on the enforceability of the enforcement remedies when used in such circumstances as it would likely require a detailed analysis of the relevant facts which is not possible in a generic opinion of this type.

215 Note that "control" for the purpose of the fixed charge and financial collateral analysis differs.

100

As per Part III of this memorandum, as we are discussing the position under English law in this memorandum, we assume for the purposes of this question that the Collateral is governed by English law as determined by the applicable conflict of laws rules relevant to that category of Collateral (in respect of which see our answer to question 2 above). As New York law will govern the contractual aspects of the IM NY Annex (subject to our answer to question 19 below), the focus is on the contractual position under the IM Deed, but the discussion will also be relevant to the IM NY Annex where the Collateral is governed by English law as determined by the applicable conflict of laws rules relevant to that category of Collateral, but as applied to the contractual remedies the parties have specified under the IM NY Annex.216

13. Assuming that (a) pursuant to the laws of your jurisdiction, the laws of another jurisdiction govern the creation and/or perfection of a security interest in the Eligible Collateral transferred by way of security pursuant to each Security Document (for example, because such Collateral is located or deemed located outside your jurisdiction), and (b) the Secured Party has obtained a valid and perfected security interest in the Eligible Collateral under the laws of such other jurisdiction, are there any formalities, notification requirements or other procedures that the Secured Party must observe or undertake in your jurisdiction in exercising its rights as a Secured Party under each Security Document?

As per Part III of this memorandum

14. Are there any laws or regulations in your jurisdiction that would limit or distinguish a creditor's enforcement rights with respect to Collateral depending on (a) the type of transaction underlying the creditor's exposure, (b) the type of Collateral or (c) the nature of the creditor or the debtor? For example, are there any types of "statutory liens" that would be deemed to take precedence over a creditor's security interest in the Collateral?

As per Part III of this memorandum except see our answer to question 11 above in relation to the characterisation of the IM Security Document as a fixed or floating charge and the types of claims that may take precedence over a floating charge.

15. How would your response to questions 12 to 14 change, if at all, assuming that an Event of Default exists with respect to the Secured Party rather than or in addition to the Security Collateral Provider (for example, would this affect the ability of the Secured Party to exercise its enforcement rights with respect to the Collateral)?

See the ISDA Collateral Taker Opinion in respect of the rights of a Collateral Provider following the default of the Collateral Taker and see also that opinion and Part II of this memorandum in respect of our advice to include Notice to Contest provisions in the Control Agreement (to the extent that either the Collateral Provider is an English Company or the Collateral is located in England).

Enforcement of rights under the IM Security Documents by the Collateral Taker after commencement of an English insolvency proceeding in respect of an English Company

Note the additional assumption in (k) in Part III above which applies to questions 16 to 18 below.

16. How are competing priorities between creditors determined in your jurisdiction? What conditions must be satisfied if the Secured Party's security interest is to have priority over all other claims (secured or unsecured) of an interest in the Eligible Collateral?

216 See note 177.

101

Since the Segregated Account at the Custodian (IM) is in the name of the Collateral Provider the rule in Dearle v Hall will be relevant and accordingly the position differs from the position described in Part III of this memorandum.

As a matter of English insolvency law, secured claims take priority over unsecured claims and fixed charges have certain advantages over floating charges. However, as discussed in our answer to question 11, a number of the disadvantages to floating charges are removed in respect of security financial collateral arrangements by the FCA Regulations.

We discuss the priority position where there are competing secured creditors in respect of English located Collateral below. The English law rules relating to priorities between creditors are complex and the below is a summary of basic principles only. As described in Part III:

(a) Subject to certain exceptions including (b) below, secured claims take priority in the order in which the security interest was created.217

(b) Where there is a competition between a legal interest (including a legal security interest) and an equitable interest (including an equitable security interest), the legal interest will take precedence over the equitable interest irrespective of the time of creation, provided the legal interest was taken for value and without knowledge of the equitable interest.

The principles at (a) and (b) above are both subject to an overarching exception that they apply where "the equities are equal". In other words, they apply unless it would be inequitable to abide by them.

As noted, there are a number of exceptions to the general rules of priority expressed in (a) and (b) above. Of particular relevance is the rule in Dearle v Hall. This governs the priority of, amongst other things, competing assignments of a debt and will apply in relation to Posted Credit Support (IM) in the form of cash.

Under rule in Dearle v Hall, priority goes to the first assignee to give notice in writing to the relevant debtor of its assignment, provided that such assignee only has priority over an earlier assignee if it does not have notice of the earlier assignment. The relevant debtor in such cases would be the Custodian (IM) holding the cash as banker. Note that the timing of the notice is important – (i) notice may be given at the same time as or any time after the assignment (but not before); and (ii) the subject-matter of the assignment must have become present property at the time the notice is received (the notice will take effect on receipt rather than on sending).

In the case of intermediated securities and the principles at (a) and (b) above, the interest of the Collateral Provider will inherently be equitable (and likewise with respect to the security interest of the Collateral Taker). As a result, taking into account the nature of the securities and the Control Agreement, the priority afforded to a subsequent legal interest does not seem likely to be problematic in practice.

In any event the rule in Dearle v Hall applies to equitable interests as well as debts and therefore may apply to intermediated securities as the Collateral Provider's interest in the intermediated securities is equitable in nature.218

217 Note that a prior security interest covering further advances loses priority to a subsequent security interest if the advances were made after the holder of the first security interest was aware of the subsequent security interest. 218 Khai Liew (n 94), Ch 6 (and para 6-44 in respect of intermediated securities). Note also that some academic commentary suggests that the rule in Dearle v Hall (n 185) does not apply to shares as common law recognises the transfer of shares.

102

17. Would the Secured Party's rights under each Security Document, such as the right to liquidate the Collateral, be subject to any stay or freeze or otherwise be affected by commencement of the insolvency (that is, how does the institution of an insolvency proceeding change your responses to questions 12 and 13 above, if at all)?

As per Part III of this memorandum.

18. Will the Security Collateral Provider (or its administrator, provisional liquidator, conservator, receiver, trustee, custodian or other similar official) be able to recover any transfers of Collateral made to the Secured Party during a certain "suspect period" preceding the date of the insolvency as a result of such a transfer constituting a "preference" (however called and whether or not fraudulent) in favour of the Secured Party or on any other basis? If so, how long before the insolvency does this suspect period begins? If such a period exists, would the substitution of Collateral by a Counterparty during this period invalidate an otherwise valid security interest if the substitute Collateral is of no greater value than the assets it is replacing? Would the posting of additional Collateral pursuant to the mark-to- market provisions (or the IM calculation provisions in the case of the IM Security Documents) of the Security Documents during the suspect period be subject to avoidance, either because the Collateral was considered to relate to an antecedent or pre-existing obligation or for some other reason?

As per Part III of this memorandum.

Additional issues

19. Would the parties' agreement on governing law of each Security Document and submission to jurisdiction be upheld in your jurisdiction, and what would be the consequences if they were not?

In respect of (i) an IM NY Annex entered into in connection with an New York law governed ISDA Master Agreement; or (ii) the IM Deed, as per Part III of this memorandum (although note that Paragraph 11(g) of the IM Deed is clear that the parties submit to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts).

In respect of an IM NY Annex entered into in connection with an English law governed ISDA Master Agreement, split governing law (dépeçage) issues arise. We assume that the parties will amend the IM NY Annex to include a New York governing law clause. The remainder of the ISDA Master Agreement is subject to English law and the English jurisdiction clause will generally apply to the entire agreement.

Article 3(1) of Rome I provides that the parties can select the law applicable to the whole or to part only of the contract. Rome I therefore clearly contemplates the possibility of different laws being chosen by contracting parties to apply to different parts of the same contract.219 It is clearly important, however, that such a choice must relate to elements in the contract that can be governed by different laws without giving rise to contradictions.

An official report on the Rome Convention (that preceded Rome I) was produced by Professor Mario Giuliano and Professor Paul Lagarde and was reproduced in the edition of the Official Journal of the Communities (C282) of 31 October 1980 (the Giuliano-Lagarde Report). The Giuliano-Lagarde Report, on its commentary on Article 3 of the Rome

However, shares held in the form of intermediated securities are in our view distinguishable from this line of argument on the basis the interest in the shares is inherently equitable. 219 Dicey (n 90), para 32-026.

103

Convention, acknowledges the possibility of dépeçage contemplated by the last sentence of Article 3(1) but confirms that such choice must not lead to a logical inconsistency.

One cannot for example, have two different laws purporting to apply to the "general obligation" of the contract. For example, one cannot have two different laws purporting to deal with the consequence of repudiation of the contract or whether the contract is discharged by frustration. If a choice were made in a way so as to lead to such a contradiction, there would be no effective governing law clause, and a court seeking to determine the law applicable to the contract would apply the general rules in Rome I that determine the law applicable to contractual obligations in the absence of choice.

In our view, the entry into an IM NY Annex (governed by New York law in accordance with a bespoke governing law clause in Paragraph 13) and an English law governed ISDA Master Agreement would not lead to a logical inconsistency and therefore we believe that an English court would recognise and give effect to the mixed governing law clause (subject to the issues discussed in Part III of this memorandum).

20. Are there any other local law considerations that you would recommend the Secured Party to consider in connection with taking and realizing upon the Eligible Collateral from the Security Collateral Provider?

As per Part III of this memorandum.

21. Are there any other circumstances you can foresee that might affect the Secured Party's ability to enforce its security interest in your jurisdiction?

As per Part III of this memorandum.

4. IM NY Annex Japanese Amendments

Would the inclusion of the IM NY Annex Japanese Amendments in the IM NY Annex affect your conclusions in Part II and in this Part IV above?

To the extent that the IM NY Annex Japanese Amendments have been included in the IM NY Annex, we assume that as a matter of New York and Japanese law there are effectively two security interests and each security interest constitutes legally valid, binding and enforceable obligations under its respective governing law. The New York law security interest relates to all Posted Collateral (IM) whereas the Japanese pledge relates to Japanese Securities (as defined in the IM NY Annex Japanese Amendments) only.

A footnote to the IM NY Annex Japanese Amendments states that, from a Japanese law perspective, the account will need to be maintained in the name of the Collateral Taker and a pledge ledger (shichiken ran) and proprietary ledger (hoyu ran) will record the transfers of Japanese Securities as set out in the amended definition of Transfer. The nature of the relevant account will depend on the relevant Custodian (IM) and the terms of the relevant Control Agreement. We assume, however, that in respect of all applicable laws all Posted Collateral (IM) continues to be owned by the Collateral Provider and, despite the fact that the Segregated Account may be in the name of the Collateral Taker, this is merely nomenclature and does not represent a material change in the nature of the Collateral Taker's or the Collateral Provider's rights or interest in respect of the Segregated Account from that described in Part II and elsewhere in this Part IV and on which our analysis of the IM NY Annex elsewhere in this memorandum is based.

104

The amended structure should not lessen "possession or control" since (i) the Segregated Account appears to be an account and/or ledger in the name of the Collateral Taker and has been developed to reduce the risk of a Japanese conflicts of law risk; (ii) in respect of Japanese Securities, the IM NY Annex Japanese Amendments are largely supplementary to the un-amended terms of the IM NY Annex and provide for an additional security interest in favour of the Collateral Taker; and (iii) the un-amended terms of the IM NY Annex continue to apply to all other Posted Credit Support (IM).

On the basis of the assumptions above, the financial collateral analysis in Part II and the conclusions in Part IV.3 are not affected by the inclusion of the IM NY Annex Japanese Amendments in the IM NY Annex.

To the extent that the IM NY Annex Japanese Amendments are included in the IM NY Annex, then issues relating to dépeçage may arise – in respect of which see our discussion in respect of a party entering into an IM NY Annex with an English law governed ISDA Master Agreement above. Similar issues would arise in this context. In our view this would not result in a logical inconsistency as the two security interests are complementary (rather than conflicting) and provide additional comfort to the Collateral Taker (although this will of course depend on how the two security interests fit together as a matter of New York law and Japanese law). However, we note that the drafting of the IM NY Annex Japanese Amendments is such that the grant of the Japanese pledge is expressed to be governed by New York law. If the IM NY Annex Japanese Amendments are to be so construed then issues of dépeçage would not, in fact, arise.

5. IM Deed Japanese Amendments

Would the inclusion of the IM Deed Japanese Amendments in the IM Deed affect your conclusions in Part II and in this Part IV above?

A footnote to the IM Deed Japanese Amendments explains that, from a Japanese law perspective, in order to create and perfect the Japanese pledge over Japanese Securities (as defined in the IM Deed Japanese Amendments), the assets over which the pledge is created need to be recorded and registered to the pledge ledger (shichiken ran) of a security account opened in the name of the Collateral Taker. A pledge ledger and a proprietary ledger will record the transfers of Japanese Securities as set out in the amended Paragraph 4(b). The same footnote, however, states that the Collateral Provider remains "title holder" of the Japanese Securities even after the pledged Japanese Securities have been transferred to the Collateral Taker.

The nature of such account will depend on the relevant Custodian (IM) and the terms of the relevant Control Agreement. We assume, however, that in respect of all applicable laws all Posted Credit Support (IM) continues to be owned by the Collateral Provider and, despite the fact that the Segregated Account in respect of securities may be in the name of the Collateral Taker, this is merely nomenclature and does not represent a material change in the nature of the Collateral Taker's or the Collateral Provider's rights or interest in respect of the Segregated Account from that described in Part II and elsewhere in this Part IV and on which our analysis of the IM Deed elsewhere in this memorandum is based. In relation to cash, we assume the Segregated Account continues to be maintained in the name of the Collateral Provider such that there is no change to the account structure in respect of cash.

Where the IM Deed Japanese Amendments have been included in the IM Deed, there would appear to be a parallel Japanese pledge granted in addition to the English charge over Posted Credit Support (IM); whereas the English security interest relates to all Posted Credit Support (IM), the Japanese security interest relates to Japanese Securities only. We express no

105

opinion as to the validity and enforceability of such supplemental obligation and we assume that the Japanese pledge granted under the IM Deed Japanese Amendments in respect of Japanese Securities is equivalent to the English charge created pursuant to the un-amended IM Deed and that such security interests complement and do not contradict one another in any relevant respect.

The amended structure should not lessen "possession or control" since (i) the Segregated Account in respect of securities appears to be an account and/or ledger in the name of the Collateral Taker and has been developed to reduce the risk of a Japanese conflicts of law risk; (ii) in respect of Japanese Securities, the IM Deed Japanese Amendments are largely supplementary to the un-amended terms of the IM Deed and provide for an additional security interest in favour of the Collateral Taker; and (iii) the un-amended terms of the IM Deed continue to apply to all other Posted Credit Support (IM).

Accordingly, on the basis of the above, the financial collateral analysis in Part II and the conclusions in Part IV.3 above would not be affected by the inclusion of the IM Deed Japanese Amendments in the IM Deed.

To the extent that the IM Deed Japanese Amendments are included in the IM Deed then issues relating to dépeçage may arise – in respect of which see our discussion in respect of a party entering into an IM NY Annex with an English law governed ISDA Master Agreement above. Similar issues would arise in this context. In our view, on the basis set out above, this would not result in a logical inconsistency as the two security interests are complementary (rather than conflicting) and provide additional comfort to the Collateral Taker. However, we note that the drafting of the IM Deed Japanese Amendments is such that the grant of the Japanese pledge is expressed to be governed by English law. If the IM Deed Japanese Amendments are to be so construed then issues of dépeçage would not, in fact, arise.

106

V. SECURITY INTEREST – CLEARING SYSTEM IM DOCUMENTS

1. Introduction

By reference to Part IV and our conclusions and analysis in respect of the IM Security Documents, in this Part V we consider issues relating to a security interest created by the relevant Clearing System IM Documents in respect of Collateral held in a Clearstream account or a Euroclear account where the Collateral Provider is an English Company.

Our conclusions in respect of an English Company apply in relation to other types of English Counterparty as modified and supplemented by the relevant Annex specified in Part IV.1. As with the IM Security Documents, we do not consider Clearing System IM Documents entered into with either the Bank of England or the United Kingdom acting through Her Majesty's Treasury in this memorandum. Due to the holding structure relevant to the Clearing System IM Documents as described below, fact pattern (c) set out in Part I.4 of this memorandum is not relevant.

We also consider at Parts V.4 and V.5 the impact of the inclusion of the Euroclear Japanese Amendments and the Clearstream Japanese Amendments in the relevant Clearing System IM Documents on our conclusions in Part II and Part V.3.

2. Assumptions

For the purpose of this Part V we make each of the assumptions applicable to Part IV except that:

(a) The parties will not enter into an IM Security Document in respect of a posting leg where the Collateral will be held in a Euroclear or Clearstream account.

(b) If the posting leg involves holding the Collateral in a Clearstream account, the parties will instead enter into:

(i) a Clearstream CTA; and

(ii) a Clearstream Security Agreement.

(c) If the posting leg involves holding the Collateral in a Euroclear account, the parties will instead enter into:

(i) a Euroclear CTA; and

(ii) a Euroclear Security Agreement.220

(d) If the parties wish to include Japanese Collateral (as defined in the Euroclear Japanese Amendments) as Collateral in cases where the Collateral is held in a Euroclear account, then:

(i) the Euroclear CTA will be amended by the inclusion of the Euroclear CTA Japanese Amendments; and

(ii) the Euroclear Security Agreement will be amended by the inclusion of Euroclear Security Agreement Japanese Amendments.221

220 We assume that a MultiSeg Eurolear CTA and a MultiSeg Euroclear Security Agreement would be used together.

107

(e) If the parties wish to include Japanese Collateral (as defined in the Clearstream Japanese Amendments) as Collateral in cases where the Collateral is held in a Clearstream account, then:

(i) the parties will enter into the 2017 Clearstream Security Agreement;

(ii) the Clearstream CTA will be amended by the inclusion of the Clearstream CTA Japanese Amendments; and

(iii) the 2017 Clearstream Security Agreement will be amended by the inclusion of the Clearstream Security Agreement Japanese Amendments.

(f) References to the IM Security Documents should accordingly be read as references to the Clearstream IM Documents or the Euroclear IM Documents (as applicable).

(g) The Collateral Provider, Collateral Taker and Clearstream or Euroclear (as applicable) have also entered into the relevant tri-party documentation specifically designed for initial margin arrangements in respect of uncleared derivatives as at the date of this memorandum (the Relevant Tri-party Documents)222 and, in the case of Euroclear, have either made the relevant election to trap income distributions to the extent the relevant securities are not substituted out in advance223 or Euroclear has undertaken to the parties to transfer such income automatically to the Collateral Provider pursuant to the Relevant Tri-party Documents only once the Euroclear Accounts (as defined below) are fully collateralised, for such purposes, without attributing any value to such income.224

(h) In the case of Clearstream, the Collateral is held in the "Collateral Account" opened in the Clearstream system, which is either an account in the name of the Collateral Provider (where the 2016 Clearstream Security Agreement is used) that is pledged to the Collateral Taker pursuant to the Clearstream Security Agreement or an account in the name of the Collateral Taker (where the 2017 Clearstream Security Agreement is used), in each case, to be operated in accordance with the Relevant Tri-party Documents (in either case, the Clearstream Account).225

(i) In the case of Euroclear, the Collateral is held in a "Pledged Securities Account" and a "Pledged Cash Account" opened in the Euroclear System in the name of Euroclear acting in its own name but for the account of the Collateral Taker (as pledgee) and to be operated in accordance with the Relevant Tri-party Documents (the Euroclear Accounts).226

221 In relation to the MultiSeg Euroclear CTA and the MultiSeg Euroclear Security Agreement we assume that the 2018 versions of the Euroclear CTA Japanese Amendments and the Euroclear Security Agreement Japanese Amendments are used. 222 As with the Control Agreement referred to in Part IV, we have not reviewed the Relevant Tri-party Documents for the purpose of this memorandum. The Relevant Tri-party Documents are referred to as the "Euroclear Agreements" in the Euroclear CTA and the "Clearstream Agreements" in the Clearstream CTA. 223 In other words, the Relevant Tri-Party Documents provide for so-called "income trapping" to apply. This is consistent with the drafting of Paragraph 5.6 (Transfer of Distributions) of the 2016 versions of the Euroclear CTAs. 224 This is consistent with the revisions made to the drafting of Paragraph 5.6 (Transfer of Distributions) by the 2017 versions of the Euroclear CTAs, which provide for an automatic income reversal approach. 225 We note that regardless of which Clearstream Security Agreement is used, the Clearstream CTA would appear to reflect the account structure described in respect of the 2016 Clearstream Security Agreement (see, for example, the definition of "Secured Account") unless the Clearstream CTA incorporates the Clearstream CTA Japanese Amendments. 226 We understand that this is also the case where the Euroclear IM Documents include the Euroclear Japanese Amendments. These terms also cover the relevant sub-divisions of the accounts as envisaged by the MultiSeg Euroclear CTA and the MultiSeg Euroclear Security Agreement (if the parties have opted to use the sub-division structure for a given post leg).

108

(j) In respect of each of the Clearstream IM Documents and the Euroclear IM Documents governed by a law other than English law, the relevant agreements would, when duly entered into, constitute legal, valid and binding obligations of each party under such foreign law and each party has duly authorised, executed and delivered, and has the capacity to enter into, each document.

(k) The Relevant Tri-party Documentation constitutes legal, valid and binding obligations under its governing law and each party has duly authorised, executed and delivered, and has the capacity to enter into, the Relevant Tri-party Documentation.

(l) The Euroclear Accounts are located in Belgium and the Clearstream Account is located in Luxembourg.

(m) Each of Clearstream or Euroclear (as applicable) will comply with its obligations and is not subject to any insolvency proceedings or resolution action and the Collateral is segregated from the proprietary assets of Clearstream or Euroclear (as applicable) in accordance with applicable law.

For the avoidance of doubt we have not reviewed the Relevant Tri-party Documentation for the purpose of this memorandum and we assume the Relevant Tri-party Documentation does not conflict with the relevant Clearing System IM Documents.

3. Analysis

Please explain how your responses in Part IV would change if instead of entering into an IM Security Document and custodial arrangements as described in Part IV, the parties enter into the arrangements described above?

Each of the Euroclear Accounts and the Clearstream Account are located outside of England and the security interest is governed by Belgian or Luxembourg law respectively. Therefore, the only scenario we need to consider is an English Company acting as Collateral Provider granting security under a foreign law security interest where the Location of the Collateral is outside of England.

Accordingly, our conclusions in Part IV in respect of an IM Security Document entered into in respect of a tri-party Control Agreement also apply to this Part V to the extent they relate to (i) foreign law governed security interests and the rights and obligations described above and (ii) Collateral located outside of England. In particular, our answers to (i) question 12 in respect of the enforcement of security interests over English located assets and (ii) question 16 in respect of competing priorities between creditors are likely to be of limited relevance to the enforcement of a Belgian or Luxembourg security interest over a Belgian or Luxembourg located account.

In respect of question 19 we address the position with respect to the Clearstream Security Agreement and the Euroclear Security Agreement only (being the relevant document under which the grant of security and enforcement remedies arise). The Clearstream Security Agreement provides that the governing law is Luxembourg law and the courts of Luxembourg-City have exclusive jurisdiction to settle any dispute arising out of or in connection with the Clearstream Security Agreement (including a dispute relating to the existence, validity, interpretation, performance, breach or termination or any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it). The Euroclear Security Agreement includes an equivalent provision in respect of Belgian law and the courts of Brussels, Belgium. See our discussion on the approach of an English court in respect of the choice of New York law and New York courts in respect of the IM NY Annex above (although, as both

109

Belgium and Luxembourg are EU member states, the reference to the choice of law not prejudicing the application of European Union law which cannot be derogated from by contract will not apply).

4. Euroclear Japanese Amendments

Would the inclusion of the Euroclear Japanese Amendments in the Euroclear IM Documents affect your conclusions in Part II and in this Part V above?

To the extent that the Euroclear Japanese Amendments have been included in the Euroclear IM Documents, we assume that as a matter of Belgian and Japanese law there are effectively two security interests and that each security interest constitutes legally valid, binding and enforceable obligations under its respective governing law. The Belgian security interest relates to all Posted Collateral whereas the Japanese pledge relates to the Japanese Collateral only. The Euroclear Japanese Amendments do not appear to change the account structure or the terms on which Collateral can be released.

Accordingly our description of the financial collateral analysis at Part II and the extent to which the conclusions in Part IV continue to apply to the Euroclear IM Documents as set out in Part V.3 above are not affected by the inclusion of the Euroclear Japanese Amendments in the Euroclear IM Documents.

To the extent that the Euroclear Japanese Amendments have been included issues relating to dépeçage will arise – in respect of which see our discussion in respect of a party entering into an IM NY Annex with an English law governed ISDA Master Agreement in Part IV above. Similar issues would arise in this context. In our view this would not result in a logical inconsistency as the two security interests are complementary (rather than conflicting) and provide additional comfort to the Collateral Taker (although this will of course depend on how the two security interests fit together as a matter of Belgian and Japanese law).

5. Clearstream Japanese Amendments

Would the inclusion of the Clearstream Japanese Amendments in the Clearstream IM Documents affect your conclusions in Part II and in this Part V above?

Where the Clearstream Japanese Amendments have been included in the Clearstream IM Documents, we assume that as a matter of Japanese law and the law of Luxembourg there are effectively two security interests and that each security interest constitutes legally valid, binding and enforceable obligations under its respective governing law. The Luxembourg pledge relates to all Posted Collateral whereas the Japanese pledge relates to Japanese Collateral only.

Pursuant to the 2017 Clearstream Security Agreement, the Clearstream Account would seem to be an account opened in the name of the Collateral Taker rather than the Collateral Provider. The nature of the relevant account will depend on the Relevant Tri-Party Documents. The amended structure should not, however, lessen "possession or control" since (i) the Clearstream Account appears to be an account in the name of the Collateral Taker and has been developed to reduce the risk of a Japanese conflicts of law risk; (ii) in respect of Japanese Collateral, the Clearstream Japanese Amendments are largely supplementary to the un-amended terms of the Clearstream IM Documents and provide for an additional security interest in favour of the Collateral Taker; and (iii) the un-amended terms of the Clearstream IM Documents continue to apply to all other Posted Collateral.

110

Accordingly, on the basis of the above, our description of the financial collateral analysis at Part II and the extent to which the conclusions in Part IV continue to apply to the Clearstream IM Documents as set out in Part V.3 above are not affected by the inclusion of the Clearstream Japanese Amendments in the Clearstream IM Documents.

To the extent that the Clearstream Japanese Amendments are included issues relating to dépeçage will arise – in respect of which see our discussion in respect of a party entering into an IM NY Annex with an English law governed ISDA Master Agreement in Part IV above. Similar issues would arise in this context. In our view this would not result in a logical inconsistency as the two security interests are complementary (rather than conflicting) and provide additional comfort to the Collateral Taker (although this will of course depend on how the two security interests fit together as a matter of Japanese law and the law of Luxembourg).

111

VI. TITLE TRANSFER

1. Introduction

In this Part VI we consider issues relating to the establishment and enforcement of a title transfer collateral arrangement relating to Collateral transferred under the Transfer Annexes under fact patterns (a) and (b) as set out in Part I.4 of this memorandum.

Our conclusions in this respect in relation to an English Company apply in relation to:

(a) an English Bank, as modified and supplemented by Annex 1;

(b) an English Investment Firm, as modified and supplemented by Annex 2;

(c) an English Building Society, as modified and supplemented by Annex 3;

(d) a Banking Group Company or a Bank Holding Company, as modified and supplemented by Annex 4;

(e) the Trustee of an English Trust (other than the Trustee of an English Charitable Trust, an English Pension Fund, an English Authorised Unit Trust or any English Trust excluded from the scope of this memorandum under Part I.2(b) above), as modified and supplemented by Annex 5;

(f) a Friendly Society, as modified and supplemented by Annex 6;

(g) a C/CB Society, as modified and supplemented by Annex 7;

(h) a Statutory Corporation, as modified and supplemented by Annex 8;

(i) a Chartered Corporation, as modified and supplemented by Annex 9;

(j) an English Insurance Company, as modified and supplemented by Annex 10;

(k) Standard Chartered Bank, as modified and supplemented by Annex 11;

(l) an English Charity acting through the Trustee of an English Charitable Trust, as modified and supplemented by Annex 12;

(m) an English Charity established in one of the other forms indicated above, as modified and supplemented by Annex 13;

(n) the Trustee of an English Pension Fund, as modified and supplemented by Annex 14;

(o) an English Investment Fund that is an Open-Ended Investment Company, as modified and supplemented by Annex 15;

(p) an English Investment Fund acting through the Trustee of an Authorised Unit Trust, as modified and supplemented by Annex 16; and

(q) an English Partnership, as modified and supplemented by Annex 17.

You have also asked us to consider such issues in respect of the Bank of England, which is a Central Bank, and the United Kingdom acting through Her Majesty's Treasury. Each of the

112

Bank of England and the United Kingdom acting through Her Majesty's Treasury requires a separate analysis due to its unique nature. We consider these issues in Annexes 18 and 19, respectively.

In this Part VI we also consider issues relating to the establishment and enforcement of a title transfer collateral arrangement relating to Collateral transferred under a Transfer Annex where the Collateral Provider is a Foreign Entity and the Collateral is located in England under fact pattern (c) as set out in Part I.4 of this memorandum.

2. Assumptions

For the purpose of this Part VI you have asked us to assume the same facts as set forth in Part III, but on the assumption that the parties have entered into a Transfer Annex in connection with an ISDA Master Agreement rather than a Non-IM Security Document.

For this purpose:

(i) we make the following assumption in place of assumption (a):

(a) The Transferor has entered into an ISDA Master Agreement227 governed by English law and a Transfer Annex with the Transferee.

(ii) assumption (d) is deleted;

(iii) assumptions (b) to (k) should be read as modified by the following: references to "Non-IM Security Document(s)" should be deemed to be references to a Transfer Annex; references to "Security Collateral Provider" and "Secured Party" should be deemed to be references to Transferor and Transferee, respectively; references to "Eligible Collateral" should be deemed to be references to Eligible Credit Support and references to "Paragraph 13" should be deemed to be references to Paragraph 11;

(iv) assumption (j) applies to question 25 below as indicated in our answer;228 and

(v) assumption (k) applies to questions 26 and 27 below.

We note that under the Transfer Annexes, a transfer of Eligible Credit Support is expressed to be an outright transfer of title, and that the transferring party (whether the Transferor in relation to the provision of Collateral, for example, as part of a Delivery Amount under the 1995 Transfer Annex, or the Transferee in relation to the return of Collateral, for example, as part of a Return Amount under the 1995 Transfer Annex) represents and agrees that it is transferring the Collateral free and clear of any liens, claims, charges or encumbrances or any other interest of the transferring party or of any third person (other than a lien routinely imposed on all securities in a relevant clearance system).

3. Questions relating to the Transfer Annexes

22. Would the laws of your jurisdiction characterize each transfer of Eligible Credit Support as effecting an unconditional transfer of ownership in the assets transferred? Is there any risk that any such transfer would be recharacterised as creating a security interest? If so, is there

227 Either the 1992 Agreement or the 2002 Agreement. 228 The trigger for Paragraph 6 of the Transfer Annex is that an Early Termination Date is designated or deemed to occur as a result of an Event of Default in relation to a party. Assumption (j) should be interpreted accordingly i.e. the deemed occurrence or designation of an Early Termination Date as a result of an Event of Default in circumstances where insolvency proceedings have not commenced.

113

any way to minimize such risk? What would be the specific consequences of such a recharacterisation (referring back to issues related to perfection, priority and formal requirements for establishing both as discussed with regard to the Security Documents in Parts III, IV and V above).

We assume that this question is primarily concerned with transfers by the Transferor to the Transferee of Eligible Credit Support in the form of securities. We will, however, comment briefly on transfers of cash, before considering securities.

Paragraph 3(a)(i) of the Transfer Annex indicates that a transfer of cash is intended to take effect as an outright payment (as opposed to, say, a payment in trust or the assignment of the benefit of an account). There is nothing elsewhere in the Transfer Annex to indicate otherwise. A transfer by the Transferor to the Transferee under Paragraph 2(a) or 3(c) of the Transfer Annex creates a conditional debt obligation of the Transferee to the Transferor. The debt obligation is conditional on the performance by the Transferor of its obligations under the ISDA Master Agreement. The debt is either repaid pursuant to Paragraph 2(b) of the Transfer Annex or, in the case of a default by the Transferor, included within the close-out netting effected under Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement.

In the case of securities, in our view, subject to the discussion below, a transfer by the Transferor to the Transferee of securities as Eligible Credit Support under Paragraph 2(a) or 3(c) of the Transfer Annex would be characterised under English law as a transfer of outright ownership in those securities. Equally, a transfer by the Transferee to the Transferor of securities as Equivalent Credit Support under Paragraph 2(b) or 3(c) would be characterised as a transfer of outright ownership in those securities.

We do not believe that there is a material risk that any such transfer would be recharacterised by an English court as transferring a lesser form of interest in the securities, for example, a security interest, provided that the true intention of the parties is the transfer of outright ownership. Paragraphs 5(a) and 5(b) make it clear that the intention of each party is that each such transfer should effect a transfer of the transferring party's full title to such securities and not merely to create a security interest in such securities. There is no other provision of the Transfer Annex that is in our view inconsistent with such a characterisation.

On the contrary, we note that in the case of transfers of Eligible Credit Support by the Transferor to the Transferee there is no contractual restriction on the Transferee's right to deal with the securities as it sees fit, including the right to sell such securities or dispose of them in some other manner, and the Transferee is only obliged under Paragraph 2(b) or 3(c), as the case may be, to deliver fungible equivalent securities to the Transferor and not the original securities it received. As a collateral arrangement, the Transfer Annex relies for its effectiveness on the close-out netting provision of Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement and not on the exercise by the Transferee of a power of sale or any other remedy of a secured creditor in relation to securities transferred to it.

The question of whether a court might recharacterise a title transfer collateral arrangement of the type exemplified by the Transfer Annex as a form of mortgage, charge or other form of security interest arises because the purpose and economic effect of such an arrangement is similar to the purpose and economic effect of a security interest. This fact alone, however, is not sufficient to cause an English court to recharacterise the arrangement.229

229 Olds Discount Co. Ltd v John Playfair Ltd [1938] 3 All ER 275; Bank of Tokyo Ltd v Karoon [1986] 3 All ER 468, 486; Re Polly Peck International plc (in administration) (No 3) [1996] 1 BCLC 428, 439.

114

The English courts have considered the question of the characterisation of a transaction as a true sale or as a form of secured financing in a number of different contexts, including sale and repurchase agreements, sale and leaseback arrangements, hire-purchase agreements and receivables financing.230 The cases show that the English courts accord considerable respect to the characterisation given by the parties themselves and will only recharacterise where the express characterisation is either a sham or at odds with the legal substance of the relations created in the relevant agreement.

Thus, in cases where the court has recharacterised a purported sale as a security interest, there have been features in the agreement inconsistent with an outright transfer of ownership (for example, restrictions on the transferee's ability to deal with the assets and/or a requirement that the transferee deliver the same assets originally transferred rather than merely fungible or equivalent assets).231 As with the question of categorising fixed and floating charges, it is likely that an English court would apply a two stage test, the first stage of which is ascertaining the nature of the rights and obligations which the parties intended to grant each other. The second stage of the process is one of categorisation of such rights as a matter of law and not of intention.

In our view, there is nothing in the Transfer Annex that is inconsistent with the stated intention of the parties that each transfer of Eligible Credit Support or Equivalent Credit Support under the Transfer Annex is intended to be an outright transfer of ownership in the relevant securities.

We assume that the parties, in operating the Transfer Annex, conduct themselves consistently with the intention expressed above. In other words, we assume that this arrangement is not a sham. Whether or not it is a sham would be a question of fact, but generally speaking it means that parties did not intend to comply with the terms of the express agreement. In other words, some element of fraud or dishonesty is involved.

Alternatively, subsequent conduct of the parties that is inconsistent with each transfer being an outright transfer of ownership could be construed as a variation or abandonment of the original agreement to effect outright transfers of Collateral. This might happen, for example, where, with the agreement of the Transferor, the Transferee segregates the transferred securities, identifies them as in some sense continuing to belong to the Transferor, and/or does not otherwise deal with the securities as it would with its own property. Again, whether or not this is the case is a question of fact.

Ultimately, all the relevant facts of each individual case must be taken in to account in determining the true intention of the parties and whether or not, in that context, whether due to contractual restrictions on the ability of the Transferee to deal freely with securities transferred as Eligible Credit Support or for any other reason, a risk of recharacterisation arises.

230 The leading cases are Manchester, Sheffield & Lincolnshire Railway Co v The North Central Wagon Company (1888) 13 App Cas 554, HL; Re George Inglefield Ltd [1933] Ch1; Re Curtain Dream plc [1990] BCLC 925; Welsh Development Agency v Export Finance Co Ltd [1992] BCLC 148; Orion Finance v Crown Management Ltd [1996] BCC 621, CA. See also in the context of repos and stock lending see Pearson v Lehman Brothers Finance SA [2010] EWHC 2914 (Ch) [78]-[82] and Mills v Sportsdirect.com Retail Ltd [2010] EWHC 1072 and the Australian cases Beconwood Securities Pty Ltd v Australia and New Zealand Banking Group Limited [2008] FCA 594 and the majority judgments in ABN AMRO Clearing Sydney Pty Ltd v Primebroker Securities Limited [2012] VSCA 287. For a good discussion of the approach of the English courts to the question of characterisation in these and similar contexts, see Ewan McKendrick, Goode on Commercial Law (5th edn, Butterworths Law 2016) paras 22.26-22.37. Specifically in the context of title transfer collateral arrangements, see also the excellent discussion of these issues in Joanna Benjamin, Interests in Securities (2000) at pp 132-134. Dr Benjamin discusses the cases mentioned above along with a number of others. See also Beale and others (n 54), para 4.28 et seq. 231 See for example, the Curtain Dream case (n 230). Also, Ex parte Odell (1878) 10 ChD 76. Smith (Administrator of Cosslett (Contractors) Ltd v Bridgend County Council [2001] UKHL 58, also falls into this category. Leading counsel confirmed at the time that the Cosslett Contractors case did not change the analysis applicable to genuine title transfer collateral arrangements of the type exemplified by the Transfer Annex.

115

An important substantive difference between a security interest collateral arrangement and a title transfer collateral arrangement is that, in the former case, the Collateral Provider remains, subject to the encumbrance it has created, the owner of the assets delivered as Collateral. This means that in the event of the insolvency of the Collateral Taker, those assets do not form part of the estate of the Collateral Taker and are not available to satisfy the general creditors of the Collateral Taker. (This also assumes that the Collateral Taker has not, either fraudulently, negligently, or honestly pursuant to an express power, disposed of such assets to a bona fide third party purchaser.)

In the case of a title transfer collateral arrangement, the Collateral Provider has no continuing proprietary interest in the Collateral it provided but merely a conditional personal right against the Collateral Taker to re-delivery of fungible equivalent assets or, in default circumstances, to the value (by payment or set-off) of such assets at the time of the default. This means that in the insolvency of the Collateral Taker, the Collateral Provider is an unsecured creditor and therefore has credit risk on the Collateral Taker to the extent that the Collateral provided exceeds total liabilities owed by the Collateral Provider to the Collateral Taker.

There are therefore clear substantive differences in the legal rights and obligations created by a security interest collateral arrangement relative to a title transfer collateral arrangement, each such arrangement having its relative advantages and disadvantages. In such circumstances, the parties have a genuine choice to make between the two approaches, and therefore the choice of a title transfer collateral arrangement is not a sham.232

Having established that a title transfer collateral arrangement is not a sham and that on a proper analysis it effects a substantively different set of legal relations than a security interest collateral arrangement, is there a risk nonetheless that an English court might recharacterise the title transfer arrangement as a form of security interest on the grounds of public policy? If, for example, the primary motivation of the parties entering into the title transfer arrangement were to avoid the Registration Provisions, in circumstances where the FCA Regulations did not apply, might this not be grounds for recharacterising the transaction?

It is clear that where there is a genuine legal difference between two arrangements that otherwise achieve the same or a similar economic effect, there is no general policy of English law that prevents their choosing the arrangement that is more convenient because, for example, it avoids the effect of legislation considered onerous by the parties. In the cases where parties have purported to enter into a fixed charge but the court has held the charge to be floating, entailing a number of inconvenient results, including historically the application of the Registration Provisions that would otherwise not have applied, the court has relied not on some overriding English policy intended to prevent circumvention of the Registration Provisions but on the fact that the charge in legal substance was a floating charge and not a fixed one.233 It is also clear that the English courts do not have any particular bias for security arrangements as opposed to title transfer arrangements. Provided that the parties reflect their true intentions in their contract, they are free to structure their transactions in whichever way they wish.

The foregoing is reinforced by the clear purpose of Article 6 of the Collateral Directive, to the effect that member states must ensure that title transfer collateral arrangements should take effect in accordance with their terms, that is, not be subject to recharacterisation. There is no

232 Contrast this with those cases in which the parties have purported to create a fixed charge but analysis of the legal substance of their arrangement shows that they have, in fact, created a floating charge. This issue is discussed above in our response to question 11 of Part III. 233 See our response to question 11 of Part III.

116

direct counterpart of this provision in the FCA Regulations, but we understand that this was simply because it was not considered necessary to specifically address recharacterisation risk in the FCA Regulations since the consensus is that the risk is negligible absent special circumstances.

Finally, in relation to Eligible Credit Support located outside England and Wales, it is not clear under current English conflict of laws rules whether an English court would apply such rules to the question of the proper characterisation of a transfer of such Eligible Credit Support under the Transfer Annex. While it is well-established that an English court will look to the relevant foreign jurisdictions as to the proprietary aspects of a transfer of assets located in such jurisdictions, it is not clear whether this includes the question of characterisation. As characterisation issues most often arise in the context of insolvency proceedings in respect of the transferor, it is also possible that the law of the insolvency proceedings will determine this issue. For a variety of reasons, it seems unlikely that an English court would recharacterise the Transfer Annex or any other title transfer collateral arrangement governed by English law as a result of recharacterisation under the law of the jurisdiction where the Collateral is located but it is possible that an English court would recognise and give effect to foreign insolvency law in this respect. Given that the position is not beyond doubt, the parties are therefore advised to investigate separately whether recharacterisation risk would arise in the jurisdiction of location of the Collateral assets or the place where any insolvency proceedings in respect of the Transferor could occur.234 Article 6(1) of the Collateral Directive addresses this risk in the EU by requiring each member state to ensure that a title transfer collateral arrangement can take effect in accordance with its terms. Article 7(1) provides similar protection in respect of close-out netting provisions and, of course, the Transfer Annex is "enforced" through the operation of the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement. Accordingly the risk of recharacterisation should be "virtually non-existent in any case involving a collateral-provider that is likely to be subject to main proceedings in an EU Member State and any case where the financial collateral is 'located' in an EU Member State."235

23. Assuming that the Transferee receives an absolute ownership interest in the Eligible Credit Support, will it need to take any action thereafter to ensure that its title therein continues? Are there any filing or perfection requirements necessary or advisable, including taking any of the actions referred to in question 5? Are there any other procedures that must be followed or consents or other governmental or regulatory approvals that must be obtained to establish, enforce or continue such an ownership interest?

Under English law, there are no ongoing actions of this kind that are required to ensure a continuation of title. There are no filing or perfection requirements of this kind that are necessary or desirable, and no consents or regulatory approvals would be required.

24. What is the effect, if any, under the laws of your jurisdiction of the right of the Transferor to exchange Eligible Credit Support pursuant to Paragraph 3(c) of each Transfer Annex? Does the presence or absence of consent to exchange by the Transferee have any bearing on this question? Please comment specifically on whether the Transferor and the Transferee are able validly to agree in the Transfer Annex that the Transferor may exchange Eligible Credit

234 Some indirect support for the views we have expressed may be found in British South Africa Co v De Beers Consolidated Mines Ltd [1910] 1 Ch 353, reversed on other grounds [1912] AC 52 and in Re Anchor Line (Henderson Bros) Ltd [1937] 2 All ER 823. These issues are also discussed, but without definitive conclusions being drawn, in a paper entitled "Cross-border securities collateral: redefining recharacterisation risk" delivered by Richard Fentiman, which was published in the proceedings of the Oxford Colloquium on Collateral and Conflict of Laws as a Special Supplement to Butterworths Journal of International Banking and Financial Law (September 1998). These issues are also discussed in Benjamin (n 230) at pp 134-137. Also see Maisie Ooi, Shares and Other Securities in the Conflict of Laws (OUP 2003) para 8.61-8.84. 235 Yeowart and Parsons (n 61) para 13.101.

117

Support without specific consent of the Transferee and whether and, if so, how this may affect your conclusions regarding the validity and enforceability of each Transfer Annex.

In our opinion, the provisions of Paragraph 3(c) of the Transfer Annex relating to the exchange of Eligible Credit Support do not change the characterisation of the transfers effected under the Transfer Annex, as each transfer relating to an exchange may equally be characterised as an outright transfer of ownership, as discussed above. We do not believe that the presence or absence of a consent requirement affects this analysis.236

25. The Transferee's rights in relation to the transferred Eligible Credit Support upon the occurrence of an Event of Default will be governed by Section 6 of the ISDA Master Agreement. Assuming that Section 6 of the ISDA Master Agreement is valid and enforceable in your jurisdiction insofar as it relates to the determination of the net amount payable by either party on the termination of the Transactions, could you please confirm that Paragraph 6 of each Transfer Annex would also be valid to the extent it provides for the Value of the Credit Support Balance to be included in the calculation of the net amount payable under Section 6 (e) of the ISDA Master Agreement.

Assuming that the Transferee receives an absolute ownership interest in the Collateral, in our opinion, Paragraph 6 of the Transfer Annex would also be valid to the extent that it provides for the Value of the Credit Support Balance (or Credit Support Balance (VM) in the case of the VM Transfer Annex) applicable to a Transferor to be included in the calculation of the net amount payable under Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement.

The availability of set-off (for example, in relation to intervening claims) is subject to the matters discussed in question 12 of Part III above.

26. Would the rights of the Transferee be enforceable in accordance with the terms of the ISDA Master Agreement and each Transfer Annex, irrespective of the insolvency of the Transferor?

Assuming that the Transferee receives an absolute ownership interest in the Collateral, the rights of the Transferee would be enforceable in accordance with the terms of the ISDA Master Agreement and the Transfer Annex, irrespective of the insolvency in England of a Transferor which is an English Company. In respect of the commencement of insolvency proceedings in England in respect of an English Branch that is providing Collateral please see Annex 1.

For the reasons given in Part III.3(3)(a) of the ISDA Netting Opinion, we believe that the ISDA Master Agreement and all Transactions (including that represented by the Transfer Annex) may be considered a single agreement between the parties and that a court would construe the close-out netting provisions (as defined in the ISDA Netting Opinion) of the ISDA Master Agreement together with Paragraph 6 of the Transfer Annex (other than to the extent that these provisions include within the calculation pursuant to Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement Unpaid Amounts owed by either party that became payable prior to the operation of Section 6(c)(ii) of the ISDA Master Agreement, as discussed in the ISDA Netting Opinion) as not involving contractual set-off but simply as representing an accounting of rights and liabilities under the single agreement following the designation or deemed occurrence of an Early Termination Date. As noted in the ISDA Netting Opinion, this is sometimes referred to as the "flawed asset" approach to contractual netting.

236 This view was confirmed by leading counsel prior to the implementation of the Collateral Directive in England. Beale and others (n 54) also notes at paragraph 7.67 in the context of a repo that there seems no reason why a repo agreement should not include a substitution right according to fixed criteria which does not require consent.

118

If, however, the court were to construe the close-out netting provisions (together with Paragraph 6 of the Transfer Annex) as operating by way of contractual set-off rather than pursuant to the "single agreement" (or "flawed asset") approach, we also consider that Paragraph 6 would be valid as a matter of English law. Automatic and mandatory insolvency set-off of mutual credits and mutual debts between the Transferor and the Transferee would occur in a liquidation of the English Company under Rule 14.25 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016. Furthermore, in circumstances where an administrator intends to make a distribution and has delivered a notice under Rule 14.29, automatic and mandatory insolvency set-off of mutual credits and mutual debts between the Transferor and the Transferee would occur under Rule 14.24 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 in an administration. Automatic and mandatory insolvency set-off is subject to a cut-off in respect of debts incurred after a specified date. The operation of the mandatory set-off provisions would result in a net balance owed by or to the Non-defaulting Party, although the quantum and timing of this net balance would not necessarily match the quantum and timing of the determination of the net balance under Section 6(e) (see the ISDA Netting Opinion for more details).

In respect of the winding up or administration of an English Company, a proof for a debt incurred or payable in a foreign currency must state the amount of the debt in that currency and, pursuant to Rule 14.21(2) of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016, the office- holder must convert all such debts into sterling at a single rate for each currency determined by the office-holder by reference to the exchange rates prevailing on the "relevant date". The "relevant date" is defined at Rule 14.1 and means:

(a) in the case of an administration:

(i) if the administration was not immediately preceded by a winding up, the date on which the company entered administration; or

(ii) if the administration was immediately preceded by a winding up, the date on which the company went into liquidation; and

(b) in the case of a winding up:

(i) if the winding up was not immediately preceded by an administration, the date on which the company went into liquidation; or

(ii) if the winding up was immediately preceded by an administration, the date on which the company entered administration.

If a creditor considers that the rate determined by the office-holder is unreasonable they may apply to the court. If the court finds that the rate is unreasonable it may itself determine the exchange rate.237

Rules 14.25(8) and 14.24(8) provide that Rule 14.21 also applies for the purpose of determining the exchange rate applicable to sums payable in a foreign currency to the insolvent party which are to be set-off under Rules 14.25 and 14.24 (respectively) against sums owed by the insolvent party.

237 Rule 14.21(4) and (5). In the unreported decision of Re Kaupthing Singer & Friedlander (In Administration) (Ch, 16 June 2009), Lloyd J ordered that the administrators should use the spot exchange rates published by the Bank of England on the date of administration as the "official exchange rate" for the purposes of Rule 2.86 of the Insolvency Rules 1986, which was the predecessor to Rule 14.21 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 in respect of administration.

119

As described in the ISDA Netting Opinion, in our view Rule 14.21 would, where relevant, apply to the net claim of the solvent Non-defaulting Party as determined under Section 6(e). In other words, an English court would not require that the mark-to-market value of each Terminated Transaction determined for purposes of Section 6(e) (or the Unpaid Amount representing the Credit Support Balance or Credit Support Balance (VM)) be converted separately in accordance with the relevant Rule before being set off under the corresponding insolvency set-off provision (Rule 14.24, in the case of administration, or Rule 14.25, in the case of liquidation). This follows from our view that an English court would recognise and give effect to the net amount determined under Section 6(e) and would not view that provision as a form of contractual set-off provision to be displaced by Rule 14.24 or Rule 14.25, as the case may be.238

If, however, we are wrong, then the close-out value of each Terminated Transaction determined under Section 6(e) as well as each Unpaid Amount (in each case, where the relevant value or amount is denominated in a currency other than sterling) would be compulsorily converted to sterling at the prevailing rate on the relevant date, rather than in accordance with the terms of Section 6(e) as to the timing and conversion of all values into the Termination Currency, in accordance with the definition in Section 14 of "Termination Currency Equivalent".

If the Transfer Annex forms part of a financial collateral arrangement under the FCA Regulations as discussed in Part II above, regulation 12 provides that a close-out netting provision shall, subject to paragraph (2), take effect in accordance with its terms notwithstanding that the collateral-provider or collateral-taker under the arrangement is subject to winding-up proceedings or reorganisation measures. In addition, pursuant to the FCA Regulations, where applicable, regulation 14 states that neither Rule 4.91 nor Rule 2.86 of the Insolvency Rules 1986 apply in respect of a financial collateral arrangement if the arrangement provides for another method of determining the relevant exchange rate into sterling or provides for the debt owed by the party in liquidation or administration to be assessed in a currency other than sterling, unless "the arrangement provides for an unreasonable exchange rate or the collateral-taker uses the mechanism provided under the arrangement to impose an unreasonable exchange rate".

As discussed in the ISDA Netting Opinion, in our view, this is intended to protect, for example, the conversion of the value of each Terminated Transaction into the Termination Currency of the ISDA Master Agreement or, in relation to the operation of the Transfer Annexes, both the conversion of the value of any item of Eligible Credit Support comprised in the Credit Support Balance (or Credit Support Balance (VM)) into the Base Currency and the subsequent conversion (if any) of the Unpaid Amount representing the Value of the Credit Support Balance (or Credit Support Balance (VM)) into the Termination Currency, such that the currency conversions contemplated by Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement and Paragraph 6 of the Transfer Annex are not displaced by Rule 4.91 or Rule 2.86. As outlined above, Rules 14.24 and 14.25 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 are (with effect from 6 April 2017) the insolvency set-off rules applicable to English Companies in an administration or winding up (respectively) and have superseded Rules 2.85 and 4.90 of the Insolvency Rules 1986 and Rule 14.21 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 has, in turn, replaced Rules 2.86 and 4.91 of the Insolvency Rules 1986. The FCA Regulations have not been updated to reflect this change but, in our view, regulation 14 should be read as applying to Rule 14.21.239 Therefore, the above issues relating to Rule

238 Although note the limited contractual set-off that applies in respect of Unpaid Amounts (as discussed above). 239 In any event, as discussed above, we are of the view that an English court would recognise and give effect to the net amount determined under Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement (together with Paragraph 6 of the Transfer Annex) and would not

120

14.21 should not apply. However, where the Termination Currency is a currency other than sterling, Rule 14.21 would still apply in order to convert it into sterling for the purpose of proving the debt.

If the requisite majority of creditors of the Transferor were to approve a CVA under the Insolvency Act 1986 or a scheme of arrangement under the Companies Act 2006, this could have the effect of releasing the whole or any part of the Transferee's claim against the Transferor and this could affect the Transferee's ability to exercise its contractual rights to netting or set-off under the Transfer Annex. The CVA or scheme may also contain provisions similar to the mandatory set-off rules referred to above preventing the exercise of set-off rights in respect of debts incurred after a specified date. As a practical matter, however, the Transferee should have sufficient time between notice of the relevant qualifying decision procedure and the approval of the CVA pursuant to the qualifying decision procedure within which to exercise any rights of netting or set-off, at least where the Transferee has a credit monitoring process in place. Similarly, the Non-defaulting Party should have time to exercise its rights under the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement before a scheme of arrangement is approved.240 Regulation 12 of the FCA Regulations discussed above is also relevant in the context of voluntary arrangements under the Insolvency Act 1986.

In respect of the 1995 Transfer Annex, we assume that the parties will provide that, for the purposes of Paragraph 6, the Valuation Percentage will be 100 per cent for each type of Eligible Credit Support comprised in the Credit Support Balance. If the Valuation Percentage for the purposes of Paragraph 6 is less than 100 per cent, then there is a risk that, in certain circumstances, the operation of Paragraph 6 might offend the English anti-deprivation rule.241 Whether or not it would offend the rule would depend on the specific facts of the particular case. The definition of "Value" in the VM Transfer Annex provides for this.

The enforcement freeze imposed upon an administration of the Transferor or in the context of a "small company" voluntary arrangement in respect of the Transferor (as discussed in the answer to question 17 of Part III above) might inhibit the ability of the Transferee to take proceedings against the Transferor to recover any shortfall following the closing out and netting of all outstanding Transactions in accordance with the ISDA Master Agreement. The administration or small company voluntary arrangement freeze would not, however, prevent the Transferee from exercising its close-out rights under the ISDA Master Agreement and the Transfer Annex or from setting off outstanding obligations, nor would it interfere with the ability of the Transferee to sell the securities transferred to it.

27. Will the Transferor (or its administrator, provisional liquidator, conservator, receiver, trustee, custodian or other similar official) be able to recover any transfers of Eligible Credit Support made to the Transferee during a certain "suspect period" preceding the date of the insolvency? If so, how long before the insolvency does this suspect period begin? If such a period exists, would the substitution of Eligible Credit Support by a Counterparty during this period invalidate an otherwise valid transfer assuming the substitute assets are of no greater value than the asset they are replacing? Would the transfer of additional Eligible Credit Support pursuant to the mark-to-market provisions of each Transfer Annex during the suspect

view that provision as a form of contractual set off provision to be displaced by Rule 14.24 or Rule 14.25, as the case may be, other than potentially in respect of Unpaid Amounts. 240 Note that it is possible that an Event of Default under section 5(a)(vii) may not be triggered in respect of a scheme of arrangement between a company and a single creditor or small group of creditors as opposed to a collective proceeding with creditors generally. 241 See Part III.3(3)(a) of the ISDA Netting Opinion for a brief explanation of the anti-deprivation rule and discussion of the leading authority on that rule.

121

period be subject to avoidance, either because it was considered to relate to an antecedent or pre-existing obligation or for some reason?

The analysis set out in question 18 of Part III above would apply equally to transfers of Eligible Credit Support under the Transfer Annexes (although we note that the discussion of Spread Trustee is specific to security based documents).

28. Would the parties' agreement on governing law of each Transfer Annex and submission to the jurisdiction be upheld in your jurisdiction, and what would be the consequences if it were not?

Our analysis in the answer to question 19 of Part III applies equally to the Transfer Annex except that the governing law and jurisdiction clause is set out in the relevant ISDA Master Agreement itself.242

29. Is each Transfer Annex in an appropriate form to create the intended outright transfer of ownership in the Eligible Credit Support to the Transferee? If there are any other requirements to ensure the validity of such transfer in each type of Eligible Credit Support by the Transferor under a Transfer Annex, please indicate the nature of such requirements. For example, are there any requirements of the type referred to in question 6?

The Transfer Annex is in an appropriate form to create the intended outright transfer of ownership in Eligible Credit Support located in England. There are no particular requirements under English law to ensure the validity of such a transfer. It is simply necessary that the relevant agreement be sufficiently clear and certain as to the intended transfer of title. We believe that the Transfer Annex is sufficiently clear and certain to reflect such an intention.

Note that if the Eligible Credit Support is located outside England, it would be necessary to ensure that the appropriate local requirements for the validity of the transfer of that Eligible Credit Support have been satisfied.

VII. ENFORCEABILITY IN THE ABSENCE OF INSOLVENCY PROCEEDINGS

1. Introduction

The principal focus of this opinion is on the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against (i) an English Counterparty as Collateral Provider (including in the event of insolvency proceedings in England); or (ii) a Foreign Entity where the Collateral is located in England.

As the Deeds are each governed by English law and the Transfer Annexes are each intended to be entered into in connection with an ISDA Master Agreement governed by English law, you have asked us to opine on the validity and enforceability under English law of each of the Deeds and the Transfer Annexes against an English Counterparty or against a Foreign Entity as a matter of contract absent insolvency proceedings or resolution action in relation to either party.

You have also requested us to opine on the validity and enforceability under English law of the English CTAs against an English Counterparty or against a Foreign Entity as a matter of contract absent insolvency proceedings or resolution action in relation to either party.

242 We do not consider in this memorandum whether and in what circumstances the 1992 Agreement or the 2002 Agreement constitute exclusive or non-exclusive jurisdiction clauses.

122

Consistent with the scope of Parts III, IV, V and VI, our opinion on the contractual enforceability in respect of the 1995 Deed in this Part VII does not consider enforceability against the United Kingdom acting through Her Majesty's Treasury and our opinions in this Part VII on the contractual enforceability of the IM Deed and the English CTAs do not consider enforceability against the Bank of England or the United Kingdom acting through Her Majesty's Treasury.

2. The Deeds

(a) Assumptions

For the purposes of this Part VII.2, our assumptions made in respect of the Deeds for the purposes of Parts III and IV apply other than assumption (k) of Part III.2 (including as applied by Part IV).

In particular, but without limiting the generality of the above, we assume:

(i) each party is able to enter into and has taken all corporate action necessary to authorise entry into the relevant Deed;

(ii) insofar as any obligation under the Deed falls to be performed in any jurisdiction outside England, its performance will not be illegal or ineffective by virtue of the laws of that jurisdiction; and

(iii) in respect of the IM Deed amended to include the IM Deed Japanese Amendments we make the additional assumptions at Part IV.5.

(b) Conclusion

On the basis of the assumptions above and the qualifications below, in the absence of insolvency proceedings or resolution action in relation to the relevant Counterparty, we are of the view that each Deed (including, in respect of the IM Deed, as amended to include the IM Deed Japanese Amendments) would constitute valid and enforceable obligations under English law and each creates a security interest in the Collateral to the extent the Collateral is Located in England.

(c) Qualifications

The foregoing conclusions are subject to the following qualifications:

(i) This is subject to all insolvency, resolution and other laws affecting the rights of creditors generally.

(ii) No opinion is expressed on matters of fact.

(iii) No opinion is expressed on tax matters.

(iv) No opinion is expressed in this Part VII.2 as to:

(I) the title of any English Counterparty or Foreign Entity to any Collateral;

(II) the priority of the security;

(III) the nature of the security created by the relevant Deed (including whether it is fixed or floating);

123

(IV) the marketability or rights of enforcement in respect of any Collateral; or

(V) any other restriction affecting any Collateral or the security created by the relevant Deed.

(v) An English court may decline jurisdiction or stay or dismiss proceedings before it in some circumstances.

(vi) See Part I above as to the meaning of "enforceable" for the purposes of this memorandum.

(vii) In relation to the IM Deed, we express no opinion on (i) the enforceability of the Delivery in Lieu Right or (ii) the ability of a Chargor to serve a Chargor Access Notice in circumstances where all Obligations of the Chargor have not been satisfied.

(viii) See our answers to question 12 in Parts III and IV in respect of enforcement rights over any Collateral located in England. We express no opinion on the enforcement rights over any Collateral located outside of England (as such enforcement rights will depend on the law of the relevant jurisdiction).

(ix) See our answers to question 16 in Parts III and IV in respect of the rules of priority applicable to the security created by an English Counterparty under the Deeds with regard to Collateral located in England. We express no opinion on the priority of the security created by the relevant Deed with regard to Collateral located outside of England or in relation to a Foreign Entity (as such priority will depend on the law of the jurisdiction of the location of the assets and/or the insolvency jurisdiction of the Foreign Entity).

(x) See our answers to question 19 in Parts III and IV as to the choice of law and jurisdiction provisions in the relevant Deed.

(xi) Paragraph 11 of the 1995 Deed provides for default interest to apply if the Secured Party fails to make, when due, any transfer of Posted Collateral or the Interest Amount. Similarly, Paragraph 11 of the IM Deed provides for default interest on Posted Credit Support (IM) where the Secured Party fails to instruct the Custodian (IM) to transfer it to the Chargor in accordance with the terms of the IM Deed. In either case, this may amount to a penalty under English law and may therefore not be recoverable.243

(xii) Any provision of either form of Deed that states that a failure or delay, on the part of any party, in exercising any right or remedy under the Deed shall not operate as a waiver of such right or remedy may not be effective.

(xiii) There could be circumstances in which an English court would not treat as conclusive a certificate or determination or other evidence or statement that the relevant Deed states is to be so treated.

(xiv) To the extent that any provision of a Deed purports to be an undertaking by a party to assume liability on account of the absence of payment of United Kingdom stamp duty or an undertaking to pay United Kingdom stamp duty, such provision may be void.

243 Following the Supreme Court decision in Cavendish Square Holding BV v Talal El Makdessi; ParkingEye Limited v Beavis [2015] UKSC 67, the test to be applied is whether the provision in question "is a secondary obligation which imposes a detriment on the contract-breaker out of all proportion to any legitimate interest of the innocent party in the enforcement of the primary obligation".

124

(xv) Any provision of a Deed that provides for deemed receipt of notices may be ineffective if a party has actual evidence of non-delivery.

(xvi) A payment obligation will be unenforceable under English law if (i) it involves the currency of any member of the International Monetary Fund and (ii) it is contrary to the exchange control regulations of any member of the International Monetary Fund that are maintained or imposed consistently with the International Monetary Fund Agreement.

(xvii) In respect of an English Partnership, we refer you to Annex 17 for a discussion of the conceptual difficulties inherent in the grant of security by an English Partnership and the characterisation of a purported security grant by an English Partnership.

(xviii) In respect of the Bank of England, issues relating to political risk and sovereign immunity arise (as discussed in Annex 18). For the purposes of this Part VII, we assume neither party is entitled to immunity under English law.

(xix) Where the IM Deed Japanese Amendments have been included in the IM Deed we express no opinion as to the nature of the Japanese security interest so created (which will be dictated by Japanese law) or otherwise as to the validity or enforceability of such security interest as a matter of English law. For the avoidance of doubt, we do not opine on the enforceability of any aspect of the IM Deed governed by another law other than English law and assume that no foreign law qualifies or affects our opinion in this Part VII.2. See Part IV.5 above to the extent that issues relating to dépeçage arise in respect of the IM Deed as amended to include the IM Deed Japanese Amendments.

3. The English CTAs

(a) Assumptions

For the purposes of this Part VII.3, our assumptions made in respect of the Clearing System IM Documents for the purposes of Part V apply other than assumption (k) of Part III.2 (as applied by Part V).

In particular, but without limiting the generality of the above, we assume:

(i) each party is able to enter into and has taken all corporate action necessary to authorise entry into the relevant English CTA; and

(ii) insofar as any obligation under the relevant English CTA falls to be performed in any jurisdiction outside England, its performance will not be illegal or ineffective by virtue of the laws of that jurisdiction.

(b) Conclusion

On the basis of the assumptions above and the qualifications below, in the absence of insolvency proceedings or resolution action in relation to the relevant Counterparty, we are of the view that each English CTA (including, as amended to include the relevant CTA Japanese Amendments) would constitute valid and enforceable obligations under English law.

(c) Qualifications

The forgoing conclusions are subject to the following qualifications:

125

(i) The qualifications set out in Part VII.2(c)(i) to (iii), (v), (vi), (x) and (xii) to (xvi) shall apply mutatis mutandis.

(ii) Paragraph 10 of each English CTA provides for default interest on Posted Collateral where the Collateral Taker fails to make, when due, a transfer of Posted Collateral under such agreement or the relevant Euroclear Security Agreement or Clearstream Security Agreement (as applicable). This may amount to a penalty under English law and may therefore not be recoverable.244

(iii) The effectiveness of an entire agreement clause is subject to the English courts being satisfied that, as a matter of fact, there was no additional term which the parties intended to form part of the agreement.

(iv) The question of whether or not any provision of an agreement that may be invalid, illegal or unenforceable may be severed from the other provisions of that agreement in order to save those other provisions would be determined by an English court in its discretion.

4. The Transfer Annexes

Each Transfer Annex forms part of and is subject to the relevant English law governed ISDA Master Agreement. We refer to Part V of the ISDA Netting Opinion. On the basis of the assumptions and qualifications set out there and assuming that each party is able to enter into and has taken all corporate action necessary to authorise entry into the relevant Transfer Annex and, insofar as any obligation under the Transfer Annex falls to be performed in any jurisdiction outside England, its performance will not be illegal or ineffective by virtue of the laws of that jurisdiction, then the entry into a Transfer Annex by two parties within the scope of Part V of the ISDA Netting Opinion in connection with an English law governed ISDA Master Agreement would not affect the conclusions in Part V of the ISDA Netting Opinion. We refer you to our answer to question 22 at Part VI.3 regarding recharacterisation risk. Also, in respect of the Bank of England and the United Kingdom acting through Her Majesty's Treasury, this opinion is subject to political risk and sovereign immunity (as discussed in Annexes 18 and 19, respectively); for the purposes of this Part VII.4, we assume neither party is entitled to immunity under English law.

VIII. CLOSE-OUT AMOUNT PROTOCOL

We have reviewed the ISDA Close-out Amount Protocol and confirm that if a 1992 Agreement between two parties, each of which is a Counterparty falling within the scope of this memorandum, governing Transactions each of which is of a type set out in Appendix A, were amended pursuant to the ISDA Close-out Amount Protocol, our conclusions in this memorandum regarding the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents would not be materially affected.

IX. COLLATERAL AGREEMENT NEGATIVE INTEREST PROTOCOL

We have reviewed the ISDA 2014 Collateral Agreement Negative Interest Protocol and confirm that if a Credit Support Document between two parties, each of which is a Counterparty falling within the scope of this memorandum, were amended pursuant to the ISDA 2014 Collateral Agreement Negative Interest Protocol, our conclusions in this memorandum regarding the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents would not be materially affected.

244 See note 243.

126

X. INDEPENDENT AMOUNT (IA) PROVISIONS

We have reviewed the IA Amendments and confirm that, if a VM NY Annex or VM Transfer Annex between two parties, each of which is a Counterparty falling within the scope of this memorandum, were amended to include the relevant IA Amendments, our conclusions in this memorandum regarding the enforceability of such VM Documents would not be materially affected.

XI. PENDING DEVELOPMENTS

Our views expressed in this memorandum are based on our understanding of English law as in effect on the date of this memorandum. Subject to this, we note that there are a number of pending developments in the form of proposals for English and European legislative changes that may have some impact on our analysis in this memorandum.

The implementation of the BRRD may necessitate further changes to the UK framework. The Commission Delegated Regulation under Article 76 of the BRRD, which entered into force on 9 June 2017 and which is discussed in more detail at Annex 1 to this memorandum, circumscribes the scope of protection for netting and set-off arrangements in a partial property transfer scenario making the Partial Property Safeguards Order, in its current form, inconsistent with the level 2 measure. Furthermore we note that, on 23 November 2016, the European Commission published proposals to amend certain aspects of the BRRD245 (the BRRD2 Proposals). The main objective of the BRRD2 Proposals is to implement the globally agreed Total Loss-Absorbing Capacity (TLAC) standard and to integrate the TLAC requirement into the minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL) obligation mandated by the BRRD. We note that derivatives liabilities are excluded from TLAC and MREL. However, there are also a number of other aspects of the BRRD which are impacted by the proposals.246 We briefly discuss below the proposals in relation to Article 55 and additional moratoria tools. Please note that the legislative process is on-going. The amendments to the BRRD are expected to apply from some point in early to mid 2020.

Recognising some of the practical difficulties currently encountered by market participants in complying with Article 55, the BRRD2 Proposals include an amendment to Article 55 of the BRRD to include additional powers permitting resolution authorities to waive the contractual recognition of bail-in requirements in certain circumstances. Pursuant to the European Council compromise text of 23 May 2018, where a relevant entity determines that it is legally or otherwise impracticable to include the contractual term, the entity must notify its resolution authority and the obligation is suspended with effect from the receipt of notice by the resolution authority. The resolution authority may require the inclusion of the contractual term where it considers that there is no impracticality or the contractual recognition is necessary to ensure the resolvability of the relevant entity. The European Parliament's compromise proposals of 25 June 2018 suggest that Article 55 should not apply to liabilities of entities whose MREL equals the loss absorption amount, provided the relevant liabilities are not counted towards that requirement. It also suggests that the sum of liabilities able to benefit from the proposed improbability waiver shall not exceed 15% of total eligible liabilities that are senior to the new class of senior non-preferred liabilities, not excluded under Article 44(2) of the BRRD, not a deposit under Article 108(a) of the BRRD and issued

245 The original proposal can be accessed at accessed 12 November 2018. 246 Note that, as mentioned below, Directive 2017/2399/EU (Insolvency Hierarchy Directive) amends Article 108 of the BRRD to create a new asset class of non-preferred senior debt as part of the reform package implementing TLAC. Member states are required to bring into force the laws, regulations and administrative provisions necessary to comply with the Directive by 29 December 2018. The Government has produced the draft Banks and Building Societies (Priorities on Insolvency) Order 2018, which is designed to implement the Insolvency Hierarchy Directive by amending, inter alia, the Insolvency Act 1986.

127

or entered into after the date on which a member state applies the Article 55 requirement. The Council text also introduces a new Article 71a mandating the contractual recognition (in "financial contracts") of stay powers under the BRRD.

The BRRD2 Proposals contained two new additional moratorium tools to suspend payment and delivery obligations: (i) an early intervention power (to apply in the pre-resolution phase) which could be used when it is necessary to assess whether early intervention measures are necessary or to determine whether the institution is failing or is likely to fail and the duration of the stay could not exceed 5 working days, and (ii) a general resolution power (to apply in the resolution phase) which could be used to suspend payment or delivery obligations when this is needed for the effective application of one or more resolution tools or for the purposes of valuation under Article 36 of the BRRD and, again, the duration of the stay could not exceed 5 working days.

The Council compromise text, however, deletes the Commission's proposed two new powers and replaces them with one new moratorium, at Article 33a. Article 33a grants the resolution authorities the power to suspend payment or delivery obligations after a determination that the institution is failing or likely to fail pursuant to Article 32(1)(a) has been made if the resolution authority decides that the exercise of the suspension power is necessary to avoid the further deterioration of the financial condition of the entity or to reach the determination that the conditions under Article 32(1)(b) and (c) are met or to choose the appropriate resolution actions. The period of suspension must be as short as possible and not exceed the minimum period of time the resolution authority considers absolutely necessary for the purposes of the suspension and, in any event, shall not exceed 2 business days. The European Parliament's compromise proposal similarly contains only one new moratorium power available to the resolution authority after a determination that an institution is failing or likely to fail. However, whereas the European Council's proposals envisage the new moratorium power as an alternative to the existing Article 69 stay, the European Parliament's proposals would permit both to be used albeit it with a requirement of 10 business days between any such dual use. The Council proposal contains provisions allowing the resolution authority to stay enforcement of security and/or termination rights in the circumstances in which payment or delivery obligations are suspended pursuant to paragraph 1 of Article 33(a). However, the Council's compromise proposals provide that where the resolution authority does utilise the new Article 33a moratorium power, whether or not with Article 70 and/or 71, it may not subsequently exercise the stay powers under Articles 69, 70 or 71.

Aside from the BRRD, another relevant area of regulatory development in relation to UK banks is the ring-fencing regime introduced by the Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013. This will have effect from 1 January 2019. In summary, the regime requires that UK banks ring-fence their retail and SME deposit-taking business in an independent legal entity separate to and effectively insulated from other wholesale and investment banking activity. A ring fenced bank is prohibited from entering into derivative transactions subject to limited exemptions (e.g. where the transaction is for hedging purposes or is a simple derivative transaction entered into with an account holder where certain conditions are satisfied). The penalty for any breach of the prohibition would be regulatory enforcement against the ring fenced bank.

Pertinent legal developments include initiatives relating to the harmonisation of securities law and conflicts of laws rules. A public consultation of the Directorate-General, Internal Markets and Services, of the European Commission on improving legal certainty of securities holdings and dispositions closed in January 2011.247 The consultation had the stated objective

247 Commission, "Legislation on Legal Certainty of Securities Holdings and Dispositions" (Consultation Document) DG Markt G2 MET/OT/acgD (2010) 768690.

128

that "EU law should regulate the legal framework governing the holding and disposition of securities held through securities accounts and the processing of rights flowing from securities held through securities accounts" and was prepared in the context of the development of proposed EU legislation referred to as the "Securities Law Directive". The consultation document contained 22 specific harmonising principles relating to the holding and disposition of intermediated securities, which included a conflict of laws principle reflecting PRIMA.

More recently, the Commission consulted on conflict of laws rules for third party effects of transactions in securities and claims248, seeking responses on various matters relating to issues of conflicts of laws including the nature of the relevant rules for intermediated securities, cash and other claims and whether there was a need for greater harmonisation across Europe and, if so, the preferred method of achieving harmonisation. This consultation closed on 30 June 2017 and ISDA submitted a response on 29 June 2017. In March 2018, the Commission published a proposal for a regulation on the law applicable to the third-party effects of assignments of claims.249 Article 4(1) of the proposed regulation sets out the general rule that third-party effects of an assignment of claims shall be governed by the law of the country in which the assignor has its habitual residence at the material time. However, cash credited to an account in a credit institution and claims arising from a financial instrument are exceptions, for which the relevant law is the law applicable to the assigned claim. It should be noted that the explanatory memorandum accompanying the proposal states that matters governed by the Collateral Directive, the Settlement Finality Directive and the Winding Up Directive are not affected by the proposed regulation. ISDA published a letter in response to the proposal in May 2018. ISDA raised concerns regarding the scope of these exceptions, in particular, that the use of the term "financial instrument" is too narrow to encompass all the relevant claims that might be subject to voluntary assignment in the derivatives market. Also ISDA is of the view that the definition of "claim" should be amended to put beyond doubt the exclusion of intermediated securities from the scope of the Commission Proposal.

In the wider international setting, there are more developed initiatives in this field. We have already mentioned, in our response to question 2 of Part III, the Hague Securities Convention and its "party autonomy" approach to the question of the law applicable to transfers of intermediated securities. The EU has not adopted the Convention but the consultation on conflict of laws may reopen the debate on its relevance. The Geneva Securities Convention,250 which is not currently in force, is intended to complement the Hague Securities Convention by seeking to create a global framework for the holding, transfer and collateralisation of intermediated securities.

In November 2016, the Commission published a proposal for a directive on preventive restructuring frameworks, second chance and measures to increase the efficiency of restructuring, insolvency and discharge procedures and amending Directive 2012/30/EU.251 The proposed directive seeks to introduce minimum standards for pre-insolvency restructuring proceedings. In summary, the areas covered are (i) the introduction of stays on creditor action and the adoption of restructuring plans (including provisions for the cram- down of an impaired class) (articles 5-15); (ii) safe-harbours for new financing and other restructuring related transactions (articles 16-17); (iii) protections for directors who propose a

248 Commission, "Consultation Document on conflict of laws rules for third party effects of transactions in securities and claims" Ref. Ares(2017)1874960 - 07/04/2017 accessed 12 November 2018. 249 Commission, "Proposal for a Regulation of the European Parliament and of the Council on the law applicable to the third-party effects of assignments of claims" COM(2018) 96 final accessed 12 November 2018. 250 The UNIDROIT Convention on Substantive Rules for Intermediated Securities (signed in Geneva on 9 October 2009). 251 COM(2016) 723 final.

129

plan (article 18); (iv) limitations on the discharge period for individual debtors (articles 19- 23); and (v) certain measures intended to increase the efficiency of restructuring and insolvency proceedings (articles 24-29). It is expected to take several months before the proposed directive becomes final but certain member states (such as the UK) have been considering similar changes to their restructuring laws to try to attract more restructurings to a particular jurisdiction. Concerns with the proposal centre around ensuring that other EU legislation, including the Collateral Directive, prevails, especially given a proposed stay on individual enforcement actions.

In August 2018, the UK Government published its response252 to the Corporate Insolvency Framework consultation,253 which contained a package of proposals to improve the rescue opportunities for financially-distressed companies drawing on some of the features of the United States' debtor-in-possession regime. Among the proposals is a new moratorium period for financially viable companies and a proposal to prohibit the enforcement of "termination clauses" by a supplier in contracts for the supply of goods and services where the clause allows a contract to be terminated on the ground that one of the parties to the contract has entered formal insolvency. In relation to ipso facto clauses, the Government acknowledges that certain types of financial products and services represent special cases and therefore accepts that there are grounds for exempting such products and services. The response also indicates that the Government intends to apply an inflationary increase to the prescribed part, adjusting the cap to approximately £800,000.

Another noteworthy UK development is the proposal for a regulation which will nullify clauses in contracts which prohibit or restrict assignments of receivables arising under that contract or any other contract between the same parties. The rationale behind the regulations is to ensure that small businesses have a range of financing options available to them including factoring and invoice discounting. The draft Business Contract Terms (Assignment of Receivables) Regulations 2018 to be made under the Small Business, Enterprise and Employment Act 2015 carve out certain contracts relating to "prescribed financial services" (defined in section 2 of the 2015 Act to mean any service of a financial nature and includes trading in derivatives for own account or for account of customers in an over-the-counter market) from its scope as well as options, futures, swaps, forwards, contracts for differences and other derivatives contracts relating to commodities, energy, emission allowances, climatic variables, freight rates or inflation rates or other official economic statistics provided that the transaction is entered into under a "market agreement for close-out netting".

The final text of the UNCITRAL Model Law on Recognition and Enforcement of Insolvency- Related Judgments has been published but has not yet been approved by the UN General Assembly. We are not aware of there being a firm indication that the UK would adopt the Model Law but this is the general expectation. The Model Law provides for the recognition of judgments arising in cross-border insolvency situations and is intended to complement the UNCITRAL Model Law on Cross-Border Insolvency, which (as discussed) creates a regime for recognition and cooperation in the context of cross-border insolvency proceedings but does not provide for the cross-border recognition and enforcement of judgments.

A number of proposals for the reform of Limited Partnerships have previously been advanced. Most recently, prompted by media reports alleging some limited partnerships

252 Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy, Insolvency and Corporate Governance (Government response, 26 August 2018) accessed 12 November 2018. 253 The Insolvency Service, A Review of the Corporate Insolvency Framework: A consultation on options for reform (May 2016) accessed 12 November 2018.

130

registered in Scotland are being used as vehicles for a number of different forms of criminality, the Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy (BEIS) published a Call for Evidence on 16 January 2017 seeking views and evidence on the possible reasons why registration of limited partnerships in Scotland (and to a lesser extent in England and Northern Ireland) has increased significantly and the types of economic uses they are put to. The consultation also aimed to look more broadly at the reform of the law of limited partnerships, including, transparency requirements, principal place of business for the purposes of registration, the serving of legal documents and the arrangements for the ending of a limited partnership. It closed on 17 March 2017. BEIS has subsequently launched a further consultation on the reform of Limited Partnership law254, which closed on 23 July 2018, stating that, while evidence provided demonstrates a continuing need to offer the limited partnership as a business entity, there is also evidence of misuse and the Government therefore wants to seek views on a series of reforms to limit the risk of misuse and to strengthen and update the legal framework.

Finally, consideration should be given to the implications of "Brexit". On 23 June 2016, in a referendum on the UK's continued participation in the European Union, a majority of those voting voted to leave the European Union. The first step in the formal process to do so, which is the giving of notice by the UK to the European Council of its intention to withdraw under Article 50 of the Treaty on European Union, was taken on 29 March 2017 following the earlier adoption of the European Union (Notification of Withdrawal) Act 2017. The UK will cease to be a member of the EU (and will become a "third country" for the purposes of EU law) at 11pm (London time) on 29 March 2019 (exit day), unless the UK requests and the 27 other EU member states (the EU27) unanimously agree to an extension.

The European Commission's draft withdrawal agreement, which will set out the framework for the future relationship between the EU27 and the UK, envisages that there may be a transitional period until 31 December 2020. However, the terms of a withdrawal agreement will not become legally binding until finalised and ratified by the European Parliament, the European Council and the UK. Both the UK Government and the European Commission negotiators are working towards finalising the terms of the draft withdrawal agreement and the process must be completed by 29 March 2019.

From a UK perspective, in order to give legal standing to separation from the EU, the UK Government will introduce a withdrawal agreement and implementation bill to enshrine the withdrawal agreement into domestic law. The bill is expected to cover the contents of the withdrawal agreement, including issues such as the details of a transitional period agreed between both sides. It will be laid before Parliament after the withdrawal agreement has been signed. Accordingly, even if the text of a withdrawal agreement is agreed at a political level, the process of ratification could take several months meaning legal certainty (including in respect of any transitional period) is unlikely before the end of 2018.

UK contingency preparations for financial services legislation are often referred to as "onshoring". The European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018 (the UK Withdrawal Act), which is intended to ensure that the UK has a functioning statute book on exit day, received royal assent on 26 June 2018. The UK Withdrawal Act will (i) repeal the European Communities Act 1972; (ii) convert EU law as it stands on exit day into UK law and retain EU-derived domestic legislation; (iii) create powers for UK Government Ministers to make changes to converted or retained EU law by secondary legislation in the form of Statutory Instruments (SIs) to prevent, remedy or mitigate any failure of EU law to operate effectively and to

254 Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy, Limited Partnerships: Reform of Limited Partnership Law (30 April 2018) accessed 12 November 2018.

131

correct "deficiencies" as well as to implement any withdrawal agreement (as discussed above); and (iv) bring to an end the jurisdiction of the Court of Justice of the EU in the UK. HM Treasury is in the process of publishing the relevant onshoring SIs in respect of financial services legislation and intends to put the SIs before Parliament this Autumn 2018.255 All SIs have been drafted on the basis of a "hard" Brexit. The SIs are not intended to make policy changes other than to reflect the UK's new position outside the EU. The changes in the SIs will not take effect on 29 March 2019 if a transitional agreement is reached.

HM Treasury proposes to delegate powers under the UK Withdrawal Act to the Bank of England, the FCA and the PRA to make amendments to their existing rules as well as onshored EU Binding Technical Standards (BTS). These changes to rules and BTS will be made by legal instruments called EU Exit Instruments.

On 10 October 2018 the FCA published the consultation paper, "Brexit: proposed changes to the Handbook and Binding Technical Standards – first consultation"256 on the amendments required to be made to the FCA Handbook and EU BTS as well as the FCA's approach to EU non-legislative material. On 25 October 2018, the Bank of England and the PRA published a package of communications and consultation papers setting out changes to their rules (including proposed changes to the PRA rules on contractual recognition of bail-in and stays in resolution) and EU BTS (including technical standards mandated by the BRRD) arising out of EU withdrawal as well as their approach to EU non-legislative material.257 Final EU Exit Instruments will be published following the end of the relevant consultation periods.

We note that, on 8 October 2018, the Government published a proposal for a temporary transitional tool to be exercised by the UK regulators to phase in requirements for UK regulated firms that will change under onshoring legislation in the event of a no-deal scenario. The transitional tool would allow financial regulators to waive or modify firms' regulatory obligations where those obligations have changed as a result of onshoring financial services legislation and could include, for example, delaying such changes so that firms could comply with pre-exit standards for a limited time after exit day. The paper explains that HM Treasury will ensure that the UK's regulatory regime is flexible enough to support firms as they adjust to altered regulatory requirements in the unlikely event that there is no implementation period.

In the Bank of England and PRA joint consultation paper, "The Bank of England's approach to amending financial services legislation under the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018"258 the use of the proposed temporary transitional power is discussed and the PRA states in this context that it has identified three examples of where it would not expect to use the power to delay onshoring changes to firms' obligations meaning that firms would need to be ready to comply with those onshoring changes by exit day, in the event that there is no implementation period. Two of these examples are: (i) contractual recognition of bail in rules

255 The draft Bank Recovery and Resolution and Miscellaneous Provisions (Amendment) (EU Exit) Regulations 2018, which is the onshoring SI for the BRRD, was laid before Parliament on 23 October 2018. 256 FCA, "Brexit: proposed changes to the Handbook and Binding Technical Standards – first consultation" (CP18/28, 10 October 2018) accessed 12 November 2018. 257 Bank of England and PRA, "Bank of England's approach to financial services legislation under the European Union (Withdrawal) Act - October 2018" (25 October 2018) accessed on 12 November 2018. 258 Bank of England and PRA, "The Bank of England's approach to amending financial services legislation under the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018" (CP25/18, October 2018) accessed on 12 November 2018.

132

where the PRA does not propose to grant transitional relief in respect of liabilities that are intended to count towards a firm's MREL (although the PRA does propose to use the temporary transitional power in relation to phase two liabilities); and (ii) contractual stays where the PRA does not propose to use the temporary transitional power in respect of new or materially amended non-UK EEA law governed financial arrangements in scope of the "Stay in Resolution" Part of the PRA Rulebook.

As well as dealing with directly applicable EU legislation, the UK Withdrawal Act also provides that "EU derived domestic legislation" will be retained as part of UK law on exit day. The effect of this may not always be clear. As the UK Withdrawal Act provides that UK courts must have regard to decisions of the Court of Justice of the EU made prior to exit day and retain general principles of EU law and EU competences, but only when construing retained EU law, this could impact how certain legislation is construed.

Similarly, it is unclear whether certain directly applicable EU delegated acts will become part of UK domestic law on Brexit because they contain provisions which overlap with pre- existing legislation. The UK Withdrawal Act provides that directly applicable EU law will only become part of UK domestic legislation if (among other things) its effect is not reproduced in EU-derived domestic legislation.

Brexit may also have other implications including in relation to:

(a) the approach HM Treasury intends to take with respect to the amendments to the BRRD (discussed above) and other EU legislation which is currently going through the EU legislative process (such as EMIR refit), which is expected to be agreed prior to exit day but which may not be implemented in the UK;

(b) how HM Treasury intends to deal with inflight legislation (i.e. legislation that is in force on exit day but not yet in application) such as certain of the EMIR initial margin rules. The UK Withdrawal Act provides that direct EU legislation will only form part of UK law on exit day if it is in force and applies immediately before exit day. This approach is also affirmed by the explanatory memoranda published by HM Treasury on the draft SIs and also by the approach set out in the consultation papers and related materials produced by Bank of England, the PRA and the FCA; and

(c) how EU legislation which is currently predicated on reciprocity will function following exit day given that the EU27 will be treated as third countries.

On 13 September 2018, the UK Government issued a technical notice entitled, "Handling civil legal cases that involve EU countries if there's no Brexit deal" in which it was stated that, in a no deal scenario, the Recast Insolvency Regulation would be repealed in the UK such that the tests set out therein would no longer restrict the opening of proceedings and so it would be possible to open insolvency proceedings under any of the tests set out in UK domestic law regardless of whether (or where) the debtor is based elsewhere in Europe. Also EU insolvency proceedings and judgments would no longer be recognisable in the UK under the Recast Insolvency Regulation (but may be recognised under the Cross-Border Insolvency Regulations).

***

133

EXHIBIT 1

DEFINITIONS USED IN THIS MEMORANDUM

In this Exhibit 1 we set out definitions for the various standard form documents and standard form amendments that are considered in this memorandum, together, for convenience, with certain other closely-related definitions. In each case, we are referring to one or more standard form documents or standard form amendments of the relevant description, as published or co-published by the International Swaps and Derivatives Association, Inc. (ISDA).

Where a defined term below refers to more than one standard form document or set of standard form amendments, then a reference to that term in this memorandum applies equally to each of the relevant standard form documents or standard form amendments, unless context otherwise requires. Where a distinction between standard forms is relevant to the analysis, we refer expressly to the relevant form or forms.

In this memorandum, the following terms have the meanings given in this Exhibit 1, unless context indicates otherwise:

1992 Agreement means the 1992 ISDA Master Agreement (Multicurrency – Cross Border).

1994 NY Annex means the 1994 ISDA Credit Support Annex (Bilateral Form) governed by New York law (in the case of a 1994 NY Annex entered into in connection with a 2002 Agreement, subject to the amendments set out in Annex 14 of the 2002 Protocol).

1995 Deed means the 1995 ISDA Credit Support Deed (Bilateral Form – Security Interest) governed by English law (in the case of a 1995 Deed entered into in connection with a 2002 Agreement, subject to the amendments set out in Annex 16 of the 2002 Protocol).

1995 Transfer Annex means the 1995 ISDA Credit Support Annex (Bilateral Form – Transfer) governed by English law (in the case of a 1995 Transfer Annex entered into in connection with a 2002 Agreement, subject to the amendments set out in Annex 15 of the 2002 Protocol).

2002 Agreement means the ISDA 2002 Master Agreement.

2002 Protocol means the 2002 ISDA Master Agreement Protocol published by ISDA on 15 July 2003.

2016 Clearstream Security Agreement means the ISDA 2016 Clearstream Security Agreement subject to Luxembourg Law (Security interest over Clearstream collateral account in the name of the Security-provider in favour of the Security-taker).

2017 Clearstream Security Agreement means the ISDA 2017 Clearstream Security Agreement subject to Luxembourg Law (Security interest over Clearstream collateral in favour of the Security- taker held in collateral account in the name of the Security-taker).

Clearing System IM Documents means each of the Clearstream IM Documents and the Euroclear IM Documents.

Clearing System Japanese Amendments means the Clearstream Japanese Amendments and the Euroclear Japanese Amendments.

Clearstream CTA means either the Clearstream English CTA and the Clearstream NY CTA.

135

Clearstream CTA Japanese Amendments means the Recommended Amendment Provisions for the ISDA Clearstream Collateral Transfer Agreement (Subject to New York Law) and the ISDA Clearstream Collateral Transfer Agreement (Subject to English Law) with respect to Japanese Collateral ("Shichiken").

Clearstream English CTA means the ISDA Clearstream 2016 Collateral Transfer Agreement Subject to English Law (Security interest over Clearstream collateral account in the name of the Security-provider in favour of the Security-taker) (Multi-Regime Scope).

Clearstream IM Documents means the Clearstream Security Agreement together with the Clearstream CTA.

Clearstream Japanese Amendments means the Clearstream Security Agreement Japanese Amendments and the Clearstream CTA Japanese Amendments.

Clearstream NY CTA means the ISDA Clearstream 2016 Collateral Transfer Agreement Subject to New York Law (Security interest over Clearstream collateral account in the name of the Security- provider in favor of the Security-taker) (Multi-Regime Scope).

Clearstream Security Agreement means either the 2016 Clearstream Security Agreement or the 2017 Clearstream Security Agreement.

Clearstream Security Agreement Japanese Amendments means the Recommended Amendment Provisions for the ISDA 2017 Clearstream Security Agreement with respect to Japanese Collateral ("Shichiken").

Credit Support Documents means each of the Security Documents and the Transfer Annexes.

CTA Japanese Amendments means (i) in respect of the Clearstream English CTA, the Clearstream CTA Japanese Amendments and (ii) in respect of the Euroclear English CTA, the Euroclear CTA Japanese Amendments.

Deeds means each of the 1995 Deed and the IM Deed.

English CTAs means each of the Clearstream English CTA and the Euroclear English CTA.

Euroclear CTA means either the Euroclear English CTA or the Euroclear NY CTA.

Euroclear CTA Japanese Amendments means either the 2016 or 2018 version of the Recommended Amendment Provisions for the ISDA Euroclear Collateral Transfer Agreement (Subject to New York Law) and the ISDA Euroclear Collateral Transfer Agreement (Subject to English Law) with respect to Japanese Collateral ("Shichiken").

Euroclear English CTA means either (i) the 2016 version of the ISDA Euroclear Collateral Transfer Agreement Subject to English Law (Security interest over Credit Support Amount held in a Euroclear account in its own name for the account of the Pledgee (third party pledgeholder structure)) (Multi-Regime Scope), (ii) the 2017 version of the ISDA Euroclear Collateral Transfer Agreement Subject to English Law (Security interest over Credit Support Amount held in a Euroclear account in its own name for the account of the Pledgee (third party pledgeholder structure)) (Multi Regime Scope) or (iii) the MultiSeg Euroclear English CTA.

Euroclear IM Documents means the Euroclear Security Agreement together with the Euroclear CTA.

136

Euroclear Japanese Amendments means the Euroclear Security Agreement Japanese Amendments and the Euroclear CTA Japanese Amendments.

Euroclear NY CTA means either (i) the 2016 version of the ISDA Euroclear Collateral Transfer Agreement Subject to New York Law (Security interest over Credit Support Amount held in a Euroclear account in its own name for the account of the Pledgee (third party pledgeholder structure)) (Multi-Regime Scope), (ii) the 2017 version of the ISDA Euroclear Collateral Transfer Agreement Subject to New York Law (Security interest over Credit Support Amount held in a Euroclear account in its own name for the account of the Pledgee (third party pledgeholder structure)) (Multi-Regime Scope) or (iii) the MultiSeg Euroclear NY CTA.

Euroclear Security Agreement means either (i) the ISDA Euroclear Security Agreement subject to Belgian Law (Security interest over Credit Support Amount held in a Euroclear account in its own name for the account of the Pledgee (third party pledgeholder structure)) or (ii) the MultiSeg Euroclear Security Agreement.

Euroclear Security Agreement Japanese Amendments means either the 2016 or 2018 version of the Recommended Amendment Provisions for the ISDA Euroclear Security Agreement with respect to Japanese Collateral ("Shichiken").

IA Amendments means (i) in respect of the VM NY Annex, the VM NY Annex IA Amendments and (ii) in respect of the VM Transfer Annex, the VM Transfer Annex IA Amendments.

IM Deed means the 2016 Phase One IM Credit Support Deed (Security interest over Credit Support (IM) held with a Custodian (IM) on behalf of the Chargor) governed by English law.

IM Deed Japanese Amendments means the Recommended Amendment Provisions for the ISDA English Law 2016 Phase One IM Credit Support Deed with respect to Japanese Securities ("Shichiken").

IM Documents means each of the (i) IM NY Annex, (ii) the IM Deed, (ii) the Clearstream IM Documents and (iv) the Euroclear IM Documents.

IM NY Annex means the 2016 Phase One Credit Support Annex for Initial Margin (IM) governed by New York law.

IM NY Annex Japanese Amendments means the Recommended Amendment Provisions for the ISDA New York Law 2016 Phase One Credit Support Annex for Initial Margin (IM) with respect to Japanese Securities ("Shichiken").

IM Security Documents means each of the IM NY Annex and the IM Deed.

ISDA Master Agreement means an agreement between two parties based on either the 2002 Agreement or the 1992 Agreement.259

MultiSeg Euroclear CTA means either the MultiSeg Euroclear English CTA or the MultiSeg Euroclear NY CTA.

MultiSeg Euroclear English CTA means the ISDA Euroclear Collateral Transfer Agreement Subject to English Law (Security interest over Credit Support Amount held in a Euroclear account (or sub-

259 Other forms of master agreement are published by ISDA, but the 2002 Agreement and 1992 Agreement are the two most widely used forms of master agreement, particularly for use in connection with a financial collateral arrangement of a type considered in this memorandum.

137

division of a Euroclear account) in its own name for the account of the Pledgee (third party pledgeholder structure)) (Multi-Regime Scope).

MultiSeg Euroclear NY CTA means the ISDA Euroclear Collateral Transfer Agreement Subject to New York Law (Security interest over Credit Support Amount held in a Euroclear account (or sub- division of a Euroclear account) in its own name for the account of the Pledgee (third party pledgeholder structure)) (Multi-Regime Scope).

MultiSeg Euroclear Security Agreement means the ISDA Euroclear Security Agreement subject to Belgian Law (Security interest over Credit Support Amount held in a Euroclear account (or sub- division of a Euroclear account) in its own name for the account of the Pledgee (third party pledgeholder structure)).

Non-IM NY Annex means either the 1994 NY Annex or the VM NY Annex.

Non-IM Security Documents means each of the 1994 NY Annex, the VM NY Annex and the 1995 Deed.

NY Annexes means each of the 1994 NY Annex, the VM NY Annex and the IM NY Annex.

Security Documents means each of the NY Annexes, the Deeds and the Clearing System IM Documents.

Transfer Annexes means each of the 1995 Transfer Annex and the VM Transfer Annex.

VM Documents means each of (i) the VM Transfer Annex, (ii) the VM NY Annex, (iii) the 1995 Deed, (iv) the 1995 Transfer Annex and (v) 1994 NY Annex.

VM NY Annex means the 2016 Credit Support Annex for Variation Margin (VM) (Bilateral Form) governed by New York law.

VM NY Annex IA Amendments means the Independent Amount (IA) Provisions: Amendments for Independent Amounts to be included in Paragraph 13 of the New York law 2016 Credit Support Annex for Variation Margin (VM).

VM Transfer Annex means the 2016 Credit Support Annex for Variation Margin (VM) (Bilateral Form – Transfer) governed by English law.

VM Transfer Annex IA Amendments means the Independent Amount (IA) Provisions: Amendments for Independent Amounts to be included in Paragraph 11 of the English law 2016 Credit Support Annex for Variation Margin (VM).

138

APPENDIX A August 2015

CERTAIN TRANSACTIONS UNDER THE ISDA MASTER AGREEMENT

Basis Swap. A transaction in which one party pays periodic amounts of a given currency based on a floating rate and the other party pays periodic amounts of the same currency based on another floating rate, with both rates reset periodically; all calculations are based on a notional amount of the given currency.

Bond Forward. A transaction in which one party agrees to pay an agreed price for a specified amount of a bond of an issuer or a basket of bonds of several issuers at a future date and the other party agrees to pay a price for the same amount of the same bond to be set on a specified date in the future. The payment calculation is based on the amount of the bond and can be physically-settled (where delivery occurs in exchange for payment) or cash-settled (where settlement occurs based on the difference between the agreed forward price and the prevailing market price at the time of settlement).

Bond Option. A transaction in which one party grants to the other party (in consideration for a premium payment) the right, but not the obligation, to purchase (in the case of a call) or sell (in the case of a put) a specified amount of a bond of an issuer, such as Kingdom of Sweden or Unilever N.V., at a specified strike price. The bond option can be settled by physical delivery of the bonds in exchange for the strike price or may be cash settled based on the difference between the market price of the bonds on the exercise date and the strike price.

Bullion Option. A transaction in which one party grants to the other party (in consideration for a premium payment) the right, but not the obligation, to purchase (in the case of a call) or sell (in the case of a put) a specified number of Ounces of Bullion at a specified strike price. The option may be settled by physical delivery of Bullion in exchange for the strike price or may be cash settled based on the difference between the market price of Bullion on the exercise date and the strike price.

Bullion Swap. A transaction in which one party pays periodic amounts of a given currency based on a fixed price or a fixed rate and the other party pays periodic amounts of the same currency or a different currency calculated by reference to a Bullion reference price (for example, Gold-COMEX on the COMEX Division of the New York Mercantile Exchange) or another method specified by the parties. Bullion swaps include cap, collar or floor transactions in respect of Bullion.

Bullion Trade. A transaction in which one party agrees to buy from or sell to the other party a specified number of Ounces of Bullion at a specified price for settlement either on a "spot" or two-day basis or on a specified future date. A Bullion Trade may be settled by physical delivery of Bullion in exchange for a specified price or may be cash settled based on the difference between the market price of Bullion on the settlement date and the specified price.

For purposes of Bullion Trades, Bullion Options and Bullion Swaps, "Bullion" means gold, silver, platinum or palladium and "Ounce" means, in the case of gold, a fine troy ounce, and in the case of silver, platinum and palladium, a troy ounce (or in the case of reference prices not expressed in Ounces, the relevant Units of gold, silver, platinum or palladium).

Buy/Sell-Back Transaction. A transaction in which one party purchases a security (in consideration for a cash payment) and agrees to sell back that security (or in some cases an equivalent security) to the other party (in consideration for the original cash payment plus a premium).

Cap Transaction. A transaction in which one party pays a single or periodic fixed amount and the other party pays periodic amounts of the same currency based on the excess, if any, of a specified

139

floating rate (in the case of an interest rate cap), rate or index (in the case of an economic statistic cap) or commodity price (in the case of a commodity cap) in each case that is reset periodically over a specified per annum rate (in the case of an interest rate cap), rate or index (in the case of an economic statistic cap) or commodity price (in the case of a commodity cap).

Collar Transaction. A collar is a combination of a cap and a floor where one party is the floating rate, floating index or floating commodity price payer on the cap and the other party is the floating rate, floating index or floating commodity price payer on the floor.

Commodity Forward. A transaction in which one party agrees to purchase a specified quantity of a commodity at a future date at an agreed price, and the other party agrees to pay a price for the same quantity to be set on a specified date in the future. A Commodity Forward may be settled by the physical delivery of the commodity in exchange for the specified price or may be cash settled based on the difference between the agreed forward price and the prevailing market price at the time of settlement.

Commodity Index Transaction. A transaction, structured in the form of a swap, cap, collar, floor, option or some combination thereof, between two parties in which the underlying value of the transaction is based on a rate or index based on the price of one or more commodities.

Commodity Option. A transaction in which one party grants to the other party (in consideration for a premium payment) the right, but not the obligation, to purchase (in the case of a call) or sell (in the case of a put) a specified quantity of a commodity at a specified strike price. The option can be settled either by physically delivering the quantity of the commodity in exchange for the strike price or by cash settling the option, in which case the seller of the option would pay to the buyer the difference between the market price of that quantity of the commodity on the exercise date and the strike price.

Commodity Swap. A transaction in which one party pays periodic amounts of a given currency based on a fixed price and the other party pays periodic amounts of the same currency based on the price of a commodity, such as natural gas or gold, or a futures contract on a commodity (e.g., West Texas Intermediate Light Sweet Crude Oil on the New York Mercantile Exchange); all calculations are based on a notional quantity of the commodity.

Contingent Credit Default Swap. A Credit Default Swap Transaction under which the calculation amounts applicable to one or both parties may vary over time by reference to the mark-to-market value of a hypothetical swap transaction.

Credit Default Swap Option. A transaction in which one party grants to the other party (in consideration for a premium payment) the right, but not the obligation, to enter into a Credit Default Swap.

Credit Default Swap. A transaction in which one party pays either a single fixed amount or periodic fixed amounts or floating amounts determined by reference to a specified notional amount, and the other party (the credit protection seller) pays either a fixed amount or an amount determined by reference to the value of one or more loans, debt securities or other financial instruments (each a "Reference Obligation") issued, guaranteed or otherwise entered into by a third party (the "Reference Entity") upon the occurrence of one or more specified credit events with respect to the Reference Entity (for example, bankruptcy or payment default). The amount payable by the credit protection seller is typically determined based upon the market value of one or more debt securities or other debt instruments issued, guaranteed or otherwise entered into by the Reference Entity. A Credit Default Swap may also be physically settled by payment of a specified fixed amount by one party against delivery of specified obligations ("Deliverable Obligations") by the other party. A Credit Default

140

Swap may also refer to a "basket" (typically ten or less) or a "portfolio" (eleven or more) of Reference Entities or may be an index transaction consisting of a series of component Credit Default Swaps.

Credit Derivative Transaction on Asset-Backed Securities. A Credit Default Swap for which the Reference Obligation is a cash or synthetic asset-backed security. Such a transaction may, but need not necessarily, include "pay as you go" settlements, meaning that the credit protection seller makes payments relating to interest shortfalls, principal shortfalls and write-downs arising on the Reference Obligation and the credit protection buyer makes additional fixed payments of reimbursements of such shortfalls or write-downs.

Credit Spread Transaction. A transaction involving either a forward or an option where the value of the transaction is calculated based on the credit spread implicit in the price of the underlying instrument.

Cross Currency Rate Swap. A transaction in which one party pays periodic amounts in one currency based on a specified fixed rate (or a floating rate that is reset periodically) and the other party pays periodic amounts in another currency based on a floating rate that is reset periodically. All calculations are determined on predetermined notional amounts of the two currencies; often such swaps will involve initial and or final exchanges of amounts corresponding to the notional amounts.

Currency Option. A transaction in which one party grants to the other party (in consideration for a premium payment) the right, but not the obligation, to purchase (in the case of a call) or sell (in the case of a put) a specified amount of a given currency at a specified strike price.

Currency Swap. A transaction in which one party pays fixed periodic amounts of one currency and the other party pays fixed periodic amounts of another currency. Payments are calculated on a notional amount. Such swaps may involve initial and or final payments that correspond to the notional amount.

Economic Statistic Transaction. A transaction in which one party pays an amount or periodic amounts of a given currency by reference to interest rates or other factors and the other party pays or may pay an amount or periodic amounts of a currency based on a specified rate or index pertaining to statistical data on economic conditions, which may include economic growth, retail sales, inflation, consumer prices, consumer sentiment, unemployment and housing.

Emissions Allowance Transaction. A transaction in which one party agrees to buy from or sell to the other party a specified quantity of emissions allowances or reductions at a specified price for settlement either on a "spot" basis or on a specified future date. An Emissions Allowance Transaction may also constitute a swap of emissions allowances or reductions or an option whereby one party grants to the other party (in consideration for a premium payment) the right, but not the obligation, to receive a payment equal to the amount by which the specified quantity of emissions allowances or reductions exceeds or is less than a specified strike. An Emissions Allowance Transaction may be physically settled by delivery of emissions allowances or reductions in exchange for a specified price, differing vintage years or differing emissions products or may be cash settled based on the difference between the market price of emissions allowances or reductions on the settlement date and the specified price.

Equity Forward. A transaction in which one party agrees to pay an agreed price for a specified quantity of shares of an issuer, a basket of shares of several issuers or an equity index at a future date and the other party agrees to pay a price for the same quantity and shares to be set on a specified date in the future. The payment calculation is based on the number of shares and can be physically-settled (where delivery occurs in exchange for payment) or cash-settled (where settlement occurs based on the difference between the agreed forward price and the prevailing market price at the time of settlement).

141

Equity Index Option. A transaction in which one party grants to the other party (in consideration for a premium payment) the right, but not the obligation, to receive a payment equal to the amount by which an equity index either exceeds (in the case of a call) or is less than (in the case of a put) a specified strike price.

Equity Option. A transaction in which one party grants to the other party (in consideration for a premium payment) the right, but not the obligation, to purchase (in the case of a call) or sell (in the case of a put) a specified number of shares of an issuer or a basket of shares of several issuers at a specified strike price. The share option may be settled by physical delivery of the shares in exchange for the strike price or may be cash settled based on the difference between the market price of the shares on the exercise date and the strike price.

Equity Swap. A transaction in which one party pays periodic amounts of a given currency based on a fixed price or a fixed or floating rate and the other party pays periodic amounts of the same currency or a different currency based on the performance of a share of an issuer, a basket of shares of several issuers or an equity index, such as the Standard and Poor's 500 Index.

Floor Transaction. A transaction in which one party pays a single or periodic amount and the other party pays periodic amounts of the same currency based on the excess, if any, of a specified per annum rate (in the case of an interest rate floor), rate or index level (in the case of an economic statistic floor) or commodity price (in the case of a commodity floor) over a specified floating rate (in the case of an interest rate floor), rate or index level (in the case of an economic statistic floor) or commodity price (in the case of a commodity floor).

Foreign Exchange Transaction. A deliverable or non-deliverable transaction providing for the purchase of one currency with another currency providing for settlement either on a "spot" or two-day basis or a specified future date.

Forward Rate Transaction. A transaction in which one party agrees to pay a fixed rate for a defined period and the other party agrees to pay a rate to be set on a specified date in the future. The payment calculation is based on a notional amount and is settled based, among other things, on the difference between the agreed forward rate and the prevailing market rate at the time of settlement.

Freight Transaction. A transaction in which one party pays an amount or periodic amounts of a given currency based on a fixed price and the other party pays an amount or periodic amounts of the same currency based on the price of chartering a ship to transport wet or dry freight from one port to another; all calculations are based either on a notional quantity of freight or, in the case of time charter transactions, on a notional number of days.

Fund Option Transaction: A transaction in which one party grants to the other party (for an agreed payment or other consideration) the right, but not the obligation, to receive a payment based on the redemption value of a specified amount of an interest issued to or held by an investor in a fund, pooled investment vehicle or any other interest identified as such in the relevant Confirmation (a "Fund Interest"), whether i) a single class of Fund Interest of a Single Reference Fund or ii) a basket of Fund Interests in relation to a specified strike price. The Fund Option Transactions will generally be cash settled (where settlement occurs based on the excess of such redemption value over such specified strike price (in the case of a call) or the excess of such specified strike price over such redemption value (in the case of a put) as measured on the valuation date or dates relating to the exercise date).

Fund Forward Transaction: A transaction in which one party agrees to pay an agreed price for the redemption value of a specified amount of i) a single class of Fund Interest of a Single Reference Fund or ii) a basket of Fund Interests at a future date and the other party agrees to pay a price for the redemption value of the same amount of the same Fund Interests to be set on a specified date in the

142

future. The payment calculation is based on the amount of the redemption value relating to such Fund Interest and generally cash-settled (where settlement occurs based on the difference between the agreed forward price and the redemption value measured as of the applicable valuation date or dates).

Fund Swap Transaction: A transaction in which one party pays periodic amounts of a given currency based on a fixed price or a fixed rate and the other party pays periodic amounts of the same currency based on the redemption value of i) a single class of Fund Interest of a Single Reference Fund or ii) a basket of Fund Interests.

Interest Rate Option. A transaction in which one party grants to the other party (in consideration for a premium payment) the right, but not the obligation, to receive a payment equal to the amount by which an interest rate either exceeds (in the case of a call option) or is less than (in the case of a put option) a specified strike rate.

Interest Rate Swap. A transaction in which one party pays periodic amounts of a given currency based on a specified fixed rate and the other party pays periodic amounts of the same currency based on a specified floating rate that is reset periodically, such as the London inter-bank offered rate; all calculations are based on a notional amount of the given currency.

Longevity/Mortality Transaction. (a) A transaction employing a derivative instrument, such as a forward, a swap or an option, that is valued according to expected variation in a reference index of observed demographic trends, as exhibited by a specified population, relating to aging, morbidity, and mortality/longevity, or (b) A transaction that references the payment profile underlying a specific portfolio of longevity- or mortality- contingent obligations, e.g. a pool of pension liabilities or life insurance policies (either the actual claims payments or a synthetic basket referencing the profile of claims payments).

Physical Commodity Transaction. A transaction which provides for the purchase of an amount of a commodity, such as oil including oil products, coal, electricity or gas, at a fixed or floating price for actual delivery on one or more dates.

Property Index Derivative Transaction. A transaction, often structured in the form of a forward, option or total return swap, between two parties in which the underlying value of the transaction is based on a rate or index based on residential or commercial property prices for a specified local, regional or national area.

Repurchase Transaction. A transaction in which one party agrees to sell securities to the other party and such party has the right to repurchase those securities (or in some cases equivalent securities) from such other party at a future date.260

Securities Lending Transaction. A transaction in which one party transfers securities to a party acting as the borrower in exchange for a payment or a series of payments from the borrower and the borrower's obligation to replace the securities at a defined date with identical securities.261

Swap Deliverable Contingent Credit Default Swap. A Contingent Credit Default Swap under which one of the Deliverable Obligations is a claim against the Reference Entity under an ISDA Master Agreement with respect to which an Early Termination Date (as defined therein) has occurred.

260 We assume, for this purpose, that under the Repurchase Transaction, the original seller's right to repurchase securities is limited to fungible securities and that it has no right to repurchase the exact same securities that it originally sold. This assumption is consistent with market practice, as far as we are aware, in relation to securities repurchase transactions governed by English law, and is necessary to avoid a risk that the transaction might otherwise be characterised by an English court as a secured loan. 261 For the reasons set out in the note above relating to the definition of "Repurchase Transaction", we assume that the reference to identical securities is to be construed as a reference to "fungible" securities rather than the exact same securities originally lent to the borrower. Again, this assumption is consistent, as far as we are aware, with market practice in relation to securities lending transactions governed by English law.

143

Swap Option. A transaction in which one party grants to the other party the right (in consideration for a premium payment), but not the obligation, to enter into a swap with certain specified terms. In some cases the swap option may be settled with a cash payment equal to the market value of the underlying swap at the time of the exercise.

Total Return Swap. A transaction in which one party pays either a single amount or periodic amounts based on the total return on one or more loans, debt securities or other financial instruments (each a "Reference Obligation") issued, guaranteed or otherwise entered into by a third party (the "Reference Entity"), calculated by reference to interest, dividend and fee payments and any appreciation in the market value of each Reference Obligation, and the other party pays either a single amount or periodic amounts determined by reference to a specified notional amount and any depreciation in the market value of each Reference Obligation.

A total return swap may (but need not) provide for acceleration of its termination date upon the occurrence of one or more specified events with respect to a Reference Entity or a Reference Obligation with a termination payment made by one party to the other calculated by reference to the value of the Reference Obligation.

Weather Index Transaction. A transaction, structured in the form of a swap, cap, collar, floor, option or some combination thereof, between two parties in which the underlying value of the transaction is based on a rate or index pertaining to weather conditions, which may include measurements of heating, cooling, precipitation and wind.

144

APPENDIX B September 2009

CERTAIN COUNTERPARTY TYPES

Description Covered262 Legal form(s)263

Bank/Credit Institution. A legal entity, which may Yes English Company264, be organized as a corporation, partnership or in English Building Society some other form, that conducts commercial banking activities, that is, whose core business typically involves (a) taking deposits from private individuals and/or corporate entities and (b) making loans to private individual and/or corporate borrowers. This type of entity is sometimes referred to as a "commercial bank" or, if its business also includes investment banking and trading activities, a "universal bank". (If the entity only conducts investment banking and trading activities, then it falls within the "Investment Firm/Broker Dealer" category below.) This type of entity is referred to as a "credit institution" in European Union (EU) legislation. This category may include specialised types of bank, such as a mortgage savings bank (provided that the relevant entity accepts deposits and makes loans), or such an entity may be considered in the local jurisdiction to constitute a separate category of legal entity (as in the case of a building society in the United Kingdom (UK)).

Central Bank. A legal entity that performs the Yes, but only in Chartered Corporation function of a central bank for a Sovereign or for an relation to the area of monetary union (as in the case of the Central Bank of European Central Bank in respect of the euro zone). the United Kingdom in respect of the

262 This column indicates whether an entity of the relevant type falls within the scope of this memorandum. Where the answer is "No", this is due to the fact that to include this type of entity would require substantial additional legal analysis, beyond the scope of our current instructions. 263 This column indicates the legal form in which an entity of the relevant type is typically organised in England under English law. While it is possible, in some cases, that an entity falling within the commercial description in the left-hand column could be organised in a different legal form in England, any such entity would not fall within the scope of this memorandum, unless expressly provided to the contrary. A capitalised term used in this column has, unless context indicates otherwise, the meaning given to that term in this memorandum. 264 There are various forms of English Company, including a public limited company, a private company with limited liability, a private company with unlimited liability and a private company limited by guarantee. Our conclusions in this memorandum apply to each type of English Company. The naming conventions for English Companies are set out in sections 58(1) and 59(1) of the Companies Act 2006. An English Company that is a public limited company must have a name that ends with the words "public limited company" or the abbreviation "plc". A private company with limited liability or limited by guarantee must have a name ending with the word "Limited" or the abbreviation "ltd". In either case, the abbreviation may be all upper case, all lower case, with an initial upper case letter only and with or without full stops between the letters (in the case of "plc"). A private company with unlimited liability is not required to have any specific word or abbreviation at the end of its name. In the case of a company registered under the Companies Act 2006 with its registered office in Wales, the name of the company may end with the Welsh equivalents of these terms.

145

Description Covered262 Legal form(s)263 Non-IM Security Documents and Transfer Annexes

Corporation. A legal entity that is organized as a Yes English Company corporation or company rather than a partnership, is engaged in industrial and/or commercial activities and does not fall within one of the other categories in this Appendix B.

Hedge Fund/Proprietary Trader. A legal entity, Yes English Company, English which may be organized as a corporation, Partnership265 partnership or in some other legal form, the principal business of which is to deal in and/or manage securities and/or other financial instruments and/or otherwise to carry on an investment business predominantly or exclusively as principal for its own account.

Insurance Company. A legal entity, which may be Yes English Company, organised as a corporation, partnership or in some Friendly Society, other legal form (for example, a friendly society or C/CB Society, industrial & provident society in the UK), that is Statutory Corporation, licensed to carry on insurance business, and is Chartered Corporation typically subject to a special regulatory regime and a special insolvency regime in order to protect the interests of policyholders.

International Organization. An organization of No, additional Sovereigns established by treaty entered into analysis between the Sovereigns, including the International required Bank for Reconstruction and Development (the World Bank), regional development banks and similar organizations established by treaty.

Investment Firm/Broker Dealer. A legal entity, Yes English Company which may be organized as a corporation, partnership or in some other form, that does not conduct commercial banking activities but deals in and/or manages securities and/or other financial instruments as an agent for third parties. It may also conduct such activities as principal (but if it does so exclusively as principal, then it most likely falls within the "Hedge Fund/Proprietary Trader" category above.) Its business normally includes holding securities and/or other financial instruments for third parties and operating related cash accounts.

265 See note 18.

146

Description Covered262 Legal form(s)263 This type of entity is referred to as a "broker-dealer" in US legislation and as an "investment firm" in EU legislation.

Investment Fund. A legal entity or an arrangement Yes Open-Ended Investment without legal personality (for example, a common Company, law trust) established to provide investors with a Authorised Unit Trust share in profits or income arising from property (acting through its Trustee), acquired, held, managed or disposed of by the Limited Partnership266 manager(s) of the legal entity or arrangement or a right to payment determined by reference to such profits or income. This type of entity or arrangement is referred to as a "collective investment scheme" in EU legislation. It may be regulated or unregulated. It is typically administered by one or more persons (who may be private individuals and/or corporate entities) who have various rights and obligations governed by general law and/or, typically in the case of regulated Investment Funds, financial services legislation. Where the arrangement does not have separate legal personality, one or more representatives of the Investment Fund (for example, a trustee of a unit trust) contract on behalf of the Investment Fund, are owed the rights and owe the obligations provided for in the contract and are entitled to be indemnified out of the assets comprised in the arrangement.

Local Authority. A legal entity established to No, additional administer the functions of local government in a analysis particular region within a Sovereign or State of a required Federal Sovereign, for example, a city, county, borough or similar area.

Partnership. A legal entity or form of arrangement Yes English Partnership without legal personality that is (a) organised as a general, limited or some other form of partnership and (b) does not fall within one of the other categories in this Appendix B. If it does not have legal personality, it may nonetheless be treated as though it were a legal person for certain purposes (for example, for insolvency purposes) and not for other purposes (for example, tax or personal liability).

Pension Fund. A legal entity or an arrangement Yes English Pension Fund without legal personality (for example, a common (acting through its Trustee) law trust) established to provide pension benefits to a specific class of beneficiaries, normally sponsored

266 See note 18.

147

Description Covered262 Legal form(s)263 by an employer or group of employers. It is typically administered by one or more persons (who may be private individuals and/or corporate entities) who have various rights and obligations governed by pensions legislation. Where the arrangement does not have separate legal personality, one or more representatives of the Pension Fund (for example, a trustee of a pension scheme in the form of a common law trust) contract on behalf of the Pension Fund and are owed the rights and owe the obligations provided for in the contract and are entitled to be indemnified out of the assets comprised in the arrangement.

Sovereign. A sovereign nation state recognized Yes, but only in internationally as such, typically acting through a relation to the direct agency or instrumentality of the central United government without separate legal personality, for Kingdom acting example, the ministry of finance, treasury or through Her national debt office. This category does not include Majesty's a State of a Federal Sovereign or other political Treasury in sub-division of a sovereign nation state if the respect of a sub-division has separate legal personality (for Transfer Annex example, a Local Authority) and it does not include any legal entity owned by a sovereign nation state (see "Sovereign-owned Entity").

Sovereign Wealth Fund. A legal entity, often No, additional created by a special statute and normally wholly analysis owned by a Sovereign, established to manage assets required of or on behalf of the Sovereign, which may or may not hold those assets in its own name. Such an entity is often referred to as an "investment authority". For certain Sovereigns, this function is performed by the Central Bank, however for purposes of this Appendix B the term "Sovereign Wealth Fund" excludes a Central Bank.

Sovereign-Owned Entity. A legal entity wholly or An English English Company majority-owned by a Sovereign, other than a Company Central Bank, or by a State of a Federal Sovereign, wholly or which may or may not benefit from any immunity majority-owned enjoyed by the Sovereign or State of a Federal by a sovereign Sovereign from legal proceedings or execution that is active against its assets. This category may include entirely in the entities active entirely in the private sector without private sector any specific public duties or public sector mission with no specific as well as statutory bodies with public duties (for public duties or example, a statutory body charged with regulatory public sector responsibility over a sector of the domestic mission is economy). This category does not include local covered.

148

Description Covered262 Legal form(s)263 governmental authorities (see "Local Authority"). All other Sovereign- Owned Entities are not covered.

State of a Federal Sovereign. The principal political No, additional sub-division of a federal Sovereign, such as analysis Australia (for example, Queensland), Canada (for required example, Ontario), Germany (for example, Nordrhein-Westfalen) or the United States of America (for example, Pennsylvania). This category does not include a Local Authority.

Banking Group Company and Bank Holding Yes English Company Company

Standard Chartered Bank Yes Chartered Corporation

English Trust Yes English Trust (acting through its Trustee(s))

English Charity Yes English Charitable Trust (acting through its Trustee(s)), English Company, Friendly Society, C/CB Society, Statutory Corporation, Chartered Corporation

Friendly Society Yes Friendly Society

C/CB Society Yes C/CB Society

Statutory Corporation Yes Statutory Corporation

Chartered Corporation Yes Chartered Corporation

149

APPENDIX C

EXCLUDED ENGLISH COMPANIES

The following types of English Company are excluded from the scope of this memorandum:267

(a) water and sewage undertakers under the Water Industry Act 1991;

(b) a qualifying water supply licensee within the meaning of section 23(6) of the Water Industry Act 1991 or a qualifying sewerage licensee within the meaning of section 23(8) of the Water Industry Act 1991;

(c) a licensed infrastructure provider within the meaning of the Water Industry (Specified Infrastructure Projects) (English Undertakers) Regulations 2013;268

(d) protected railway companies under the Railways Act 1993 (as extended by the Channel Tunnel Rail Link Act 1996);

(e) air traffic services companies under the Transport Act 2000; and

(f) a public-private partnership company under the Greater London Authority Act 1999.269

In addition, this memorandum does not consider issues relating to a clearing house organised as an English Company. This is because, among other things, an ISDA Master Agreement entered into between a clearing house and a clearing member is typically tailored to the specific requirements of the clearing house structure and rules such that it requires a separate analysis. Nor do we consider infrastructure companies within the meaning of section 112 of the Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013, which may be subject to FMI administration pursuant to Part 6 of that Act.

We also do not consider a protected energy company within the meaning of section 154 of the Energy Act 2004 or an energy supply company within the meaning of section 94 of the Energy Act 2011, a community interest company under the Companies (Audit, Investigations and Community Enterprise) Act 2004 and the Community Interest Company Regulations 2005 (each as amended) or, with the exception of Annex 16 (in which we consider the Trustee of an Authorised Unit Trust), an English Company that is an institution of a class specified in paragraph (2) of regulation 2 of the Investment Bank (Amendment of Definition) and Special Administration (Amendment) Regulations.270 More generally we assume that the English Company is not subject to a special regulatory regime not contemplated by this memorandum.

267 Each of these entities is subject to a special insolvency regime as specified in section 249 of the Enterprise Act 2002, which would require a separate analysis from that set out in this memorandum in relation to English Companies generally. 268 SI 2013/1582. The Water Industry (Specified Infrastructure Projects) (English Undertakers) Regulations 2013 apply the special insolvency regime applicable to the entities listed at (a) and (b) above (subject to certain modifications) to such entities. 269 Section 249 of the Enterprise Act 2002 also refers to English Building Societies, which are covered by this memorandum, as noted above. 270 SI 2017/443.

150

APPENDIX D

RECOURSE TO THE ASSETS OF A TRUST

1. A Trustee's right of recourse to the assets of a trust

A Trustee has statutory and general rights of indemnity271272 against an English Trust for all expenses, and general trust law rights in respect of all liabilities that it incurs in the course of carrying out its duties. For the purpose of giving effect to the indemnity, the Trustee has an interest in the trust assets which is a form of equitable charge and is also known as the Trustee's lien. There may also be an express right of indemnity of the Trustee against the trust assets under the trust deed.273

A third party dealing with a Trustee does not have a general non-contractual right of enforcement against the trust assets under statute or common law. There may be an express or implied direct right of recourse for third parties under the trust deed. This is discussed in paragraph 2 below. A third party will, however, be subrogated to the Trustee's right of indemnity, but will therefore be vulnerable to any impairment of that right of indemnity as discussed further below.

Should a Trustee need to use trust assets to fulfil a contractual obligation to a third party, the Trustee's exercise of the right of recourse against the trust is subject to the following limitations arising under general equitable principles:

(i) the Trustee must have acted within its powers, that is to say it must have been empowered by statute and by the relevant trust deed to undertake the Transaction in question;

(ii) the Trustee must have exercised those powers prudently for the purpose for which they were conferred and in the interests of the beneficiaries of the trust;

(iii) the Trustee must have taken all relevant considerations into account and no irrelevant considerations; and

(iv) the Trustee must have complied with any internal authorisation and other relevant requirements of the trust as set out in the trust deed.

An important risk when dealing with a Trustee is that the Trustee's right to reimbursement from the trust's assets has been impaired by a breach of trust that is entirely unrelated to the liability for which it is seeking reimbursement. The general principle is that a Trustee may not claim reimbursement from the trust assets to satisfy a contractual liability where it has committed a breach of trust and failed to rectify the breach, assuming it is capable of rectification, regardless of whether the breach was related to the incurring of the liability and even if the breach occurred after the liability was incurred. Impairment of the Trustee's right of recourse will, therefore, be a continuing risk for any creditor, even if the Transaction giving rise to its claim against the Trustee has been properly entered into.

271 Trustee Act 2000, s 31(1). Also see Jennings v Mather [1902] 1 KB1. 272 The terms "right of recourse, "right of indemnity" and "right of reimbursement" are more or less interchangeable in this context, and used as such in this Appendix D. 273 In this Appendix D (as well as elsewhere in this memorandum) we use the term "trust deed" for convenience, given that the principal document constituting a trust is normally executed as a deed. We use the term, however, to refer to all the documentation governing the operation of the trust (whether or not executed by deed), including the duties, obligations and rights of the Trustee(s) and the rights of the beneficiaries, whether set out in the trust deed itself or in a related document made pursuant to the trust deed (for example, a document setting out rules for the trust).

151

The fragility of the Trustee's right of recourse to the trust is a serious difficulty for a commercial party wishing to deal with a Trustee. It was partly in recognition of this problem that the Trust Law Committee, discussed further below, was founded.274 One of the principal aims of the Trust Law Committee has been to consider appropriate law reform measures to make trusts more suitable for use in modern commercial practice. Unfortunately, the difficulty posed by an unrelated breach of trust remains an issue for creditors of Trustees.

2. A third party's right of recourse to the assets of a trust

To protect against the risk that the Trustee's right of recourse has been lost or impaired, or where this has happened, a third party may wish to consider the following:

(a) In circumstances where the third party has enriched or benefited the English Trust at its own expense, and it was acting in good faith and did not know that the Trustee was acting beyond its powers, it is possible that the third party may have a direct non-derivative claim in equity, based in the law of restitution, against the trust assets, even in circumstances where the Trustee has exceeded its powers.275

The possibility of such a restitution-based claim is referred to in a consultation paper dated April 1997 published by the Trust Law Committee (the 1997 Consultation Paper). However, we should point out that the precise scope of this claim is still not entirely clear as a matter of English law. The claim would be limited to the extent that the Trust is benefited and may be affected by the defence of change of position, and so we would not recommend that a party rely on the availability of such a claim.

(b) A provision may be added to the ISDA Master Agreement or a Credit Support Document under which the Trustee creates a contractual right for the other party to have direct recourse to the assets of the trust to the extent of the Trustee's liability under the ISDA Master Agreement or Credit Support Document. If valid, this right would be analogous to the Trustee's own right of recourse, without being subject to the limitations as set out in paragraph 1 above, and would take priority over the Trustee's right to enforce its indemnity against the trust assets. For such a provision to be effective, the trust deed would need to anticipate and give the Trustee authorisation to confer this direct right of recourse on a third party.

The Trust Law Committee in the 1997 Consultation Paper cites the cases of Ex parte Garland276 and Fairland v Percy277 as authority for the proposition that such a direct right of recourse will be effective where the trust instrument anticipates and gives the Trustee authorisation to confer this direct right of recourse. Although these cases are not directly on point, we believe that the better view is that a Trustee can be authorised by the trust deed to confer on a party by contract a direct right of recourse that is analogous to the Trustee's own right of recourse but which is not subject to the same limitations and which takes priority over the Trustee's own lien. We note that the Trust Law Committee was firmly of this view in the 1997 Consultation Paper, although it did not cite any case law that was directly on point or any other authoritative commentary in the 1997 Consultation Paper.

274 The Trust Law Committee is an ad hoc group of leading academics and practitioners dedicated to researching weaknesses of English trust law and ways of improving it. The Trust Law Committee is run under the charitable auspices of King's College London. Further information may be found at accessed 12 November 2018. 275 Devaynes v Robinson (1857) 24 Beav 86. 276 (1804) 10 Ves 110. 277 (1875) LR 3 P&D 217.

152

In the 1997 Consultation Paper, the Trust Law Committee suggested that it may be possible for the contract between the Trustee and a third party to give the third party a direct right of recourse to the trust assets even if the trust deed does not expressly authorise the Trustee to confer such a direct right of recourse, provided that there was nothing in the trust deed which expressly prevented such a right of recourse being given. However, the Trust Law Committee noted that there is no English case law authority to support such a proposition, and we are not aware of any more recent cases that have supported the suggestion in the 1997 Consultation Paper.

The 1997 Consultation Paper was followed in June 1999 by the Trust Law Committee's Report on the Rights of Creditors Against Trustees and Trust Funds (the 1999 Report). In the 1999 Report, the Trust Law Committee recommended that legislation be passed to the effect that any indebtedness of a Trustee to the trust fund (for example, by reason of breach of trust) should not prevent a creditor from having a right of indemnity out of the trust fund if the Trustee's breach was not connected with the contract with the creditor. However, this proposal was never adopted. In the 1999 Report, the Trust Law Committee repeated its view that, even absent an express power in the trust instrument, an English court may reach the conclusion that a Trustee was able to give a creditor a direct right of indemnity by way of an unsecured right of recourse to the trust fund absent any provision to the contrary in the trust instrument. However, as mentioned above, this is by no means certain and is not yet, as far as we are aware, supported by any English case.

153

ANNEX 1

BANKS

PART 1 – ENGLISH BANK

In Part 1 of this Annex 1, we set out our views regarding the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against an English Bank in the event that resolution action or insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of the English Bank.

Subject to the more detailed discussion below, the types of insolvency proceedings that may be commenced in England in respect of an English Bank are:

(a) each type of insolvency proceeding that may be commenced in England in relation to an English Company as set out in Part III.1(4) of the ISDA Netting Opinion;

(b) the bank insolvency procedure under Part 2 of the Banking Act (the Bank Insolvency Procedure);

(c) the bank administration procedure under Part 3 of the Banking Act (the Bank Administration Procedure); and

(d) if the English Bank is an investment bank as defined in section 232 of the Banking Act:

(i) special administration (bank insolvency) under the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011278 (Special Administration (Bank Insolvency)); and

(ii) special administration (bank administration) under the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011 (Special Administration (Bank Administration)).

The above list of insolvency proceedings assumes that the English Bank does have eligible depositors279. If, in fact, the English Bank has no eligible depositors, the types of insolvency proceedings that may be commenced in England in respect of it are:

(a) each type of insolvency proceeding that may be commenced in England in relation to an English Company as set out in Part III.1(4) of the ISDA Netting Opinion;

(b) the Bank Administration Procedure; and

(c) if the English Bank is an investment bank as defined in section 232 of the Banking Act:

(i) Special Administration (Bank Administration); and

(ii) investment bank special administration under the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011 (Investment Bank Special Administration).

We also discuss below, in relation to an English Bank, Part 1 of the Banking Act, which establishes the English special resolution regime, and transfer schemes under Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000.

278 SI 2011/245. 279 "Eligible depositors" is defined at section 93(3) of the Banking Act and means depositors who are eligible for compensation under the FSCS (established under Part 15 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000).

154

1. Conclusion

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 1, we are of the view that our conclusions in this memorandum in relation to an English Company would also apply to an English Bank, including in the event of its becoming subject to: (a) one of the forms of insolvency proceeding under the Insolvency Act 1986 or a scheme of arrangement under the Companies Act 2006; (b) the Bank Insolvency Procedure; (c) the Bank Administration Procedure; (d) Special Administration (Bank Insolvency); (e) Special Administration (Bank Administration); (f) Investment Bank Special Administration; (g) a transfer scheme under Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000; or (h) the special resolution regime under Part 1 of the Banking Act.

2. Analysis

The conclusions in paragraph 1 of this Annex are subject to the discussion below.

2.1 Insolvency proceedings under the Insolvency Act 1986 and scheme of arrangement under the Companies Act 2006

The insolvency proceedings applicable to an English Company may also apply to an English Bank. However, the FCA and the PRA (the FCA, together with the PRA, the Regulators) have certain powers to initiate and to intervene in insolvency proceedings in relation to English Banks.280 Neither the existence nor the possibility of the exercise by the Regulators of any of these powers would, however, have a material adverse effect on our conclusions in this memorandum as they would apply to an English Bank.

2.2 Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000

Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 sets out provisions for various transfer schemes including banking business transfer schemes and ring-fencing transfer schemes. Insurance business transfer schemes are discussed in Annex 10.281

A banking business transfer scheme is a scheme under which the whole or part of the business of an English Bank, including the acceptance of deposits, may be transferred to another body, subject to certain conditions and exclusions.282 A ring-fencing transfer scheme is a scheme under which the whole or part of the business of a UK authorised person (or of an entity incorporated in the UK that is not authorised but is a member of a group including the UK authorised person) may be transferred to another body, subject to certain conditions and exclusions, for the purpose of complying with the ring-fencing rules and the duty imposed on ring-fenced bodies as to the activities they can carry on. These provisions do not apply to building societies.

A transfer scheme (except in respect of insurance business) does not have to be effected in accordance with these provisions,283 but if it is, an application is made to the court for an order sanctioning the scheme. The application may be made by the English Bank, the transferee or both. Note that a ring-fencing scheme requires consent from the PRA.

280 For example see the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, Part XXIV and the Banking Act, s 120. 281 Part VII also includes transfer provisions in respect of 'reclaim funds', being companies incorporated under the Companies Act 2006 in connection with the regime applicable to dormant bank and building society accounts. 282 The Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, s 106. 283 The Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, s 104, which makes the provisions of Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 mandatory for an insurance business transfer scheme, was never brought into force in relation to banking business transfer schemes and has now been amended to refer only to insurance business transfer schemes. Therefore the use of the mechanisms of Part VII is optional in relation to a banking business transfer scheme.

155

If the court sanctions the scheme by order, then certain other provisions of Part VII apply, including section 112A(2), which provides that any right of a person to terminate, modify, acquire or claim an interest or right to treat an interest or right as terminated or modified is not enforceable until after the court has made its order under section 112(1) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 and is then enforceable only to the extent permitted by the order. Section 112(1) gives the court broad powers to make any provision it sees fit to give effect to the transfer and to what is "necessary to secure that the scheme is fully and effectively carried out".

Accordingly, an order under section 112(1) could in theory prejudice a party that has entered into a Credit Support Document with an English Bank. Note that an order can only be made if the court considers that, in all circumstances, it is appropriate to sanction the scheme. However, we do not believe that an English court would make an order under Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 in relation to the sanctioning of a transfer scheme that would (a) prejudice the ability of the Secured Party under a Security Document or the Transferee under a Transfer Annex to exercise its rights against an English Bank or (b) otherwise materially and adversely affect the rights of the Secured Party or Transferee, as the case may be. Also see Annex 1 of the ISDA Netting Opinion in respect of the potential circumstances in which the designation of an Early Termination Date under the ISDA Master Agreement may not be possible as a result of an order under section 112(1).

2.3 Banking Act

Our conclusions in this Annex 1 are subject to the provisions of the Banking Act, which came into force on 21 February 2009. The Banking Act introduced significant changes to the law relating to English Banks, as described in outline at (a) below and in more detail in the paragraphs that follow.284

(a) Key elements of the Banking Act

The Banking Act provides for a "special resolution regime" applicable to English Banks. Amendments to the Banking Act have widened the Act's scope and in addition to English Building Societies, the Act also applies to certain English Investment Firms and Banking Group Companies.285

The special resolution regime in relation to English Banks consists of:

(i) in Part 1 of the Banking Act, a set of five stabilisation options, which are exercised through four stabilisation powers (the SRR);

(ii) the Bank Insolvency Procedure (which is a liquidation procedure for English Banks); and

(iii) the Bank Administration Procedure (which is an administration procedure for English Banks).286

284 Building societies and credit unions also fall within the scope of the Banking Act. As credit unions do not fall within the scope of this memorandum, we do not discuss them further. English Building Societies are discussed in Annex 3 to this memorandum. Insurance companies may also have fallen within the scope of the Banking Act as a technical matter, due to the way "bank" is defined in sections 2(1) and 91(1). This was not intended and insurance companies are now excluded by virtue of The Banking Act 2009 (Exclusion of Insurers Order) 2010, SI 2010/35. 285 English Investment Firms, English Building Societies and Banking Group Companies are considered at Annexes 2, 3 and 4 to this memorandum respectively. 286 The Banking Act, s 1(2).

156

We comment on each of these elements below. The Banking Act also granted the Treasury broad powers to make regulations introducing a special liquidation or administration regime for investment banks, which it did by making the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011. These Regulations are discussed further in Annex 2 to this memorandum in the context of their application to an English Investment Firm. As outlined above, however, in relation to an English Bank with eligible depositors that is also an investment bank as defined in section 232 of the Banking Act, the Regulations introduce two additional insolvency procedures that may be applied in relation to that English Bank: Special Administration (Bank Insolvency) and Special Administration (Bank Administration). These are discussed at paragraph (e) below. The Banking Act also deals with certain other matters, however, these have no relevance to the issues considered in this memorandum.

Part 1 of the Banking Act underwent substantial amendment as part of the implementation in English law of the European Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive287 (the BRRD).288

The BRRD seeks to establish a common framework for the orderly resolution of failing credit institutions and investment firms within the European Union (as well as entities within their group if deemed relevant). Member states, including the United Kingdom, had an obligation to transpose and implement the BRRD into national law by 31 December 2014 and to apply the majority289 of its provisions from 1 January 2015. The BRRD is a "minimum harmonisation" EU Directive which aims to equip national authorities of the member states with the relevant resolution tools and powers to restructure failing institutions within its scope. Individual member states are free to adopt stricter rules and regulations in the context of resolution as long as they remain compliant with the provisions of the BRRD290.

As part of the implementation of the BRRD, Part 1 of the Banking Act underwent extensive amendment by, inter alia, the Bank Recovery and Resolution Order 2014291 (the BRR Order 2014), which came into force on 1 January 2015. More recently, the Bank Recovery and Resolution Order 2016292 (the BRR Order 2016) made a number of further changes to the Banking Act regime.

Responsibility for operation of the SRR rests with the four public authorities with primary responsibility for the banking sectors, namely, the Bank of England, the Treasury and the Regulators (together, the Authorities and, each, an Authority). The PRA's role under the SRR is primarily to decide, together with the Bank of England, whether the general conditions for exercise of a stabilisation power in

287 Directive 2014/59/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 May 2014, as published in the Official Journal of the EU on 12 June 2014. 288 The SRM Regulation (Regulation (EU) No 806/2014 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 July 2014 establishing uniform rules and a uniform procedure for the resolution of credit institutions and certain investment firms in the framework of a Single Resolution Mechanism and a Single Resolution Fund and amending Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010) is closely related to the BRRD. As we discuss the BRRD, as implemented in English law, in detail in this memorandum and as the UK has chosen not to participate in the single supervisory mechanism, we do not consider the SRM Regulation further. Broadly, pursuant to the SRM Regulation, the Single Resolution Board (the SRB), which is a fully independent EU agency acting as the central resolution authority within the banking union, and the European Commission have various resolution mechanisms available to them in respect of banks covered by the single supervisory mechanism corresponding to those set out in the BRRD, with the SRB taking on many of the functions assigned to national resolution authorities under the BRRD. 289 Article 130(1) of the BRRD allowed for member states to apply provisions relating to the 'bail-in tool' from 1 January 2016 at the latest. 290 Such rules and regulations must also be in compliance with EU State aid rules – see 'EU Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD): Frequently Asked Questions' published by the European Commission on 15 April 2014. 291 SI 2014/3329. 292 SI 2016/1239.

157

relation to a failing English Bank have been met.293 The Regulators also have the right to be consulted on various matters. The stabilisation powers themselves may be exercised by the Bank of England or the Treasury, depending on the relevant circumstances, including the nature of the power being exercised. In the discussion below, in relation to the exercise of a stabilisation power, references to an "Authority" means either the Bank of England or the Treasury, as appropriate.

We assume in relation to any such exercise that the Authorities have decided that the relevant conditions to the exercise of those powers are satisfied in relation to that English Bank. The general conditions to the exercise of a stabilisation power set out in section 7 of the Banking Act broadly require that the English Bank is failing or is likely to fail and is beyond the reach of less drastic remedial action than application of the SRR. Such action must also be necessary having regard to the public interest in the advancement of the special resolution objectives and one or more of the special resolution objectives would not be met to the same extent by the winding up of the bank (whether under Part 2 or otherwise).294 Sections 8 and 8ZA specify further specific conditions for a transfer to a private sector purchaser, bridge bank or asset management vehicle and section 9 specifies further specific conditions for a transfer to temporary public ownership.

Sections 5 and 6 of the Banking Act provide for the Treasury to issue a code of practice relating to, inter alia, the use by the Authorities of the stabilisation powers, the Bank Insolvency Procedure and the Bank Administration Procedure. The current version of the code of practice was issued in March 2017 (the Banking Act SRR Code of Practice). It is not binding on the Authorities but ISDA members may find it helpful to refer to it with regard to the practical operation of the SRR.

Section 10 of the Banking Act provides for the establishment by the Treasury of a panel to advise the Treasury about the effect of the SRR on English Banks and the financial market in which they operate. The panel, known as the Banking Liaison Panel, was established shortly after the Banking Act came into effect and includes representatives from the Authorities as well as the Financial Services Compensation Scheme (the FSCS) and various private sector representatives with expertise in the business of banks, financial law and insolvency law.

(b) Stabilisation options and powers

We consider first whether the application of any of the stabilisation powers set out in Part 1 of the Banking Act in relation to an English Bank could affect the validity or enforceability of a Credit Support Document against an English Bank.

(i) Overview

The stabilisation options provide for (i) private sector transfer of all or part of the business of the relevant entity; (ii) transfer of all or part of the business of the relevant entity to a bridge bank that is wholly or partially owned by and controlled by the Bank of England; (iii) transfer of all or part of the business of the relevant entity to an asset management vehicle owned (directly or indirectly) by the Bank of England or HM Treasury and controlled by the Bank of England;295 (iv) writing down certain claims of unsecured creditors

293 The Banking Act 2009, s 7. 294 In relation to the special resolution objectives, see the Banking Act, s 4. 295 This tool can only be used in conjunction with one of the other stabilisation tools: Banking Act, s 8ZA(2).

158

of the relevant entity and/or converting certain unsecured debt claims to equity, (the "bail-in option"), which equity could also be subject to any future write-down; and (v) temporary public ownership (nationalisation) of all or part of the relevant entity.296

The stabilisation options are achieved through the exercise of one or more of the "stabilisation powers" detailed at section 1(4) of the Banking Act, which are: (i) the share transfer powers (including share transfer instruments under section 15 and share transfer orders under section 16), (ii) the resolution instrument powers (which make provision for bail-in under section 12A), (iii) the property transfer powers (including property transfer instruments under section 33), and (iv) the third country instrument powers (including instruments made under sections 89H and 89I of the Banking Act that recognise the effect of special resolution action taken under the laws of a country outside the EEA).

The Authorities also have certain other wide powers under the Banking Act including the power to modify contractual arrangements in certain circumstances and powers for Treasury to disapply or modify laws (with possible retroactive effect) to enable the stabilisation powers under the Banking Act to be used effectively.297

Note that certain "reverse" and "onward" transfers are also possible where one of the transfer options has been exercised.

(ii) Share or property transfer powers

The "share transfer powers" (as they are referred to in the Banking Act, although the power is broad enough to cover debt securities, warrants and certain other rights, as well as equity shares)298 grant the Authorities the power to effect the transfer of securities issued by an English Bank and include certain other powers designed to ensure that the exercise of the share transfer power is fully effective. A share transfer by an Authority under the Banking Act would be made by a "share transfer order" or a "share transfer instrument".299 The exercise of the share transfer powers by an Authority in respect of an English Bank that is a party to the ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document would not affect the rights or obligations of the parties to the ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document, and therefore have no impact on our conclusions in this memorandum.

The exercise by an Authority under the Banking Act of the property transfer powers would be by a "property transfer instrument"300 or a "property transfer order"301. The property transfer powers include certain other powers designed to ensure that an exercise of the property transfer power is fully effective. The exercise of the property transfer powers may provide for the transfer of all property, rights and liabilities of an English Bank or for the

296 The Banking Act, s 1(3). 297 In relation to the power to change law, see Banking Act s 75. We note that s 75(4)(a) states that the Treasury may disapply or modify the effect of a provision of an enactment but not a provision made by or under the Banking Act. 298 The Banking Act, s 14. 299 Under s 12A of the Banking Act, the Bank of England may exercise an analogous transfer power in a resolution instrument making provision for securities issued by a specified bank to be transferred to a resolution administrator or another person. 300 The Banking Act, s 33(1). 301 ibid, s 45, which applies to the temporary public ownership stabilisation option.

159

transfer of some, but not all, of the property, rights or liabilities of an English Bank.302 In the latter case, the transfer would be a "partial property transfer".

The Authorities have a broad discretion to decide which property, rights or liabilities are to be transferred. This would include "foreign property", which is defined in section 39 of the Banking Act to be property outside the United Kingdom and rights and liabilities under foreign law. As we are advising only in relation to English law in this memorandum, we must assume that the transfer by an Authority of foreign property by virtue of a property transfer instrument would be effective as to that foreign property.

We note that section 39 of the Banking Act imposes various obligations on the transferor English Bank (it is the "transferor" under the Banking Act notwithstanding the involuntary nature of the transfer) and the transferee to take necessary steps to ensure that the relevant transfer is effective under relevant foreign law,303 until which time the transferor holds the relevant property or right in trust for the benefit of the transferee or is required to discharge the relevant liability on behalf of the transferee.304

The transfer of all of the property, rights and liabilities of an English Bank to a private sector purchaser, a bridge bank or asset management vehicle would necessarily include any ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document entered into by the relevant entity with another market participant, including all Transactions under that ISDA Master Agreement. From the point of view of the other market participant, the identity of its contracting party would change, however the validity and enforceability of the Credit Support Document, as a matter of English law would be unaffected.

We will now consider the application of the partial property transfer power.

(iii) Summary of conclusions in respect of the partial property transfer power

For the reasons given below, we are of the view that an Authority may not exercise the partial property transfer power in such a way as to affect the validity or enforceability of a Credit Support Document.

While the operation of a Security Document would be disrupted upon the effectiveness of a partial property transfer made in breach of article 5 of the Partial Property Safeguards Order (as defined below), an administrative remedy would be available to the Collateral Taker, as described below.

(iv) Application of the partial property transfer power to an English Bank in respect of the Security Documents and article 5 of the Partial Property Safeguards Order

The Banking Act 2009 (Restriction of Partial Property Transfers) Order 2009305 (as amended306, the Partial Property Safeguards Order) provides

302 ibid, s 33(2). 303 ibid, s 39(3). 304 ibid, s 39(4). 305 SI 2009/322. 306 The Partial Property Safeguards Order has been amended by, inter alia, the Banking Act 2009 (Restriction of Partial Property Transfers) (Amendment) Order 2009, SI 2009/1826, the BRR Order 2014 and the BRR Order 2016.

160

various protections for certain arrangements within its scope from the effect of partial property transfers.

Article 5 of the Partial Property Safeguards Order protects security arrangements by providing that a secured liability, the assets securing that liability and the benefit of that security may not be divided as a result of the exercise by an Authority of a partial property transfer power to which the Order applies. The secured liability, security assets and benefit of the security must be transferred together or not at all.307

Article 5(2), which applies where an arrangement has been entered into under which one party owes a liability to the other and that liability is secured against property or rights, provides that a partial property transfer may not "transfer the property or rights against which the liability is secured unless that liability and the benefit of the security are also transferred" and article 5(3) states that a partial property transfer may not "transfer the liability unless the benefit of the security is also transferred". Article 5(2A), introduced by the Banking Act 2009 (Restriction of Partial Property Transfers) (Amendment) Order308, also provides that a partial property transfer may not "transfer the benefit of the security unless the liability which is secured is also transferred". Although the drafting of the safeguard provisions of article 5 of the Partial Property Safeguards Order is, in certain technical respects, somewhat deficient, our view is that the intention of article 5 is clearly that, in relation to a partial property transfer within scope, the secured property, the encumbrance of the security interest, and the secured liabilities move together or not at all. The Banking Act Code of Practice states, at paragraph 8.6, that the safeguards ensure that, where the bank or its counterparty has a security interest over an asset securing a liability owed to it by the other, the charged asset may not be "split up" from this liability under a partial property transfer and, therefore, "counterparties can continue to be confident that they will be able to have recourse to collateral assets over which they have taken security."

If, notwithstanding article 5, an Authority were to exercise the partial property transfer power such that article 5 was breached in relation to a Security Document, then the Collateral Taker would have the right to seek a remedy from the Authority under article 12 of the Partial Property Safeguards Order, as discussed in more detail in below.

Section 42A of the Banking Act (Private sector purchaser: reverse property transfer) was inserted into the Banking Act by the Financial Services Act 2012. Article 2 of the Partial Property Safeguards Order has not been updated to clarify that the Partial Property Safeguards Order also applies to section 42A.309 We are not aware of any explanation for this state of affairs. We do not see any reason why this provision should not also be covered by the Partial Property Safeguards Order and believe there are strong policy

307 This principle is qualified by article 5(5) of the Partial Property Safeguards Order, however, we assume that the circumstances described in article 5(5) do not apply in relation to a Credit Support Document falling within the scope of this memorandum. Article 5(5) would only apply if the arrangement was entered into by the English Bank in contravention of a rule prohibiting such arrangements made by the FCA or the PRA under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 or otherwise than in accordance with its Part 4A permission (as such term is defined in the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000). 308 SI 2009/1826. 309 Similarly Article 8 which, subject to a number of exceptions, prohibits the application of a partial property reverse transfer to relevant financial instruments has not been updated.

161

reasons why the Authorities would not wish to exercise such powers to disrupt the operation of a Credit Support Document.310

We discuss in the ISDA Netting Opinion the issues posed by the Commission Delegated Regulation under Article 76 of the BRRD311 (the Partial Property Transfer Delegated Act) made under Article 76(4) of the BRRD in relation to the netting analysis in respect of the ISDA Master Agreement. In respect of the Security Documents, Article 2 of the Partial Property Transfer Delegated Act states that security arrangements pursuant to Article 76(2)(a) of the BRRD shall include "liens and other real securities interests" with the caveat that security arrangements shall qualify as security arrangements pursuant to Article 76(2)(a) only if the rights or assets to which the security interest attaches are sufficiently identifiable "in accordance with the terms of the arrangement and the applicable national law". It therefore appears that, in respect of the security interest collateral arrangements considered in this memorandum, the Partial Property Transfer Delegated Act does not run counter to the Partial Property Safeguards Order and, accordingly, does not affect our conclusions herein.

(v) Application of the partial property transfer power to an English Bank in respect of the Transfer Annexes and article 3 of the Partial Property Safeguards Order

Article 3(1) of the Partial Property Safeguards Order provides that a partial property transfer (to which the Order applies) may not provide for the transfer of some, but not all, of the "protected rights and liabilities" between an English Bank and a particular person under a "set-off arrangement, netting arrangement or title transfer financial collateral arrangement". Rights and liabilities are "protected rights and liabilities" if they are rights and liabilities which the English Bank or its counterparty is entitled to set-off or net under a set-off arrangement, netting arrangement or title transfer financial collateral arrangement between the parties (provided they are not "excluded rights" or "excluded liabilities").312

As noted in the ISDA Netting Opinion, in our view, whilst there are exclusions from the scope of the Partial Property Safeguards Order such as retail deposits, retail liabilities and subordinated debt, assuming that all Transactions are within the scope of Appendix A then all rights and obligations under an ISDA Master Agreement between an English Bank and a party would be "protected rights and liabilities" within the scope of the Partial Property Safeguards Order (except any claims arising under indemnities such as under section 11 of the ISDA Master Agreement) if they are subject to set off or netting under the ISDA Master Agreement.

310 There appear also to be a number of less obvious gaps in the Partial Property Safeguards Order and the Bail-in Safeguards Order in the context of onward and reverse property transfers. For instance, the definition of "banking institution" in the Partial Property Safeguards Order includes a bridge bank but not an asset management vehicle despite the fact that sections 43 and 44 of the Banking Act contemplate transfers from a resolution company. Similarly, in relation to bail-in, the definition of "banking institution" does not include a resolution company although section 44B provides that special bail-in provision may be made in various property transfer instruments including an onward property transfer instrument under section 43(2). In each case, as with the section 42A omission discussed above, we consider this to be simply a legislative oversight. 311 Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2017/867 of 7 February 2017 on classes of arrangements to be protected in a partial property transfer under Article 76 of Directive 2014/59/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council. 312 Article 3(3) of the Partial Property Safeguards Order.

162

This view would remain unchanged if a Transfer Annex were to form part of the relevant ISDA Master Agreement, which of course relies for its effectiveness on the operation of the early termination and close-out netting provisions of Section 6 of the ISDA Master Agreement. For this reason, article 3(1) of the Partial Property Safeguards Order would protect the Transfer Annex from disruption as a result of the exercise by an Authority of the partial property transfer power. A "title transfer financial collateral arrangement" for the purposes of the Partial Property Safeguards Order has the meaning given by regulation 3 of the FCA Regulations and a Transfer Annex may therefore also be a title transfer financial collateral arrangement under the FCA Regulations, as discussed in Part II of this memorandum.

The discussion of the scope of article 2 of the Partial Property Safeguards Order above applies equally to the Transfer Annexes.

The Partial Property Transfer Delegated Act would not appear to pose similar concerns in respect of title transfer collateral arrangements that arise in respect of the ISDA Master Agreement as a netting agreement and which are discussed in the ISDA Netting Opinion. As flagged in the ISDA Netting Opinion, the Explanatory Memorandum to the Partial Property Transfer Delegated Act states that "[s]ome classes of arrangements should be protected simply due to their nature (for example, full title transfer security), as the application of the safeguards for these classes of arrangements is clear and straightforward" and it therefore appears that the Partial Property Transfer Delegated Act is not intended, insofar as title transfer collateral arrangements are concerned, to represent a departure from the status quo ante.

(vi) Continuity and other powers

Under the continuity powers conferred by section 64(2) of the Banking Act and section 67(2) of the Banking Act, the relevant Authority has a number of wide-ranging powers including the ability to cancel or modify a contract between a "residual bank" or "transferred bank" and a third party.313 The continuity powers could therefore apply after either a property transfer or a share transfer. The purpose of these provisions is to ensure the provision of such services and facilities as are required to enable either the transferred bank to operate effectively or the transferee to operate the transferred business effectively (as applicable).

In relation to a partial property transfer and a collateral arrangement entered into under a Security Document, article 5(4) of the Partial Property Safeguards Order provides that a partial property transfer (within the scope of the Order, as to which see above) may not include provision under the continuity powers which "terminates or modifies the arrangement if the effect of that provision is to provide that the liability is no longer secured against the property or right." Article 5(4) would therefore protect a Security Document between an English Bank and a third party from disruption as a

313 A "residual bank" is a bank all or part of whose business has been transferred in accordance with section 11(2)(b), 12(2), 12ZA(3), 41A(2) or 44D(2) of the Banking Act. A "transferred bank" is a bank all or part of the ownership of which has been transferred in accordance with section 11(2)(a), 12(2)(a) or 13(2) of the Banking Act or in respect of which a mandatory reduction instrument or resolution instrument (or supplemental resolution instrument) has changed the ownership (wholly or partly) of.

163

result of the exercise by an Authority of a continuity power in connection with a partial property transfer.

In relation to a Transfer Annex, article 3(2) of the Partial Property Safeguards Order confirms that a partial property transfer within the scope of the Partial Property Safeguards Order may not include provision under the continuity powers that terminates or modifies any protected rights or liabilities between an English Bank and the party to the set-off arrangement, netting arrangement or title transfer financial collateral arrangement. Article 3(2) would therefore protect a Transfer Annex between an English Bank and a third party from being disrupted by the exercise of a continuity power where a partial property transfer has occurred (subject to the discussion above regarding the impact of the Partial Property Transfer Delegated Act).

No such explicit protection exists in the case of a full property transfer or a transfer of all or part of the ownership of the English Bank pursuant to powers granted under the Banking Act. However, as discussed above, the continuity powers exist to ensure that the transferee or the transferred bank (as applicable) is provided with such services and facilities required to enable it to operate effectively314 and we consider it unlikely that such powers would be used in such a way as to disrupt the operation of a Credit Support Document in the context of a transfer of ownership or full property transfer.

In addition to the continuity powers, there are other powers in the Banking Act that could at least potentially be used to modify or affect contractual rights. Section 75 gives power to the Treasury to change the law, including with retrospective effect (other than the Banking Act), for the purpose of enabling the powers under Part 1 of the Banking Act to be used effectively. Sections 23 and 40 also provide that share transfer instruments or orders or property transfer instruments may include incidental, consequential or transitional provision the scope of which are not clear but which may potentially have an impact on contractual rights.

(vii) Remedies for breach of the Partial Property Safeguards Order

The nature of a counterparty's remedy for breach of the Partial Property Safeguards Order in relation to a Credit Support Document between the counterparty and an English Bank depends on the nature of the breach. The remedies are set out in Part 3 of the Partial Property Safeguards Order.

Partial property transfer – breach of article 5 of the Partial Property Safeguards Order

If an Authority makes a partial property transfer that has one or more of the effects described in paragraphs (2), (2A) and (3) of article 5 of the Partial Property Safeguards Order, then this would constitute a breach of article 5.

A partial property transfer in breach of article 5 would (absent some other available grounds for invalidating it) be effective when made. A person adversely affected by the breach (the Claimant), however, would have the right to apply to the relevant Authority for a remedy of the breach under article 12 of the Partial Property Safeguards Order.

314 The Banking Act, ss 63(2) and 66(2).

164

The procedure for obtaining a remedy under article 12 is as follows:

(A) The Claimant must give notice of the breach to the Authority in accordance with article 12(4) of the Partial Property Safeguards Order within 60 days of the day on which the partial property transfer took effect.

(B) The Authority then has up to 60 days to consider whether it agrees that a breach has occurred.315 In a particularly complicated case, the Authority has the right to extend its time for consideration by an additional 60 days.316

(C) If the Authority agrees that a breach has occurred, then it is required to transfer the relevant property, rights and/or liabilities (or, if this is not practicable, equivalent property, rights and/or liabilities)317 to the transferee or the transferor (as these terms are defined in the Banking Act in relation to a property transfer), as appropriate, in order to remedy the breach.318

(D) If the Authority does not agree that a breach has occurred, then it must give its reasons to the Claimant.319 This decision would be subject to judicial review.

The Secured Party would, by complying with the procedure in article 12, be able to obtain a remedy for a disruption of the operation of the Security Document as a result of the exercise by an Authority of the partial property transfer power in breach of article 5 of the Partial Property Safeguards Order.

Therefore, on the basis of the Partial Property Safeguards Order and subject to the analysis above, we conclude that the exercise by an Authority of a partial property transfer power in relation to an English Bank would either not affect the validity and enforceability of a Security Document, or if made in breach of article 5, would be subject to an administrative remedy.

Partial property transfer – breach of article 3(1) of the Partial Property Safeguards Order

Articles 11(1)(a) and 11(2) of the Partial Property Safeguards Order provide that, where a partial property transfer has been made in contravention of article 3 (unless the contravention relates to the exercise of continuity powers in which case article 10 applies), then that partial property transfer will not affect the exercise of that right to set off or net.

As a result of article 11, it will never be necessary for a party to an ISDA Master Agreement to seek an administrative remedy under article 12 of the Partial Property Safeguards Order in relation to a contravention of article 3.

315 The Partial Property Safeguards Order, art 12(5). 316 ibid, art 12(8). 317 ibid, art 12(9). The word "equivalent" in article 12(9) is not defined, so the Authority would probably have some discretion to determine what constitutes an equivalent item of property, right or liability for this purpose. 318 ibid, art 12(6). 319 ibid, art 12(7).

165

Therefore, on the basis of the Partial Property Safeguards Order and subject to the analysis above, we conclude that the exercise by an Authority of a partial property transfer power in relation to an English Bank would not affect the validity and enforceability of a Transfer Annex against the English Bank.

Continuity power – breach of article 5(4) or 3(2) of the Partial Property Safeguards Order

In the event of the exercise of a continuity power by an Authority in connection with a partial property transfer in breach of:

(A) article 5(4) of the Partial Property Safeguards Order in relation to a Security Document; or

(B) article 3(2) in relation to a Transfer Annex,

article 10 of the Partial Property Safeguards Order would invalidate the partial property transfer in so far as it relates to the exercise of the continuity power in breach of the Partial Property Safeguards Order.

(viii) Bail-in option

The fourth stabilisation option, the bail-in option, is exercised through the making of one or more resolution instruments. A resolution instrument made under section 12A of the Banking Act may make "special bail-in provision" with respect to a specified English Bank.320

Pursuant to section 48B(1), "special bail-in provision" means any of the following (or a combination of the following):

(A) provision cancelling a liability owed by the bank;

(B) provision modifying, or changing the form of, a liability owed by the bank; and

(C) provision that a contract under which the bank has a liability is to have effect as if a specified right had been exercised under it.

When the Bank of England exercises the resolution instrument powers it must do so in accordance with section 12AA of the Banking Act.321

In relation to the Security Documents, the concern is that special bail-in provision could apply so as to reduce the value of, or eliminate, the secured liabilities of the English Bank with the effect that the security interest is undermined. However, in this regard, section 48B(4)(b) of the Banking Act states that a power to make special bail-in provision may not be exercised so as to affect any "excluded liability". An "excluded liability" for these purposes includes "any liability so far as it is secured"322. Secured for this

320 A property transfer instrument under sections 11(2), 12(2), 12ZA(3), 41A(2), 43(2) or 44D(2) or a supplemental property transfer instrument, may also make special bail-in provision with respect to the bank (see the Banking Act, ss 44B and 44BA). 321 The Banking Act, s 12A(2B). 322 See the Banking Act, ss 48B(7A) and (8), in respect of excluded liabilities. Note the Bank of England also has the power under section 48B(7A)(b) and (10) to exclude any eligible liability or class of eligible liabilities from the application of any special

166

purpose means secured against property or rights, or otherwise covered by collateral arrangements.323 The implications of these provisions for the Security Documents are discussed below.

In relation to the Transfer Annexes, the concern is that special bail-in provision could apply so as to reduce or eliminate the amount owed by the English Bank under Transactions under the ISDA Master Agreement (excluding the Transaction constituted by the Transfer Annex) with the effect that the ability of the other contracting party to net the Value of the Credit Support Balance or Credit Support Balance (VM), as the case may be, against liabilities due to it under such Transactions as part of the calculation of the net amount payable under Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement, pursuant to Paragraph 6 of the Transfer Annex, is commensurately reduced or eliminated. However, in this respect, article 4 (Set-off and netting) of the Banking Act 2009 (Restriction of Special Bail-in Provision, etc.) Order 2014324 (the Bail-in Safeguards Order) prohibits special bail-in provision from being made in respect of a "protected liability". A "protected liability" is a liability of the English Bank owed to a particular person which such person or the bank is entitled to set-off or net under a set-off arrangement, netting arrangement or title transfer collateral arrangement between the relevant person and the bank and that has not been converted into a net debt, claim or obligation or treated as if converted into a net debt.325 Article 4(4)(b) states that a liability is treated as if converted into a net debt, claim or obligation if the amount due in relation to the liability is reduced by reference to any sums which the debtor would be able to "set off" against the liability in the event that the debtor decided to exercise set off or netting rights.

For these purposes, "set-off arrangements" means arrangements under which two or more debts, claims or obligations can be set off against each other; "netting arrangements" means arrangements under which a number of claims or obligations can be converted into a net claim or obligation and includes, in particular, "close-out" netting arrangements, under which actual or theoretical debts are calculated during the course of a contract for the purpose of enabling them to be set off against each other or to be converted into a net debt; and "title transfer collateral arrangements" means arrangements under which Person 1 transfers assets to Person 2 on terms providing for Person 2 to transfer assets if specified obligations are discharged.326

As discussed in the ISDA Netting Opinion, we are of the view that the ISDA Master Agreement would be a "netting arrangement" or "set-off arrangement" for these purposes. We are also of the view that the ISDA Master Agreement, together with the Transfer Annex, would constitute a "title transfer collateral arrangement" for these purposes. However, a liability is not a protected

bail-in provision in relation to the bank if the Bank of England thinks the exclusion is justified on one or more of the grounds set out at subsection (12) and notifies the European Commission of its intention to exclude the liabilities before making the instrument that gives effect to the exclusion and subject to the considerations at subsection (13). See also Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/860 of 4 February 2016 specifying further the circumstances where exclusion from the application of write-down or conversion powers is necessary under Article 44(3) of Directive 2014/59/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council establishing a framework for the recovery and resolution of credit institutions and investment firms. 323 The Banking Act, s 48D(1). 324 SI 2014/3350. 325 Where the liability relates to a derivative, financial contract or qualifying master agreement (discussed below) it must be converted into a net debt, claim or obligation (rather than be "treated as converted") whether in accordance with the relevant arrangements or through the making of special bail-in provision or otherwise. 326 The Banking Act, s 48P(2).

167

liability for the purposes of the Bail-in Safeguards Order if it is of a type listed in article 4(3) of the Order. For present purposes this includes unsecured liabilities in relation to any instrument or contract which, at the date on which it was issued or made, had a maturity period of 12 months or more and is not a derivative, financial contract or qualifying master agreement327 and unsecured liabilities owed to another member of the same group as the relevant bank which are not owed in relation to derivatives, financial contracts or qualifying master agreements.328

In the Order "derivative" means a derivative as defined in Article 2(5) of EMIR and "financial contract" includes: a contract for the purchase, sale, transfer or loan of a transferable security; a repurchase transaction or reverse repurchase transaction on any transferable security; certain commodities contracts of a financial nature; and futures contracts. A "qualifying master agreement" means a master agreement in so far as it relates to a derivative, financial contract or contract for the sale, purchase or delivery of the currency of the United Kingdom or another country, territory or monetary union.329 Undertakings are in the same group if they are group undertakings in respect of each other as defined in section 1161(5) of the Companies Act 2006.330

To the extent that the Transactions (other than the Transaction constituted by the Transfer Annex) under the ISDA Master Agreement are "derivatives" or "financial contracts" as defined in the Bail-in Safeguards Order or the ISDA Master Agreement including all Transactions (other than the Transaction constituted by the Transfer Annex) thereunder is otherwise a "qualifying master agreement", the operation of the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement, including Paragraph 6 of the Transfer Annex, would be effectively protected and these exclusions from the scope of the protection of the Bail-in Safeguards Order will not apply. Please note that, in our view, these exclusions would be capable of applying to liabilities that arise under an agreement that would otherwise constitute a qualifying master agreement "in so far as" those liabilities relate to Transactions that are not derivatives, financial contracts or contracts for the sale, purchase or delivery of a currency. Most of the Transactions described in Appendix A will satisfy the definitions of either "derivative" or "financial contracts" (as those terms are defined in the Bail-in Safeguards Order) and, in so far as the ISDA Master Agreement relates to such Transactions or transactions for the sale, purchase or delivery of a currency, the ISDA Master Agreement will be a "qualifying master agreement". It is conceivable, however, that certain Transactions described in Appendix A may fall outside the scope of these definitions.331 In any event, we do not believe that these exclusions in the Bail-in Safeguards Order would apply in the context of an ISDA Master Agreement collateralised with a Transfer Annex given the meaning of "secured" in the legislation, as discussed below.

327 The Bail-in Safeguards Order, art 4(3)(d). 328 ibid, art 4(3)(e). 329 ibid, art 5. 330 ibid, art 4(5). 331 However to bail-in such Transactions on a gross basis would ostensibly be contrary to the 'no creditor worse off' principle and, in which case, may attract compensation pursuant to the Banking Act 2009 (Mandatory Compensation Arrangements Following Bail-in) Regulations, SI 2014/3330.

168

As noted above, the power to make special bail-in provision may not be exercised so as to affect any excluded liability, which includes any liability so far as it is secured. The definition of "secured" for this purpose extends to liabilities covered by title transfer collateral arrangements.332 In respect of an ISDA Master Agreement collateralised with a Transfer Annex, the collateral is applied as an Unpaid Amount as part of close-out and the Bail-in Safeguards Order would, in any event, subject to the discussion above, prohibit the bail-in of liabilities in respect of Transactions prior to the conversion into a net debt (including the application of the Unpaid Amount in respect of Collateral transferred by the English Bank). The position is different with respect to the Security Documents where the Transactions would first be converted into a net debt (which is, subject to the discussion above, required by the Bail-in Safeguards Order) and the value of the Collateral then applied to that net debt. It is only the portion of the net debt that exceeds the value of the Collateral that would be subject to bail in.

Furthermore, the exclusions from the scope of the Bail-in Safeguards Order discussed above only apply to unsecured liabilities. The definition of "secured" in the context of the Bail-in Safeguards Order should be ascribed the meaning referred to above. Therefore, where the ISDA Master Agreement is collateralised by the English Bank pursuant to either a Security Document or a Transfer Annex (or a combination of Credit Support Documents), such exclusions would prima facie not be relevant notwithstanding the existence of one or more Transactions that do not fall within the definition of "derivative" or "financial contract" or otherwise cause the ISDA Master Agreement to fail to be a "qualifying master agreement" in so far as it relates to such Transactions. In addition, as mentioned above, section 48B of the Banking Act provides that a liability may not be subject to bail-in at all so far as it is secured. As the Credit Support Documents "secure" the ISDA Master Agreement as a whole, it is arguable that the liabilities under the ISDA Master Agreement would need to be converted (or treated as converted) into a net debt in accordance with the close-out netting provisions, against which the Collateral the subject of the security interest under a Security Document would be applied or which would include the Unpaid Amount in respect of a Transfer Annex (as applicable), before any net debt that exceeds the value of the Collateral could be considered for bail- in.

For these reasons, the presence of one or more Credit Support Documents333 would, in our view, likely ensure that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement operate in accordance with their terms in the context of the bail-in of the Collateral Provider. We note, however, that the situation is not free from doubt. Note that the above discussion regarding netting protection in the context of a bail-in of secured liabilities under the ISDA Master Agreement is only relevant where the English Bank is Collateral Provider under the relevant Credit Support Document. Where the English Bank has received collateral on account of a net in-the-money position the above arguments would not apply (although where IM Documents are in place and the English Bank has posted initial margin to its counterparty the reasoning would remain relevant). In any event, the

332 The Banking Act, s 48D. 333 For instance, where the parties have entered into one or more IM Documents there will be both the IM Document(s) together with one or more VM Documents pertaining to the relevant ISDA Master Agreement.

169

protections afforded by the Bail-in Safeguards Order and section 48B of the Banking Act ensure that the collateral arrangements established by the Credit Support Documents are not undermined by bail-in.

Article 6(7) and article 6(8) of the Bail-in Safeguards Order provide that if special bail-in provision has been made in contravention of the Bail-in Safeguards Order, the remedies are for the Bank of England:

(A) to require the relevant bank or bridge bank (as applicable) to issue securities to the affected person or to transfer securities issued by the relevant bank or bridge bank (as applicable) to the affected person, in either case, which the Bank of England estimates to have a value equal to the relevant sum; or

(B) to require the relevant bank or bridge bank (as applicable) to transfer the relevant sum to the affected person.

For these purposes "relevant sum" means such sum as the Bank of England considers necessary to put the relevant person in the position the person would have been in had the contravention not occurred.

On the basis of the above discussion, therefore, we conclude that the exercise by the Authorities of the resolution instrument powers in relation to an English Bank would not affect the validity and enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against the English Bank.

Please note that although section 48B(4)(b) of the Banking Act and the Bail- in Safeguards Order act to preserve the effectiveness of the Credit Support Documents, any net sum owed by the English Bank following the enforcement of the security interest or the operation of the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement together with Paragraph 6 of the Transfer Annex (as appropriate) would itself be at risk of being reduced or eliminated by the making of special bail-in provision. Also note that the Bail-in Safeguards Order does not prevent special bail-in provision from being made to convert a protected liability into a net debt, claim or obligation.334 Note that the Bail-in Safeguards Order provides, at article 4(2), that where the protected liability relates to a derivative, financial contract or qualifying master agreement it must be converted into a net debt, claim or obligation, whether in accordance with the relevant arrangement or through the making of special bail-in provision.335

334 The Bail-in Safeguards Order, art 4(6). 335 See further BRRD, art 49. Regarding the valuation of derivatives for bail-in see Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/1401 of 23 May 2016 supplementing Directive 2014/59/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council establishing a framework for the recovery and resolution of credit institutions and investment firms with regard to regulatory technical standards for methodologies and principles on the valuation of liabilities arising from derivatives (the Valuation RTS). The Valuation RTS provides the detail in respect of the process for valuation of derivatives contracts when resolution authorities apply bail-in to derivatives liabilities. Pursuant to Article 4, the "valuer" (meaning the independent expert appointed to carry out the valuation in compliance with the requirements and the criteria set out in Part Four of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/1075 or the resolution authority when conducting the valuation pursuant to paragraphs (2) and (9) of Article 36 of Directive 2014/59/EU) shall determine, in respect of a netting agreement, a single amount which the institution under resolution has the legal right to receive or the legal obligation to pay as a result of the close-out of all derivative contracts in the netting set. The Valuation RTS goes on to provide, at Article 5, that the early termination amount shall equal "a close-out amount covering the amount of losses or costs incurred by derivative counterparties, or gains realised by them, by replacing or obtaining the economic equivalent of material terms of the terminated contracts and the option rights of the parties in respect of those contracts" and separately factors in unpaid amounts, collateral and other amounts due in each direction. Where a counterparty has provided evidence of "commercially reasonable replacement trades" within the deadline set out in Article 3(3) of the Valuation RTS, the valuer shall determine the close-out amount at the prices of those replacement trades (Article 6(1)), subject to Article 6(2).

170

In addition, in this context, we note that, under section 6B of Banking Act (which is technically a pre-resolution tool and not part of the SRR), the Bank of England must, where the section applies336 (which includes where the Bank of England or Treasury has decided to exercise a stabilisation power under the SRR in respect of the English Bank in circumstances where section 12AA does not apply), make an instrument (a "mandatory reduction instrument") containing the mandatory reduction provision. The "mandatory reduction provision" is essentially provision for the write-down or conversion of capital instruments and must be made in accordance with the principles and procedures specified in sections 6B and 6C. The capital instruments subject to these provisions are Common Equity Tier 1 instruments, Additional Tier 1 instruments and Tier 2 instruments.337 Accordingly, the Transactions under the ISDA Master Agreement would not be directly affected by these provisions.

(ix) Overrides and stays

Under section 48Z(6) of the Banking Act (which applies, inter alia, where a contract or other agreement is entered into by an English Bank and the substantive obligations provided for in the contract or agreement continue to be performed), the following are to be disregarded in determining whether a default event provision (which includes a provision of an agreement that has the effect that, if a specified event occurs or situation arises, the agreement or any rights or duties thereunder are terminated or a sum becomes payable or delivery becomes due or other right accrues) applies:

(A) a crisis prevention measure or crisis management measure taken in relation to the bank or a member of the same group (as defined at section 474 of the Companies Act 2006) as the bank; and

(B) the occurrence of any event directly linked to the application of such a measure.

The terms "crisis management measure" and "crisis prevention measure" are defined at section 48Z(1) of the Banking Act by reference to the BRRD and include certain action taken under the Banking Act and the BRRD. In addition a mandatory reduction instrument, a share transfer instrument, a property transfer instrument or a resolution instrument (each a Part 1 instrument) or a share transfer order may, in circumstances where section 48Z(6) does not apply, provide that the Part 1 instrument or share transfer order should be disregarded in determining whether a default event provision applies.338 See also the multi-branch discussion at Part 2 of this Annex 1 below in respect of certain cross-border scenarios where the restriction on termination could be engaged.

In the present context, the effect of the section is that the right of the Secured Party to enforce the security interest in the Collateral pursuant to the Security Documents or, in relation to the Transfer Annex, the right of the Transferee to terminate and close-out Transactions in accordance with the ISDA Master

336 See section 6A of the Banking Act for the circumstances in which section 6B applies. See section 81AA in respect of Banking Group Companies. 337 These terms are defined in the Banking Act, s 3. 338 The Banking Act, s 48Z(7).

171

Agreement (including Paragraph 6 of the Transfer Annex), would be ineffective in certain circumstances including where such rights arise as a result of the exercise of a stabilisation power in relation to the English Bank. However, such rights based on the existence or occurrence of other events or circumstances, should not be affected. Therefore we do not consider that such power has an impact on the conclusions in this memorandum.

Note that the definition of a "default event provision" at section 48Z would also be wide enough to include Section 2(a)(iii) of the ISDA Master Agreement such that a party to an ISDA Master Agreement with an English Bank may not rely on Section 2(a)(iii) to withhold its performance in circumstances where that Section is rendered applicable by a crisis prevention measure or crisis management measure taken in relation to the bank or member of its group.

The BRR Order 2016 includes changes to the mandatory default override in section 48Z to allow default event provisions to take effect in accordance with their terms notwithstanding section 48Z(6) if provided for in a Part 1 instrument or share transfer order (or to take effect to the extent specified in the instrument or order).339 Such provision may be made only if the Bank of England (in the case of a Part 1 instrument) or HM Treasury (in the case of a share transfer order) considers that such provision would advance one or more of the special resolution objectives.

As discussed in Annex 1 of the ISDA Netting Opinion, under section 70A of the Banking Act, the Bank of England may suspend obligations to make a payment or delivery under a contract where one of the parties to the contract is an English Bank subject to a stabilisation power. This power is exercisable by way of provision in a share transfer instrument, property transfer instrument, resolution instrument or third-country instrument. Any such period of suspension must end no later than midnight at the end of the first business day following the day on which the instrument providing for the suspension is published.340 Section 70A(3)(c) clarifies that all the obligations of the parties to the relevant contract will be suspended. Any payments or deliveries "due" under the ISDA Master Agreement (or the relevant Credit Support Document) during the stay period, while not being made by either party, will instead become due at the end of such period (subject to the terms of the ISDA Master Agreement and relevant Credit Support Document).341 Similarly, pursuant to section 70C of the Banking Act, the Bank of England may suspend the termination rights (which includes a right to close out, set- off or net obligations or any similar provision that extinguishes an obligation of a party to the contract and a provision that prevents an obligation from arising under the contract) of any party to a contract with a bank under resolution assuming that all the obligations under the contract to make payments or deliveries or provide collateral continue to be performed. Again, any such suspension must end no later than midnight at the end of the first business day following the day on which the relevant instrument providing

339 BRR Order 2016, art 15 and the Banking Act, s 48Z(6A). 340 The Banking Act, s 70A(3). 341 ibid, s 70A(4).

172

for the suspension is published.342 Furthermore, pursuant to section 70B of the Banking Act, the Bank of England may suspend the rights of a secured creditor of a bank subject to a stabilisation power to enforce any security interest the creditor has in relation to the assets of the bank.343 Any such suspension must also end no later than midnight at the end of the first business day following the day on which the relevant instrument is published.

Noting that the restrictions under sections 70A, 70B and 70C of the Banking Act will not prejudice a party in seeking to enforce its rights against the English Bank under the ISDA Master Agreement and the relevant Credit Support Document upon expiration of the stay, we do not consider that such powers have an impact on our conclusions herein regarding the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents.344

(c) Bank Insolvency Procedure

The Bank Insolvency Procedure is an additional procedure for winding up or liquidating an English Bank (if the English Bank has depositors who are eligible depositors). It is based on the provisions for the liquidation of an English Company, as described in this memorandum, but adapted to further the purposes of the Banking Act and, in particular, to transfer the accounts of eligible depositors to another financial institution or to facilitate rapid payments to such depositors under the FSCS.345

The detailed operation of the Bank Insolvency Procedure is subject to the Bank Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2009 (the Bank Insolvency Rules),346 which, for present purposes, are comparable to the provisions of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 that apply to the winding up of a company. Rule 72 of the Bank Insolvency Rules sets out an insolvency set-off provision that is, for present purposes, substantially the same as Rule 14.25 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016. There are some differences between the two provisions, but these have no bearing on our conclusions in this memorandum.347 The application of Rule 72 is modified by Rule 73 in respect of protected deposits.

The Bank Insolvency Procedure is not mandatory. For example, an ordinary winding up or liquidation of an English Bank under the Insolvency Act 1986 could still occur. It is likely, however, that the Bank Insolvency Procedure would be used where the Authorities decide that putting the failed English Bank straight into liquidation is the best or only viable course to take.

342 Note that, subject to section 48Z, termination rights can be exercised at the end of the suspension period pursuant to the contract, provided that, if the rights and liabilities have been transferred to another entity, the termination right must have been triggered by the new entity. 343 Assuming such secured creditor is not an "excluded person" (see the Banking Act, s 70D) and the security interest is in assets of the bank that have been pledged or provided to the excluded person as collateral or as cover for margin. 344 The restrictions in ss 70A and 70C also do not apply to a party to a contract with the English Bank that is an "excluded person" as defined in s 70D. 345 Section 103(6) of the Banking Act sets out a table showing how the relevant provisions of the Insolvency Act 1986 have been modified for the purpose of the Bank Insolvency Procedure. 346 SI 2009/356, which came into effect on 25 February 2009. 347 Note that Rule 72 is based on Rule 4.90 of the Insolvency Rules 1986. Reference is also made to Rule 4.86 of the 1986 Rules which applies for the purpose of contingent obligations. Note also that Rule 74 (which also applies for the purposes of Rule 72 in relation to any sums due to the bank which are payable in a currency other than sterling) applies Rule 4.91 of the Insolvency Rules 1986 for the purposes of debts in a foreign currency. We refer the reader to the discussion at Part I.6 of this memorandum.

173

The Bank Insolvency Procedure may be initiated by any of the Secretary of State, the Bank of England or the PRA making an application to the court for a bank insolvency order under section 95 of the Banking Act. In each case certain conditions and grounds must be satisfied, including (i) in the case of the Bank of England, that the PRA is satisfied that Condition 1 in section 7 of the Banking Act is met; and (ii) in the case of the PRA, that the Bank of England is satisfied that Condition 2 in section 7 of the Banking Act is met.

There are various technical differences between the winding up of an English Company under the Insolvency Act 1986 and the Bank Insolvency Procedure, but these have no material effect on our conclusions in relation to the issues discussed in this memorandum.

(d) Bank Administration Procedure

The Bank Administration Procedure is an additional procedure for the administration of a failing English Bank. It is based on the provisions for the administration of an English Company, as described in this memorandum, but adapted to further the purposes of the Banking Act.348 In particular, the Bank Administration Procedure is intended to be used in relation to a failing English Bank where there has been a partial transfer of business from the failing English Bank to a commercial purchaser or resolution company. The bank administrator appointed by the court would be empowered and required to ensure that the non-transferred part of the English Bank (referred to in the Banking Act as the "residual bank") provides services or facilities required to enable a private sector purchaser or resolution company that has acquired the transferred business to operate effectively.

The Bank Administration Procedure would be initiated by the Bank of England making an application to the court for a bank administration order under section 142 of the Banking Act. The Bank Administration Procedure is not mandatory. For example, an ordinary administration under the Insolvency Act 1986 could still occur. It is highly likely, however, that where a transfer of part of the business of a failed bank has occurred, the Bank Administration Procedure would be commenced by the Bank of England in relation to the residual bank.

The detailed operation of the Bank Administration Procedure is subject to the Bank Administration (England and Wales) Rules 2009 (the Bank Administration Rules),349 which are, for present purposes, comparable to the provisions of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 that apply to the administration of a company. Rule 61 of the Bank Administration Rules applies various provisions of the Insolvency Rules 1986 to the conduct of a Bank Administration Procedure, including Rule 2.85.350

The moratorium on enforcement under paragraph 43 and 44 of Schedule B1 to the Insolvency Act 1986 also applies to the Bank Administration Procedure under section 145 of the Banking Act subject, in relation to paragraph 43, to (i) in the case of bank administration following transfer to a resolution company, the requirement for Bank of England approval in addition to administrator consent until the Bank of England has given an "Objective 1 Achievement Notice"; and (ii) the court must also have

348 Section 145(6) of the Banking Act sets out a table showing how the relevant provisions of the Insolvency Act 1986 have been modified for the purpose of the Bank Administration Procedure. 349 SI 2009/357, which came into effect on 25 February 2009. 350 See the discussion at Part I.6 of this memorandum.

174

regard to the objectives of the Bank Administration Procedure when considering whether to give permission under paragraph 43. Objective 1 is to ensure the supply to the private sector purchaser or resolution company of such services and facilities as are required to enable it, in the opinion of the Bank of England, to operate effectively.

There are various technical differences between the administration of an English Company under the Insolvency Act 1986 and the Bank Administration Procedure, but these have no material effect on our conclusions in relation to the issues discussed in this memorandum.

(e) Special Administration (Bank Insolvency) and Special Administration (Bank Administration)

As noted above, where an English Bank is also an investment bank as defined in section 232 of the Banking Act, there are additional insolvency procedures that may be applied to it, namely, Special Administration (Bank Insolvency) and Special Administration (Bank Administration) under the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011.351

Note that if the English Bank, as a matter of fact, has no eligible depositors, then Special Administration (Bank Insolvency) would not be available and instead either Investment Bank Special Administration or Special Administration (Bank Administration) would apply.352 See Annex 2 in respect of Investment Bank Special Administration.

The purpose of these additional procedures is to act as an alternative to the Bank Insolvency Procedure or, as the case may be, the Bank Administration Procedure in relation to an English Bank that is also an investment bank. In other words, in circumstances where a failing English Bank would otherwise have been put into the Bank Insolvency Procedure, it could, if it is also an investment bank, be put instead into Special Administration (Bank Insolvency).

Similarly, in circumstances where an English Bank that is a residual bank under the Banking Act would otherwise have been put into the Bank Administration Procedure, it could, if it is also an investment bank, be put instead into Special Administration (Bank Administration).

Regulation 3(3) makes it clear that an investment bank that is an English Bank with eligible depositors may not be put into Investment Bank Special Administration, but may be put into Special Administration (Bank Insolvency) or Special Administration (Bank Administration), as appropriate. Schedule 1 to the Regulations governs Special Administration (Bank Insolvency). Schedule 2 governs Special Administration (Bank Administration).

The detailed operation of each procedure is governed by the Investment Bank Special Administration (England and Wales) Rules 2011353 (the Investment Bank Administration Rules). The Investment Bank Administration Rules are, for present purposes, comparable to the provisions of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 that apply to the administration of a company. Part 2, Chapter 2 of the Rules

351 Various changes were made to the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011 by the Investment Bank (Amendment of Definitions) and Special Administration (Amendment) Regulations 2017 (for further details, see Annex 2). 352 The Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011, reg 3(4). 353 SI 2011/1301, which came into effect on 30 June 2011.

175

governs the procedure for applying for a special administration (bank insolvency) order. Part 2, Chapter 3 of the Rules governs the procedure for applying for a special administration (bank administration) order. The remaining Rules apply in relation to both procedures (and also to Investment Bank Special Administration, as discussed in Annex 2).

Neither procedure is mandatory. Which procedure is commenced in relation to a failing English Bank, if either, will be determined by the Authorities, subject to the approval of the court, and will depend on a variety of circumstances that cannot be predicted ex ante. For present purposes, though, the issue is whether the commencement of either procedure in relation to an English Bank would materially and adversely affect the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against the English Bank.

Rule 164 of the Investment Bank Administration Rules sets out an insolvency set-off provision that, for present purposes, is substantially the same as Rule 14.25 and Rule 14.24 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016. It applies in relation to each procedure, as amended by Rule 165 in the case of Special Administration (Bank Insolvency) and Special Administration (Bank Administration) if all or part of a creditor's claim against the English Bank is in respect of protected deposits. While there are some differences between Rule 164 (as amended by Rule 165, if applicable) and Rule 14.25 and Rule 14.24 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016, these differences have no bearing on our conclusions in this memorandum.354

The moratorium on enforcement under paragraph 43 and 44 of Schedule B1 to the Insolvency Act also applies to Special Administration (Bank Insolvency) and Special Administration (Bank Administration) under regulation 15 and Schedule 1 paragraph 5 and Schedule 2 paragraph 6 of the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011. In the case of Special Administration (Bank Administration) the application of paragraph 43 is subject to (i) in the case of Special Administration (Bank Administration) following transfer to a bridge bank, the requirement for Bank of England approval in addition to administrator consent until the Bank of England has given an "Objective A Achievement Notice"; and (ii) the court must also consider Objective A and the special administration objectives when giving any permissions. Objective A is to provide support for a private sector purchaser or bridge bank.

Although there are various technical differences between, on the one hand, the administration of an English Company under the Insolvency Act 1986 and, on the other hand, Special Administration (Bank Insolvency) or Special Administration (Bank Administration), as the case may be, subject to the analysis above these differences have no material effect on our conclusions in relation to the issues discussed in this memorandum.

2.4 The Winding Up Directive

As noted in our answer to question 20 in Part III, the Recast Insolvency Regulation does not apply to an English Bank. Instead, an English Bank would be subject to an alternative

354 Note that Rule 166 (which also applies for the purposes of Rule 164 in relation to any sums due to the investment bank which are payable in a currency other than sterling) provides that for the purpose of proving a debt incurred or payable in a currency other than sterling, the amount of the debt shall be converted into sterling at the official rate prevailing on the date when the investment bank entered special administration. "The official exchange rate" means the mean of the buying and selling spot rates prevailing in the London market as published at the close of business for the date in question. In the absence of any such published rate, it is such rate as the court determines. This broadly reflects the position in respect of administration set-off under the Insolvency Rules 1986 (which has now been superseded by Rule 14.21 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 (see our response to question 26 in Part VI)).

176

European cross-border insolvency law regime applicable to credit institutions under Directive 2001/24/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 4 April 2001 on the reorganisation and winding up of credit institutions (the Winding Up Directive), which was implemented in the United Kingdom by the Credit Institutions (Reorganisation and Winding Up) Regulations 2004355 (the Winding Up Regulations).356

See Part IV of the ISDA Netting Opinion and also the multibranch discussion below in respect of the impact of this regime on the multibranch analysis. In addition, see paragraph 2.1 of Annex 1 and Appendix D of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to the application of the Winding Up Directive and the Winding Up Regulations to an English Bank that is party to a New York law governed ISDA Master Agreement. The ISDA Netting Opinion discusses the derogations in respect of applicable law in the Winding Up Directive and the Winding Up Regulations with regards to netting and set-off. Regulation 28 of the Winding Up Regulations (in relation to set-off) may also be relevant when considering the enforceability of the NY Annexes. Note that there are further derogations in the Winding Up Regulations not discussed in the ISDA Netting Opinion that may also apply when considering the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents in the event of the insolvency or resolution of an English Bank. These include regulations 26 (Third parties' rights in rem), 30 (Detrimental acts pursuant to the law of an EEA State), 31 (Protection of third party purchasers) and 33 (Lex rei sitae).

We discuss the position under English law only in this memorandum.

Regulation 26 is analogous to Article 8 of the Recast Insolvency Regulation. It is therefore relevant where the location of the Collateral under the Security Documents is outside of England and states that a relevant reorganisation or a relevant winding up shall not affect the rights in rem of creditors or third parties in respect of assets situated within the territory of an EEA State at the relevant time. Where the requirements of regulation 26 are met it would therefore lead to the disapplication of a stay on enforcement of the security interest imposed in the context of an administration or CVA of an English Bank.357

As noted in our answer to question 20, the Cross-Border Insolvency Regulations would also not apply to an English Bank.

Also see paragraph 2.1 of Annex 1 of the ISDA Netting Opinion for a discussion of Article 55 of the BRRD and the rules of the PRA requiring contractual recognition of resolution stays.

2.5 The FCA Regulations

The protections afforded to financial collateral arrangements by the FCA Regulations upon insolvency apply also in the context of the Bank Insolvency Procedure358, the Bank Administration Procedure359, Special Administration (Bank Insolvency)360, Special

355 SI 2004/1045. 356 Please note that the various references to the Insolvency Rules 1986 in the Winding Up Regulations have not been updated to reflect the introduction of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016. See discussion at Part I.6 above. 357 Unlike the Recast Insolvency Regulation, neither the Winding Up Regulations nor the Winding Up Directive set out specific rules for the determination of the location of the relevant assets for this purpose. Although see regulation 33 of the Winding Up Regulations (discussed in our response to question 2 of Part III), implementing article 24 of the Winding Up Directive, with respect to PRIMA. 358 The Bank Insolvency Procedure is a "winding-up proceeding" as defined in the FCA Regulations. See also the Banking Act 2009 (Parts 2 and 3 Consequential Amendments) Order 2009, SI 2009/317, art 3. 359 See the Banking Act 2009 (Parts 2 and 3 Consequential Amendments) Order 2009, SI 2009/317, art 3. 360 See the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011, Sch 1, para 3. In our view this provision applies Schedule 6 of the Regulations to Special Administration (Bank Insolvency).

177

Administration (Bank Administration)361 and Investment Bank Special Administration362, subject to the discussion below.

In relation to the scope of application of the FCA Regulations, the secondary legislation cited in support of the proposition above clarifies that a reference in the FCA Regulations to winding up or administration (as applicable) under the Insolvency Act 1986 should be read as including a reference to the relevant insolvency proceeding. The application of regulation 12, for instance, which states that a close-out netting provision takes effect in accordance with its terms notwithstanding the winding up or administration of the collateral-provider or collateral-taker, is therefore seemingly not in doubt.

In relation to other provisions of the FCA Regulations, however, that operate by disapplying certain onerous provisions of English insolvency law, an argument could be made that by not expressly disapplying such provisions as applied by another insolvency proceeding (where such provisions as originally enacted do not apply to such insolvency proceeding), such provisions have not been effectively disapplied in that context by the FCA Regulations. On a purposive interpretation of the FCA Regulations, we would construe them as disapplying such provisions of insolvency law in respect of financial collateral arrangements whether those provisions apply directly to an insolvency proceeding or indirectly by subsequent extension but we note the contrary view is arguable. This is a general point in respect of the interpretation of the FCA Regulations and applies equally to other insolvency proceedings considered in this memorandum, which apply provisions of the Insolvency Act 1986 or other enactments, perhaps with amendment, or indeed apply those provisions as applied by another insolvency proceeding.

In contrast, where legislation provides that an insolvency regime applicable to companies generally applies to a particular Counterparty with modification (rather than creating an independent insolvency proceeding that applies provisions relating to an existing insolvency proceeding), in our view, the issue described above does not arise. Those provisions that are disapplied by the FCA Regulations (if they applied to the Counterparty to begin with) apply directly to such insolvency proceeding to which the Counterparty is subject.

In any event, in respect of the Bank Insolvency Procedure and the Bank Administration Procedure, article 3(4) of the Banking Act 2009 (Parts 2 and 3 Consequential Amendments) Order 2009 clarifies that references in the FCA Regulations to the provisions of the Insolvency Act 1986 shall be read to include those provisions as applied and modified by sections 103 and 145 of the Banking Act and that references to the provisions of the Insolvency Rules 1986 shall be read to include those provisions as applied and modified by rules made under section 411(1A), in relation to the Bank Insolvency Procedure, or section 411(1B), in relation to the Bank Administration Procedure, of the Insolvency Act 1986. In relation to regulation 14 of the FCA Regulations, which relates to the application of Rules 4.91 and 2.86 of the Insolvency Rules 1986, Rule 74 of the Bank Insolvency Rules and Rule 61 of the Bank Administration Rules apply Rules 4.91 and 2.86 of the Insolvency Rules 1986, respectively, to the Bank Insolvency Procedure and the Bank Administration Procedure including for the purposes of the relevant mandatory set-off rules.

Schedule 6 of the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011 contains similar language in respect of Investment Bank Special Administration (discussed further at Annex 2). We are of the view that the effect of paragraph 3 of Schedule 1 and paragraphs 4 and 5 of Schedule 2 of the Regulations is to apply Schedule 6 to Special Administration (Bank

361 See the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011, Sch 2, para 4 and 5. In our view these provisions apply Schedule 6 of the Regulations to Special Administration (Bank Administration). 362 See the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011, reg 27 and Sch 6.

178

Insolvency) and Special Administration (Bank Administration). However, the currency conversion provision for the purposes of mandatory set-off set out at Rule 166 of the Investment Bank Administration Rules is a standalone provision and does not apply either Rules 4.91 or 2.86 of the Insolvency Rules 1986 (or rule 14.21 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016). It could therefore be argued that regulation 14 of the FCA Regulations has no application to Investment Bank Special Administration, Special Administration (Bank Insolvency) or Special Administration (Bank Administration). The relevant provision in Schedule 6 of the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011 is subtly different from the equivalent provision in the Banking Act 2009 (Parts 2 and 3 Consequential Amendments) Order 2009 and provides that references to "the provisions of the Insolvency Rules 1986 […] include the provisions of insolvency rules made under section 411 of the Insolvency Act as applied by regulation 15(6)."363 We would argue that this should be interpreted to mean that a reference to Rule 4.91 or Rule 2.86 of the Insolvency Rules 1986 in regulation 14 of the FCA Regulations includes reference to the analogous provision of the Investment Bank Administration Rules but this is not free from doubt.

In relation to regulation 12 of the FCA Regulations, note that regulation 12(5) provides that nothing in regulation 12 prevents the Bank of England imposing a restriction on the effect of a close-out netting provision in the exercise of its powers under Part 1 of the Banking Act. Similarly, regulation 18A provides that nothing in regulation 16 (Right of use under a security financial collateral arrangement) and regulation 17 (Appropriation of financial collateral under a security financial collateral arrangement) prevents the Bank of England imposing a restriction on the enforcement of financial collateral arrangements or on the effect of a security financial collateral arrangement, close-out netting provision or set-off arrangement (as defined in Article 2.1(99) of the BRRD) in the exercise of its powers under Part 1 of the Banking Act.364

3. Security Documents

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 1 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 1, we are of the view that our analysis relating to the enforceability against a Security Collateral Provider:

(i) of the Non-IM Security Documents in Part III.3 of this memorandum;

(ii) of the IM Security Documents in Parts IV.3, IV.4 and IV.5 of this memorandum; and

(iii) of the Clearing System IM Documents in Parts V.3, V.4 and V.5 of this memorandum,

would apply in circumstances where the Security Collateral Provider is an English Bank.

4. Transfer Annexes

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 1 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex

363 The Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011, Sch 6, para 1(2)(i). Regulation 15(6) applies section 411 of the Insolvency Act 1986 to Investment Bank Special Administration. Paragraph 5 of Schedule 1 to the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011 applies section 411 as applied by regulation 15(6) to Special Administration (Bank Insolvency) and paragraph 6(4) of Schedule 3 to the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011 applies section 411 as applied by regulation 15(6) to Special Administration (Bank Administration). 364 The BRRD amended the Collateral Directive to state that the Collateral Directive shall be without prejudice to the BRRD (see BRRD, art 9a).

179

1, we are of the view that the analysis in Part VI.3 of this memorandum of issues relating to the enforceability of the Transfer Annexes would apply to an English Bank.

180

PART 2 –BANKS ACTING ON A MULTIBRANCH BASIS

Certain English Banks are multibranch entities. The issues that may arise when dealing with an English Bank that is a multibranch entity are beyond the scope of this memorandum but for a discussion of certain issues that may arise when an English Bank is transacting through an overseas branch, see Part IV of the ISDA Netting Opinion. Many of the same issues would apply similarly to a Credit Support Document (particularly if the Collateral is being provided by a foreign branch of the English Bank).

In Part 2 of this Annex 1, we briefly discuss the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents in the event that insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of an English Branch which is providing Collateral under a Credit Support Document. As with an English Bank, certain issues may also arise as a result of the other branches of the Foreign Entity or the jurisdiction of incorporation which are beyond the scope of this memorandum. For a discussion of certain of such issues, please see Part IV of the ISDA Netting Opinion.

As discussed in Part IV of the ISDA Netting Opinion, whether or not the English Branch can enter into insolvency proceedings in England will depend on the Winding Up Regulations, implementing the Winding Up Directive.

If the English Branch is part of an EEA credit institution, under the Winding Up Regulations, no winding up proceedings or reorganisation measures (including resolution action) in respect of the English Branch can be undertaken in the United Kingdom except in the circumstances permitted by the Winding Up Regulations.365

Under section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986 the English courts would have jurisdiction to wind up an English Branch of a non EEA credit institution. Please see Part IV of the ISDA Netting Opinion for a detailed discussion of how section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986 would apply, including the discretion of the court in determining whether or not to take jurisdiction.

If an English Branch is not part of an EEA credit institution and is subject to winding up proceedings in England then:366

(a) in respect of the Security Documents, our conclusions with regard to questions 16 to 18 in respect of winding up proceedings at Parts III, IV and V of this memorandum would apply mutatis mutandis; and

(b) in respect of the Transfer Annexes, our conclusions in respect of winding up proceedings set out in questions 26 and 27 at Part VI would also apply mutatis mutandis,

365 Note that the basic rule of the Winding Up Directive is that the home member state of an EEA credit institution will have exclusive jurisdiction to open insolvency proceedings in relation to the EEA credit institution and the insolvency law of that member state will govern the effect of those insolvency proceedings throughout the EEA. This is discussed in more detail in the ISDA Netting Opinion. However, there are certain derogations which include a derogation for certain rights in re. The Winding Up Directive provides that the adoption of reorganisation measures or the opening of winding-up proceedings shall not affect the rights in re of creditors or third parties in respect of tangible or intangible, movable or immovable assets (including both specific assets and collections of indefinite assets as a whole which change from time to time) belonging to the affected credit institution which are situated within the territory of another EEA State at the time of the adoption of such measures or the opening of such proceedings. Similar derogations exist in the Winding Up Directive in relation to the enforcement of proprietary rights in certain instruments, rights of third party purchasers, rights of set-off and rights under netting agreements (as mentioned above in relation to the Winding Up Regulations). 366 See below in respect of the SRR.

181

for the reasons given therein and subject to the discussion in Part IV of the ISDA Netting Opinion in respect of the enforceability of close-out netting under the ISDA Master Agreement in such circumstances.

An administration or CVA in relation to a foreign company that is a non EEA credit institution is highly unlikely367 unless section 426(5) of the Insolvency Act 1986 applies. Since foreign companies are liable to be wound up under section 221, a foreign company can also be subject to a scheme of arrangement assuming there is sufficient connection with England (see Part IV of the ISDA Netting Opinion).

When facing an English Branch of a non EEA credit institution, consideration should also be given to the application of the Banking Act. As discussed in more detail at Part IV of the ISDA Netting Opinion, the powers under Part 1 of the Banking Act may, subject to certain modifications, be exercised by the Authorities in respect of a third country institution (as defined in section 89H(7) of the Banking Act (a Third Country Institution), being broadly an entity the head office of which is established in a country outside the EU that would, if it were established within the EU, be a credit institution or an investment firm as defined in the BRRD), in circumstances where a Third Country Institution (or third-country parent undertaking (again, as defined in section 89H(7) of the Banking Act)) is subject to resolution action in a state other than an EEA state (a Third Country Resolution Action).368 The Winding Up Regulations provide, at regulation 3(7A), that a "stabilisation instrument" (which includes a third country instrument made under section 89H of the Banking Act) shall not be made in respect of an EEA credit institution.

Section 89I(3) of the Banking Act makes it clear that the stabilisation powers are only available in respect of the Third Country Institution to the extent that they would be available in respect of a similar entity in the United Kingdom. Accordingly, please refer to the analysis in Part 1 of this Annex 1 for a discussion of how these powers may be exercised in respect of an English Bank. However, it should be noted that, where a third country instrument made under section 89H recognises a Third Country Resolution Action (or part of it), such Third Country Resolution Action (or part of it) is expressed in the Banking Act to have the same effect in the UK as it would have produced had it been made with due authority under the law of the relevant part of the UK.369 Note that to qualify as a Third Country Resolution Action, the Banking Act requires that the anticipated results of the third country action must be broadly comparable to the results which could have been anticipated from the exercise of a stabilisation option in relation to an entity in the UK corresponding to the relevant third country institution or parent undertaking and the objectives of the action must also be broadly comparable to those in section 4 of the Banking Act.370 However, the nature and effect of the recognised Third Country Resolution Action is ultimately a question for the relevant foreign law.

Article 2(4B) of the Partial Property Safeguards Order clarifies that the protections afforded by the Partial Property Safeguards Order will apply where the Bank of England has made a third country instrument in accordance with section 89H or any further third country instruments made under section 89I(4)(b) which, in either case, makes provision which would otherwise be made in a property transfer order and constitutes a partial property transfer.

Section 48Z of the Banking Act also applies such that the Third Country Resolution Action recognised by the Bank of England pursuant to section 89H(2) of the Banking Act or the exercise of a stabilisation power in respect of a Third Country Institution or member of its group (as defined in

367 See definition of "company" in (i) paragraph 111(1A) of Schedule B1 of the Insolvency Act 1986 in respect of administration; and (ii) section 1(4) of the Insolvency Act 1986 in respect of CVAs. See the definition of "company" in section 28(1) of the Insolvency Act 1986 in respect of administrative receivership which makes it clear that it is not possible to have an administrative receiver of a foreign company. 368 See Chapter 6 (Third-country Resolution Actions) of the Banking Act. 369 The Banking Act, s 89I(2). 370 See definition of "third country resolution action" in the Banking Act, s 89H(7).

182

section 474 of the Companies Act 2006) pursuant to section 89I(3) of the Banking Act alone shall not permit a counterparty of the Third Country Institution to terminate and close-out the ISDA Master Agreement or to enforce security in respect of it.

In addition, the BRR Order 2016, implementing Article 96 of the BRRD, introduces a new section 89JA of the Banking Act, which provides the Bank of England with back-stop powers to act independently to resolve a UK branch by applying relevant parts of the SRR, subject to modifications. A "UK branch" is a branch located in the United Kingdom of a Third Country Institution authorised for the purposes of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 by the PRA or the FCA. Broadly, the Bank of England's powers in this regard are limited to transferring the property, rights and liabilities of the branch and the power to bail in transferred liabilities. "Special bail-in provision" for these purposes means (i) provision modifying or changing the form of a relevant liability or (ii) provision that a contract under which the relevant institution has a relevant liability is to have effect as if a specified right had been exercised under it (and, in either case, associated provision).371 The BRR Order 2016 extends the safeguards that apply in connection with the exercise of the partial property transfer and bail-in powers for banks established in the UK to the case of branch resolution (see Annex 1 for further details regarding the relevant safeguards).372

371 For these purposes, "relevant liability" means a liability of the Third Country Institution which is transferred in the property transfer instrument which makes special bail-in provision and "relevant institution" means the Third Country Institution whose liabilities are so transferred. "Associated provision" in this context means provision modifying a contract under which a company which is a banking group company in relation to the Third Country Institution has a liability (whether or not the institution in relation to which the special bail-in provision is made is the Third Country Institution). 372 Article 36 of the BRR Order 2016 amends the definition of "banking institution" in the Partial Property Safeguards Order to include "a third-country institution (within the meaning of section 89JA of the [Banking Act] (resolution of UK branches of third-country institutions)" and inserts a new article 1(3)(5) that states: "[r]eferences in this Order to sections of the [Banking Act] include, as the context requires, references to those provisions as applied with or without modifications by that Act, as that Act has effect on the day on which the [BRR Order 2016] comes into force." Article 39 of the BRR Order 2016 extends the definition of "banking institution" in the Bail-in Safeguards Order in the same manner as article 36. Article 39 also amends article 2(2) of the Bail-in Safeguards Order to state that "[r]eferences to sections of the [Banking Act] include, as the context requires, those sections as applied with or without modifications by that Act, as that Act has effect on the day on which the [BRR Order 2016] comes into force."

183

ANNEX 2

ENGLISH INVESTMENT FIRM

In this Annex 2, we set out our views regarding the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents in the event that resolution action or insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of an English Investment Firm.

The resolution regime (if any) and the insolvency proceedings that are available in respect of an English Investment Firm depend on its particular status.

For all English Investment Firms the applicable procedures include each type of insolvency proceeding that may be commenced in England in relation to an English Company as set out in Part III.1(4) of the ISDA Netting Opinion.

If the English Investment Firm is an "investment firm" as defined in section 258A of the Banking Act (being broadly an investment firm under the EU Capital Requirements Regulation subject to the €730,000 initial capital requirement but subject to some exclusions) then the SRR in Part 1 of the Banking Act and the Bank Administration Procedure are also applicable.

If the English Investment Firm is an "investment bank" as defined in section 232 of the Banking Act (which requires that it holds client assets and has at least one of a specified list of authorisations under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 relating to investments), then Investment Bank Special Administration is applicable.

If the English Investment Firm is both an "investment firm" under section 258A of the Banking Act and an "investment bank" under section 232 of the Banking Act then, in addition to each of the procedures above, Special Administration (Bank Administration) is also applicable.

1. Conclusion

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 2, we are of the view that our conclusions in this memorandum in relation to an English Company would also apply to an English Investment Firm, including in the event of its becoming subject to: (a) one of the forms of insolvency proceeding under the Insolvency Act 1986 or a scheme of arrangement under the Companies Act 2006; (b) the Bank Administration Procedure; (c) Investment Bank Special Administration; (d) Special Administration (Bank Administration); or (e) the SRR.

2. Analysis

The conclusions in paragraph 1 of this Annex are subject to the discussion below.

2.1 Insolvency proceedings under the Insolvency Act 1986 or scheme of arrangement under the Companies Act 2006

The insolvency proceedings applicable to an English Company may also apply to an English Investment Firm, subject to the qualification that the Regulators have certain powers to initiate and to intervene in insolvency proceedings in relation to an English Investment Firm. Neither the existence nor the possibility of the exercise of any of these powers would have a material adverse effect on our conclusions in this memorandum as they would apply to an English Investment Firm.

184

2.2 Banking Act

The SRR and the Bank Administration Procedure apply to systemically important English Investment Firms. Under section 258A of the Banking Act, an English Investment Firm will be within the scope of the regime (an English Banking Act Investment Firm) if it is an investment firm which is (or, but for the exercise of a stabilisation power, would be) an investment firm for the purposes of the Capital Requirements Regulation373, but excluding:

(a) any institution which is also:

(i) an English Bank;

(ii) an English Building Society; or

(iii) a credit union within the meaning of section 31 of the Credit Unions Act 1979; and

(b) an institution which is not required under provisions implementing the Capital Requirements Directive374 to have initial capital of €730,000.375

Sections 89A and 159A of the Banking Act apply Part 1 (Special Resolution Regime) and Part 3 (Bank Administration) of the Banking Act (respectively) to English Banking Act Investment Firms as such provisions apply to English Banks subject to certain modifications none of which are relevant to our conclusions as expressed in Annex 1 in respect of an English Bank. Accordingly, see Annex 1 to this memorandum for a detailed discussion of how Parts 1 and 3 of the Banking Act apply to English Banks.

2.3 Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011

(a) Investment Bank Special Administration

Sections 233 and 234 of the Banking Act granted the Treasury broad power to make regulations modifying the law of insolvency as it applies to investment banks and to establish procedures for the liquidation or administration of an investment bank with certain broad objectives set out in section 233(3) of the Banking Act, including identifying, protecting and facilitating the return of client assets. The Treasury exercised this power by making the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011376, which came into effect on 8 February 2011.

Under section 232 of the Banking Act, an "investment bank" is a UK institution that holds client assets (including client money) and has permission under Part 4A of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 to carry on at least one of the following regulated activities: (a) safeguarding and administering investments; (b) dealing in investments as principal; and (c) dealing in investments as agent.377

373 Regulation (EU) 575/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council. 374 Directive 2013/36/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26th June 2013 on access to the activity of credit institutions and the prudential supervision of credit institutions and investment firms, amending Directive 2002/87/EC and repealing Directives 2006/48/EC and 2006/49/EC. 375 Banking Act 2009 (Exclusion of Investment Firms of a Specified Description) Order 2014, SI 2014/1832, as amended by article 37 of the BRR Order 2016. 376 SI 2011/245. 377 This is a broad definition, arguably broader than the market understanding of the term "investment bank". There will, however, be English Investment Firms that fall outside its scope.

185

In relation to an English Investment Firm that is an investment bank, the Regulations introduce an additional form of insolvency proceeding called investment bank special administration and referred to in the Regulations as "special administration", which we refer to as "Investment Bank Special Administration" to avoid confusion with the other forms of special administration introduced by the Regulations. Note that Investment Bank Special Administration could also apply to an investment bank that is an English Bank that has no depositors that are eligible for compensation under the FSCS as discussed in Annex 1.

Investment Bank Special Administration is based on the existing provisions for the administration of an English Company, as described in this memorandum, but adapted to further the purposes set out in section 233 of the Banking Act, which include, in addition to the usual goals of collective insolvency procedures, (a) identifying, protecting and facilitating the return of client assets, (b) minimising the disruption of business and markets and (c) maximising the efficiency and effectiveness of the financial services industry in the United Kingdom.

The special administrator has greater powers than an administrator in relation to an English Company, but also additional statutory objectives, which are: (1) to ensure the return of client assets as soon as is reasonably practicable; (2) to ensure timely engagement with market infrastructure bodies and the Authorities including facilitating the operation of the relevant default rules and resolving unsettled trades or settlement instructions; and (3) either to rescue the investment bank as a going concern or to wind it up in the best interest of the creditors.378

Amendments were made to the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011 by the Investment Bank (Amendment of Definition) and Special Administration (Amendment) Regulations 2017379, reflecting proposals following the review of the regime pursuant to section 236 of the Banking Act (which requires a review of the effect of the Regulations to be completed within 2 years of their coming into force). The amendments to Investment Bank Special Administration (with consequential effect in respect of Special Administration (Bank Insolvency) and Special Administration (Bank Administration)) include changes designed to facilitate the transfer of client assets from the failed investment firm to a solvent firm. Insofar as partial property transfers are concerned, however, there are restrictions imposed for the benefit of set-off and netting arrangements as well as safeguards for title transfer collateral arrangements380 and security interests phrased similarly to the Partial Property Safeguards Order.

The detailed operation of Investment Bank Special Administration is subject to the Investment Bank Administration Rules. The Rules are, for present purposes, comparable to the provisions of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 that apply to the administration of a company. As discussed in Annex 1, Rule 164 sets out an insolvency set-off provision that, for present purposes, is substantially the same as Rule 14.24 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016. There are some differences between the two provisions, but these have no bearing on our conclusions in this memorandum.381

378 Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011, reg 10. 379 SI 2017/443. 380 A "title transfer financial collateral arrangement" for these purposes has the meaning given by regulation 3(1) of the FCA Regulations. 381 See note 354.

186

The moratorium on enforcement under paragraph 43 and 44 of Schedule B1 to the Insolvency Act also applies to Investment Bank Special Administration under regulation 15 of the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011.

Investment Bank Special Administration could be initiated by any of various interested parties specified in regulation 5, including the investment bank itself, the directors, one or more creditors and various others, including the Secretary of State, the FCA or, if the investment bank is a PRA-authorised person, the PRA, making an application to the court for a special administration order on one of the grounds specified in regulation 6, namely, that (i) the investment bank is, or is likely to become, unable to pay its debts, (ii) it would be fair to put the investment bank into Investment Bank Special Administration or (iii) it is expedient in the public interest to put the investment bank into Investment Bank Special Administration.

Where the FCA is not the person seeking the order, it must be notified of the application and has various rights to consent to the application and give directions to the administrator. The PRA also has such rights if the relevant investment bank is a PRA-authorised person. In contrast to the administration of an English Company, there are no circumstances in which a special administrator may be appointed out of court.

Investment Bank Special Administration is not mandatory, and an English Investment Firm that is an investment bank could still be made subject to administration under the Insolvency Act 1986. It is highly likely, however, that Investment Bank Special Administration will be commenced in relation to a failing investment bank in preference to ordinary administration.382

There are various technical differences between the administration of an English Company under the Insolvency Act 1986 and Investment Bank Special Administration, but these have no material effect on our conclusion in relation to the issues discussed in this memorandum.

(b) Special Administration (Bank Administration)

Article 10 of the Financial Services Act 2012 (Consequential Amendments and Transitional Provisions) (No 3) Order 2013383 amended Schedule 2 of the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011 to extend Special Administration (Bank Administration) to investment banks that are not deposit-taking banks. As Special Administration (Bank Administration) applies where part of the business of the investment bank is sold to a commercial purchaser in accordance with section 11 of the Banking Act or transferred to a bridge bank in accordance with section 12, an English Investment Firm would seem capable of being made subject to Special Administration (Bank Administration) only if it is also an investment firm under section 258A of the Banking Act (and therefore within the scope of the SRR).384 See Annex 1 to this memorandum for a discussion of the operation of Special Administration (Bank Administration) in relation to English Banks.

382 On 31 October 2011 the Financial Services Authority announced that MF Global UK Limited had entered Investment Bank Special Administration, becoming the first investment bank to do so. Since then a number of further entities have entered into Investment Bank Special Administration including Pritchard Stockbrokers Limited, WorldSpreads Limited and City Equities Limited. 383 SI 2013/1765. 384 Despite some ambiguity in relation to the application of Special Administration (Bank Administration) to such investment banks in the Regulations themselves (the change to Schedule 2 sits uneasily with article 9, which states that Schedule 2 applies where the investment bank is a deposit-taking bank), this application was confirmed by the Treasury in its consultation paper on Secondary legislation for Non-Bank resolution regimes published on 26 September 2013.

187

2.4 Winding Up Regulations

As discussed in our answer to question 20, the Recast Insolvency Regulation does not apply to an English Investment Firm.

English Investment Firms that are "investment firms" as defined in section 258A of the Banking Act are subject to the Winding Up Regulations. It is not possible for the UK to wind up or resolve an EEA investment firm with its head office in an EEA state other than the UK.

In respect of English Investment Firms within the scope of the Winding Up Regulations, we therefore assume that the head office is in England.

In respect of English Investment Firms within the scope of the Winding Up Regulations, see paragraph 2.1 of Annex 1 and Appendix D of the ISDA Netting Opinion in respect of the treatment of New York law governed ISDA Master Agreements. See also paragraph 2.4 of Part 1 of Annex 1 hereto for additional discussion of the application of the various derogations in the Winding Up Regulations to the Credit Support Documents.

2.5 The FCA Regulations

See paragraph 2.5 of Part 1 of Annex 1 hereto in relation to the application of the FCA Regulations in the context of the Bank Administration Procedure, Special Administration (Bank Administration) and Investment Bank Special Administration and the interaction between the SRR and the FCA Regulations.

3. Security Documents

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 2 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 2, we are of the view that our analysis relating to the enforceability against a Security Collateral Provider:

(i) of the Non-IM Security Documents in Part III.3 of this memorandum;

(ii) of the IM Security Documents in Parts IV.3, IV.4 and IV.5 of this memorandum; and

(iii) of the Clearing System IM Documents in Parts V.3, V.4 and V.5 of this memorandum,

would apply in circumstances where the Security Collateral Provider is an English Investment Firm.

4. Transfer Annexes

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 2 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 2, we are of the view that the analysis in Part VI.3 of this memorandum of issues relating to the enforceability of the Transfer Annexes would apply to an English Investment Firm.

188

ANNEX 3

ENGLISH BUILDING SOCIETY

In this Annex 3, we set out our views regarding the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents in the event that resolution action or insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of an English Building Society.

1. Conclusion

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 3, we are of the view that our conclusions in this memorandum in relation to an English Company would also apply to an English Building Society, including in the event of it becoming subject to: (a) one of the forms of insolvency proceeding under the Building Societies Act 1986 or a scheme of arrangement under the Companies Act 2006; (b) the Building Society Insolvency Procedure under Part 2 of the Banking Act; (c) the Building Society Special Administration Procedure under Part 3 of the Banking Act; or (d) the SRR.

2. Analysis

The conclusion in paragraph 1 of this Annex 3 is subject to the discussion below.

In paragraph 2.1 of this Annex 3, we discuss the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against an English Building Society in the event of its winding up under the Building Societies Act 1986, in the now relatively unlikely event that it is not subject to the SRR, the Building Society Special Administration Procedure, or the Building Society Insolvency Procedure.

In paragraph 2.2 of this Annex 3, we discuss the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against an English Building Society in the event that it becomes subject to the SRR (which may include, as a consequence, it becoming subject to the Building Society Special Administration Procedure) or the Building Society Insolvency Procedure.

2.1 Insolvency proceedings under the Building Societies Act 1986

In this paragraph 2.1, we assume that the English Building Society has not been made subject to the SRR (which may include, as a consequence, it becoming subject to the Building Society Special Administration Procedure) or the Building Society Insolvency Procedure, but has become subject to one of the forms of insolvency proceeding set out in Part X and in Schedules 15 and 15A to the Building Societies Act 1986.385

Those provisions apply parts of the Insolvency Act 1986 to building societies with various modifications, principally to reflect the legislative framework for building societies, which differs in various respects from that applicable to companies, and to reflect the mutual nature of an English Building Society (that is, the fact that it is owned by its members, who are also its principal depositors and borrowers). These provisions allow for the possibility of a voluntary winding up, winding up by the court or administration of an English Building Society or for its entering into a CVA with its creditors.386

385 Part X of the Building Societies Act 1986 also includes provisions relating to mergers and the transfer of the business of a building society which are outside the scope of this memorandum. 386 Section 87 of the Building Societies Act 1986 contemplates dissolution by consent of its members, but this would have no impact on existing contractual obligations of the English Building Society and would therefore occur only on a solvent basis, after agreement between the English Building Society and the other party to terminate the relevant contract on an agreed basis or

189

As is the case with English Banks and English Investment Firms (see Annex 1 and Annex 2, respectively), the FCA and, if the society is a PRA-authorised person, the PRA have certain powers to initiate and to intervene in insolvency proceedings in relation to an English Building Society. Neither the existence nor the possibility of the exercise of any of these powers would have a material and adverse effect on our conclusions this memorandum as they would apply to an English Building Society.387

Paragraph 58 of Schedule 15 to the Building Societies Act 1986 provides that rules may be made under section 411 of the Insolvency Act 1986 for the purpose of giving effect, in relation to building societies, to the provisions of the parts of the Insolvency Act 1986 made applicable to building societies by Part X and Schedules 15 and 15A of the Building Societies Act 1986.

In other words, the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016, which apply to companies, do not apply to building societies. Instead, similar but appropriately adapted rules were to have been brought into effect in relation to building societies. Unfortunately, no such rules have ever been prepared or published.388 Therefore, there is no statutory equivalent for building societies of the company insolvency set-off provision in Rule 14.25 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016, which applies in the winding up of an English Company.

In relation to administration, an English Building Society would be subject, with appropriate modifications, to the administration regime that applied to companies prior to the coming into force of the changes to the administration regime made by the Enterprise Act 2002.389 That older regime does not provide for the administrator to make distributions to creditors and therefore there would, in any event, have been no statutory set-off provision comparable to Rule 14.24 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 in any insolvency rules applicable to an English Building Society, had they ever been adopted. The older regime did, however, provide for a statutory moratorium at sections 10 and 11 of the Insolvency Act 1986, which for present purposes was substantially the same as that which now applies pursuant to paragraphs 43 and 44 of Schedule B1.

We do not know why the insolvency rules for English Building Societies have not yet been introduced, but there is no reason to believe that the failure to introduce insolvency rules for English Building Societies arises because of a concern of principle regarding the application of insolvency set off in the event of the insolvency of an English Building Society. Accordingly, the disapplication of insolvency set-off to building societies since the Building Societies Act 1986 should, in our view, be considered merely a legislative lacuna arising due to a failure of administration, rather than as the result of a deliberate policy choice. The policy reasons in favour of insolvency set off in relation to English Building Societies are as strong as they are in relation to individuals or companies.390 The inclusion of statutory

following completion of one of the insolvency procedures mentioned in this Annex 3. Section 91 of the Building Societies Act 1986 gives the court the power to declare the dissolution of a building society void on an application by, among others, "any ... person appearing to the Court to be interested", which would certainly include a creditor of the building society. A building society that is in the course of dissolution by consent may be wound up by the court under section 86(2). In our view, therefore, the power of the members to dissolve a building society by consent has no material impact on the conclusions in this memorandum. 387 For example see the Building Societies Act 1986, ss 89 and 90D. 388 We are not aware of any official explanation for this state of affairs having ever been given, despite our having made enquiry of the relevant authorities on numerous occasions over the years following the coming into force of the Building Societies Act 1986. 389 The Enterprise Act 2002, s 249. 390 The FMLC published a paper in December 2007 entitled "Building Society and Friendly Society Set-off: Proposal for a Mandatory Insolvency Set-Off Rule applicable to Building Societies and Incorporated Friendly Societies", which deals with these issues in some detail. The paper may be accessed at

190

insolvency set-off provisions in the legislation for the Building Society Insolvency Procedure and the Building Society Special Administration Procedure under the Banking Act, as discussed in paragraph 2.2 of this Annex 3, strengthens this conclusion.

It should be noted that section 90D of the Building Societies Act 1986 requires that the PRA and the Bank of England are given seven days' notice of (i) an application for an administration order in respect of a building society, (ii) a petition for its winding up, (iii) a resolution for voluntary winding up and (iv) an appointment of an administrator, to enable them to consider whether to apply for a building society insolvency order or exercise a stabilisation power. The Banking Act SRR Code of Practice provides that when considering whether to use an SRR tool in respect of a failing building society, the authorities will have regard to the benefits of ensuring that if a building society is to enter liquidation proceedings, it is done under the Building Society Insolvency Procedure. In particular, they will take into account that the BSI Rules (as defined below) do include a statutory set-off provision.

An English Building Society was previously prohibited from granting a floating charge under section 9B of the Building Societies Act 1986. A limited exception was created under the Financial Assistance Order 2010 under the Banking Act.391 Section 9B has now been generally repealed and an English Building Society is permitted to grant floating charges.

However, administrative receivership is not available outside the scope of the Financial Assistance Order.392 Administrative receivership is available in respect of "relevant building societies" under the Financial Assistance Order393, which is a building society which receives financial assistance from a qualifying institution, has entered into an agreement with a qualifying institution under which it may receive financial assistance from that institution or has received an offer of such an agreement or of financial assistance from a qualifying institution. The term "qualifying institution" is defined to include only public sector lenders, namely, the Treasury, the Bank of England, another central bank of a member state of the European Economic Area and the European Central Bank.

Part VI of the Insolvency Act 1986 (Miscellaneous Provisions applying to companies which are insolvent or in liquidation) applies (with certain modifications) to building societies by virtue of section 90, section 90A, Schedule 15, Part I paragraph 1, and Schedule 15A, Part I paragraph 1, of the Building Societies Act 1986. Consequently, our analysis in the body of this memorandum in respect of sections 238, 239, 244 and 245 of the Insolvency Act 1986 remains unchanged where the Counterparty is an English Building Society.394

It is possible that a Building Society could be made subject to a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006 for the reasons given in Annex 9 in relation to Chartered Corporations. The same arguments as apply in relation to a Chartered Corporation would arguably also apply in relation to a Building Society.395

Mandatory-Insolvency-Set-Off-Rule-Applicable-to-Building-Societies-and-Incorporated-Friendly-Societies.pdf> accessed 12 November 2018. 391 SI 2010/1188. 392 The Building Societies Act 1986, sch 15A, para 27F. 393 Financial Assistance Order, arts 11(2) and 11(6E). 394 Section 423 of the Insolvency Act 1986, which relates to transactions at an undervalue which prejudice other creditors, is in Part XVI of the Insolvency Act 1986. However, notwithstanding the fact that it appears in the Insolvency Act 1986, section 423 may be invoked even where there are no insolvency proceedings and is the latest incarnation of a very old rule against fraudulent conveyances. It is available to any creditor of any person (not limited to companies) who has been defrauded by entry into a transaction at any undervalue by that person with a third person and may therefore be applicable to building societies in any event, particularly outside of an insolvency. 395 The key to the argument is the breadth of the word "company" in section 895(2)(b) of the Companies Act 2006, as discussed in Annex 9. It is clear that this is intended to be broader than an English Company. An English Building Society is a body corporate and the fact that it is a mutual would not exclude it from the scope of the word "company" in that context.

191

2.2 Banking Act

The conclusions in this memorandum are subject to the provisions of the Banking Act to the extent that they apply to English Building Societies. Section 84 of the Banking Act applies the SRR for banks set out in Part 1 of the Banking Act to English Building Societies, subject to various modifications. This is discussed in (a) below.

Section 130 of the Banking Act empowers the Treasury by order to apply Part 2 of the Banking Act (Bank Insolvency), with appropriate modifications, to English Building Societies. This is discussed in (b) below. Section 158 of the Banking Act provides a comparable power to the Treasury to apply Part 3 of the Banking Act (Bank Administration), with appropriate modifications, to English Building Societies. This is discussed in (c) below.

We note that section 232 of the Banking Act does not expressly carve out an English Building Society from the definition of institution that can qualify as an investment bank. Therefore, if an English Building Society met the relevant conditions relating to safeguarding or dealing in investments and also holding client assets, then it would technically be an investment bank. If that were the case, the additional procedures under the Investment Bank Special Administration Regulations 2011 discussed at Annex 1 in relation to an English Bank would potentially be applicable. However, we discuss the more likely position below – i.e. where the English Building Society is subject to the Banking Act regime that has been specifically designed for such entities (including taking account of the mutual status of an English Building Society). In addition, we are not aware of English Building Societies that would commonly engage in activities that would place them within the scope of the definition of an investment bank.

(a) Special resolution regime applicable to English Building Societies

The SRR applicable to an English Building Society by virtue of section 84 of the Banking Act is based on the SRR applicable to an English Bank described in Annex 1 (including the application of the Partial Property Safeguards Order – subject to the discussion below).396 There are a number of modifications to the SRR in respect of an English Building Society due to its mutual status.

In respect of the bail-in option, section 84A of the Banking Act provides that a resolution instrument with respect to an English Building Society may, inter alia:

(i) convert the building society into a company incorporated under the Companies Act 2006; or

(ii) transfer all the property, rights and liabilities of the building society to a company incorporated under the Companies Act 2006,397 and

cancel shares and membership rights of the building society and convert shares into deposits of the successor company. The effect of this is to demutualise the building society.

396 Section 84 provides that the SRR applies to building societies as it applies to banks subject to the modifications in sections 84 to 84D. 397 In respect of a conversion, the successor company may be wholly owned by a company as long as that parent company is wholly owned by the Bank of England; a resolution administrator or a person nominated by the Bank of England. Similarly, a transferee company must immediately before the transfer be wholly owned by the Bank of England; a resolution administrator; a person nominated by the Bank of England; or a company wholly owned by one of such specified entities. For the purposes of section 84A, "company" means a company as defined in section 1(1) of the Companies Act 2006 which is a public company limited by shares (s 84A(12)).

192

Upon such a resolution instrument being made, section 84D of the Banking Act provides that the bail-in option would apply in respect of such successor or its parent and, for this purpose, applies various provisions of the Banking Act as they would apply to a bank subject to various modifications. Note that it is expected that the successor company would be authorised as a bank.398 It is not entirely clear from section 84D how the other stabilisation options would be exercised in respect of the successor company but in any event it is clear property transfers are possible as section 41A (Transfer of property subsequent to resolution instrument) is expressly referred to in section 84D.399 Note that, unlike the position in relation the Bail-in Safeguards Order, as discussed below, it seems that the Partial Property Safeguards Order does not explicitly apply to the successor company as section 48 is not referenced in the table at section 84D.400 We consider that this must be a legislative oversight, or that the intention is that the successor company will be caught by the safeguards by virtue of being a bank or by virtue of the relevant provisions of the SRR applying to the successor company "as they apply in relation to a bank"401, as we see no reason not to extend such protection to a successor company. This memorandum is, however, qualified accordingly.

For the purposes of this memorandum, the bail-in option may be exercised in respect of a successor company in substantially the same manner as in respect of an English Bank, including subject to the relevant protections contained in the Bail-in Safeguards Order.402 The exercise of the bail-in option in respect of an English Bank is discussed in paragraph 2.3(b)(viii) of Annex 1 to this memorandum

The BRR Order 2016403 has inserted a new section 84ZA into the Banking Act, which relates to the exercise of the second stabilisation option (transfer to a bridge bank) in relation to a building society. The new section provides that a share transfer instrument under section 12(2)(a) may convert the building society into a company and make other provision for the purposes of, or in connection with, the conversion of the building society.404 Such provision includes that the resulting company be wholly owned by a bridge bank. Section 84D is also updated to provide that, where a share transfer instrument provides for a building society to be converted into a company under section 84ZA(2), the second stabilisation option is to be exercised by making (in that or a subsequent share transfer instrument) provision under section 12(2)(a) with respect to the successor company or, where such company upon creation is to be wholly owned by a bridge bank, the successor company or the bridge bank parent and, for these purposes, the provisions of the Banking Act specified in section 84D apply with the modifications stated. Again, it is not wholly apparent how other stabilisation options may be exercised in respect of the successor company but

398 See explanatory note to the Building Societies (Bail-in) Order 2014/3344. 399 Note section 84D(5A) provides that, following the exercise of the powers under sections 84A(5)(a) or 84A(5)(b), references to the bank in section 12ZA(1)(a) and any other provision so far as relating to property transfer instruments under section 12ZA include a reference to the successor company. 400 The Banking Act, s 84D(3). 401 ibid, s 84D(2). 402 See section 84D(3) of the Banking Act which provides that statutory instruments made under sections listed in the table apply to the successor company as they apply to a bank subject to the modifications specified in the table. Section 48P of the Banking Act is listed in the relevant table in section 84D. 403 Article 21. 404 Article 28 of the BRR Order 2016 states that where (a) a share transfer instrument makes provision under section 84ZA(2)(a) of the Banking Act for the conversion of a building society into a company ("the successor company"); (b) by virtue of that conversion the successor company acquires property or undertaking (within the meaning of section 1161(1) of the Companies Act 2006) which is subject to a charge; and (c) the charge is of a kind which would, if it had been created by the company after the acquisition of the property or undertaking, have been capable of being registered under section 859A (charges created by a company) of that Act, section 859C(2) and (3) of the Companies Act 2006 (charges existing on property or undertaking acquired) applies in relation to that charge regardless of the date of creation.

193

reference to section 44D (Bridge bank: supplemental property transfer powers) is made in the table at section 84D. As discussed in connection with the bail-in option above, the Partial Property Safeguards Order seemingly does not explicitly apply to a successor company within the meaning of section 84ZA(2).

Both sections 84ZA and 84A also provide for the transfer of liabilities from the successor company to its parent undertaking (in relation to section 84ZA, where this is a bridge bank) or the replacement of a liability of the building society or successor company with a liability or security of the parent undertaking. The scope of such provision is unclear and could, at least in theory, affect the rights of the parties to the ISDA Master Agreement and the relevant Credit Support Documents.

There are various other differences between the regime applicable to English Banks and that applicable to English Building Societies (for example the method of transferring to temporary public ownership is different), but these have no material effect on our conclusions in relation to the issues discussed in this memorandum.405

(b) Building Society Insolvency Procedure

The Treasury exercised its power under section 130 of the Banking Act by making the Building Societies (Insolvency and Special Administration) Order 2009 (as amended, the BSISA Order)406. The BSISA Order inserts section 90C into the Building Societies Act 1986 which applies Part 2 (Bank Insolvency) and Part 3 (Bank Administration) to building societies.

The procedure in Part 2 of the Banking Act as applied to an English Building Society, with appropriate modifications, is called "building society insolvency" (the Building Society Insolvency Procedure).

The detailed operation of the Building Society Insolvency Procedure is subject to the Building Society Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2010 (the BSI Rules),407 which are, for present purposes, comparable to the provisions of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 that apply to the winding up of an English Company. Rule 73 of the BSI Rules sets out an insolvency set-off provision that is, for present purposes, substantially the same as Rule 14.25 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016.408 The application of Rule 73 is modified by Rule 74 in respect of protected deposits. There are some differences between the two provisions, but these have no bearing on our conclusions in this memorandum.

As in the case of the Bank Insolvency Procedure, the Building Society Insolvency Procedure is based on the existing provisions for the liquidation of an English Company, as described in this memorandum, but adapted to further the purposes of

405 On Saturday, 28 March 2009 a Scottish building society, Dunfermline Building Society, went into the special resolution regime under Part 1 of the Banking Act. It was the first bank or building society to be made subject to the regime after the Banking Act came into effect on 21 February 2009. See Bank of England press release dated 30 March 2009 on Dunfermline Building Society accessed 12 November 2018. 406 SI 2009/805. 407 SI 2010/2581. 408 Note that Rule 73 is based on Rule 4.90 of the Insolvency Rules 1986. Reference is also made to Rule 4.86 of the 1986 Rules which applies for the purpose of contingent obligations. Note also that Rule 75 (which also applies for the purposes of Rule 73 in relation to any sums due to the building society which are payable in a currency other than sterling) applies Rule 4.91 of the Insolvency Rules 1986 for the purposes of debts in a foreign currency. We refer the reader to the discussion at Part I.6 of this memorandum.

194

the Banking Act and, in particular, eligible claimants having their accounts transferred to another financial institution or receiving payments under the FSCS.

The Building Society Insolvency Procedure is not mandatory. One of the other insolvency proceedings described in paragraph 2.1 of this Annex 3 could be applied to an English Building Society (although see the discussion of mandatory set-off above). It is likely, however, that the Building Society Insolvency Procedure would be used where the Authorities have applied the SRR to an English Building Society and where the Authorities have decided that putting the failed English Building Society straight into liquidation is the best or only viable course to take.

The Building Society Insolvency Procedure may be initiated by the Bank of England or the PRA making an application to the court for a building society insolvency order under section 95 of the Banking Act as modified by section 90C of the Building Societies Act 1986. The Bank of England can apply if (i) the PRA is satisfied that Condition 1 in section 7 is met and (ii) the Bank of England is also satisfied that certain conditions are met. The PRA can apply if (i) the Bank of England is satisfied that Condition 2 in section 7 is met and (ii) the PRA is also satisfied that certain conditions are met.

There are various technical differences between the winding up of an English Company under the Insolvency Act 1986 and the Building Society Insolvency Procedure, but these have no material effect on our conclusions in relation to the issues discussed in this memorandum.

(c) Building Society Special Administration Procedure

As noted above, the BSISA Order and section 90C of the Building Societies Act 1986 also apply Part 3 of the Banking Act to English Building Societies, with appropriate modifications, under the name "building society special administration" (the Building Society Special Administration Procedure).

The Building Society Special Administration Procedure is based on the existing provisions for the administration of an English Company, as described in this memorandum, but adapted to further the purposes of the Banking Act. In particular, it is intended to be used in relation to a failing English Building Society where there has been a partial transfer of business from the failing English Building Society to a commercial purchaser or resolution company.409 The building society special administrator appointed by the court would be empowered and required to ensure that the non-transferred part of the English Building Society (referred to as the "residual building society" in the BSISA Order), the residual entity, provides services or facilities required to enable a private sector purchaser or resolution company that has acquired the transferred business to operate effectively.

The detailed operation of the Building Society Special Administration Procedure is subject to the Building Society Special Administration (England and Wales) Rules 2010 (the BSSA Rules).410 Part 5 of the BSSA Rules applies specified provisions of the Insolvency Rules 1986, with some modifications, to the process of the Building

409 In relation to the Dunfermline Building Society (regarding which see note 405), both of these occurred. The private sector purchaser was Nationwide Building Society, to which were transferred retail and wholesale deposits, the employees, the head office and branch network and originated mortgages. Housing association loans and deposits were transferred to a bridge bank. The residual entity (which retained the commercial loan book, acquired mortgage portfolios and all subsidiaries of Dunfermline Building Society bar one) was placed into the Building Society Special Administration Procedure. 410 SI 2010/2580.

195

Society Special Administration Procedure, including the set-off provision in Rule 2.85.411 The modifications to Rule 2.85 for this purpose have no bearing on our conclusions in this memorandum.

The moratorium on enforcement under paragraph 43 and 44 of Schedule B1 to the Insolvency Act 1986 also applies to the Building Society Special Administration Procedure under section 145 of the Banking Act as it applies to English Banks under the Bank Administration Procedure.

The Building Society Special Administration Procedure would be initiated by the Bank of England making an application to the court for a building society special administration order under section 142 of the Banking Act, as modified by section 90C of the Building Societies Act 1986.

There are various technical differences between the administration of an English Company under the Insolvency Act 1986 and the Building Society Special Administration Procedure, but these have no material effect on our conclusions in relation to the issues discussed in this memorandum.

2.3 Winding Up Regulations

As noted in our answer to question 20, the Recast Insolvency Regulation does not apply to an English Building Society.

Instead, an English Building Society would be subject to the European cross-border insolvency law regime applicable to credit institutions under the Winding Up Directive, implemented in the United Kingdom by the Winding Up Regulations.

See paragraph 2.1 of Annex 1 and Appendix D of the ISDA Netting Opinion in respect of the treatment of New York law governed ISDA Master Agreements. See also paragraph 2.4 of Part 1 of Annex 1 hereto for additional discussion of the application of the various derogations in the Winding Up Regulations to the Credit Support Documents.

As noted in our answer to question 20, the Cross-Border Insolvency Regulations would also not apply to an English Building Society.

2.4 The FCA Regulations

The protections afforded to financial collateral arrangements by the FCA Regulations upon insolvency apply in the context of the forms of insolvency proceeding under the Building Societies Act 1986. Regulation 8(3) of the FCA Regulations disapplies the moratorium on enforcement of security imposed by sections 10(1)(b) and 11(3)(c) of the Insolvency Act 1986.

The FCA Regulations also apply in the context of the Building Society Insolvency Procedure and the Building Society Special Administration Procedure. Schedule 2, paragraphs 1, 2 and 3 of the BSISA Order have the effect of applying the provisions of the Banking Act 2009 (Parts 2 and 3 Consequential Amendments) Order 2009 to English Building Societies (see the discussion at paragraph 2.5 of Part 1 of Annex 1 above in this regard) with the necessary modifications such that, taken as a whole, (i) references in the FCA Regulations to winding up (or liquidation) or administration include references to the Building Society Insolvency

411 Note that the BSSA Rules have not been updated to refer to the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016. Again see the discussion at Part I.6 of this memorandum.

196

Procedure and the Building Society Special Administration Procedure, respectively, (ii) references to the provisions of the Insolvency Act 1986 include those provisions as applied and modified by section 90C of the Building Societies Act 1986 and the BSISA Order, and (iii) references to the provisions of the Insolvency Rules 1986 include those provisions as applied and modified by rules made under section 411(1A) of the Insolvency Act 1986, in relation to the Building Society Insolvency Procedure, and section 411(1B) of the Insolvency Act 1986, in relation to the Building Society Special Administration Procedure (section 411(3A) of the Insolvency Act 1986 states that references in that section to Part 2 or Part 3 of the Banking Act include references to those Parts as applied to building societies). In relation to (iii) and regulation 14 of the FCA Regulations, Rule 75 of the BSI Rules applies Rule 4.91 of the Insolvency Rules 1986 for the purposes of the mandatory set-off rule under the Building Society Insolvency Procedure and Rule 63 of the BSSA Rules applies Rule 2.86 for the purposes of the mandatory set-off rule under the Building Society Special Administration Procedure.

See paragraph 2.5 of Part 1 of Annex 1 hereto in relation to the interaction between the SRR and the FCA Regulations.

3. Security Documents

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 3 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 3, we are of the view that our analysis relating to the enforceability against a Security Collateral Provider:

(i) of the Non-IM Security Documents in Part III.3 of this memorandum;

(ii) of the IM Security Documents in Parts IV.3, IV.4 and IV.5 of this memorandum; and

(iii) of the Clearing System IM Documents in Parts V.3, V.4 and V.5 of this memorandum,

would apply in circumstances where the Security Collateral Provider is an English Building Society.

This is subject to section 104A of the Building Societies Act 1986, which provides that the Secretary of State may, by order made with the concurrence of the Treasury, provide that such of Part 25 of the Companies Act 2006 (that is, the Registration Provisions) as may be specified in the order shall apply in relation to English Building Societies, and charges created by English Building Societies, with such modifications as may be so specified. As of the date of this memorandum, however, no such order has been made. Therefore, the Registration Provisions do not apply in relation to an English Building Society.

4. Transfer Annexes

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 3 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 3, we are of the view that the analysis in Part VI.3 of this memorandum of issues relating to the enforceability of the Transfer Annexes would apply to an English Building Society.

We believe that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against an English Building Society in the event of its winding up, including under the Building Societies Act 1986, without reliance on a statutory insolvency set-off rule, for the reasons we give in Part III.3(3)(a) of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to an

197

English Company on the basis that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement do not involve contractual set-off (other than to the limited extent that it includes Unpaid Amounts owed by either party that became payable prior to the operation of Section 6(c)(ii) of the ISDA Master Agreement) but simply represent an accounting of rights and liabilities under a single agreement following the designation or deemed occurrence of an Early Termination Date (sometimes referred to as the "flawed asset" approach to close-out netting).

If, however, the court were to construe the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement as operating by way of contractual set-off rather than pursuant to the single agreement (or "flawed asset") approach described above, we also consider that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against an English Building Society. Our reasons for this view are principally those set out in Part III.3(3)(a) of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to an English Company, supplemented by our view that in respect of an insolvency of an English Building Society under the Building Societies Act 1986 an English court would find that insolvency set-off applies, despite the fact that there is no statutory insolvency set-off rule. We believe this would be the result because it is clear, in our view, that the lack of insolvency rules for English Building Societies in an insolvency under the Building Societies Act 1986 is a failure of administration rather than a deliberate policy choice, much less an expression of the will of Parliament.

The policy reasons in favour of insolvency set-off for English Building Societies are as strong as they are in relation to individuals or companies, and there is a common law basis for the insolvency set-off provision which pre-dates its first appearance in statutory form in 1705. An English court would therefore, in our view, either find that insolvency set-off applies as a matter of common law in relation to an English Building Society in a winding up under the Building Societies Act 1986 or, alternatively, would find that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement viewed as a form of contractual set-off do not offend against any mandatory rule of English insolvency law and are therefore enforceable in accordance with their terms.

In addition to the arguments above, if the Transfer Annex forms part of a financial collateral arrangement under the FCA Regulations, as discussed in Part II above, regulation 12 provides that a close-out netting provision shall, subject to paragraph (2), take effect in accordance with its terms notwithstanding that the collateral-provider or collateral-taker under the arrangement is subject to winding-up proceedings or reorganisation measures.

Since the Transfer Annexes rely for their effectiveness on the inclusion of the Credit Support Balance or Credit Support Balance (VM), as applicable, within the scope of the close-out netting provisions in Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement, we are of the view that an English court would find that the title transfer collateral arrangement constituted by the relevant Transfer Annex is enforceable against an English Building Society in the event of its winding up in England under the Building Societies Act 1986.

198

ANNEX 4

BANKING GROUP COMPANIES AND BANK HOLDING COMPANIES

In this Annex 4, we set out our views regarding the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents in the event that resolution action or insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of a banking group company.

In this Annex: (i) "Bank" has the meaning given in section 2 of the Banking Act; (ii) "Building Society" has the meaning given in section 119 of the Building Societies Act 1986; (iii) "Investment Firm" has the meaning given in section 258A of the Banking Act412; (iv) "EU Institution" means a credit institution or investment firm which is incorporated in or formed under the law of any part of an EEA state other than the United Kingdom; and (v) "Third Country Institution" has the meaning given to the term in Part 2 of Annex 1 of this memorandum.

The definition of banking group company in the Banking Act is complex. A Banking Group Company under this Annex 4 means an English Company which (i) is (or would, but for the exercise of a stabilisation power, be) in the same group as a Bank, Building Society, Investment Firm, EU Institution or Third Country Institution and (ii) is not excluded under the Banking Group Companies Order (as discussed in more detail below).413

Subject to the more detailed discussion below, a Banking Group Company may be subject to each type of insolvency proceeding that may be commenced in England in relation to an English Company as set out in Part III.1(4) of the ISDA Netting Opinion. A Banking Group Company may also be subject to the SRR in Part 1 of the Banking Act and the Bank Administration Procedure.

In this Annex 4, we also consider the power of the Treasury to take a Bank Holding Company into temporary public ownership. For this purpose a Bank Holding Company is an English Company that is the parent undertaking of a Bank, a Building Society or an Investment Firm.

Note that if an English Company is part of the group of a UK authorised person, the ring-fencing transfer scheme powers under Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 could also apply as discussed in more detail in Annex 1. "Group" and "authorised person" for this purpose are as defined in the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 - an English Bank would be a UK authorised person.

1. Conclusion

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 4, we are of the view that our conclusions in this memorandum in relation to an English Company would also apply to a Banking Group Company, including in the event of its becoming subject to: (a) one of the forms of insolvency proceeding under the Insolvency Act 1986 or a scheme of arrangement under the Companies Act 2006; (b) the Bank Administration Procedure; or (c) the SRR.

2. Analysis

The conclusion in paragraph 1 of this Annex 4 is subject to the discussion below.

412 Referred to as an English Banking Act Investment Firm in the context of Annex 2 in respect of English entities only. 413 Note this includes where the Bank, Investment Firm or Building Society is elsewhere in the United Kingdom, but not banking group companies incorporated elsewhere in the United Kingdom.

199

2.1 Definition of a Banking Group Company

As discussed above, under the Banking Act a "banking group company" means:

(a) an undertaking which is (or, but for the exercise of the stabilisation power, would be) in the same group as a Bank, a Building Society, an Investment Firm, a recognised central counterparty, EU Institution or Third Country Institution (each a Relevant Entity); and414

(b) that meets the conditions in the Banking Act 2009 (Banking Group Companies) Order 2014415 (the Banking Group Companies Order).

For these purposes undertakings are in the same "group" if they are "group undertakings" in respect of each other as defined in the Companies Act 2006.

The Banking Group Companies Order requires that the relevant undertaking is a parent or subsidiary of the Relevant Entity or a group subsidiary of the Relevant Entity (that is a subsidiary of the parent but not a direct subsidiary of the Relevant Entity itself). Certain entities are excluded by the Banking Group Companies Order including certain mixed activity holding companies (MAHC). Where the Relevant Entity is a subsidiary of a MAHC and of a "financial holding company" which is also a subsidiary of the MAHC, the MAHC is not a "parent" of the Relevant Entity and a group subsidiary which is a subsidiary of the MAHC is also excluded unless it is a financial institution or a subsidiary of a financial institution which is also a subsidiary of the MAHC.

For this purpose:

(a) a MAHC is a parent (i) whose subsidiaries include at least one credit institution, investment firm or central counterparty; (ii) which is not itself a credit institution, investment firm or central counterparty; and (iii) which together with its subsidiaries, constitutes a group which fails to meet certain conditions in the Supplementary Supervision Directive416 (or would fail to meet such conditions, if entities that are central counterparties or investments exchanges were deemed to be financial sector entities for that purpose); and

(b) a financial holding company is a parent (i) which is a financial institution; and (ii) whose subsidiaries are exclusively or mainly credit institutions, financial institutions, investment exchanges, investment firms or central counterparties.417

Also excluded from the definition of banking group companies are securitisation companies which are not investment firms or financial institutions.418

414 See the Banking Act, s 81D. Note we only consider Banking Group Companies that are English Companies and are part of a group including a Bank, Investment Firm, Building Society, EU Institution or Third Country Institution in this Annex. Note the Relevant Entity itself may be located elsewhere in the United Kingdom. Banking group companies under the Banking Act include undertakings in the same group as Building Societies and Investment Firms by virtue of sections 84 and 89A (respectively). The definition also includes undertakings in the same group as recognised central counterparties by virtue of section 89B. For these purposes "recognised central counterparty" has the meaning given by section 285 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 except for recognised clearing houses that are also banks, building societies, credit unions or investment firms (section 89G of the Banking Act). We do not consider recognised clearing houses in this memorandum and neither do we consider entities that would be banking group companies as a result of being part of a group including such an entity. 415 2014/1831. 416 Directive 2002/87/EC. 417 See the Banking Group Companies Order, art 2, for the full definitions. 418 Securitisation companies are defined by reference to taxation legislation except that certain warehouse companies that would otherwise be securitisation companies are excluded from being securitisation companies. Covered bond vehicles are also

200

2.2 Application of Part 1 of the Banking Act to a Banking Group Company

The Bank of England may:419

(a) transfer all or part of the business of a Banking Group Company to a private sector purchaser or a bridge bank if the conditions in section 81B of the Banking Act are satisfied;

(b) transfer all or part of the business of a Banking Group Company to an asset management vehicle if the conditions in section 81ZBA of the Banking Act are satisfied; and

(c) exercise the resolution instrument powers in accordance with section 12A(2) (Bail-in option) of the Banking Act in respect of the Banking Group Company if the conditions in section 81BA are satisfied.420

If the Relevant Entity is incorporated in the United Kingdom, the conditions for applying the SRR to the Banking Group Company include that (x) the PRA and the Bank of England (as appropriate) are satisfied that the general conditions in section 7 of the Banking Act are met in respect of the Relevant Entity and (y)(i) the Bank of England is satisfied the exercise of the power is necessary having regard to the public interest in the advancement of one or more of the special resolution objectives; or (ii) if the Treasury has provided financial assistance in respect of the Relevant Entity, the Treasury has recommended the exercise of such powers to protect the public interest and the Bank of England has determined such exercise is appropriate (other than in respect of bail-in as the conditions in (y)(i) will always apply to the exercise of the resolution instrument powers). If the Relevant Entity is an EU Institution or Third Country Institution, the relevant EEA or third country authority (as applicable) will need to be satisfied the equivalent tests in the relevant jurisdiction are met.

We assume that the relevant conditions are met if the SRR is applied to a Banking Group Company. In respect of a bail-in or a transfer of property to a private sector purchaser or a bridge bank (but not to an asset management vehicle in respect of which other additional conditions apply), the Bank of England must have regard to the need to minimise the effect of such measures on other group members.

Pursuant to sections 81C and 81CA of the Banking Act, the relevant stabilisation powers may be exercised in respect of the Banking Group Company that is part of a group including a Bank, EU Institution or Third Country Institution as if it were a Bank (subject to a number of modifications, in particular where the Banking Group Company is the "parent").

As noted above, the relevant sections of the Banking Act relating to Banking Group Companies also apply where the Relevant Entity is an Investment Firm or a Building Society (since Part 1 of the Banking Act is applied to those entities as it applies to Banks). Therefore, where the Relevant Entity is an Investment Firm or a Building Society, the reference to the Banking Group Company being subject to the SRR as if it were a Bank should be read instead as being subject to the SRR as if it were an Investment Firm or Building Society. The SRR is modified in respect of an Investment Firm or Building Society. Particularly in respect of the

excluded from being banking group companies but as these are limited liability partnerships these are not relevant for the purposes of this memorandum. 419 See paragraph 2.4 below in respect of the ability of the Treasury to take a Bank Holding Company into temporary public ownership in accordance with section 13(2) of the Banking Act. 420 Section 48B(2) of the Banking Act states that special bail-in provision also includes any "associated provision", which is defined (at section 48B(3)) as provision cancelling or modifying a contract under which a banking group company has a liability.

201

modifications for Building Societies, it is unclear how exactly these would be applied to a Banking Group Company given the difference in legal forms.

Where a resolution instrument has been made in respect of a Building Society in relation to the exercise of the bail-in option, section 84D(5) of the Banking Act also makes express provision in respect of banking group companies in respect of Building Societies. In this circumstance, references to Banking Group Companies in sections 81BA and 81CA in respect of group bail-in should be read as references to subsidiaries of the Building Society and section 81D does not apply. Section 84D(5) also provides that a resolution instrument may only be made in respect of the Banking Group Company where a resolution instrument has also been made in respect of the parent Building Society.

Since the Banking Group Company is to be subject to the SRR as if it were a Bank, Building Society or Investment Firm, the Partial Property Safeguards Order and the Bail-in Safeguards Order apply to the Banking Group Company. Note that partial property transfers are further restricted in respect of Banking Group Companies that are not financial institutions or parent undertakings of the Relevant Entity by article 9A of the Partial Property Safeguards Order. Article 9A provides that partial property transfers should only be made in such circumstances if it is necessary for carrying on the business or any part of the business, of the Relevant Entity or another Banking Group Company in the same group.

Subject to the discussion above, as the powers outlined in this paragraph 2.2 apply to a Banking Group Company as if it were a Bank, Building Society or Investment Firm (as applicable), the relevant analysis in respect of such English entities at Annex 1, Annex 2 and Annex 3 of this memorandum also applies to a Banking Group Company.421

2.3 The Bank Administration Procedure

Pursuant to sections 81C and 81CA of the Banking Act, the Bank Administration Procedure may be applied to a Banking Group Company that is part of a group including a Bank, EU Institution or Third Country Institution as if it were a Bank (subject to a number of modifications). As noted above, the relevant sections of the Banking Act relating to Banking Group Companies also apply where the Relevant Entity is an Investment Firm or a Building Society (since Part 1 of the Banking Act is applied to those entities as it applies to Banks).

Therefore, where the Relevant Entity is an Investment Firm or a Building Society, the reference to the Banking Group Company being subject to the Bank Administration Procedure as if it were a Bank should be read instead as being subject to Bank Administration Procedure as if it were an Investment Firm or Building Society. The Bank Administration Procedure is modified (and renamed) in respect of Building Societies as discussed in Annex 3 due to the mutual nature of a Building Society – therefore it is unclear how exactly it would be applied to a Banking Group Company given the difference in legal forms.

Subject to the discussion above, as the Bank Administration Procedure (or Building Society Special Administration Procedure) applies to a Banking Group Company as if it were a Bank, an Investment Firm or Building Society (as applicable), the relevant analysis in respect of such English entities at Annex 1, Annex 2 and Annex 3 of this memorandum also applies to a Banking Group Company.422

421 We assume, given that the Banking Group Company we refer to in this Annex is an English Company and its COMI is in England (see assumption 3(k) in Part I), that it would be the Banking Act regime as applicable in England that would be relevant even where the Relevant Entity was located elsewhere in the UK. We do not consider the Banking Act as it applies elsewhere in the UK. 422 See note 421 above in respect of the intra-UK jurisdictional issue.

202

2.4 Bank Holding Companies

Pursuant to section 82 of the Banking Act, a Bank Holding Company may, in certain circumstances, be taken into temporary public ownership. The Banking Act SRR Code of Practice provides that this should be used as a last resort after having assessed and exploited other resolution tools to the greatest extent possible whilst maintaining financial stability.

Once the Bank Holding Company has been taken into temporary public ownership, section 83 provides for various powers under the Banking Act to apply including section 45 (Temporary public ownership: property transfer) and sections 65 to 68 (in respect of the continuity obligations). These would apply to the Bank Holding Company broadly as they would apply to a Bank, an Investment Firm or Building Society (as applicable) including the application of the Partial Property Safeguards Order.

As the powers outlined in this paragraph 2.4 apply substantially to a Bank Holding Company as if it were a Bank, an Investment Firm or Building Society (as applicable), our analysis in respect of each such English entities in Annex 1, Annex 2 and Annex 3 of this memorandum also applies to a Bank Holding Company.423

2.5 The Winding Up Regulations

A group company within the scope of regulation 44 of the Winding Up Regulations is subject to the Winding Up Regulations if (i) a stabilisation instrument has been made in respect of the UK group company or (ii) a resolution tool or resolution power (provided for in the BRRD) has been exercised in respect of the EEA group company (as applicable). It is therefore not possible for the UK to wind up or resolve an EEA group company with its head office in an EEA state other than the UK where one or more of the resolution tools or resolution powers have been applied.

In respect of any Banking Group Company or Bank Holding Company within the scope of regulation 44 of the Winding Up Regulations, we assume the head office is in England and it is not otherwise subject to the Regulations and therefore it would be a "UK group company".

Furthermore, see paragraph 2.1 of Annex 1 and Appendix D of the ISDA Netting Opinion in respect of the treatment of New York law governed ISDA Master Agreements. See also paragraph 2.4 of Part 1 of Annex 1 hereto for additional discussion of the application of the various derogations in the Winding Up Regulations to the Credit Support Documents.

2.6 The FCA Regulations

See paragraph 2.5 of Part 1 of Annex 1 hereto in relation to the application of the FCA Regulations in the context of the Bank Administration Procedure and the interaction between the SRR and the FCA Regulations.

3. Security Documents

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 4 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 4, we are of the view that our analysis relating to the enforceability against a Security Collateral Provider:

(i) of the Non-IM Security Documents in Part III.3 of this memorandum;

423 See note 421 above in respect of the intra-UK jurisdictional issue.

203

(ii) of the IM Security Documents in Parts IV.3, IV.4 and IV.5 of this memorandum; and

(iii) of the Clearing System IM Documents in Parts V.3, V.4 and V.5 of this memorandum,

would apply in circumstances where the Security Collateral Provider is a Banking Group Company or Bank Holding Company.

4. Transfer Annexes

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 4 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 4, we are of the view that the analysis in Part VI.3 of this memorandum of issues relating to the enforceability of the Transfer Annexes would apply to a Banking Group Company or Banking Holding Company.

204

ANNEX 5

TRUSTEE OF AN ENGLISH TRUST

In this Annex 5, we set out our views on the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against the Trustee of an English Trust in the event that insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of the Trustee or the English Trust is wound up.

In this Annex 5, as noted in Part I.2 of this memorandum, we only consider an English Trust that is not an English Charitable Trust, an Authorised Unit Trust or an English Pension Fund or any other form of trust subject to a special regulatory regime. In Annex 12 we consider how the principles below apply in the case of the Trustee of an English Charitable Trust. In Annex 14 we consider how the principles below apply in the case of the Trustee of an English Pension Fund. In Annex 16 we consider how the principles below apply in the case of the Trustee of an Authorised Unit Trust. As noted in Part I.2 of this memorandum, any other form of English Trust that is subject to a special regulatory regime that may affect the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents is beyond the scope of this memorandum.

Subject to the more detailed discussion below, the types of insolvency proceeding that may be commenced in England in respect of the Trustee are the same as those that would apply in respect of an English Company, as described in Part III.1(4) of the ISDA Netting Opinion, since we have assumed in Part I.2 of this memorandum that the Trustee is an English Company.

If the English Trust itself (rather than the Trustee) were to become insolvent, the English Trust would not be wound up under English insolvency legislation as it is not a legal person. Instead, the following possibilities exist:

(I) the Trustees could wind up the English Trust in various circumstances, provided that the trust deed confers this power on the Trustees and the relevant circumstances have occurred; and

(II) the court could make an administration order424 in relation to the English Trust under Rule 64.2 of the Civil Procedure Rules 1998.

Under Rule 64.2 of the Civil Procedure Rules 1998, the execution of the English Trust would be carried out under the direction of the court. The court would only make an administration order if it considered that the issues between the parties could not properly be resolved in any other way.

Due to the fact that the English Trust is not a legal person, we also assume for the purpose of this Annex 5 that the Trustee entered into the ISDA Master Agreement, any Credit Support Document, and each Transaction prior to (i) the insolvency of the English Trust or (ii) the making of an administration order in respect of the English Trust under Rule 64.2 of the Civil Procedure Rules 1998. We also make the equivalent assumptions set out at Part I.3(e), (g) and (h) in respect of the underlying English Trust.

We consider below the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents in the following three cases:

(I) where there is more than one Trustee and insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of at least one Trustee but one or more solvent Trustees remain that are parties to the ISDA Master Agreement and relevant Credit Support Document (a Partial Trustee Insolvency);

424 Referred to as an "administration order" under this Rule, but not to be confused with an administration order under Part II of the Insolvency Act 1986.

205

(II) where there is a single Trustee and insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of it or there is more than one Trustee and insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of each Trustee (a Full Trustee Insolvency); and

(III) where the English Trust is insolvent, in the sense that the assets held on trust are insufficient to meet the liabilities incurred by the Trustees on behalf of the English Trust (a Trust Insolvency).

Partial Trustee Insolvency

A Partial Trustee Insolvency would normally fall within the Section 5(a)(vii) (Bankruptcy) Event of Default in the ISDA Master Agreement. A party to an ISDA Master Agreement with an insolvent Trustee may not, however, wish to exercise its right to designate an Early Termination Date in relation to the Trustee for the following reasons:

(a) on a Partial Trustee Insolvency, on the assumption that all the Trustees would be jointly and severally liable for the obligations under the Credit Support Document, a party would be entitled to proceed against any of the remaining Trustees who would have recourse to the assets of the English Trust to meet that liability (regarding which, see Appendix D); and

(b) a Partial Trustee Insolvency would not affect the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against each remaining solvent Trustee which is party to the ISDA Master Agreement and Credit Support Document or interfere with the direct recourse of any such Trustee to the assets of the English Trust to satisfy its obligations under the Credit Support Document, subject to the discussion in Appendix D.

Full Trustee Insolvency

A Full Trustee Insolvency (like a Partial Trustee Insolvency) would normally fall within the Section 5(a)(vii) (Bankruptcy) Event of Default in the ISDA Master Agreement.

We believe that it is unlikely that an English Trust would be left without any solvent Trustees. In other words, under normal circumstances it is unlikely that a Full Trustee Insolvency would occur and persist for a significant period of time.425

Where there is more than one Trustee, it is unlikely that all of the Trustees would be simultaneously insolvent. Where there is a sole Trustee which becomes insolvent, the trust deed would normally provide that a person identified in the trust deed may select a new Trustee, and the court has a statutory power to appoint a new Trustee subject to certain conditions specified by statute.426 Following such substitution, a party, by subrogation to the original Trustee's right of indemnity, would (until the dissolution of the previous Trustee) be entitled to enforce its subrogated right of indemnity against the trust assets directly, regardless of the fact that the newly-appointed Trustee would not be liable for the previous Trustee's liabilities. As such right would arise by subrogation to the right of the original Trustee, it would be limited to the extent of the original Trustee's right of indemnity, which may have been lost or limited by breach of trust by that Trustee, as discussed in Appendix D. Note, however, that ultimately the insolvent Trustee will be dissolved and at that point the creditor may not be able to rely on the right of subrogation as the Trustee no longer exists.

425 Although this risk is increased if there is a single Trustee. 426 The Trustee Act 1925, s 41, which expressly envisages that a court could use the power in order to appoint a new trustee in substitution for a corporate trustee which, among other things, is in liquidation or has been dissolved.

206

A party may agree with the new Trustee and the previous Trustee a novation of the previous Trustee's rights and obligations under the ISDA Master Agreement and the Credit Support Documents to the new Trustee. In this case, a party will be dealing with the new Trustee (and relying on the new Trustee's recourse to the trust assets) rather than seeking to enforce its subrogated right of indemnity by virtue of the previous Trustee's right of indemnity.

On the assumption that the English Trust is solvent, an insolvent Trustee (and a third party by subrogation) will still be able to enforce its claim against the trust assets, provided the Trustee has not lost its right of recourse in one of the ways described in Appendix D. In any event, as mentioned above, we believe that a Full Trustee Insolvency would normally be unlikely to occur and endure for a significant period of time as a matter of practice.

Trust Insolvency

As noted above, as an English Trust is not a legal person, it is not subject to the insolvency legislation of the type that applies to legal persons.427 An English Trust may, however, be wound up, if the trust deed so provides and any relevant conditions or requirements of the trust deed are satisfied. It is also possible for the court to make an administration order in relation to the English Trust under Rule 64.2 of the Civil Procedure Rules 1998, under which the administration of the English Trust will be carried out by court.

Usually an English Trust, particularly if it is solvent, will be wound up by its Trustees, rather than by the court, in accordance with the terms of the trust deed. This may be on a solvent or an insolvent basis. This type of winding up is not under the supervision of the court.

There are no mandatory set-off rules that apply if an English Trust is wound up (i) in accordance with its trust deed or (ii) under an administration order made under Rule 64.2 of the Civil Procedure Rules 1998. In the latter case it is possible that the court would apply the same mandatory insolvency set-off rules that would have applied if the English Trust were a legal person (that is, a natural person subject to section 323 of the Insolvency Act 1986 or an English Company subject to Rule 14.24 or Rule 14.25 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016).

As in the case of a Full Trustee Insolvency, as discussed below, the technical issue may be raised that there is insufficient mutuality between the creditor and the English Trust (viewed, in effect, as a "quasi-person" for purposes of the winding up) for a right of insolvency set-off to apply in these circumstances. However, we believe that an English court would find that there was mutuality for this purpose (whether by way of equitable or insolvency set-off) for the reasons set out below.

If the court did make an order under Rule 64.2, it has broad discretion, as there is no provision in the Civil Procedure Rules 1998 directing how the court should direct the execution of the English Trust. However, the Trust Law Committee in the 1997 Consultation Paper suggests that the court would divide the assets of the insolvent trust in the following priority: (i) secured creditors; (ii) costs of realisation of assets; (iii) preferential creditors428; and (iv) floating charges in the order of creation.429 After that it is uncertain what the court would

427 See, for example, Gilbert Deya Ministries v Kashmir Broadcasting Corporation Ltd [2010] EWHC 3015 (Ch), where the court held that a charitable trust is not an unregistered company for purposes of Part V of the Insolvency Act 1986, which provides for the winding up of unregistered companies. The same would be true of any trust, whether or not established for charitable purposes. 428 Note that in Lynton Tucker, Nicholas Le Poidevin QC, James Brightwell, Thomas Fletcher and Christopher Lloyd, Lewin on Trusts, (19th edn, Sweet & Maxwell 2015), it is argued that the provisions in insolvency legislation conferring preferential status on certain debts have no application to the distribution of proceeds of a right of indemnity. 429 We note that in the 1999 report, the Trust Law Committee states that it seems likely that the priority order that the court would lay down would be (1) creditors with fixed charges, (2) creditors with floating charges, (3) preferential creditors, (4) general

207

direct, though it is clear that a creditor with an indirect claim on the trust assets by way of subrogation to a Trustee's right of reimbursement would be limited to the sum that such Trustee could claim. In relation to priority of general creditors, Lewin on Trusts430 raises two primary possibilities: (i) ranking pari passu; and (ii) ranking in order of time so that the liability that arose first would be met first.431 Whilst there is no authority in England, it has been emphasised in several decisions in New Zealand that whether a distribution pari passu is appropriate is to be assessed case by case, the ultimate objective being to do justice between the parties.432

In relation to an English Trust, it is possible for the trust deed to contain a provision stating that a certain event will trigger the winding up of the English Trust or providing that one or more persons (for example, the person who created the English Trust, usually referred to as the "grantor" or "settlor" of the English Trust) have the right to trigger a winding up of the English Trust under the trust deed. In either case or under any other provision of the trust deed requiring or permitting the winding up of the Trust, it would normally be the Trustees who carry out the winding up.

If an English Trust were wound up, the assets of the English Trust would be applied to satisfy the liabilities validly incurred by the Trustees on behalf of the English Trust. If there were insufficient assets to cover the entirety of those liabilities, we believe that the assets would be applied in the priority order suggested by the Trust Law Committee in the 1997 Consultation Paper as discussed above.

Provided the Trustee's right of recourse to the trust assets is not impaired as discussed in Appendix D, then it will have a right of recourse to the trust assets secured by its lien that will enable the Trustee to use the assets of the English Trust to pay creditors in priority to the beneficiaries. In other words, the rights of the beneficiaries of an English Trust are subordinate to the Trustee's right of recourse.

The foregoing events relating to a Trust Insolvency would not fall within the Section 5(a)(vii) (Bankruptcy) Event of Default in the ISDA Master Agreement. Accordingly, we recommend that an additional Event of Default be added to the Schedule to the ISDA Master Agreement providing that the occurrence of any of the foregoing events in relation to the English Trust will constitute an Event of Default in relation to the Trustee(s).

1. Security Documents

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 5 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 5, we are of the view that our analysis relating to the enforceability against a Security Collateral Provider:

(i) of the Non-IM Security Documents in Part III.3 of this memorandum;

(ii) of the IM Security Documents in Parts IV.3, IV.4 and IV.5 of this memorandum; and

creditors. No explanation is given for the change of the position of preferential creditors and creditors with floating charges between the 1997 Consultation Paper and the 1999 Report. Given that the position in the 1997 Consultation Paper reflects the priority position on the winding up of a company, and that there is no explanation for the change, we believe the true view of the Trust Law Committee is that set out in the 1997 Consultation Paper. 430 Lynton Tucker, Nicholas Le Poidevin QC, James Brightwell, Thomas Fletcher and Christopher Lloyd, Lewin on Trusts, (19th edn, Sweet & Maxwell 2015). 431 A third possibility known as the "North American method" or the "rolling charge" method is also raised but criticised for producing arbitrary results and is time consuming and expensive to implement. 432 See further Lynton Tucker, Nicholas Le Poidevin QC, James Brightwell, Thomas Fletcher and Christopher Lloyd, Lewin on Trusts, (19th edn, Sweet & Maxwell 2015), paras 22-045 to 22-048.

208

(iii) of the Clearing System IM Documents in Parts V.3, V.4 and V.5 of this memorandum,

would apply in circumstances where the Security Collateral Provider is a Trustee of an English Trust (see the discussion of the Transfer Annexes below in relation to the avoidance of transactions in a Trust Insolvency).433

The above conclusions are qualified by the fact that there are circumstances in which a delivery of Eligible Collateral by the Trustee would not take effect solely in accordance with its terms as expressed by the Security Documents. In circumstances where the Trustee, acting outside its powers, transfers Eligible Collateral, such Trustee will be liable to the beneficiaries of the trust for loss caused by such breach of trust. Under general equitable principles, this liability will not affect the party contracting with the Trustee provided that such party (a) gave value for the property or obligations, (b) acted in good faith in acquiring the legal title to such property or obligations, and (c) did not have notice (including constructive notice)434 that the Trustee was acting inconsistently with the terms of the trust. If such party fails to fulfil any of these three conditions, it may be held to be a constructive Trustee of the Eligible Collateral for the beneficiaries of the trust. If the party contracting with the Trustee had notice of the breach of trust, it may also incur personal liability as a knowing recipient of the trust property and, if such party acts dishonestly, it may also incur liability for "knowing assistance".

On the assumption that the Trustee is authorised by the rules of the Trust to enter into the ISDA Master Agreement and to provide collateral by way of security, the Trustee would be acting within the terms of the trust by transferring or receiving Eligible Collateral under the Security Documents. We are not aware of any general restriction preventing a Trustee of an English Trust validly transferring or receiving Eligible Collateral under the Security Documents, provided that the trust deed permits the Trustee to hold the particular type of Eligible Collateral transferred.

2. Transfer Annexes

We now consider the extent to which the analysis of the Transfer Annexes in Part VI of this memorandum applies in relation to the enforceability of the Transfer Annexes against the Trustee of an English Trust. Our conclusions are as follows:

(i) Title transfer

Would the laws of England characterise each transfer of Eligible Credit Support as effecting an unconditional transfer of ownership in the assets transferred? Is there any risk that any such transfer would be recharacterised as creating a security interest? If so, is there any way to minimise such risk? What would be the consequences of such a recharacterisation?

433 Note that difficult questions may arise in respect of floating charges in the context of an English Trust where there is a change of Trustee. David Hayton, Paul Matthews and Charles Mitchell, Underhill and Hayton Law of Trusts and Trustees (19th edn, LexisNexis 2016), at paras 81.54-81.56, present the view that, because the basis of a floating charge is contract law and the burden of a contract cannot be imposed on a successor Trustee without a novation, a charge of future property created by the original Trustee will not operate upon property acquired after the appointment of the successor. 434 The precise test for constructive notice in the commercial context is subject to some debate. The party contracting with the Trustee may be considered to have knowingly assisted the Trustee in breach of the trust where it has (i) knowledge that the transaction involved a misapplication of trust property (of which dishonesty is an essential element, objectively assessed against the standard of an honest person, with regard to the contracting party's experience); (ii) deliberately disregarded or failed to make inquiries into a transaction which it suspected was in breach of such trust; or (iii) the party's state of knowledge is such as to make it unconscionable for him to retain the benefit of the receipt. See Jamie Glister and James Lee, Hanbury and Martin: Modern Equity (21st edn Sweet & Maxwell, 2018), paras 25-10 to 25-23.

209

The opinion contained in this memorandum regarding recharacterisation risk applies equally to a Transfer Annex entered into with a Trustee.

However, there are circumstances in which a transfer of Eligible Credit Support by a Trustee would not effect an unconditional transfer of ownership in the assets transferred. In circumstances where a Trustee, acting outside its powers, transfers Eligible Credit Support, such Trustee will be liable to the beneficiaries of the trust for loss caused by such breach of trust. Under general equitable principles, this liability will not affect the party contracting with a Trustee provided that such party (a) gave value for the property or obligations, (b) acted in good faith in acquiring the legal title to such property or obligations, and (c) did not have notice (including constructive notice)435 that the Trustee was acting inconsistently with the terms of the trust. If such party fails to fulfil any of these three conditions, it may be held to be a constructive Trustee of the Eligible Credit Support for the beneficiaries of the trust; in other words, the purported transfer by the Trustee would not be effective to transfer beneficial ownership of the Eligible Credit Support to such party. If the party contracting with a Trustee had notice of the breach of trust, it may also incur personal liability as a knowing recipient of the trust property and, if such party acts dishonestly, it may also incur liability for "knowing assistance".

On the assumption that the Trustee is authorised by the rules of the Trust to enter into the ISDA Master Agreement and to provide collateral by way of title transfer, the Trustee would be acting within the terms of the trust by transferring or receiving Eligible Credit Support under the Transfer Annexes. We are not aware of any general restriction preventing a Trustee of an English Trust validly transferring or receiving Eligible Credit Support under the Transfer Annexes, provided that the trust deed permits the Trustee to hold the particular type of Eligible Credit Support transferred.

We are of the opinion that the analysis in Part VI.3 of this memorandum in response to Questions 23, 24 and 29 relating to unconditional transfer of title and filing or perfection requirements would remain unchanged where the counterparty is the Trustee of an English Trust.

A separate issue that must be considered in the case of the Trustee is whether the Trustee will have a right of recourse to the trust in order to meet its obligation (if any) to transfer Equivalent Credit Support under the Transfer Annexes where it is acting as Transferee. As discussed above, if a Trustee acts outside the terms of the trust, it will not have recourse to the Trust to meet obligations incurred. Where a contracting party transfers Eligible Credit Support to a Trustee and the Trustee acted outside its powers when entering into the Transfer Annex, if the contracting party is subsequently entitled to the return of Equivalent Credit Support, it may have only a personal contractual claim against the Trustee for the return of Equivalent Credit Support. In this situation, such party may be able to rely on a restitutionary claim against the trust assets as discussed in Appendix D.

(ii) Validity of Paragraph 6 of the Transfer Annexes

Assuming that Section 6 of the ISDA Master Agreement is valid and enforceable in England insofar as it relates to the determination of the net amount payable by either party on the termination of the Transactions, please confirm that Paragraph 6 of each Transfer Annex would also be valid to the extent it provides for the Value of the

435 See note 434 above.

210

Credit Support Balance to be included in the calculation of the net amount payable under Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement.

On the assumption that Section 6 of the ISDA Master Agreement is valid and assuming that the Transferee receives an absolute ownership interest in the Collateral, Paragraph 6 of the Transfer Annexes would also be valid to the extent it provides for the Value of the Credit Support Balance (or Credit Support Balance (VM) in the case of the VM Transfer Annex) to be included in the calculation of the net amount payable under Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement.

(iii) Single Trustee Insolvency, Full Trustee Insolvency or Trust Insolvency

Would the rights of the Transferee be enforceable in accordance with the terms of the ISDA Master Agreement and each Transfer Annex, irrespective of the occurrence of a Partial Trustee Insolvency, Full Trustee Insolvency or a Trust Insolvency?

In relation to the issues discussed in Part VI of this memorandum in response to question 26, assuming that the Transferee receives an absolute ownership interest in the Collateral, the Transfer Annexes would be enforceable against the Trustee irrespective of the occurrence of a Trust Insolvency, Partial Trustee Insolvency or Full Trustee Insolvency, subject in addition to the issues regarding mutuality discussed below.

If a Full Trustee Insolvency were to occur, we believe that the ISDA Master Agreement and all Transactions (including that represented by the relevant Transfer Annex) entered into between a party and the Trustee would be considered as a single agreement between the party and the Trustee. For the reasons given in Part III.3(3)(a) of the ISDA Netting Opinion, we believe that an English court would construe the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement (together with Paragraph 6 of the Transfer Annex) as not involving contractual set-off (other than to the limited extent that it includes Unpaid Amounts owed by either party that became payable prior to the operation of Section 6(c)(ii) of the ISDA Master Agreement, as discussed in the ISDA Netting Opinion) but simply as representing an accounting of rights and liabilities under a single agreement following the designation or deemed occurrence of an Early Termination Date in the event of a Full Trustee Insolvency. As noted in the ISDA Netting Opinion, this is sometimes referred to as the "flawed asset" approach to contractual netting.

If, however, the court were to construe the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement as operating by way of contractual set-off rather than pursuant to the single agreement (or "flawed asset") approach discussed above, we also consider that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against the Trustee in a Full Trustee Insolvency under English law. Our reasons for this view are principally those set out in Part III.3(3)(a) of the ISDA Netting Opinion. In relation to netting against the Trustee, however, there is an additional issue that must be considered.

Insolvency set-off under Rule 14.24 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016, in the event of administration proceedings, or Rule 14.25 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016, in the event of winding up proceedings, is limited to mutual obligations. This gives rise to a technical issue when a Trustee enters into any contract on behalf of an English Trust, even if the Trustee is acting within its powers when entering into the contract, as there is an argument that there are no mutual obligations between the Trustee and its contracting party under the contract.

211

The argument runs as follows: the Trustee is not beneficially entitled to any obligations owed by the other party as the benefit of such obligations are owned by the beneficiaries of the English Trust. However, the contractual obligations are owed by the Trustee (because it is a party to the contract) and the Trustee is therefore liable in its personal capacity even though the contract is for the benefit of the English Trust.

It was acknowledged by the Trust Law Committee in the 1997 Consultation Paper that, if it is correct that the foregoing constitutes a lack of mutuality barring insolvency set-off, then this position is most unsatisfactory for the Trustee and its contracting party. We do not believe, however, that this position is correct for the reasons given below.

In relation to an ISDA Master Agreement, the purported lack of mutuality will not be an issue prior to an administration or liquidation of the Trustee as the ISDA Master Agreement between the Trustee and the other party will take effect according to its terms, given our assumptions as to legal capacity and due authorisation of each of the parties. However, this issue could arise in the event of the administration or liquidation of the Trustee.

Arguments in favour of mutuality

Given the strong policy in favour of insolvency set-off in English law, we think that in a Full Trustee Insolvency the obligations owed by the Trustee to the other party under an ISDA Master Agreement and the obligations owed by the other party to the Trustee for the benefit of the English Trust would be treated as mutual notwithstanding the technical argument that the respective obligations are not mutual because the Trustee is personally liable for the obligations it owes but not beneficially entitled to the obligations it is owed, which it holds for the benefit of the English Trust.

Notwithstanding the technical argument, provided the Trustee has incurred its obligations solely for the purposes of the English Trust and, subject to the issues discussed in Appendix D, it is entitled to indemnification out of the assets of the English Trust. Any obligations of the other party are owed to the Trustee, but solely for the benefit of the English Trust. Substantively, therefore, there is mutuality at the level of the English Trust. All amounts owed by and to the Trustee for purposes of the English Trust should therefore, in our view, be considered mutual and therefore permit such obligations to be set-off.

The Trust Law Committee, in the 1997 Consultation Paper and the 1999 Report, suggested that, on a Trust Insolvency where an application to court was made under Rule 64.2 of the Civil Procedure Rules, the court might treat the English Trust as a "quasi-person" involved in bilateral mutual dealings with a contracting party and would apply similar insolvency set-off rules to those that would apply if the trust fund were an individual or a company. This would be particularly relevant where, as would typically be the case, the Trustee has limited its liability under the ISDA Master Agreement to the value of the trust assets and the other party's remedies are therefore limited to its indirect right of recourse (by subrogation to the Trustee's right of recourse) to the trust assets (in other words to the insolvent trust fund).

Furthermore, if the Trustee becomes insolvent, provided that the Trustee has not lost its right of indemnity in one of the ways described in Appendix D, the Trustee will still have recourse to the trust fund in relation to any obligations owed by it under the

212

ISDA Master Agreement, secured by its Trustee's lien, and so will have a beneficial interest in the English Trust to the extent of this right of recourse. There is an argument that this would give the Trustee a beneficial interest in the trust fund (including the benefit of the obligations owed by the other party) such that the Trustee could be described as being beneficially entitled to the other party's obligations, thereby establishing mutuality (although we note that the Trust Law Committee, in the 1997 Consultation Paper, was not convinced that this argument would be successful).

The other party may also have a direct right of recourse to the trust assets (subject to the qualifications referred to above and in Appendix D), particularly if the ISDA Master Agreement provides that the other party's right of recourse is to the trust assets rather than to the Trustee in its personal capacity. Such a right of recourse may mean that the English court would allow set-off between the other party and the trust fund on this basis.

The foregoing are essential technical arguments to rebut technical objections based on a characterisation of mutuality for set-off purposes as requiring personal liability and beneficial entitlement to be united in the same person acting in the same capacity in relation to each liability and entitlement. However, the policy which underlies the principle of mutuality in relation to set-off is that one person's assets should not be used to satisfy another person's creditors.

Accordingly, adopting a narrow formulation of the mutuality requirement in terms of personal liability and beneficial entitlement is, in our view, not appropriate to claims where a Trustee is attempting to set off claims owed to the Trustee for the benefit of the English Trust against claims owed by the Trustee that were incurred on behalf of the same trust. In other words, this analysis of mutuality does not take into account the special nature of an English Trust under English law. While the purpose of the English Trust is, among other things, to permit a separation of legal ownership and beneficial ownership, many rules of trust law are based upon an identification of the interests of a Trustee with those of the beneficiaries for a variety of purposes. In the case of set-off, permitting an obligation owed to the Trustee (which is a trust asset) to be discharged by set-off of a liability of the Trustee incurred legitimately for the benefit of the English Trust manifestly does not offend against the policy of not permitting one person's asset (the trust asset) being used to discharge another person's liability (the Trustee's liability on behalf of the English Trust). This is because the Trustee's liability is only "personal" in the sense that, as a technical matter, a creditor may not proceed against the beneficiaries directly (other than in exceptional circumstances not relevant to the facts you have asked us to assume).436 But it is a special type of liability which, as a matter of trust law, carries with it a special right, namely, the right of recourse to the assets of the English Trust in priority to the rights of the beneficiaries.

On the other hand, an English court would clearly not permit an obligation owed to a Trustee for the benefit of the trust fund to be set-off against a purely personal liability of the Trustee (that is, one incurred solely for its own benefit). Clearly this latter case would offend against the policy mentioned above. Therefore, we believe that an English court is highly likely to view obligations owed to a Trustee for the benefit of an English Trust as mutual with obligations owed by the Trustee that were legitimately incurred for the benefit of the English Trust and therefore to permit such

436 See, for example, Hardoon v Belilios [1901] AC 118 (PC).

213

obligations to be set-off, whether in the case of a Full Trustee Insolvency or a Trust Insolvency.

In Penwith District Council v V P Developments Limited437 Laddie J adopted similar reasoning in respect of the availability of equitable set-off and found a set-off to be available although note that the set-off in that case was equitable rather than insolvency set-off.438

We therefore consider that the strong weight of informed opinion supports the view that there would be sufficient mutuality between the respective obligations for a right of set-off to be available on an administration or liquidation of the Trustee or an insolvency of the trust fund, although there is no case law to support this view. Accordingly, Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement (including Paragraph 6 of the Transfer Annexes) should work even on the basis of a set-off analysis.

In addition to the arguments above, in respect of a Full Trustee Insolvency, if the relevant Transfer Annex forms part of a financial collateral arrangement under the FCA Regulations as discussed in Part II above, regulation 12 provides that a close-out netting provision shall, subject to paragraph (2), take effect in accordance with its terms notwithstanding that the collateral-provider or collateral-taker under the arrangement is subject to winding-up proceedings or reorganisation measures.

(iv) Avoidance of transfers under the Transfer Annexes

Will the Trustee (or its administrator, provisional liquidator, conservator, receiver, trustee, custodian or other similar official) be able to recover any transfers of Eligible Credit Support made to the Transferee during a certain "suspect period" preceding the date of the insolvency? If so, how long before the insolvency does this suspect period begin? If such a period exists, would the substitution of Eligible Credit Support by a Counterparty during this period invalidate an otherwise valid transfer assuming the substitute assets are of no greater value than the assets they are replacing? Would the transfer of additional Eligible Credit Support pursuant to the mark-to-market provisions of each Transfer Annex during the suspect period be subject to avoidance, either because it was considered to relate to an antecedent or pre-existing obligation or for some reason?

In relation to the issues referred to in Part VI of this memorandum in response to question 27,439 as noted above, the provisions of the Insolvency Act 1986 are not applicable to an English Trust (as distinguished from the Trustee). Accordingly sections 238, 239, 244 and 245 of the Insolvency Act 1986 would not apply, and therefore those provisions are not relevant to a Trust Insolvency.

As discussed below, section 423 of the Insolvency Act 1986 might apply in certain circumstances on a Trust Insolvency.

The above sections of the Insolvency Act 1986 would, however, apply on a liquidation or administration of a corporate Trustee.

However, in our view a liquidator or administrator would not be able to reverse a margin transfer made by the Trustee for the benefit of the English Trust, because the

437 [2005] EWHC 259 (Ch). 438 See also the discussion in Rory Derham, Derham on the Law of Set-off (4th edn, OUP 2010), paras 17.122-17.126. 439 Which cross-refers to the analysis in Part III question 18 of this memorandum.

214

English Trust, not the Trustee's general creditors, would receive any benefit that might be obtained from the reversal of that margin transfer.

Preferences in respect of an English Trust

The court has a general equitable power to avoid a transaction by virtue of which a debtor apparently treats one creditor preferentially relative to other creditors, where the creditor enjoying the preference knows at the time of the transaction that the debtor is in financial difficulties.440

While this jurisprudence is considered to have been displaced by the specific provisions of the Insolvency Act 1986 in relation to corporate insolvencies, it might still apply in relation to a non-corporate insolvency, such as the winding up of an English Trust. It is important to note that, in these circumstances, there is no specific time period, but rather a general vulnerability of transactions entered into where the relevant creditor knows (or should have known) that the debtor is in financial difficulty.

We consider it unlikely that the court would make an order of this type merely because a creditor dealt with an English Trust that was under-funded. We would suggest that something more would be required, similar to the requirements of section 239 of the Insolvency Act 1986 (which deals with preferences in relation to a corporate insolvency), namely, that there was an active intention of the debtor to put the creditor in a better position than other creditors in the event of its winding-up. Normally a transaction entered into at arm's-length where value is given and received contemporaneously (as opposed to consideration for a pre-existing debt, for example) will not be preferential in this sense.

However, the question of whether any particular action was preferential would depend on the facts and circumstances in question. See our answers to questions 18 and 27 in Part III and Part VI, respectively, for a further discussion of preferences under section 239 of the Insolvency Act 1986 in the context of a corporate insolvency.

Section 423

There is the possibility that a creditor of the Trustees could seek an order under section 423 of the Insolvency Act 1986 (transactions defrauding creditors) as this provision, notwithstanding the fact that it appears in the Insolvency Act 1986, may be invoked even where there are no insolvency proceedings under the Insolvency Act 1986. Also this provision, which is the latest incarnation of a very old rule against fraudulent conveyances, is available to any creditor of any person (not limited to companies) who has been defrauded by entry into a transaction at any undervalue by that person with a third person. There is no time limit on the application of this provision, so in theory the court could reopen and avoid a transaction entered into years ago (although in practice the older a transaction is the less likely the court is to do so). The definition of "transaction at an undervalue" is similar to the one used in section 238 of the Insolvency Act 1986. A party contracting with the Trustee who is acting in good faith and has given value will have a defence to such an order being granted.

Preferences and section 423 where English Trust subject to an administration order

440 Watts v Christie (1849) 11 Beav 546, 50 ER 928.

215

It is possible that the English Trust could be subject to an administration order, as already mentioned above. In these circumstances, section 423 of the Insolvency Act 1986 and the old jurisprudence mentioned above relating to preferences would be relevant, the same considerations as described above applying, including no time limit in the former case and an indefinite time period in the latter case running from knowledge by the creditor of the debtor's financial difficulties.

(v) Governing law and submission to jurisdiction

Would the parties' agreement on governing law of each Transfer Annex and submission to jurisdiction be upheld in England, and what would be the consequences if it were not?

Our analysis remains unchanged from the analysis referred to in Part VI of this memorandum in response to question 28.441

441 Which cross-refers to the analysis in Part III question 19 of this memorandum.

216

ANNEX 6

FRIENDLY SOCIETY

In this Annex 6, we set out our views on the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against a Friendly Society in the event that insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of the Friendly Society. In this Annex 6 we consider only a Friendly Society that is neither an English Insurance Company nor an English Charity nor otherwise subject to a special regulatory regime. In Annex 10 we consider a Friendly Society that is an English Insurance Company, and in Annex 13 we consider a Friendly Society that is an English Charity.

Subject to the more detailed discussion below, the types of insolvency proceeding that may be commenced in England in respect of a Friendly Society are, pursuant to section 21 or 22 of the Friendly Societies Act 1992, a voluntary or compulsory winding up under the Insolvency Act 1986. It is also possible that a Friendly Society could be made subject to a scheme of arrangment under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006.

Insolvency proceedings in respect of a Friendly Society

Sections 21 and 22 of the Friendly Societies Act 1992 provide that a Friendly Society may be wound up voluntarily (that is, by the creditors) or compulsorily (that is, by the court)442. Section 23 provides that "the companies winding up legislation" specified in paragraph 1 of Schedule 10 to the Friendly Societies Act 1992 shall apply, as modified by Parts I and II of Schedule 10. The winding up legislation specified in paragraph 1 of Schedule 10 consists of Parts IV, VI, VII, XII and XIII of the Insolvency Act 1986.

These provisions, as modified by the Friendly Societies Act 1992, apply the companies winding up provisions to Friendly Societies, but not the CVA provisions in Part I or the administration provisions in Part II of the Insolvency Act 1986. Section 255 of the Enterprise Act 2002 provides the Treasury with the power to provide by order for an administration regime for Friendly Societies. To date, no such order has been made by the Treasury.

It is unclear what insolvency rules would apply to a winding up of a Friendly Society. Paragraph 69 of Schedule 10 to the Friendly Societies Act 1992 provides that rules may be made under section 411 of the Insolvency Act 1986 for the purpose of giving effect to winding up legislation in relation to Friendly Societies. No such rules have been made. Given that the intention would appear to be for special rules to apply (as opposed to the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016, which apply to English Companies), there would appear to be no applicable rules currently, and therefore there is no equivalent for Friendly Societies of Rule 14.25 of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016, which is the insolvency set-off provision applicable to English Companies.

No official explanation for this state of affairs has ever been given. This unsatisfactory state of affairs in relation to Friendly Societies (and Building Society insolvency proceedings other than under the

442 Section 20 of the Friendly Societies Act 1992 contemplates dissolution by consent of its members, but this would have no impact on existing contractual obligations of the Friendly Society and would therefore occur only on a solvent basis, after agreement between the Friendly Society and the other party to terminate the relevant contract on an agreed basis or following completion of one of the insolvency procedures mentioned in this Annex 6. Section 25 of the Friendly Societies Act 1992 gives the court the power to declare the dissolution of a Friendly Society void on an application by, among others, "any [...] person appearing to the Court to be interested", which would certainly include a creditor of the friendly society. A Friendly Society that is in the course of dissolution by consent may be wound up by the court under section 22. In our view, therefore, the power of the members to dissolve a Friendly Society by consent under section 20 would not materially affect our conclusions in this memorandum.

217

Banking Act) was highlighted by the FMLC in December 2007, but so far the government has taken no action to remedy this lacuna.443

It is possible that a Friendly Society could be made subject to a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006 for the reasons given in Annex 9 in relation to Chartered Corporations. The same arguments as apply in relation to a Chartered Corporation would arguably also apply in relation to a Friendly Society.444

1. Security Documents

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 6 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 6, we are of the view that our analysis relating to the enforceability against a Security Collateral Provider:

(i) of the Non-IM Security Documents in Part III.3 of this memorandum;

(ii) of the IM Security Documents in Parts IV.3, IV.4 and IV.5 of this memorandum; and

(iii) of the Clearing System IM Documents in Parts V.3, V.4 and V.5 of this memorandum,

would apply in circumstances where the Security Collateral Provider is a Friendly Society, subject to the following:

(a) the Registration Provisions will not apply because a Friendly Society is not an English Company; and

(b) on the basis that the administration provisions in Part II of the Insolvency Act 1986 are not applicable to a Friendly Society, our answers to the questions in Parts III.3, IV.3 and V.3 of this memorandum which relate to administration should be disregarded. The same is true of CVAs (and so, for example, our explanation in the body of this memorandum of the "eligible company" moratorium under the Insolvency Act 2000 is not relevant to a Friendly Society).

2. Transfer Annexes

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 6 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 6, we are of the view that our conclusions in Part VI.3 of this memorandum would apply to a Friendly Society.

We believe that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against a Friendly Society in the event of its winding up, without reliance on a statutory insolvency set-off rule, for the reasons we give in Part III.3(3)(a) of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to an English Company on the basis that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement do not involve contractual set-off (other than to the limited extent that it includes Unpaid Amounts owed by either party that became payable

443 The FMLC published a paper in December 2007 entitled "Building Society and Friendly Society Set-off: Proposal for a Mandatory Insolvency Set-off Rule Applicable to Building Societies and Incorporated Friendly Societies", which deals with these issues in some detail. The paper may be found on the FMLC website at accessed 12 November 2018. 444 The key to the argument is the breadth of the word "company" in section 895(2)(b) of the Companies Act 2006, as discussed in Annex 9. It is clear that this is intended to be broader than an English Company. A Friendly Society is a body corporate and the fact that it is a mutual would not exclude it from the scope of the word "company" in that context.

218

prior to the operation of Section 6(c)(ii) of the ISDA Master Agreement, as discussed in the ISDA Netting Opinion) but simply represent an accounting of rights and liabilities under a single agreement following the designation or deemed occurrence of an Early Termination Date (sometimes referred to as the "flawed asset" approach to close-out netting).

If, however, the court were to construe the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement as operating by way of contractual set-off rather than pursuant to the single agreement (or "flawed asset") approach described above, we also consider that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against a Friendly Society. Our reasons for this view are principally those set out in Part III.3(3)(a) of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to an English Company, supplemented by our view that an English court would find that insolvency set-off applies, despite the fact that there is no statutory insolvency set-off rule for Friendly Societies. We believe this would be the result because it is clear, in our view, that the lack of insolvency rules for Friendly Societies is a failure of administration rather than a deliberate policy choice, much less an expression of the will of Parliament.

The policy reasons in favour of insolvency set-off for Friendly Societies are as strong as they are in relation to individuals or companies, and there is a common law basis for the insolvency set-off provision which pre-dates its first appearance in statutory form in 1705. An English court would therefore, in our view, either find that insolvency set-off applies as a matter of common law in relation to a Friendly Society in winding up or, alternatively, would find that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement viewed as a form of contractual set-off do not offend against any mandatory rule of English insolvency law and are therefore enforceable in accordance with their terms.

In addition to the arguments above, if the Transfer Annex forms part of a financial collateral arrangement under the FCA Regulations as discussed in Part II above, regulation 12 provides that a close-out netting provision shall, subject to paragraph (2), take effect in accordance with its terms notwithstanding that the collateral-provider or collateral-taker under the arrangement is subject to winding-up proceedings or reorganisation measures.

If a Friendly Society were to enter into a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006, the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against the Friendly Society on the same basis as the close-out netting provisions would be enforceable against an English Company, as set out in Part III.3(3)(d) of the ISDA Netting Opinion.

Since the Transfer Annexes rely for their effectiveness on the inclusion of the Credit Support Balance or Credit Support Balance (VM), as applicable, within the scope of the close-out netting provisions in Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement, we are of the view that an English court would find the title transfer collateral arrangement constituted by the relevant Transfer Annex is enforceable against a Friendly Society in the event of insolvency proceedings in respect of it in England.

219

ANNEX 7

C/CB SOCIETY

In this Annex 7, we set out our views on the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against a C/CB Society (formerly an Industrial & Provident Society)445 in the event that insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of the C/CB Society. In this Annex 7 we consider only a C/CB Society that is neither an English Insurance Company nor an English Charity nor otherwise subject to a special regulatory regime (such as a private registered provider of social housing, a registered social landlord or a credit union). In Annex 10 we consider a C/CB Society that is an English Insurance Company, and in Annex 13 we consider a C/CB Society that is an English Charity.

Subject to the more detailed discussion below, the types of insolvency proceeding that may be commenced in England in respect of a C/CB Society are, pursuant to the Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014, a voluntary or compulsory winding up under the Insolvency Act 1986, administration, a CVA and a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006.

Insolvency proceedings in respect of a C/CB Society

Section 123 of the Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014 states that a C/CB Society may be dissolved on its being wound up in pursuance of an order or resolution made as is directed in the case of companies registered under the Companies Acts. The provisions relating to the winding up of companies registered under the Companies Acts have effect in relation to a registered society as if the society were such a company. Therefore the provisions of the Insolvency Act 1986 relating to the winding up of companies apply to C/CB Societies, with some minor modifications that are not material to the questions considered in this memorandum446.

The Co-operative and Community Benefits Societies Act 2014 does not give detailed guidance as to how the companies winding-up regime will apply to a C/CB Society. However Harman J in Re Norse Self Build Association447 held that section 55 of the Industrial and Provident Societies Act 1965 (which was the equivalent section under the previous regime) enabled an Industrial & Provident Society to be wound up in exactly the same way as if it were an English Company and that it is unnecessary to have resort to the power to wind up unregistered companies in Part V of the Insolvency Act 1986. Although the Industrial and Provident Societies Act 1965 has been repealed and replaced by the Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014, Re Norse Self Build Association448 would still apply as the relevant sections of the 2014 Act are substantially the same. This means that the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 as far as they are relevant to a winding up would apply to the winding up of a C/CB Society, including the insolvency set-off provision in Rule 14.25.

445 The Industrial and Provident Societies Act 1965 has been replaced by the Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014, which came into force on 1 August 2014. Sections 1(1)(b) and 150(1) of the Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014 deem any reference to societies registered under it to include societies that were, prior to its commencement, registered under the Industrial and Provident Societies Act 1965. 446 Section 119 of the Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014 contemplates dissolution by consent of its members. The instrument of dissolution must set forth the claims of creditors and the provision to be made for their payment and this procedure would have no impact on existing contractual obligations of the C/CB Society. It would therefore occur only on a solvent basis, after agreement between the C/CB Society and the other party to terminate the relevant contract on an agreed basis or following completion of one of the insolvency procedures mentioned in this Annex 7. In our view, therefore, the power of the members to dissolve a C/CB Society by consent under section 119 would not materially affect our conclusions in this memorandum. 447 [1985] BCLC 219. 448 [1985] BCLC 219.

220

The Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies and Credit Unions (Arrangements, Reconstructions and Administration) Order 2014 (formerly the Industrial and Provident Societies and Credit Unions (Arrangements, Reconstructions and Administration) Order 2014)449 applies, subject to certain modifications, CVAs and administration under the Insolvency Act 1986450 and schemes of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006 to C/CB Societies (except certain excluded C/CB Societies not relevant to this memorandum).451

1. Security Documents

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 7 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 7, we are of the view that our analysis relating to the enforceability against a Security Collateral Provider:

(i) of the Non-IM Security Documents in Part III.3 of this memorandum;

(ii) of the IM Security Documents in Parts IV.3, IV.4 and IV.5 of this memorandum; and

(iii) of the Clearing System IM Documents in Parts V.3, V.4 and V.5 of this memorandum,

would apply in circumstances where the Security Collateral Provider is a C/CB Society, subject to the qualification that the Registration Provisions will not apply because a C/CB Society is not an English Company.452

2. Transfer Annexes

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 7 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 7, we are of the view that our conclusions in Part VI.3 of this memorandum would apply to a C/CB Society.

We are of the view that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against a C/CB Society in the event of its winding up or administration for the reasons we give in Part III.3(3)(a) and (b) of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to an English Company on the basis that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement do not involve contractual set-off (other than to the limited extent that it includes Unpaid Amounts owed by either party that became payable prior to the operation of Section 6(c)(ii) of the ISDA Master Agreement, as discussed in the ISDA Netting Opinion) but simply represent an accounting of rights and liabilities under a single agreement following the

449 SI 2014/229. 450 See Part I.6 of this memorandum in respect of the continued application of the Insolvency Rules 1986 to insolvency proceedings applied by the 2014 Order. 451 Note that prior to this Order, neither administrative receivership nor administration were available in respect of what was then an Industrial & Provident Society. Instead the holder of a floating charge had recourse only to common law receivership. See Ian Snaith, Handbook of Co-operative and Community Benefit Society Law, (2nd edn, Jordan Publishing 2014). A floating chargeholder in respect of a floating charge created on or prior to 6 April 2014 will continue to have the choice of receivership or administration. 452 We note that there is a provision for the registration of security in section 59 of the Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014. Section 59 is not mandatory but successful registration of the security with the FCA has the effect of excluding that security from the provisions of the Bills of Sale Act 1878 (as amended in 1882) requiring security falling within it to be registered within 7 days of creation. However, we are of the view that security in the form of Collateral, on the assumptions we have made in this memorandum, would not fall within the definition of "bills of sale" in the Bills of Sale Act 1878 and therefore registration under the Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014 or the Bills of Sale Act 1878 is not mandatory.

221

designation or deemed occurrence of an Early Termination Date (sometimes referred to as the "flawed asset" approach to close-out netting).

If, however, the court were to construe the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement as operating by way of contractual set-off rather than pursuant to the single agreement (or "flawed asset") approach described above, we also consider that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against a C/CB Society for the reasons set out in Part III.3(3)(a) and (b) of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to an English Company.

In addition to the arguments above, if the Transfer Annex forms part of a financial collateral arrangement under the FCA Regulations as discussed in Part II above, regulation 12 provides that a close-out netting provision shall, subject to paragraph (2), take effect in accordance with its terms notwithstanding that the collateral-provider or collateral-taker under the arrangement is subject to winding-up proceedings or reorganisation measures.

If a C/CB Society were to enter into a CVA under the Insolvency Act 1986 or a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006, the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against the C/CB Society on the same basis as the close-out netting provisions would be enforceable against an English Company, as set out in Part III.3(3)(c) and (d) of the ISDA Netting Opinion.

Since the Transfer Annexes rely for their effectiveness on the inclusion of the Credit Support Balance or Credit Support Balance (VM), as applicable, within the scope of the close-out netting provisions in Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement, we are of the view that an English court would find the title transfer collateral arrangement constituted by the relevant Transfer Annex is enforceable against a C/CB Society in the event of insolvency proceedings in respect of it in England.

222

ANNEX 8

STATUTORY CORPORATION

In this Annex 8, we set out our views on the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against a Statutory Corporation in the event that insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of the Statutory Corporation. In this Annex 8 we consider only a Statutory Corporation that is neither an English Insurance Company nor an English Charity nor otherwise subject to a special regulatory regime. In Annex 10 we consider a Statutory Corporation that is an English Insurance Company and in Annex 13 we consider a Statutory Corporation that is an English Charity.

Subject to the more detailed discussion below, the types of insolvency proceeding that may be commenced in England in respect of a Statutory Corporation established by a private Act of Parliament are a voluntary or compulsory winding up under the Insolvency Act 1986. It is also possible that a Statutory Corporation could be made subject to a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006.

Insolvency proceedings in respect of a Statutory Corporation

There is good authority for the view that a Statutory Corporation established by a private Act of Parliament may be wound up as an "unregistered company" under section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986.453

Section 221(1) provides that "all of the provisions of this Act about winding up apply to an unregistered company with the exceptions and additions mentioned in the following subsections". Section 221(4) provides that "[n]o unregistered company shall be wound up under this Act voluntarily, except in accordance with the EU Regulation". "EU Regulation" means the Recast Insolvency Regulation. Under the Recast Insolvency Regulation a company incorporated in an EU member state with its COMI in England may be wound up in England under a creditors' voluntary winding up.454 We have defined a Statutory Corporation to be "a body corporate established by private Act of Parliament with its principal place of business in England" and assumed its COMI is in England. As England is part of the United Kingdom, which is an EU member state, a Statutory Corporation may be wound up voluntarily in England. If not wound up voluntarily, a Statutory Corporation will be wound up by the court (compulsory winding up).

Whether the winding up of a Statutory Corporation is conducted on a voluntary or compulsory basis, the provisions of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 relevant to a winding up will apply to the winding up of the Statutory Corporation, including the insolvency set-off provision in Rule 14.25.455

453 See Derek French, Applications to Wind Up Companies (3rd edn, OUP 2015), 34, where numerous cases are cited to support this proposition. Although these cases were decided in relation to the winding up provisions of earlier companies legislation, the same principles appear to us to be applicable in relation to Part V of the Insolvency Act 1986, given the similarity of concepts and terminology in the earlier legislation and the clear intent that these provisions are a consolidation (although amended in certain respects), and therefore a continuation, of the earlier regimes. In support of this approach to these earlier cases, see Re a Debtor (No 784 of 1991) [1992] Ch 554, 558-559 (per Hoffmann J); and Re Modern Jet Support Centre Ltd [2005] EWHC 1611 (Ch), [2005] 1 WLR 3880 [22], [30]-[31]. See also Len Sealy and David Milman, Annotated Guide to the Insolvency Legislation 2018, vol 1 (21st edn, Sweet & Maxwell 2018) 250-251. 454 Re TXU Europe German Finance BV [2005] BCC 90. 455 Where a statutory corporation has been established by an Act of Parliament for a public purpose without private shareholders, obiter dicta of Denning LJ in the Court of Appeal decision in Tamlin v Hannaford [1950] 1 KB 18 provides persuasive support for the view that such a statutory corporation is not liable to be wound up at the suit of any creditor. An earlier case, Re Exmouth Docks Co. (1873-1874) LR 17 Eq 181, suggested that a court would be unlikely to make a winding up order in relation to a statutory corporation established for a public purpose under existing legislation. The court was of the view that instead a further Act of Parliament would need to be passed specifically to provide for the winding up. The relationship between the decision in Exmouth Docks and the dicta in Tamlin is not entirely clear, but together they appear to exclude the possibility of a court's being able to wind up a statutory corporation established for a public purpose without a further Act of Parliament. As a general rule,

223

A Statutory Corporation may not be made subject to a CVA or to administration proceedings under the Insolvency Act 1986. Each of these regimes is limited to English Companies and certain foreign companies.456

It is possible that a Statutory Corporation could be made subject to a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006 for the reasons given in Annex 9 in relation to a Chartered Corporation. The same arguments as apply in relation to a Chartered Corporation would also apply in relation to a Statutory Corporation.

In relation to any Statutory Corporation, it is possible that the private Act of Parliament under which it is established could provide for its being subject to winding up or some other form of insolvency proceeding, and therefore we advise a party proposing to deal with a Statutory Corporation to check the relevant statute in this regard. For the purposes of this Annex 8, we assume that the relevant statute contains no such provisions or, if it does, we assume that such provisions do not affect our conclusions in this Annex 8.

1. Security Documents

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 8 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 8, we are of the view that our analysis relating to the enforceability against a Security Collateral Provider:

(i) of the Non-IM Security Documents in Part III.3 of this memorandum;

(ii) of the IM Security Documents in Parts IV.3, IV.4 and IV.5 of this memorandum; and

(iii) of the Clearing System IM Documents in Parts V.3, V.4 and V.5 of this memorandum,

would apply in circumstances where the Security Collateral Provider is a Statutory Corporation, subject to the following:

(a) the Registration Provisions will not apply because a Statutory Corporation is not an English Company; and

(b) on the basis that the administration provisions in Part II of the Insolvency Act 1986 are not applicable to a Statutory Corporation, our answers to the questions in Parts III.3, IV.3 and V.3 of this memorandum which relate to administration should be disregarded. The same is true of CVAs (and so, for example, our explanation in the body of this memorandum of the "eligible company" moratorium under the Insolvency Act 2000 is not relevant to a Statutory Corporation).

2. Transfer Annexes

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 8 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 8, we are of the view that our conclusions in Part VI.3 of this memorandum would apply to a Statutory Corporation.

however, a statutory corporation established for a public purpose is normally established by a public general, rather than private, Act of Parliament and is therefore excluded from the scope of this memorandum (except for the consideration of the Board of the Pension Protection Fund at Annex 14). See note 8. 456 In relation to CVAs, see the definition of "company" in section 1(4) of the Insolvency Act 1986, and in relation to administration proceedings, see the definition of "company" in paragraph 111(1A) of Schedule B1 to the Insolvency Act 1986.

224

If a Statutory Corporation established by a private Act of Parliament were wound up as an "unregistered company" under section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986, then, in our view, the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against that Statutory Corporation for the reasons we give in Part III.3(3)(a) of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to an English Company on the basis that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement do not involve contractual set-off (other than to the limited extent that it includes Unpaid Amounts owed by either party that became payable prior to the operation of Section 6(c)(ii) of the ISDA Master Agreement, as discussed in the ISDA Netting Opinion) but simply represent an accounting of rights and liabilities under a single agreement following the designation or deemed occurrence of an Early Termination Date (sometimes referred to as the "flawed asset" approach to close-out netting).

If, however, the court were to construe the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement as operating by way of contractual set-off rather than pursuant to the single agreement (or "flawed asset") approach described above, we also consider that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against the Statutory Corporation for the reasons set out in Part III.3(3)(a) of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to an English Company.

In addition to the arguments above, if the Transfer Annex forms part of a financial collateral arrangement under the FCA Regulations as discussed in Part II above, regulation 12 provides that a close-out netting provision shall, subject to paragraph (2), take effect in accordance with its terms notwithstanding that the collateral-provider or collateral-taker under the arrangement is subject to winding-up proceedings or reorganisation measures.

If a Statutory Corporation were to enter into a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006, the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against the Statutory Corporation on the same basis as the close-out netting provisions would be enforceable against an English Company, as set out in Part III.3(3)(d) of the ISDA Netting Opinion.

Since the Transfer Annexes rely for their effectiveness on the inclusion of the Credit Support Balance or Credit Support Balance (VM), as applicable, within the scope of the close-out netting provisions in Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement, we are of the view that an English court would find the title transfer collateral arrangement constituted by the relevant Transfer Annex is enforceable against a Statutory Corporation in the event of insolvency proceedings in respect of it in England.

225

ANNEX 9

CHARTERED CORPORATION

In this Annex 9, we set out our views on the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against a Chartered Corporation in the event that insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of the Chartered Corporation. In this Annex 9 we consider only a Chartered Corporation that is neither an English Insurance Company nor an English Charity nor otherwise subject to a special regulatory regime. In Annex 10 we consider a Chartered Corporation that is an English Insurance Company, and in Annex 13 we consider a Chartered Corporation that is an English Charity.

Subject to the more detailed discussion below, the types of insolvency proceeding that may be commenced in England in respect of a Chartered Corporation are a voluntary or compulsory winding up under the Insolvency Act 1986. It is also possible that a Chartered Corporation could be made subject to a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006.

Insolvency proceedings in respect of a Chartered Corporation

Winding up of a Chartered Corporation

There is good authority for the view that a Chartered Corporation may be wound up as an "unregistered company" under section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986.457

Section 221(1) provides that "all of the provisions of this Act about winding up apply to an unregistered company with the exceptions and additions mentioned in the following subsections". For the reasons given in relation to a Statutory Corporation in Annex 8 and on the basis of our definition of a Chartered Corporation ("a body corporate established by royal charter granted by the Crown with its principal place of business in England"), in our view a Chartered Corporation may be subject to voluntary or compulsory winding up under the Insolvency Act 1986.

Whether the winding up of a Chartered Corporation is conducted on a voluntary or compulsory basis, the provisions of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 relevant to a winding up will apply to the winding up of the Chartered Corporation, including the insolvency set-off provision in Rule 14.25.

Scheme of Arrangement

It appears that a chartered corporation may be made subject to a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006 (sections 895 to 901).458

457 Re Oriental Bank Corporation (1885) 54 LJ Ch 481 (CA); Re Commercial Buildings Co of Dublin [1938] IR 477. The latter is an Irish case, but it was decided in relation to a corporation established by a royal charter granted on 1 January 1798 with regard to the winding up provisions of the Companies (Consolidation) Act 1908, which at that time applied both in England and Ireland. Although the Irish judge was somewhat sceptical about the basis of the earlier decision in Re Oriental Bank Corporation, which was decided by reference to the winding up provisions of the Joint Stock Companies Winding-up Act 1848, he was unequivocal that a chartered corporation could be wound up under the winding up provisions of the 1908 Act. In Re English, Scottish and Australian Chartered Bank [1893] 3 Ch 385 (CA) 405, the Court of Appeal considered various issues arising out of a proposed scheme of arrangement in connection with the winding up of the English, Scottish and Australian Chartered Bank, a chartered corporation, the principal business of which was in Australia. It was taken for granted by the Court of Appeal, and not an issue in dispute between the parties, that the High Court had the power to order the winding up of the bank. Derek French (op cit note 453) refers to other cases that are similarly concerned with later proceedings in relation to a chartered company that was already in winding up. 458 In Re English, Scottish and Australian Chartered Bank [1893] 3 Ch 385, the Court of Appeal upheld an order of the High Court provisionally sanctioning a scheme of arrangement in relation to a bank incorporated by royal charter that was in the course of being wound up.

226

"Company" for purposes of Part 26 is defined in section 895 of the Companies Act 2006 to include "any company liable to be wound up under the Insolvency Act 1986". In our view, this would include an unregistered company liable to be wound up under section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986.

This view is supported by an analysis of the whole definition of "company" in section 895:

"'company' –

(a) in section 900 (powers of court to facilitate reconstruction or amalgamation) means a company within the meaning of this Act, and

(b) elsewhere in this Part means any company liable to be wound up under the Insolvency Act 1986 (c 45) or the Insolvency Northern Ireland Order 1989 (SI 1989/2405 (NI 19))."

Clause (a) includes all companies registered under the Companies Act 2006. If Part 26 were limited to such companies, then there would be no need for clause (b). That taken with the argument that an unregistered company is liable to be wound up under the Insolvency Act 1986, as noted above, is in our view sufficient to bring a Chartered Corporation within the scope of Part 26.

The fact that the English court still has discretion under section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986 to decide whether it has the power to assume jurisdiction and, where it does have the power, the discretion whether or not to exercise it in relation to an unregistered company does not, in our view, mean a Chartered Corporation is not "liable" to be wound up under the Insolvency Act 1986. The argument may be weaker in relation to a foreign company where there is an insufficient connection with England such that it is likely that the grounds for jurisdiction set out in section 221(5) would not be made out.

We note that the Unregistered Companies Regulations 2009459 do not apply Part 26 to unregistered companies. But nonetheless, for the reasons given above, we believe that, at least in theory, Part 26 could be applied to a Chartered Corporation.

Winding up in connection with royal charter

In relation to any Chartered Corporation, it is possible that the royal charter under which it is established could provide for its winding up in certain circumstances or may otherwise provide for the revocation of the charter or the dissolution of the Chartered Corporation. We therefore advise a party proposing to deal with a Chartered Corporation to check the royal charter (and any related constitutional documents such as any bye-laws or rules made under the royal charter) in this regard. For the purposes of this Annex 9, we assume that the relevant royal charter (or any related constitutional document) contains no such provisions or, if it does, we assume that such provisions do not affect our conclusions in this Annex.

Administration and company voluntary arrangements not applicable

A Chartered Corporation may not be made subject to a company voluntary arrangement or to administration proceedings under the Insolvency Act 1986. Each of these regimes is limited to English Companies and certain foreign companies.

1. Security Documents

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 9 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex

459 SI 2009/2436.

227

9, we are of the view that our analysis relating to the enforceability against a Security Collateral Provider:

(i) of the Non-IM Security Documents in Part III.3 of this memorandum;

(ii) of the IM Security Documents in Parts IV.3, IV.4 and IV.5 of this memorandum; and

(iii) of the Clearing System IM Documents in Parts V.3, V.4 and V.5 of this memorandum,

would apply in circumstances where the Security Collateral Provider is a Chartered Corporation, subject to the following:

(a) the Registration Provisions will not apply because a Chartered Corporation is not an English Company; and

(b) on the basis that the administration provisions in Part II of the Insolvency Act 1986 are not applicable to a Chartered Corporation, our answers to the questions in Parts III.3, IV.3 and V.3 of this memorandum which relate to administration should be disregarded. The same is true of CVAs (and so, for example, our explanation in the body of this memorandum of the "eligible company" moratorium under the Insolvency Act 2000 is not relevant to a Chartered Corporation).

2. Transfer Annexes

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 9 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 9, we are of the view that our conclusions in Part VI.3 of this memorandum would apply to a Chartered Corporation.

If a Chartered Corporation were wound up as an "unregistered company" under section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986, then, in our view, the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against that Chartered Corporation for the reasons we give in Part III.3(3)(a) of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to an English Company on the basis that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement do not involve contractual set-off (other than to the limited extent that it includes Unpaid Amounts owed by either party that became payable prior to the operation of Section 6(c)(ii) of the ISDA Master Agreement, as discussed in the ISDA Netting Opinion) but simply represent an accounting of rights and liabilities under a single agreement following the designation or deemed occurrence of an Early Termination Date (sometimes referred to as the "flawed asset" approach to close-out netting).

If, however, the court were to construe the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement as operating by way of contractual set-off rather than pursuant to the single agreement (or "flawed asset") approach described above, we also consider that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against the Chartered Corporation for the reasons set out in Part III.3(3)(a) of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to an English Company.

In addition to the arguments above, if the Transfer Annex forms part of a financial collateral arrangement under the FCA Regulations as discussed in Part II above, regulation 12 provides that a close-out netting provision shall, subject to paragraph (2), take effect in accordance with its terms notwithstanding that the collateral-provider or collateral-taker under the arrangement is subject to winding-up proceedings or reorganisation measures.

228

If a Chartered Corporation were to enter into a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006, the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against the Chartered Corporation on the same basis as the close-out netting provisions would be enforceable against an English Company, as set out in Part III.3(3)(d) of the ISDA Netting Opinion.

Since the Transfer Annexes rely for their effectiveness on the inclusion of the Credit Support Balance or Credit Support Balance (VM), as applicable, within the scope of the close-out netting provisions in Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement, we are of the view that an English court would find the title transfer collateral arrangement constituted by the relevant Transfer Annex is enforceable against a Chartered Corporation in the event of insolvency proceedings in respect of it in England.

229

ANNEX 10

ENGLISH INSURANCE COMPANY

In this Annex 10, we set out our views on the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against an English Insurance Company in the event that insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of the English Insurance Company.

The types of insolvency proceeding that may be commenced in England in respect of an English Insurance Company depend on the legal form in which it is established as well as specific insolvency rules applicable to an English Insurance Company as discussed below in this Annex 10.

A summary of the types of insolvency proceedings that may be commenced in England is set out, in respect of:

(a) an English Company, in Part III.1(4) of the ISDA Netting Opinion;

(b) a Friendly Society, in Annex 6;

(c) a C/CB Society, in Annex 7;

(d) a Statutory Corporation, in Annex 8; and

(e) a Chartered Corporation, in Annex 9.

One of the most important changes made by the specific insolvency rules applicable to insurers is that an English Insurance Company that is a Statutory Corporation or a Chartered Corporation can be put into administration proceedings. Normally administration proceedings are not available in relation these legal forms of entity, as noted in Annexes 8 and 9, respectively. Administration proceedings remain unavailable for an English Insurance Company that is a Friendly Society.

As noted in Part I of this memorandum, an English Insurance Company may be organised in one of a number of different legal forms. The most common forms are the five forms covered by this memorandum. As a general rule the following analysis in this Annex 10 applies to an English Insurance Company regardless of the form in which it is established, but there are some points regarding which the analysis is affected by the relevant form of organisation. These points are noted below.

There are a number of provisions of English law that apply differently to English Insurance Companies than they do to other companies established in the United Kingdom. There are also some differences between the provisions applicable to mutual and proprietary English Insurance Companies, and between English Insurance Companies carrying on direct insurance business and reinsurance business, but these are less significant. We highlight relevant differences below.

So far as this advice is concerned, the legal provisions that are likely to be relevant are:

(1) the specific insolvency rules applicable to English Insurance Companies, which modify the insolvency regimes that would normally apply; and

(2) the rules governing the financial regulation of English Insurance Companies (which in turn account for certain particular features of the insolvency rules, as described below).

230

The legal framework for insurance regulation in the United Kingdom is currently set out in the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 together with rules and regulations made by the Regulators and the Treasury, under powers conferred by the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000. This regime has gone through substantive changes as a result of the implementation of the Solvency II Directive (2009/138/EC) (as amended by the Omnibus II Directive (2014/51/EU)) (the Solvency II Directive, also referred to as the level 1 framework Directive), which consolidates, with some amendments, a number of existing insurance and reinsurance Directives and provides the framework for a new EU solvency and supervisory regime for the insurance sector. The level 1 framework Directive is supplemented by the Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/35 (as amended by Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/467) (the Delegated Regulation) and a number of binding technical standards (together, the level 2 measures) and guidelines produced by the European Insurance and Occupational Pensions Authority (the level 3 measures).

In general, the Solvency II Directive applies to most English Insurance Companies with limited exceptions (in broad terms, those with gross premium income below €5 million and gross technical provisions of less than €25m). There are about 100 smaller English Insurance Companies (mainly Friendly Societies) that fall outside the scope of the Solvency II Directive. However, these firms may opt into the Solvency II regime and be subject to the same rules that apply to Solvency II firms.

Solvency II is transposed into UK law primarily by the Solvency 2 Regulations 2015 (SI 2015/575) (the Solvency 2 Regulations) with effect from 1 January 2016. The PRA and the FCA have provided rules and guidance to ensure firms' compliance with the new regime and have done so mainly by revising existing provisions in their respective rulebooks. In addition, the Solvency II level 2 measures take the form of EU Regulations and, as such, apply directly in the UK without the need for transposition.

The effecting and carrying out of contracts of insurance as principal in the United Kingdom are (subject to minor exclusions) regulated activities for the purposes of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000,460 and persons who carry on such activities require authorisation under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 and the appropriate permission under Part 4A of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 having regard to the regulated activities performed. Authorisation and supervisory powers are conferred by the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 on the Regulators, including the power to grant and vary Part 4A permissions. The Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 and rules and regulations made under it together impose a number of requirements on an English Insurance Company that are in addition to the requirements contained in its constitution and the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 or other statute applicable to the specific entity type.

For the purposes of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 and the Solvency II regime, it is necessary to make a distinction between English Insurance Companies conducting "long-term insurance business" (Life Insurance Companies) and those conducting "general insurance business" (General Insurance Companies). Long-term insurance business would include, for example, life assurance, annuity and pension fund management whereas general insurance business would include what is sometimes known as "non-life" or "property and casualty" business (including, for example, household, vehicle, liability, accident and sickness insurance). There are important differences between the regulatory rules governing long-term insurance business (which includes many savings products) and general insurance business, the former affording, overall, a higher level of policyholder protection.

"Long-term" and "general" insurance business are defined in more detail in the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 and the FCA Handbook. The FCA maintains a register of all companies

460 Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Regulated Activities) Order 2001, SI 2001/544, art 10. In the Handbook, the business of effecting or carrying out contracts of insurance as principal is known as "insurance business".

231

(including, inter alia, English Insurance Companies) that are authorised under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000. This register states what class or classes of business (long-term or general and the sub-divisions thereof) each English Insurance Company may carry on.

Some English Insurance Companies (Composites) have permission to carry on both long-term and general insurance business. However, pursuant to the Article 73 of the Solvency II Directive, and paragraph 2.3 of the PRA's Supervisory Statement SS8/15, an English Insurance Company will now, with certain exceptions, not be given permission to do so.461 The main exceptions are for a few older English Insurance Companies established before 15 March 1979 and for pure reinsurers.

Modifications of general insolvency law in relation to an English Insurance Company

Subject to certain modifications mentioned below, the winding up in England of an English Insurance Company is governed by the rules that would apply according to its legal form. Although there are various differences of detail in the winding up regimes that would apply to each form of English Insurance Company, each form is broadly subject to the winding up regime applicable to an English Company.

For all forms of English Insurance Company apart from a Friendly Society, this includes the application of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 relevant to winding up, including the insolvency set-off provision in Rule 14.25. Although the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 would not apply in the winding up of an English Insurance Company that is a Friendly Society, we believe that a court would, to give proper effect to the winding up regime applicable to Friendly Societies, find that insolvency set-off applies, as discussed in more detail in Annex 6.

Accordingly, in contrasting the winding up regime that would normally apply to each of the five legal forms of entity within the scope of this memorandum with the winding up regime applicable to an English Insurance Company, we primarily refer below to the regime applicable to an English Company. None of the differences of detail in relation to the other four winding up regimes affects our conclusions in this Annex 10.

The insolvency regime applicable to each form of English Insurance Company other than an English Insurance Company that only carries on reinsurance business (a pure reinsurer) is subject to certain provisions of the Insurers (Reorganisation and Winding Up) Regulations 2004462 (the RWU Regulations).

In addition, the insolvency regime applicable to an English Insurance Company other than one established as a Friendly Society463 is subject to:

(i) Part XXIV (sections 355 – 379) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000;

461 See the PRA's Supervisory Statement on composites SS8/15, para 2.3. 462 SI 2004/353, as amended by paragraph 17 Schedule 2 to the Solvency 2 Regulations. Please note that various references to the Insolvency Rules 1986 in the RWU Regulations have not been updated to reflect the introduction of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016. 463 Part XXIV of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 includes various provisions relating to insolvency of authorised persons. In relation to English Insurance Companies, its provisions are limited to an "insurer". Under s 355 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 the term "insurer" has such meaning as may be specified in an order made by the Treasury. The Treasury made such an order in the form of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Insolvency) (Definition of "Insurer") Order 2001, SI 2001/2634. Article 2 of that Order provides as follows: "In Part XXIV of the Act (insolvency), 'insurer' means any person who is carrying on a regulated activity of the kind specified by article 10(1) or (2) of the Regulated Activities Order (effecting and carrying out contracts of insurance) but who is not – (a) exempt from the general prohibition in respect of that regulated activity; (b) a friendly society; or (c) a person who effects or carries out contracts of insurance all of which fall within paragraphs 14 to 18 of Part I of Schedule 1 to the Regulated Activities Order in the course of, or for the purposes of, a banking business." An English Insurance Company established as a Friendly Society would therefore not fall within this definition. The four other legal forms of English Insurance Company covered by this memorandum would fall within this definition.

232

(ii) the Insurers (Winding Up) Rules 2001 (the Winding Up Rules),464 made under section 379 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000; and

(iii) the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Administration Orders Relating to Insurers) Order 2010 (the Insurer Administration Order),465 made under section 360 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000.

The main modifications made by these instruments to the general rules are discussed below.

(a) Administration

Section 360 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 empowers the Treasury by statutory order to apply the administration provisions of the Insolvency Act 1986 to English Insurance Companies, other than an English Insurance Company established as a Friendly Society,466 subject to any specified modifications.

Pursuant to the Insurer Administration Order, an English Insurance Company, other than a Friendly Society, is subject to the administration provisions in Schedule B1 to the Insolvency Act 1986, but such an administration must be commenced by order of the court. Appointment of an administrator out of court (that is, by filing prescribed documents with the court) is not possible in relation to an English Insurance Company. The basic time limit for the duration of an administration is extended from 12 to 30 months.

Pursuant to the Insurer Administration Order, as from 1 February 2011, rules equivalent to those already in place in respect of the winding up of Life Insurance Companies and Composites under section 379 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 became applicable to the administration of Life Insurance Companies and Composites.467 A statutory duty is imposed upon the administrator to carry on the long-term insurance business (unless the court otherwise orders) with a view to it being transferred to another company as a going concern.

(b) Priority of claims

There are important differences in the priority of claims against an English Insurance Company in liquidation compared to an English Company in liquidation. Creditors of an English Company rank in the following (descending) order of priority:

(A) realisations from assets subject to fixed charges paid to the fixed charge holder;

(B) the expenses of the insolvency practitioner (including remuneration);468

464 SI 2001/3635. See the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 (Consequential Amendments and Savings) Rules 2017/369, Sch 2, para 6, in respect of the amendments to the Winding Up Rules to reflect the introduction of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016. 465 SI 2010/3023. 466 See note 463. 467 Article 3 of the Insurer Administration Order applies the Insolvency Rules 1986 so far as they give effect to administration to relevant insurers. The Insurer Administration Order has not been updated to refer to the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016. 468 Section 176ZA of the Insolvency Act 1986 (introduced by section 1282 of the Companies Act 2006), Rule 6.42 (in relation to creditors' voluntary winding up) and Rule 7.108 (in relation to winding up by the court) of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 provide that the expenses of a winding up in England and Wales are payable out of the assets of the company available for payment to general creditors and, subject to Rules 6.44 to 6.48 (in relation to creditors' voluntary winding up) and Rules 7.111 to 7.116 (in relation to winding up by the court) of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016, out of the property comprised in or subject to a floating charge created by the company. Rules 6.44 to 6.48 and Rules 7.111 to 7.116 set out a reasonably detailed set of rules intended to protect the holder of a floating charge from erosion of its security by requiring that a liquidator obtain (a) the holder's approval or authorisation of the amount of any liquidation expenses to be incurred by the

233

(C) preferential creditors (discussed further below);

(D) unsecured creditors to the extent of the "prescribed part" (discussed further below);

(E) the floating charge holder (to the extent of the charge); and

(F) unsecured senior (unsubordinated) creditors.

Preferential debts rank equally with each other. They include:

(i) occupational pension scheme contributions and state scheme premiums; and

(ii) remuneration of employees.469

The preferential status previously afforded to debts owed to the Crown by an insolvent company was abolished as a consequence of the introduction of the Enterprise Act 2002 on 15 September 2003. Accordingly, money owed to HM Revenue & Customs for income tax deducted at source, value-added tax, betting and gaming duties and social security contributions, in relation to the period prior to insolvency proceedings now rank as ordinary unsecured claims.

The Enterprise Act 2002 also created a priority for unsecured creditors. Section 176A of the Insolvency Act 1986 provides that any receiver (including an administrative receiver), liquidator or administrator of a company is required to make a "prescribed part" of the floating charge realisations available for the satisfaction of unsecured debts in priority to the claims of the floating charge holder. This obligation does not apply if the floating charge realisations are less than a prescribed minimum and the relevant officeholder is of the view that the cost of making a distribution to unsecured creditors would be disproportionate to the benefits. The relevant officeholder may also apply to court for an order that the provisions of section 176A should not apply on the basis that the cost of making a distribution would be disproportionate to the benefits. The "prescribed part" is defined in the Insolvency Act 1986 (Prescribed Part) Order 2003470 to be an amount equal to 50 per cent. of the first £10,000 of floating charge realisations plus 20 per cent. of the floating charge realisations thereafter, provided that such amount may not exceed £600,000. Section 176A applies to any floating charge granted on or after 15 September 2003.

In the case of an insolvent English Insurance Company (whether carrying on life or non-life or direct or reinsurance business and whether mutual or proprietary), the application of the above rules would mean that, generally speaking, the claims of its policyholders would rank equally with those of general unsecured and unsubordinated creditors in the case of a winding up or, where applicable, an administration of the English Insurance Company.

However, the position is considerably altered as regards insurance undertakings (that are not pure reinsurers) by the RWU Regulations, which give effect in the United Kingdom to the Reorganisation and Winding-up of Insurance Undertakings Directive 2001/17/EC (the Insurance Winding Up Directive) which has been consolidated into and repealed by the

liquidator in relation to legal proceedings for the purpose of preserving, realising or getting in any of the assets of the company or (b) in certain circumstances, for example, where the holder is the proposed defendant in the legal proceedings, the consent of the court. 469 See also note 170 in respect of depositor preference in respect of English Banks. 470 SI 2003/2097.

234

Solvency II Directive471. As noted in our answer to question 20 in Part III, the Recast Insolvency Regulation does not apply to English Insurance Companies.

Title IV of the Solvency II Directive applies in respect of direct insurance undertakings (not pure reinsurers) which have their head office or (if the undertaking's head office is situated in a third country) a branch within the EEA. It confers exclusive jurisdiction over the reorganisation and winding up of direct insurance undertakings on the courts or other competent authorities of the home member state in which the head office or branch is situated472, and provides for the decisions of those authorities to be recognised throughout the EEA.

Although for the most part the domestic rules applicable in the EEA member state of the head office or branch of the insurance undertaking will apply to a reorganisation or winding up, this is subject to some qualifications. In particular, EEA member states are required to introduce one of two systems of priority:

(i) direct insurance claims (that is, not reinsurance claims) must, with respect to assets representing the technical provisions (that is, assets set aside to cover liabilities to policyholders), take absolute precedence over any other claim on the undertaking; or

(ii) direct insurance claims must, with respect to the whole of the undertaking's assets, take precedence over any other claim on the insurance undertaking with the only possible exception of:

(A) claims by employees arising from employment contracts and employment relationships;

(B) claims by public bodies on taxes;

(C) claims by social security systems; and

(D) claims on assets subject to "rights in rem".473

Whichever system is chosen, precedence may also be given to the whole or part of the winding-up expenses.474

The RWU Regulations adopt option (ii) above, so that:

(1) preferential debts, as described above and as amended by the Enterprise Act 2002, have priority over direct insurance claims; and

(2) secured debts and proprietary rights are not affected by the winding up provided that they are treated as "rights in rem" for the purposes of Title IV of the Solvency II Directive. The term "rights in rem" is not defined in Title IV of the Solvency II Directive or in the RWU Regulations, but we consider that it will cover most, if not all, proprietary rights currently recognised by English law.

The priority afforded to direct insurance claims is also preserved in respect of the "prescribed part" of the floating charge realisations that a receiver (including an administrative receiver),

471 The Solvency II Directive, art 310 and Part A of Annex VI. 472 ibid, art 268(1)(a). 473 The Solvency II Directive, art 275(1). 474 ibid, art 275(2).

235

liquidator or administrator of a company is required to make available for the satisfaction of unsecured debts in priority to the claims of the floating charge holder.475 The RWU Regulations provide that such direct insurance debts must be paid out of the prescribed part in priority to all other unsecured claims.476

Accordingly, in the case of a winding-up477 of an English Insurance Company, unsecured senior creditors of the English Insurance Company rank equally with each other but behind other creditors in the following (descending) order of priority:

(i) in relation to realisations of assets subject to a floating charge:

(A) the expenses of the winding up (including the liquidator's remuneration) so far as the assets of the English Insurance Company available for payment of general unsecured creditors are insufficient to meet them;

(B) preferential creditors (discussed above) so far as the assets of the English Insurance Company available for payment of general unsecured creditors are insufficient to meet them;

(C) unsecured creditors to the extent of the prescribed part, with creditors with direct insurance claims taking priority over other unsecured creditors in respect of the prescribed part;

(D) the floating charge holder (to the extent of the charge); and

(E) creditors with direct insurance claims (to the extent not fully satisfied under(C) above); and

(ii) in relation to realisations of unsecured assets:

(A) the expenses of the winding up (including the liquidator's remuneration);

(B) preferential creditors; and

(C) creditors with direct insurance claims.

As in the case of a holder of a fixed charge granted by an English Company, the holder of a fixed charge granted by an English Insurance Company (such as under a Security Document, subject to the discussion in relation to the characterisation thereof in this memorandum) will be paid in priority to all of the above claims to the extent of the holder's security over those assets under the fixed charge.

The RWU Regulations provide expressly that insolvency proceedings in respect of an English Insurance Company will be governed by general English insolvency law, subject to

475 The prescribed part is to be reserved pursuant to section 176A of the Insolvency Act 1986. Please refer to the discussion above on section 176A where the circumstances in which the prescribed part must be reserved are described. 476 RWU Regulations, reg 21(7). 477 Presently if an administrator of an English Insurance Company makes a distribution to creditors under paragraph 65 of Schedule B1 to the Insolvency Act 1986, the RWU Regulations do not specifically provide that he or she should give priority to direct insurance claims. The special priority to direct insurance claims only applies in the case of the winding-up of an English Insurance Company or if an administrator of an English Insurance Company makes a distribution under the powers conferred by Schedule 1 to the Insolvency Act (see the Schedule to the Insurer Administration Order). However, paragraph 65 of Schedule B1 to the Insolvency Act 1986 provides that section 175 of the Insolvency Act 1986 (which governs preferential debts) applies in an administration as it applies in a winding-up. As section 175 of the Insolvency Act 1986 is disapplied by the RWU Regulations in a winding-up, and is replaced with the priority provisions in the RWU Regulations, it is arguable that the priority rules in the RWU Regulations will apply in an administration. Amendment legislation may be required to clarify the position.

236

modification by the RWU Regulations.478 The RWU Regulations do not modify the insolvency set-off provisions applicable in a winding up and, where applicable, an administration, which therefore apply in the winding up or, as the case may be, administration of an English Insurance Company (except in respect of a Friendly Society for the reasons given in Annex 6).

Liquidation expenses, preferential claims and direct insurance claims will rank ahead of the claims of general unsecured creditors (where those unsecured claims are not preferential) after the exercise of any rights of set-off. An unsecured net amount owed by an English Insurance Company under an ISDA Master Agreement will not be a preferential debt under the RWU Regulations. Therefore a party to an ISDA Master Agreement with an English Insurance Company will rank behind preferential debts and, more importantly, behind direct insurance claims.

(c) Composites

The RWU Regulations make provision, in the case of an undertaking which is a "non-transferring" Composite (that is, a Composite the long-term business of which has not been, and is not to be, transferred as a going concern to a person who may lawfully carry out those contracts, in accordance with section 376(2) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000), for the separate application of long-term and general business assets in a winding-up to the payment of preferential debts and direct insurance liabilities.

The result is that in the case of any winding up of a non-transferring Composite on or after 20 April 2003 (or at least one which carries on direct insurance business, as the position as regards a Composite which is a pure reinsurer is unclear), the long-term and general business assets must be applied in discharge, respectively, of the long-term and general business preferential and insurance liabilities, any excess of the long-term assets being applied to meet a deficit in the general business preferential and insurance liabilities and vice versa.479

Accordingly, it is our view that, on the winding up of a non-transferring Composite, it may not be possible to net Transactions under the ISDA Master Agreement (including that represented by the Transfer Annex) entered into in connection with the Composite's long-term insurance business against Transactions entered into in connection with its general insurance business and such mingling of Transactions should be avoided. There is similar uncertainty in relation to the effectiveness of security (for example, under a Security Document) over assets relating to the English Insurance Company's long-term business to secure liabilities entered into in connection with its general business or similarly to transfer those assets pursuant to a title transfer collateral arrangement (such as the Transfer Annex) relating to its general business. We have therefore assumed, for the purposes of the analysis in this Annex 10, that all Transactions between a party and an English Insurance Company under the ISDA Master Agreement are entered into for the purposes of either (a) the long term insurance business of the English Insurance Company (in the case of an English Insurance Company that carries on long term business) or (b) its other businesses (if any), and not a mixture of both.

We note that there are additional regulatory restrictions which apply to the segregation of an English Insurance Company's assets relating to its general insurance business and its long- term insurance business, and to the application of (or creation of a mortgage or charge over)

478 RWU Regulations, regulation 8. 479 An amendment to the RWU Regulations made by regulation 2(4) of the Insurers (Reorganisation and Winding Up) (Amendment) Regulations 2004, SI 2004/546 clarified that the preferential debts should be paid after the expenses of the winding up. However, the amendment was not made to the equivalent provision applying to non-transferring Composites. We consider this is likely to be an oversight in the drafting rather than a substantive change to the law.

237

the assets of an insurer's with-profits funds, and the importance of these restrictions is explained below.

(d) Winding-up restrictions (Life Insurance Companies)

Each form of English Insurance Company may be wound up voluntarily under the Insolvency Act 1986. However, in the case of a Life Insurance Company or Composite, section 366(1) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 requires that the PRA's consent is obtained before such voluntary liquidation is commenced.

Also, on the insolvency of a Life Insurance Company or Composite, a statutory duty under section 376(2) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 is imposed upon the liquidator to carry on its long-term insurance business (unless the court otherwise orders) with a view to it being transferred to another company as a going concern. In practice, as discussed further below, this will usually result in a transfer of business under Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 or some form of arrangement being made between the liquidator and the unsecured creditors in respect of the long-term business of the insolvent English Insurance Company.

The provisions in sections 366(1) and 376(2) are intended to protect the legitimate interests of policyholders rather than non-insurance creditors, however, we do not believe that either of the provisions in section 366(1) or 376(2) would prevent, or confer a power on the PRA to prevent, the exercise by a Non-defaulting Party of its rights under the close-out netting provisions (including the application of the Transfer Annex) of the ISDA Master Agreement or otherwise prejudice the rights of a Collateral Taker under a Security Document.

(e) Schemes of arrangement

Each form of English Insurance Company may, at least in theory, be made subject to a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006. In recent years the insolvency of General Insurance Companies with substantial long tail liabilities (that is, liabilities such as those arising from asbestosis which emerge over a long period) have typically been resolved through a scheme of arrangement under section 425 of the Companies Act 1985 under which liabilities were commuted, or part paid as the assets (including reinsurance recoveries) accrue, rather than by a winding up. A smaller number of schemes have also been drawn up for Life Insurance Companies.

The Companies Act 2006 scheme of arrangement provisions are, for present purposes, broadly the same as those in the Companies Act 1985.480 The RWU Regulations do not directly apply to such schemes. However, in Marconi Corporation plc v Marconi plc,481 Lindsay J observed that "where the scheme is in practical terms an alternative to a liquidation or administration, it is not wrong… to bear in mind, in the composition of classes of creditors, how the respective creditors would have been treated in the alternative insolvency". The priority rules laid down in the RWU Regulations for liquidations may therefore have an indirect impact on distributions though schemes. Prior to the RWU Regulations coming fully into force, this point was alluded to by Lloyd J in Re Pan Atlantic Insurance Company Limited482 where he suggested that, although not relevant in that case ("as it is not clear that there are any creditors who are not insurance creditors"), the introduction of the RWU

480 As far as we are aware, to date there has been only one scheme of arrangement for an insurance company under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006, which is a solvent scheme of arrangement for The Scottish Lion Insurance Company Limited. The explanatory statement for the scheme, which is required by section 897 of the Companies Act 2006, was issued on 22 December 2008. 481 [2003] EWHC 663 (Ch). 482 [2003] EWHC 1969 (Ch), [2003] BCC 847.

238

Regulations would have to be taken into account in relation to insurance companies with insurance and non-insurance creditors for purposes of composing classes of creditors for the scheme.483

A Non-defaulting Party will generally have sufficient time, following notice of the meeting of creditors to consider the scheme, to exercise its rights under the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement, before the scheme is approved by a specified majority of the creditors (or relevant class of creditors) and sanctioned by the court, in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006, and becomes binding on all the creditors, at least where the Non-defaulting Party has a credit monitoring process in place. (It should be noted that there may be some circumstances in which it may be advantageous for a Non-defaulting Party not to close out its position prior to a scheme of arrangement being sanctioned by the court. Professional advice should always be taken when a scheme of arrangement is proposed in this context.)

We do not believe that an English court would sanction a scheme of arrangement that would prejudice non-insurance creditors. Although the Companies Act 2006 provides no guidance to the court as to what factors should guide its decision whether or not to sanction a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006, it is clear that the purpose of the court being required to sanction the scheme is to ensure, among other things, that the process is fair to the members of each class.

(f) Company voluntary arrangements

An English Insurance Company that is an English Company or a C/CB Society may enter into a CVA with its creditors under Part I of the Insolvency Act 1986, as an alternative to a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006. This option is not, however, available to an English Insurance Company organised as a Friendly Society, Statutory Corporation or Chartered Corporation for reasons given in relation to each such type of entity elsewhere in this memorandum.

There are certain differences between the rules applicable to schemes of arrangement under the Companies Act 2006 and CVAs under the Insolvency Act 1986, but they are not material to our conclusions in relation to the issues discussed in this Annex. CVAs are considered not to be well-adapted for use with an English Insurance Company and are therefore relatively rare in this sector. Although section 1A of the Insolvency Act 1986 provides for a moratorium in relation to certain companies proposing to enter into a CVA, English Insurance Companies are expressly excluded from eligibility for the moratorium.484

As in the case of a scheme of arrangement, a Non-defaulting Party will generally have sufficient time, following notice of the qualifying decision procedure to approve the company voluntary arrangement, to exercise its rights under the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement (including the Transfer Annex), before the scheme is approved by the specified majority of the creditors as required by the Insolvency Act 1986, at least where the Non-defaulting Party has a credit monitoring process in place. Court sanction is not required, but an aggrieved creditor has a limited right to challenge the CVA if it feels it has been unduly prejudiced or there has been a material irregularity in relation to the CVA.

(g) Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000

483 In the Pan Atlantic case (n 482), Lloyd J was asked to consider the potential effect of the 2003 version of the RWU Regulations, which were repealed and replaced by the RWU Regulations in 2004. The differences between the two versions are not relevant to the point under discussion. 484 The Insolvency Act 1986, para 2 of Sch A1.

239

Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 sets out provisions for insurance business transfer schemes.485 An insurance business transfer scheme is a scheme under which the whole or part of the business of an English Insurance Company may be transferred to another body, subject to certain conditions and exclusions. Part VII applies to any English Insurance Company other than a Friendly Society.486

Under section 104 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, an insurance business transfer scheme may be effected only if an order has been made by the court sanctioning the scheme under section 111(1) of the Act. Section 107 of the Act governs the making of an application for an order sanctioning the scheme. The application may be made by the English Insurance Company, the transferee or both. If the court sanctions the scheme by order under section 111(1), then certain other provisions of Part VII apply, including sections 112 and 112A.

Section 112(1)487 sets out the powers of the court in relation to a business transfer scheme, which may be made by the court in its order under section 111(1) sanctioning the scheme or by any subsequent order, as the court thinks fit. Section 112A provides that any right of a person to terminate, modify, acquire or claim an interest or right to treat an interest or right as terminated or modified in consequence of anything done or likely to be done in connection with a scheme under Part VII is not enforceable until after the court has made its order under section 112(1) and is then enforceable only to the extent permitted by the order.

Section 112(1) gives the court broad powers to make any provision it sees fit to give effect to the transfer and to what is "necessary to secure that the scheme is fully and effectively carried out". In particular the court may provide for the transfer of any property or liabilities of the insurer without any requirement for the consent of any third party.

Accordingly, an order under section 112(1) could in theory prejudice a contracting party to a Credit Support Document. However, we do not believe that an English court would make an order that would (a) prejudice the ability of such party as the Collateral Taker under a Security Document or the Transferee under a Transfer Annex to exercise its rights against an English Insurance Company or (b) otherwise materially and adversely affect the rights of such party as Collateral Taker or Transferee, as the case may be. See also Annex 10 to the ISDA Netting Opinion for the impact on the ISDA Master Agreement.

(h) Reduction of contracts

Section 377 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000488 gives the court the power to reduce the value of one or more of an insolvent English Insurance Company's contracts as an alternative to winding-up. We do not, however, believe that this power has been exercised in any significant number of cases.

Section 377 would not, in any event, appear to prevent, or give a court the power to prevent, the exercise by a party contracting with an English Insurance Company of its rights under a Credit Support Document. A remote possibility exists that it might be used to reduce the value of a subsequent net claim under the ISDA Master Agreement if owed by the English Insurance Company. We are not aware that the power has ever been exercised in relation to the ISDA Master Agreement or any comparable financial market agreement.

485 Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 also deals with banking business transfer schemes, as discussed in Annex 1. 486 Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, s 105(3) excludes a Friendly Society from the scope of Part VII of the Act. Transfers in respect of Friendly Societies are made under the Friendly Societies Act 1992. 487 The remainder of section 112 clarifies and, in certain respects, extends the scope of the court's power under section 112(1). 488 This provision does not apply to a Friendly Society. See note 463.

240

(i) Valuation of policies

The Winding Up Rules489 make provision as to the method of valuing policies of an English Insurance Company that has gone into liquidation. The resulting values are likely to reflect the amount of the reserves that an English Insurance Company should have established to meet its insurance liabilities as well as the values which would in any event have been placed on the policies under the general insolvency rules. They should therefore facilitate an assessment of the assets likely to be available at any time to meet the claims of general unsecured creditors.

(j) Compensation scheme

Under Part XV of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, the FSCS has been established under which eligible persons may be compensated where authorised firms are unable, or are likely to be unable, to satisfy protected claims against them. (In the case of an English Insurance Company, the FSCS may alternatively assist by providing financial assistance to the English Insurance Company concerned or by arranging for the transfer of policies to another English Insurance Company.)

In the case of English Insurance Companies, protected claims are claims arising from risks covered by direct long-term insurance policies and (with certain exceptions) direct general insurance policies; and eligible persons are policyholders under such policies (provided that, in the case of general insurance, they are individuals or partnerships), where the risks or commitments insured under the policies are situated in the UK, or in some cases in the EEA, the Channel Islands or the Isle of Man.

The level of compensation payable by the FSCS differs according to the type of insurance policy concerned: when the insurance is compulsory (for example, third party car insurance), full compensation is paid; for non-compulsory general insurance (for example, home and contents insurance) and for long-term insurance policies, 90 per cent. of the amount of the claim is paid (calculated in accordance with Scheme rules).

The FSCS will normally be subrogated to the claims of policyholders to whom it pays compensation (including, under the RWU Regulations, their priority), so the claims of unsecured general creditors should be unaffected. However, the participation of the FSCS in a winding-up may affect (possibly expedite) the progress of winding-up proceedings to some extent.

The Insurer Administration Order imposes a duty on the administrator of an insurer to assist the FSCS in administering the compensation scheme in relation to contracts of insurance, and in securing continuity of insurance in relation to contracts of long-term insurance.

(k) Banking Act– exclusion of insurers

Although the Banking Act was apparently not intended to apply to English Insurance Companies, any English Insurance Company with permission under Part 4A of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 to carry on the regulated activity of accepting deposits falls within the definition of "bank" in section 2(1) of the Banking Act and is therefore prima facie within its scope.490 In our experience, most English Insurance Companies have permission to accept deposits.

489 The Winding Up Rules do not apply to a Friendly Society. See note 463. 490 "Bank" is defined in section 2(1) of the Banking Act as "a UK institution which has permission under Part 4A of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 to carry on the regulated activity of accepting deposits". A "UK institution" is defined in section 2(3) of the Banking Act as "an institution which is incorporated in, or formed under the law of any part of, the United Kingdom".

241

Section 2(2)(c) of the Banking Act gives the Treasury the power to exclude a class of institutions from the definition of "bank". The Treasury exercised this power, by an order491 that came into force on 7 January 2010, to exclude any institution with permission under Part 4A of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 to effect or carry out contracts of insurance as principal. Therefore the Banking Act does not apply to any English Insurance Company falling within the scope of this memorandum.

Regulatory provisions

Section 138E of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 provides that no contravention of a rule made by the Regulators makes any Transaction void or unenforceable. Accordingly, no breach of the provisions of the PRA Rulebook or the FCA Handbook by an English Insurance Company would prevent the other party from taking proceedings to enforce the ISDA Master Agreement or any Credit Support Document against the English Insurance Company. However, the Regulators enjoy wide powers under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 to make rules applicable to authorised firms (including English Insurance Companies), to supervise their businesses and to take enforcement action, including power to impose individual requirements on an English Insurance Company where there has been a breach of rules or there is a perceived threat to the interests of its policyholders.

In addition, the Regulators and the Secretary of State have powers under Part XXV of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 to seek an injunction from the High Court (in England and Wales) restraining a contravention of a requirement imposed by or under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, or restraining the disposition or dealing of assets, by a person who has contravened a requirement imposed by or under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, or a person knowingly concerned in such a contravention. Accordingly, there is a theoretical possibility that, in circumstances where an English Insurance Company has breached a requirement imposed by or under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, and where the other party was "knowingly concerned" in such a breach by the English Insurance Company, the PRA could apply for an injunction restraining the English Insurance Company or the other party from acting in contravention of such requirement or disposing of assets. Restitution awards are also possible in similar circumstances.

While it is unlikely that the Regulators would exercise their powers in such a way as to prejudice directly the interests of non-insurance creditors (even in circumstances where an agreement has been entered into in breach of the rules), it may be that an exercise of their powers could in certain circumstances affect the ability of the English Insurance Company to comply with its obligations under the ISDA Master Agreement or a Credit Support Document. Accordingly, although breach of the PRA Rulebook and the FCA Handbook does not of itself call into question the enforceability of the ISDA Master Agreement or any Credit Support Document, a breach could create circumstances which enable the Regulators to invoke powers, the exercise of which could be prejudicial to the English Insurance Company's and the other party's interests. This could include action by the Regulators which would curtail the income or capitalisation of the English Insurance Company (impairing its ability to pay) or affect the reputational standing of the English Insurance Company or the other party. We therefore outline below relevant parts of the PRA Rulebook and FCA Handbook that apply to an English Insurance Company which concern segregation of assets and which are therefore relevant to arrangements which contemplate netting and security.

(a) Separation of long-term insurance business of a Composite

Prior to the implementation of the Solvency II regime on 1 January 2016, the PRA Rulebook contained provisions:

491 The Banking Act 2009 (Exclusion of Insurers) Order 2010, SI 2010/35.

242

(i) requiring an English Insurance Company to apply assets held in respect of its long- term insurance business only for the purposes of that long-term insurance business (INSPRU 1.5.30);

(ii) requiring an English Insurance Company to maintain a separate accounting record in respect of long-term insurance business (INSPRU 1.5.23);

(iii) requiring an English Insurance Company to separately identify and allocate receipts of its long-term insurance business (premiums and investment income) and the assets representing those receipts to a fund (known as the "long-term insurance fund") (INSPRU 1.5.24); and

(iv) preventing an English Insurance Company from agreeing to or allowing any mortgage or charge on assets held in respect of its long-term insurance business other than in respect of a long term liability (INSPRU 1.5.31).

The effect of these provisions was to segregate the long-term insurance business of an English Insurance Company from its other business and accordingly, prior to the implementation of the Solvency II regime, it would have been a breach of INSPRU 1.5.30 for an English Insurance Company to permit the netting of Transactions entered into in connection with the English Insurance Company's long-term insurance business against Transactions entered into in respect of its other business, and consequently advisable to avoid such mingling of Transactions.492 Equally, it would have been a breach of INSPRU 1.5.31 for an English Insurance Company to grant security over assets pertaining to a long-term insurance fund to secure obligations entered into in connection with its other business or similarly to transfer those assets under a title transfer collateral arrangement (such as the Transfer Annex) relating to its other business.

Following the implementation of the Solvency II regime, these rules have ceased to apply, and, in their place, rules have been introduced in the "Composites" chapter of the PRA Rulebook which require an English Insurance Company within the Solvency II regime that is a Composite to separately manage its general insurance business activities and long-term insurance business activities in such a way that:

(i) its long-term insurance business and its general insurance business are distinct from one another (Composites 2.2(1));

(ii) the interests of policyholders of contracts of long-term insurance are not prejudiced by activities relating to the firm's general insurance business and the interests of policyholders of contracts of general insurance are not prejudiced by activities relating to the firm's long-term insurance business (Composites 2.2(2));

(iii) profits from the Composite's long-term insurance business benefit policyholders of long-term insurance as if the Composite was engaged only in long-term insurance business (Composites 2.2(3));

(iv) separate accounts relating to its long-term insurance business and its general insurance business are maintained (Composites 3.2).

Crucially, the rule (previously set out in INSPRU 1.5.30) prohibiting the application of assets of the long-term insurance fund to business other than long-term insurance business has

492 It will normally be desirable to ensure that Transactions are all, in fact, entered into with, and expressed to be allocated to, the English Insurance Company's long-term insurance business, since the preponderance of the English Insurance Company's assets are likely to be held in its long-term insurance fund.

243

ceased to apply, following the implementation of the Solvency II regime (and, in fact, the potential application of capital resources attributable to long-term insurance business to other parts of a Composite's business is contemplated in Composites 4.6).

Nonetheless, in practical terms, it is likely to be difficult for a counterparty to be able to evaluate due observance of the rules in the Composites chapter of the PRA Rulebook in connection with a transaction entered into by a Composite which envisages netting, unless that transaction is limited to its long-term insurance business or its general insurance business (but not both). In addition, as discussed above, the RWU Regulations continue to apply following the implementation of the Solvency II regime, such that, on the winding up of a non-transferring Composite, it may not be possible to net transactions entered into in connection with a Composite's long-term insurance business against transactions entered into in connection with its general insurance business.

On this basis, notwithstanding the introduction of the Solvency II regime, it would, in our view, be prudent to avoid mingling of transactions between the long-term insurance fund and the Composite's other business. We therefore continue to recommend that separate ISDA Master Agreements and Credit Support Documents are entered into in relation to the long- term business and the general business. In this way Transactions relating to long-term insurance business are governed by one ISDA Master Agreement and Transactions relating to general business are governed by a separate ISDA Master Agreement. Assets used as Collateral under the relevant Credit Support Documents in respect of a given ISDA Master Agreement should also pertain to the business relevant to that ISDA Master Agreement. This would minimise the risk that any provision of the Composites part of the PRA Rulebook is breached.

(b) With-profits funds

If an English Insurance Company with long-term business only, or the long-term business segment of Composites, effects or carries out with-profits business, additional segregation requirements apply in relation to the assets comprising the English Insurance Company's with-profits fund. From 1 January 2016, an English Insurance Company effecting or carrying out with-profits insurance business is subject to the rules and guidance in the FCA Handbook relating to with-profits funds (COBS 20.1A). COBS 20.1A requires an English Insurance Company within the Solvency II regime to maintain separate accounting records for each of its with-profits funds and to ensure that the assets in its with-profits funds are separately identified and allocated to the relevant with-profits fund at all times. An English Insurance Company which carries out with-profits business must apply assets in a with-profits fund for the purposes of the business in that with-profits fund only (COBS 20.1A.10) and must not transfer assets out of a with-profits fund unless the assets represent a surplus (COBS 20.1A.8). In addition, an English Insurance Company which carries out with-profits insurance business is prevented from agreeing to, or allowing, any mortgage or charge on the assets in any of its with-profits fund other than in respect of that with-profits business (COBS 20.1A.11).

Pursuant to COBS 20.1A.2, the same treatment under COBS 20.1A applies in respect of each sub-fund of a with-profits fund, so that each sub-fund is treated as a distinct with-profits fund. A sub-fund may arise where an English Insurance Company which carries out with-profits insurance business identifies particular assets as forming a distinct part of its with-profits fund and restricts participation in the profits or other experience of that distinct part of the fund to a particular category of with-profits policies, for example as a consequence of a court order under Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 following a transfer of insurance business.

244

As a consequence of the provisions of COBS 20.1A, the assets of a with-profits fund will normally not be available to discharge any claim of a creditor of the English Insurance Company that arises from a Transaction not entered into for the purposes of the business in that with-profits fund. Accordingly, in the case of Transactions under an ISDA Master Agreement with an English Insurance Company which carries out with-profits business it is likely to result in a breach of the relevant rules under COBS 20.1A for an English Insurance Company which carries out with-profits insurance business to permit the netting of Transactions entered into in connection with its with-profits fund against Transactions entered into in connection with its other business, and therefore such mingling of Transactions should be avoided. The same would apply as regards granting security over assets of a with-profits fund to secure obligations entered into in connection with its other business or similarly transferring such assets under a title transfer collateral arrangement (such as the Transfer Annex) relevant to that other business.

The implication of this is that, in order for the ISDA Master Agreement to be for the purpose of the long-term insurance business in the with-profits fund, the Transactions to which they relate must also be for such purpose. We think that, provided that the Transactions themselves are legal, valid, binding and enforceable and are being entered into in order to hedge an exposure in relation to the long-term insurance with-profits fund, the entry into of the ISDA Master Agreement and any related Credit Support Document could be viewed as for the purpose of the long-term insurance for the purpose of the business in the with-profits fund to the extent that it supports such Transactions.

In our view the requirements set out in COBS 20.1A will continue to apply to an English Insurance Company carrying out with-profits insurance business in liquidation or provisional liquidation which is a "transferring insurer", that is, its long-term business being carried on with a view to its being transferred to another company in circumstances where the liquidator or provisional liquidator causes the insurer to continue its business prior to such transfer.

(c) Imposition of requirements by the Regulators under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000

An English Insurance Company may be subject to requirements imposed by the FCA or the PRA in accordance with sections 55L and 55M of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 in connection with the English Insurance Company's application for the Part 4A permission or for variation of such permission. Such requirements may extend to activities which are not regulated activities493, and may be placed on the assets of the English Insurance Company. Assets requirements are requirements that:

(i) prohibit the disposal of, or other dealing with, any of the English Insurance Company's assets (whether in the United Kingdom or elsewhere) or restrict such disposals or dealings, or

(ii) require that all or any of the English Insurance Company's assets, or all or any assets belonging to consumers but held by the English Insurance Company or to its order, must be transferred to and held by a trustee approved by the appropriate regulator.

In particular, section 55P of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 provides that where a requirement of the kind referred to in (ii) above is imposed on a person and while it is in force, no assets held in accordance with such requirement may be released or dealt with except with the consent of the Regulator which imposed the requirement (section 55P(7) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000) and any charge (to the extent that it confers

493 Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, s 55N.

245

security over the assets) created by the person over any of its assets held by a trustee in accordance with such requirement is void against the liquidator and any creditor of the English Insurance Company (section 55P(8) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000).

Accordingly, in the case of Transactions under an ISDA Master Agreement with an English Insurance Company which is subject to an asset requirement, it is likely to result in a breach of the relevant provisions of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 by the English Insurance Company if the entering into or the netting of the Transactions involves disposal or release of, or other dealing with, assets pertaining to an asset requirement. A breach of section 55P(7) further constitutes an offence with fine on summary conviction. Equally, it may not be possible to enforce as Collateral Taker any security granted by the English Insurance Company if the security is created over assets pertaining to a requirement of the kind referred to in (ii) above. We therefore assume, for the purposes of the analysis in this Annex 10, that the English Insurance Company is not subject to the exercise by either the PRA or the FCA of any powers conferred on such regulator by sections 55J to 55P (inclusive) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (nor have such powers become exercisable in respect of the English Insurance Company), in each case, in such a way which might affect the ability of the English Insurance Company to perform any or all of its obligations under any Credit Support Document.

(d) Insurance business limitation

Rule 9.1 in the "Conditions Governing Business" part of the PRA Rulebook (Conditions Governing Business) is designed to inhibit English Insurance Companies from entering into business other than insurance business, due to a concern that any such other business may fail and bring down the insurance business with it.

Rule 9.1(1) provides as follows:

"A firm, other than a pure reinsurer, must not carry on any commercial business other than insurance business and activities directly arising from that business."

The scope of rule 9.1 of Conditions Governing Business should be noted as it applies to activities wherever carried on. This means that even if performance under the ISDA Master Agreement occurs outside the United Kingdom, rule 9.1 of Conditions Governing Business would continue to apply.

Two questions arise from this provision. First, would the entering into of derivative transactions and related Credit Support Documents by an English Insurance Company be regarded as an activity "directly arising from" insurance business (or, in the case of a pure reinsurer, would it be regarded as a "related operation")? Secondly, if an English Insurance Company enters into derivative transactions in breach of rule 9.1 of Conditions Governing Business, what would be the effect on the transaction and the rights of the other party?

There is no meaning attributed to "directly arising from" in the PRA Rulebook. However, it seems to us that the phrase should encompass all activities undertaken by an English Insurance Company for the purposes of enabling it to carry out its obligations under contracts of insurance which it has written and that this will include the investment of funds received in the course of its insurance business. There is strong authority from the taxation field to the effect that the investment of funds received by an English Insurance Company will form part and parcel of its insurance business.494

494 See Liverpool and London Globe Insurance Company v Bennett [1913] AC 610 (HL), 621 (opinion of Lord Mersey).

246

More specifically, support for the view that English Insurance Companies may properly enter into derivative contracts and related Credit Support Documents in relation to their insurance business is given by rule 5.2 of the "Investments" part of the PRA Rulebook (Investments). This clearly envisages English Insurance Companies entering into derivative contracts and provides guidance on the admissibility of those contracts for regulatory valuation purposes. It does not, however, expressly state that English Insurance Companies can enter into Transactions, Credit Support Documents or agreements similar to the ISDA Master Agreement.

Based on this, we think that an English Insurance Company could enter into the Credit Support Documents in appropriate circumstances. Broadly, we think that Credit Support Documents would be entered into in appropriate circumstances if the underlying Transactions they relate to are entered into for the purposes of efficient portfolio management or the reduction of investment risk in compliance with the requirements of rule 5.2(1) of Investments in relation to the English Insurance Company's long-term insurance business and are likely to be treated as "directly arising" from its insurance business for the purposes of rule 9.1 (or as "related operations" for the purposes of rule 9.2) of Conditions Governing Business.

Any concern of any party as to a breach of the rules is likely to be confined to the possibility that such a breach will result in action by the Regulators which would curtail the income or capitalisation of the English Insurance Company or that it may affect the reputational standing of the English Insurance Company or, conceivably, the other party.

RWU Regulations

Aspects of the RWU Regulations have been discussed in the context of the analysis above. For consistency with other annexes of this memorandum, we note here that, as with the Winding Up Regulations, the RWU Regulations contain a number of derogations to the application of English law in the context of a winding up or reorganisation of a UK insurer that may be relevant when considering the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents. Regulation 41 (Third parties' rights in rem) mentioned above states that a relevant reorganisation or a relevant winding up shall not affect the rights in rem of creditors or third parties in respect of assets belonging to the insurer situated within the territory of an EEA state at the relevant time. Other derogations of potential application to the Credit Support Documents include regulation 43 (Creditor's rights to set off), regulation 45 (Detrimental acts pursuant to the law of an EEA State) and regulation 46 (Protection of third party purchasers).

1. Security Documents

For the reasons discussed above, we assume that all Transactions between a party and an English Insurance Company under the ISDA Master Agreement are entered into for the purposes of, and all Collateral under the Security Documents relates to, either (i) the long-term insurance business of the English Insurance Company (in the case of an English Insurance Company that carries on long-term business) or (ii) its other businesses (if any), and not a mixture of both.

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 10 and, where applicable, each of Annexes 6, 7, 8 and 9 and subject to the analysis set out in those Annexes, we are of the view that our analysis relating to the enforceability against a Security Collateral Provider:

(i) of the Non-IM Security Documents in Part III.3 of this memorandum;

247

(ii) of the IM Security Documents in Parts IV.3, IV.4 and IV.5 of this memorandum; and

(iii) of the Clearing System IM Documents in Parts V.3, V.4 and V.5 of this memorandum,

would apply in circumstances where the Security Collateral Provider is an English Insurance Company.

2. Transfer Annexes

We set out below our conclusions in relation to the enforceability of the Transfer Annexes against an English Insurance Company established in any of the legal forms falling within the scope of this memorandum. For the reasons discussed above, we assume that all Transactions between a party and an English Insurance Company under the ISDA Master Agreement are entered into for the purposes of, and all Collateral under the relevant Transfer Annex relates to, either (i) the long-term insurance business of the English Insurance Company (in the case of an English Insurance Company that carries on long-term business) or (ii) its other businesses (if any), and not a mixture of both.

(a) Winding up

If an English Insurance Company were subject to winding up under the rules that would normally apply to an English Insurance Company established in its relevant legal form, then, in our view, the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against that English Insurance Company for the reasons we give in Part III.3(3)(a) of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to an English Company on the basis that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement do not involve contractual set-off (other than to the limited extent that it includes Unpaid Amounts owed by either party that became payable prior to the operation of Section 6(c)(ii) of the ISDA Master Agreement, as discussed in the ISDA Netting Opinion) but simply represent an accounting of rights and liabilities under a single agreement following the designation or deemed occurrence of an Early Termination Date (sometimes referred to as the "flawed asset" approach to close-out netting).

If, however, the court were to construe the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement as operating by way of contractual set-off rather than pursuant to the single agreement (or "flawed asset") approach described above, we also consider that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against the English Insurance Company for the reasons set out in Part III.3(3)(a) of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to an English Company.495

(b) Administration

If an English Insurance Company, other than a Friendly Society (which cannot be made subject to administration proceedings), were to enter into administration proceedings, the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against that English Insurance Company on the same basis as the close-out netting provisions would be enforceable against an English Company, as set out in Part III.3(3)(b) of the ISDA Netting Opinion.

495 In relation to Friendly Societies see the additional analysis in Annex 6 in respect of the absence of insolvency rules for such entities.

248

(c) Company voluntary arrangement

If an English Insurance Company that is an English Company or a C/CB Society were to enter into a CVA under Part I of the Insolvency Act 1986, the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against that English Insurance Company on the same basis as the close-out netting provisions would be enforceable against an English Company, as set out in Part III.3(3)(c) of the ISDA Netting Opinion.

(d) Scheme of arrangement

If an English Insurance Company were to enter into a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006, the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against the English Insurance Company on the same basis as the close-out netting provisions would be enforceable against an English Company, as set out in Part III.3(3)(d) of the ISDA Netting Opinion.

(e) Conclusion

Under the Transfer Annexes, the parties to the ISDA Master Agreement transfer Eligible Credit Support or Equivalent Credit Support to each other from time to time based on the net exposure of one party to the other party at the relevant time in respect of Transactions under the ISDA Master Agreement, possibly subject to certain thresholds and adjustments agreed between the parties and specified in the relevant Transfer Annex.

If an Early Termination Date is designated by a Non-defaulting Party or deemed to occur under Section 6(a) of the ISDA Master Agreement then, under Paragraph 6 of the relevant Transfer Annex, the Credit Support Balance or Credit Support Balance (VM), as applicable, as at the Early Termination Date will be included as an Unpaid Amount in the calculation of the net amount to be paid under the close-out netting provisions. As discussed above (and subject to the qualifications contained in the ISDA Netting Opinion), we believe that the close-out netting provisions are enforceable against an insolvent English Insurance Company.

In addition to the arguments above, if the Transfer Annex forms part of a financial collateral arrangement under the FCA Regulations as discussed in Part II above, regulation 12 provides that a close-out netting provision shall, subject to paragraph (2), take effect in accordance with its terms notwithstanding that the collateral- provider or collateral-taker under the arrangement is subject to winding-up proceedings or reorganisation measures.

Accordingly, on the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum, as modified and supplemented by this Annex 10 and each of Annexes 6, 7, 8 and 9 and subject to the analysis set out in those Annexes, we are of the view that our conclusions in Part VI.3 of this memorandum relating to the Transfer Annexes apply equally to an English Insurance Company.

249

ANNEX 11

STANDARD CHARTERED BANK

In this Annex 11, we set out our views regarding the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents in the event that resolution action or insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of Standard Chartered Bank.

1. Legal form and regulatory status of Standard Chartered Bank

Standard Chartered Bank was incorporated in England with limited liability by royal charter in 1853 as The Chartered Bank of India, Australia and China, changing its name to The Chartered Bank in 1956 and to Standard Chartered Bank in 1985.

Standard Chartered Bank is currently governed by a royal charter, bye-laws and rules dated 1 January 1985. The Royal Charter was most recently amended on 22 March 2005 (the Charter).

Standard Chartered Bank is therefore a Chartered Corporation. Standard Chartered Bank is therefore not an English Bank as defined in this memorandum. It is, however, a Bank/Credit Institution as defined in Appendix B.

Although Standard Chartered Bank is not registered under the Companies Act 2006, a number of provisions of the Companies Act 2006 apply to it as an "unregistered company" pursuant to section 1043 of the Companies Act 2006 and the Unregistered Companies Regulations 2009496, which are made under that section.

Standard Chartered Bank appears in the records of the registrar of companies as a chartered corporation under reference number ZC000018 with its principal office at 1 Basinghall Avenue, London, EC2V 5DD.

According to the register of persons authorised to conduct regulated activities maintained by the FCA and the PRA,497 Standard Chartered Bank is an authorised person under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 with permission under Part 4A of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 to engage in the regulated activity of accepting deposits (Financial Services Register number 114276).

2. Conclusion

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by Annex 1, Annex 9 and this Annex 11, we are of the view that our conclusions in this memorandum would also apply to Standard Chartered Bank, including in the event that insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of Standard Chartered Bank or Standard Chartered Bank becomes subject to the SRR or a transfer scheme under Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000.

3. Analysis

3.1 Insolvency Proceedings in respect of Standard Chartered Bank

Standard Chartered Bank is a Chartered Corporation and therefore, except as otherwise stated below, the insolvency proceedings set out in respect of a Chartered Corporation at Annex 9

496 SI 2009/2436. 497 The Financial Services Register may be consulted at . The information in the text was confirmed by reference to the Financial Services Register on that website on 13 November 2018.

250

will apply to Standard Chartered Bank. As Standard Chartered Bank is an English Bank, paragraph 2.1 of Annex 1 would also apply relating to the powers of the FCA and the PRA on an insolvency.

However, as Standard Chartered Bank is a bank it is not subject to the Recast Insolvency Regulation and therefore it would only be wound up on a compulsory basis under section 221 of the Insolvency Act (and not on a voluntary basis).

3.2 Winding up by revocation of Charter

As noted in Annex 9, in addition to statutory insolvency proceedings, Standard Chartered Bank could be wound up under the Charter498 in the following circumstances:

(a) as a result of the revocation of the Charter under Provision 17 thereof, by the Crown:

(i) on any suspension of payments by Standard Chartered Bank for any continuous period of sixty days or any number of days at intervals that amount altogether to sixty days within one year;

(ii) if the Commissioners of Her Majesty's Treasury report to the Crown that Standard Chartered Bank has not complied with the Charter; or

(iii) if it appears to the Crown that there is any other good and sufficient reason; or

(b) under Bye-Law 140 of the Charter, by Special Resolution of the members (shareholders) of Standard Chartered Bank on the recommendation of its Court of directors (in effect, its board of directors).

Under the Charter, the Court of directors of Standard Chartered Bank has the full power to carry out the winding up of the affairs of Standard Chartered Bank "by all necessary ways and means", and all powers conferred by the Charter on Standard Chartered Bank as a body corporate remain exercisable by the Court of directors. Under Provision 20 of the Charter, if the Charter is revoked, the following will occur:

(x) the property of Standard Chartered Bank will be converted into money, the debts due to Standard Chartered Bank will be collected and unpaid calls on shares will be collected;

(y) the monies collected as described in (x) will be applied in paying the debts and liabilities of Standard Chartered Bank "in due course of Law" (which we interpret to refer to all applicable English law, including English insolvency law, and any applicable foreign law, including foreign insolvency law to the extent it applies to a branch of Standard Chartered Bank that is subject to winding up under that foreign insolvency law);499 and

(z) any surplus monies after payment of the debts and liabilities of Standard Chartered Bank would be divided among the members of Standard Chartered Bank in accordance with their rights and priorities.

498 See Provision 20 of the Charter and Bye-Law 141. 499 Of course the Winding Up Directive would prevent there being any such proceedings in relation to a branch of Standard Chartered Bank in any other EEA member state. But such proceedings could be opened in relation to a branch in a jurisdiction outside the EEA, if local law in the branch jurisdiction would permit or require this.

251

Provision 20 broadly reflects the functions of a liquidator in a winding up of an English Company, as set out in section 143 of the Insolvency Act 1986. However, the grounds for winding up Standard Chartered Bank under Provision 17 and Bye-Law 140 of the Charter are not consistent with the normal grounds for winding up under the Insolvency Act 1986, and there is no clear authority on how this inconsistency would be resolved.

We believe that it is highly unlikely that Standard Chartered Bank would be wound up under these provisions of the Charter, given that a bank of the size of Standard Chartered Bank would almost certainly enter the special resolution regime under the Banking Act if it were to fail. If that did not occur for any reason, the next most likely outcome would be that it to be wound up under section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986 as an unregistered company. Rather than exercise its rights under the Charter, the Crown would almost certainly defer to the PRA or its successor as the principal regulator of Standard Chartered Bank for such purposes, and the regulator would almost certainly insist that the winding up of Standard Chartered Bank be carried out in accordance with the provisions of the Banking Act or the Insolvency Act 1986 referred to above.

Finally, even in the unlikely event that Standard Chartered Bank were wound up under the Charter as described in this paragraph 3.2 of this Annex 11, we do not believe that there is anything in the Charter or in applicable law that would permit the Court of directors of Standard Chartered Bank to take any action that would have a material adverse effect on the operation of the Credit Support Documents.

3.3 Scheme of arrangement

As set out in Annex 9 it is possible that a Chartered Corporation, such as Standard Chartered Bank, could be made subject to a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006.

Standard Chartered Bank is incorporated by royal charter, has its principal office in England and has its principal or home regulators in England, namely, the FCA and the PRA. Given those circumstances, it seems sufficiently clear to us that Standard Chartered Bank would fall within clause (b) of the definition of "company" set out at Annex 9.

3.4 Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000

The provisions of Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, which are described in Part 2.2 of Annex 1 in relation to an English Bank, would also apply to Standard Chartered Bank. Our analysis of the effect of Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 on the Credit Support Documents in relation to an English Bank would apply equally in relation to Standard Chartered Bank, without additional qualification.

3.5 Banking Act

Standard Chartered Bank falls within the definition of "bank" in section 2 of the Banking Act. Therefore each of the following parts of the Banking Act apply to Standard Chartered Bank to the same extent as to an English Bank, as described in paragraph 2.3 of Annex 1 to this memorandum, namely, Part 1 (special resolution regime), Part 2 (bank insolvency) and Part 3 (bank administration).

We assume that Standard Chartered Bank holds client assets. Given its permissions and the fact it is incorporated in England, Standard Chartered Bank would therefore be an "investment bank" and is also subject to Special Administration (Bank Insolvency) and Special Administration (Bank Administration) assuming that it does have eligible depositors.

252

However, if Standard Chartered Bank has no depositors that are eligible for compensation under the FSCS, Special Administration (Bank Insolvency) will not apply and Investment Bank Special Administration may apply instead.

Therefore our analysis in paragraph 2.3 of Annex 1 to this memorandum in respect of an English Bank in the event of its becoming subject to the SRR in Part 1 of the Banking Act or being made subject to the Bank Insolvency Procedure, the Bank Administration Procedure, Special Administration (Bank Insolvency), Special Administration (Bank Administration) or Investment Bank Special Administration applies equally to Standard Chartered Bank, without additional qualification.

3.6 Standard Chartered Bank and the Winding Up Regulations

Standard Chartered Bank falls within the definition of "UK credit institution" in the Winding Up Regulations and is subject to the Winding Up Regulations on the same basis as an English Bank. See paragraph 2.1 of Annex 1 and Appendix D of the ISDA Netting Opinion in respect of the treatment of New York law governed ISDA Master Agreements. See also paragraph 2.4 of Part 1 of Annex 1 hereto for additional discussion of the application of the various derogations in the Winding Up Regulations to the Credit Support Documents.

3.7 Standard Chartered Bank and the FCA Regulations

See paragraph 2.5 of Part 1 of Annex 1 hereto in relation to the application of the FCA Regulations to the additional insolvency proceedings discussed at paragraph 3.5 above and the interaction between the SRR and the FCA Regulations.

4. Security Documents

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by Annex 1, Annex 9 and this Annex 11 and subject to the analysis set out in those Annexes, we are of the view that our analysis relating to the enforceability against a Security Collateral Provider:

(i) of the Non-IM Security Documents in Part III.3 of this memorandum;

(ii) of the IM Security Documents in Parts IV.3, IV.4 and IV.5 of this memorandum; and

(iii) of the Clearing System IM Documents in Parts V.3, V.4 and V.5 of this memorandum,

would apply in circumstances where the Security Collateral Provider is Standard Chartered Bank.

5. Transfer Annexes

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by Annex 1, Annex 9 and this Annex 11 and subject to the analysis set out in those Annexes, we are of the view that the analysis in Part VI.3 of this memorandum would apply to Standard Chartered Bank.

253

ANNEX 12

ENGLISH CHARITY – TRUSTEE OF AN ENGLISH CHARITABLE TRUST

In this Annex 12, we set out our views on the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against the Trustee of an English Charitable Trust in the event that insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of the Trustee or a Trust Insolvency occurs in relation to the English Charitable Trust.

Application of general trust law to English Charitable Trusts

This Annex 12 should be read together with the analysis of Trustees and English Trusts elsewhere in this memorandum, in particular in Part I.2, Appendix D and Annex 5. That analysis applies to the Trustee of an English Charitable Trust, as supplemented by this Annex 12.

Investment manager for the Trustee of an English Charitable Trust

It is common for the Trustee of an English Charitable Trust to appoint an investment manager to act as agent for the Trustee for certain purposes. In such a case, a party would enter into an ISDA Master Agreement, a Credit Support Document and each Transaction under that ISDA Master Agreement, with an investment manager acting as agent for the Trustee of the English Charitable Trust rather than directly with the Trustee. The investment manager will have been appointed by the Trustee pursuant to a power to do so in the trust deed for the English Charitable Trust, and subject to any applicable requirements of the trust deed. The terms of the investment manager's appointment and the scope of its authority as agent will be determined by an investment management agreement between the investment manager and the Trustee.

Provided that the investment manager has been validly appointed and is acting within the scope of its authority in entering into an ISDA Master Agreement, a Credit Support Document and each Transaction with a party, and in performing any obligations of the Trustee on behalf of the English Charitable Trust, then the Credit Support Document will form part of a contractual relationship between the party and the Trustee directly. A failure by the investment manager to perform an obligation of the Trustee under a Credit Support Document will constitute a failure to perform by the Trustee in just the same manner as if the Trustee had been dealing directly with the party.

The commencement of insolvency proceedings in relation to the investment manager will normally effect a revocation of its authority to act as agent of the Trustee or to continue to perform the obligations of the Trustee after the effective date of such revocation, but will not otherwise affect the enforceability of a Credit Support Document against the Trustee.

Our analysis of the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against the Trustee of an English Charitable Trust is not affected by whether the Trustee has entered into the relevant Credit Support Document directly with the other party or through an investment manager acting as agent. Therefore we do not need to give further consideration to the role of the investment manager in this Annex 12.

Security Documents and Transfer Annexes

Although the charitable sector is heavily regulated, the insolvency proceedings applicable to an English Charity are determined by its legal form. In contrast to the insurance sector, there are no special insolvency rules that apply to an English Charity under charities law or that modify the rules that would otherwise apply to the English Charity.

254

Therefore the special regulatory regime that applies to an English Charitable Trust under the Charities Act 2011 has no material effect on the analysis or conclusions in Annex 5 in respect of the Trustee of an English Trust, including in the event that insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of the Trustee or a Trust Insolvency occurs in respect of the English Charitable Trust.500

500 We do not consider in this memorandum the various powers of the Charity Commission in respect of charities under the Charities Act 2011 in circumstances where the Charity Commission has instituted an inquiry under section 46 and is satisfied either as mentioned in section 76(1)(a) (regarding misconduct or mismanagement in the administration of the charity) or section 76(1)(b) (regarding the need to act to protect the property or the charity or secure a proper application of that property or property coming to the charity for the purposes of the charity). These powers include the power to appoint an interim manager to act as receiver and manager in respect of the property and affairs of the charity and, where the conditions in section 84B(1) are met, to direct its winding up (section 84B was added by the Charities (Protection and Social Investment) Act 2016).

255

ANNEX 13

ENGLISH CHARITY – OTHER FORMS OF ENGLISH CHARITY

In this Annex 13, we set out our views on the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against an English Charity other than a Trustee of an English Charitable Trust in the event that insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of the English Charity.

Application of Insolvency Law to Charities

The types of insolvency proceeding that may be commenced in England in respect of an English Charity are, in respect of an English Charity established as:

(a) an English Company, set out in Part III.1(4) of the ISDA Netting Opinion;

(b) a Friendly Society, set out in Annex 6;

(c) a C/CB Society, set out in Annex 7;501

(d) a Statutory Corporation, set out in Annex 8; and

(e) a Chartered Corporation, set out in Annex 9.502

Although the charitable sector is heavily regulated, the insolvency proceedings applicable to an English Charity are determined by its legal form. In contrast to the insurance sector, there are no special insolvency rules that apply to an English Charity under charities law or that modify the rules that would otherwise apply to the English Charity.

Investment manager for the English Charity

It is common for an English Charity to appoint an investment manager to act as agent for the English Charity for certain purposes. In such a case, a party would enter into an ISDA Master Agreement, a Credit Support Document and each Transaction under that ISDA Master Agreement with an investment manager acting as agent for the English Charity rather than directly with the English Charity. The terms of the investment manager's appointment and the scope of its authority as agent will be determined by an investment management agreement between the investment manager and the English Charity.

Provided that the investment manager has been validly appointed and is acting within the scope of its authority in entering into an ISDA Master Agreement, the Credit Support Document and each Transaction under that ISDA Master Agreement with a party, and in performing any obligations of the English Charity, then the Credit Support Document will form part of a contractual relationship between the party and the English Charity directly. A failure by the investment manager to perform an obligation of the English Charity under a Credit Support Document will constitute a failure to perform by the English Charity in just the same manner as if the English Charity had been dealing directly with the party.

501 See note 13 in respect of English Charities established in the form of a C/CB. 502 For the purposes of this Annex 13 we assume that each form of English Charity considered holds its assets as corporate assets (i.e. that it is beneficially entitled to its assets) and not trust assets otherwise additional considerations would arise. According to William Henderson and Jonathan Fowles (eds), Tudor on Charities (10th edn, Sweet & Maxwell 2015), it may be the case that a Chartered Corporation that is an "eleemosynary corporation" does hold its assets on trust – that is a corporation constituted for the perpetual distribution of free alms and bounty of the founder to such persons as the founder has directed (usually hospitals or colleges). In addition, we assume that the ISDA Master Agreement and related Credit Support Document(s) are not entered into by the English Charity in connection with specific assets subject to specific trusts.

256

The commencement of insolvency proceedings in relation to the investment manager will normally effect a revocation of its authority to act as agent of the English Charity or to continue to perform the obligations of the English Charity after the effective date of such revocation, but will not otherwise affect the enforceability of the Credit Support Document against the English Charity.

Our analysis of the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against an English Charity is not affected by whether the English Charity has entered into the Credit Support Document directly with the other party or through an investment manager acting as agent. Therefore we do not need to give further consideration to the role of the investment manager in this Annex 13.

1. Security Documents

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 13 and each of Annexes 6, 7, 8 and 9 and subject the analysis set out in those Annexes, we are of the view that our analysis relating to the enforceability against a Security Collateral Provider:

(i) of the Non-IM Security Documents in Part III.3 of this memorandum;

(ii) of the IM Security Documents in Parts IV.3, IV.4 and IV.5 of this memorandum; and

(iii) of the Clearing System IM Documents in Parts V.3, V.4 and V.5 of this memorandum,

would apply in circumstances where the Security Collateral Provider is an English Charity.503

2. Transfer Annexes

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 13 and each of Annexes 6, 7, 8 and 9 and subject to the analysis set out in those Annexes, we are of the view that the conclusions in Part VI.3 of this memorandum would apply to an English Charity.504

503 See note 500. 504 See note 500.

257

ANNEX 14

TRUSTEE OF AN ENGLISH PENSION FUND

In this Annex 14, we set out our views on the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against the Trustee of an English Pension Fund in the event that insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of the Trustee or a Trust Insolvency occurs in respect of the English Pension Fund.

Subject to the more detailed discussion below, additional considerations apply in the context of an English Pension Fund to those analysed at Annex 5 in respect of an English Trust not subject to a special regulatory regime. In particular, for the purposes of this memorandum, in the case of a Trust Insolvency, the possibility exists that the Pensions Regulator could order the winding up of the English Pension Fund in accordance with its power to do so in certain circumstances under the Pensions Act 1995 and separate consideration should be given to the duty of the PPF Board (as defined below) to take over the English Pension Fund in certain circumstances.

Accordingly, in addition to the assumptions made in Annex 5, we assume for the purposes of this Annex 14 that the assets and liabilities of the English Pension Fund (in full or in part) have not been taken over by the PPF Board in accordance with the relevant duty imposed on the PPF Board by the Pensions Act 2004.

Application of general trust law to English Pension Funds

This Annex 14 should be read together with the analysis of Trustees and English Trusts elsewhere in this memorandum, in particular in Part I.2, Appendix D and Annex 5. Such analysis applies to the Trustee of an English Pension Fund, as supplemented by this Annex 14.

As mentioned at Part I.2, it is our understanding that an English Pension Fund will typically have a sole corporate Trustee and therefore the analysis at Annex 5 of this memorandum in respect of a Partial Trustee Insolvency should be ignored. In the case of a Full Trustee Insolvency, where there is a sole corporate Trustee which becomes insolvent, the trust deed would normally provide that the sponsoring employer may select a new Trustee, and the Pensions Regulator and the court have a statutory power to appoint a new Trustee subject to certain conditions specified by statute.

Additional considerations in relation to an English Pension Fund – Trust Insolvency

In the remainder of this Annex we discuss certain further considerations that apply in respect of an English Pension Fund in addition to the analysis in respect of an ordinary English Trust. The focus of this section is Trust Insolvency. The powers and duties of the PPF Board are considered below.

In respect of a Trust Insolvency, the possibility exists that the Pensions Regulator could order the winding up of the English Pension Fund in accordance with its power to do so in certain circumstances under the Pensions Act 1995. This is in addition to the possibility of a winding up under the trust deed (where the trust deed confers this power on the Trustee and the relevant circumstances have occurred, for example, the liquidation of the sponsoring employer or where the sponsoring employer has entered administration505) and the theoretical possibility that the court could make an administration order in relation to the English Pension Fund under Rule 64.2 of the Civil Procedure Rules 1998, each discussed at Annex 5. As with these latter events, the winding up of the English Pension Fund by order of the Pensions Regulator would not fall within the Section 5(a)(vii) (Bankruptcy) Event of Default in the ISDA Master Agreement. Accordingly, we recommend that an

505 In practice, the winding up of an English Pension Fund on the grounds of its own insolvency is likely to relate to the insolvency of the employer and to lead to an assessment period commencing under the Pensions Act 2004, the implications of which are discussed below.

258

additional Event of Default be added to the Schedule to the ISDA Master Agreement providing that the occurrence of any of the foregoing events in relation to the English Pension Fund will constitute an Event of Default in relation to the Trustee. There are no mandatory set-off rules that apply if an English Pension Fund is wound up (i) in accordance with its trust deed, (ii) under an administration order made under Rule 64.2 of the Civil Procedure Rules506 or (iii) as a result of an order of the Pensions Regulator. In view of the power of the Pensions Regulator to order the winding-up of a Pension Fund (as well as its other regulatory powers), we believe that a court would be unlikely to intervene in the affairs of a Pension Fund by making an order under Rule 64.2 of the Civil Procedure Rules.

In relation to an English Pension Fund, it is usual for the trust deed to contain a provision stating that the insolvency of the sponsoring employer will trigger the winding up of the English Pension Fund. The sponsoring employer might also have the right to trigger a winding up of the English Pension Fund under the trust deed.

Although section 73 of the Pensions Act 1995 sets out the priorities for the distribution of an English Pension Fund's assets, section 73 applies to the satisfaction of "liabilities in respect of pensions and other benefits", and therefore we do not believe it applies to creditors of the English Pension Fund who are not beneficiaries. As described in Annex 5, if the English Pension Fund were wound up and there were insufficient assets to cover the entirety of the English Pension Fund's liabilities, we believe that the assets will be applied in the priority order suggested by the Trust Law Committee in the 1997 Consultation Paper. English Pension Fund trust deeds commonly provide that liabilities to third parties will be paid out before the remaining assets are applied towards providing the pension benefits for the members. Therefore, it is generally accepted, and it is our view, that any expenses, costs or liabilities properly incurred in connection with the English Pension Fund, including any liability to a counterparty to an ISDA Master Agreement, will be payable in priority to any pension benefits for members.

In any event, provided the Trustee's right of recourse to the trust assets is not impaired, the counterparty will have a right of recourse to the assets of the English Pension Fund secured by a Trustee's lien that will enable the Trustee to use the assets of the English Pension Fund to pay creditors in priority to the beneficiaries (because the Trustee's right of recourse to use the assets in this manner will take priority over the beneficiaries' interests).

As discussed above, the Pensions Regulator has the power to wind up an English Pension Fund. In addition, the Pensions Regulator has the power to issue a restoration order in relation to any transaction at an undervalue (defined in a manner similar to the Insolvency Act 1986 definition) where the transaction was entered into on or after 27 April 2004 and within two years prior to the employer entering into insolvency. Normally a transaction entered into by the Trustee with a market counterparty that acted in good faith and gave value for its side of the bargain will not be subject to a restoration order. The Pensions Regulator would bear the burden of proof in these circumstances. We are not aware of any specific counterpart of the Insolvency Act 1986 provision relating to preferences in relation to a winding up by the Pensions Regulator. However, as discussed in Annex 5, there is old jurisprudence which suggests that the court has a general equitable power to avoid a transaction by virtue of which a debtor apparently treats one creditor preferentially relative to other creditors, where the creditor enjoying the preference knows at the time of the transaction that the debtor is in financial difficulties (please refer to the discussion in Annex 5 for further details). There is also the possibility that the Pensions Regulator could seek an order under section 423 of the Insolvency Act 1986.

506 See Annex 5 in relation to the possibility of the application of insolvency set-off in this case.

259

Additional considerations in relation to an English Pension Fund - the Pension Protection Fund

Following the establishment of the Pension Protection Fund under the Pensions Act 2004, in a number of cases an English Pension Fund will not, in fact, go into winding-up but rather its assets and liabilities will be transferred to the Board of the Pension Protection Fund, a statutory corporation established by the Pensions Act 2004 (the PPF Board and, when referring to the fund only, the Pension Protection Fund). Before this occurs, however, an assessment period arises under section 132 of the Pensions Act 2004, which can lead to various outcomes, only one of which involves the English Pension Fund being taken over by the PPF Board.

(a) Commencement of an assessment period

Under section 160 of the Pensions Act 2004 a transfer of pension fund assets and liabilities to the PPF Board could occur, as described in more detail below, after completion of an assessment period in relation to the English Pension Fund. The assessment period is triggered under sections 127 and 132(2) of the Pensions Act 2004 by a qualifying insolvency event in relation to the sponsoring employer of the English Pension Fund, for example, the entry of the sponsoring employer into administration.507

During the assessment period, the PPF Board would assess whether the English Pension Fund qualifies for the protection of the Pension Protection Fund. To qualify, an English Pension Fund must meet the eligibility requirements for such protection set out in the Pensions Act 2004 and must also have insufficient assets itself to provide the minimum level of compensation that would be payable by the PPF Board out of the Pension Protection Fund under the Pensions Act 2004 (the Protected Liabilities).

During the assessment period, the Trustee would continue to manage the English Pension Fund as before, but benefits would stop accruing, contributions would cease and the Trustee would reduce benefit payments to the level of the Protected Liabilities. In addition, the PPF Board may make various directions to protect the position of the English Pension Fund, in particular in relation to the investment of assets of the English Pension Fund, the incurring of expenditure by the Trustee on behalf of the English Pension Fund and the conduct of legal proceedings on behalf of the English Pension Fund.

Absent an express contractual provision referring to the assessment period, however, the commencement of the assessment period would not have any effect on the terms of any contract, including an ISDA Master Agreement, entered into between the Trustee and any third party. The power of the PPF Board to make certain directions referred to above should not affect the terms and conditions of existing contracts, including an ISDA Master Agreement between a party and the Trustee of the English Pension Fund.

During the assessment period, in order to establish whether the scheme is able to meet the Protected Liabilities, the PPF Board must, under section 143 of the Pensions Act 2004, either:

(i) obtain a valuation of the English Pension Fund's assets and liabilities as at the date immediately before the qualifying insolvency event (a s143 Valuation); or

507 Sections 129 and 132(4) of the Pensions Act 2004 provide that an assessment period will start where the trustees or managers of an eligible scheme become aware that the employer in relation to the scheme is unlikely to continue as a going concern, the employer is of a prescribed description and the trustees or managers make an application to the PPF Board for it to assume responsibility for the scheme. An assessment period will also start where the Pensions Regulator provides a notice under section 129(4) to the PPF Board that such an employer is unlikely to continue as a going concern and the PPF Board then provides a copy of that notice to the trustees or managers of the scheme and the employer. The prescribed description of "employer" includes employers which are not companies as defined in section 1(1) of the Companies Act 2006, and employers which are not companies that may be wound up under Part 5 of the Insolvency Act 1986 (unregistered companies).

260

(ii) make a determination of the value of the English Pension Fund's assets and liabilities as at that date (a s143 Determination).508

The PPF Board's power to make a s143 Determination applies from 23 July 2012. The power was added to the legislation as, where an English Pension Fund is very underfunded or very overfunded, it was considered that undertaking a s143 Valuation led to disproportionate delay and costs.

(b) Outcomes following the end of an assessment period

At the end of the assessment period, there are, broadly speaking, four possible alternative states of affairs:

(i) rescue of the English Pension Fund;

(ii) continuation of the English Pension Fund as a closed scheme;

(iii) winding up of the English Pension Fund; or

(iv) transfer of the property, rights and liabilities of the English Pension Fund to the PPF Board.

(c) Rescue of the English Pension Fund

If the English Pension Fund is "rescued", then the assessment period will end and the English Pension Fund will continue with no impact on any ISDA Master Agreement entered into between the Trustee of the English Pension Fund and a party, unless expressly provided for contractually. An English Pension Fund is "rescued" where either the employer is rescued as a going concern and retains responsibility for the English Pension Fund or another person has assumed responsibility for meeting the employer's liabilities in respect of that English Pension Fund.509

It is our view that no provision of the Pensions Act 2004 would prevent a party from exercising its contractual right under Section 6(a) of the ISDA Master Agreement to designate an Early Termination Date as a result of an Event of Default that was triggered by the commencement or continuation of an assessment period, even where the English Pension Fund was rescued during the course of the assessment period.

In our experience, however, Trustees of English Pension Funds have strongly resisted the inclusion of an additional Event of Default (or even an Additional Termination Event) that is triggered only by the commencement or continuation of an assessment period. In any event, we do not consider it necessary to include such an Event of Default (or Additional Termination Event) to deal with this case. The enforceability of the Credit Support Documents are unaffected.

(d) Continuation of the English Pension Fund as a closed scheme and application for reconsideration

If the s143 Valuation or s143 Determination shows that the English Pension Fund has sufficient assets to meet the Protected Liabilities but not to purchase the full benefits from an insurer, the PPF Board may, in certain circumstances, authorise the English Pension Fund to

508 Pensions Act 2004, s 143, as introduced by the Pensions Act 2011, Sch 4, paras (5) and (6). 509 See the Pension Protection Fund (Entry Rules) Regulations, reg 9(1)(a) and the Pensions Act 2004, s 122(5)(a).

261

continue as a closed scheme under section 153 of the Pensions Act 2004. In that case, members will accrue no further benefits. It may also be the case that no further contributions will be paid into the English Pension Fund as the employer may be insolvent.

The continuation of the English Pension Fund as a closed scheme will have no impact on the ISDA Master Agreement entered into between the Trustee of the English Pension Fund and a party, unless expressly provided for contractually.

Note that if, following the s143 Valuation or s143 Determination, the assets of the English Pension Fund fall below the amount needed to meet the Protected Liabilities, then the English Pension Fund could be reconsidered for PPF entry. In summary, this could happen in one of two ways:

(i) if the assets fall below the amount needed to meet the Protected Liabilities within 6 months of the s143 Valuation or s143 Determination becoming binding the English Pension Fund may apply to be reconsidered by the PPF Board in accordance with section 151 of the Pensions Act 2004. The PPF Board will then issue a determination notice stating that it will assume responsibility for the English Pension Fund. That determination will not take effect for at least one month, so the other party would therefore have one month to exercise any Additional Termination Event or Event of Default inserted in respect of this eventuality; or

(ii) if the assets fall below the amount needed to meet the Protected Liabilities while the English Pension Fund is operating as a closed scheme a further assessment period will start in accordance with section 159 of the Pensions Act 2004. This could result in one of the other outcomes described in this section, for example, winding up or transfer of the English Pension Fund to the PPF Board.

It is our view that no provision of the Pensions Act 2004 would prevent a party from exercising its contractual right under Section 6(a) of the ISDA Master Agreement to designate an Early Termination Date as a result of an Event of Default that was triggered by the PPF Board authorising the English Pension Fund to continue as a closed scheme.

We expect, however, that the Trustee of the English Pension Fund would resist the inclusion of an additional Event of Default (or even an Additional Termination Event) that is triggered by such an authorisation on the basis that the hedging arrangements under the ISDA Master Agreement might still be required by the Trustee where the English Pension Fund continues to operate.

In our view, it is not necessary to have an Event of Default (or Additional Termination Event) to deal with this possibility provided that the Trustee continues to perform its obligations under the ISDA Master Agreement. The other party's rights under the Credit Support Documents would not be affected by the operation of the English Pension Fund as a closed scheme.

(e) Winding up of the English Pension Fund

At the end of the assessment period, the English Pension Fund may be liable to winding up under the relevant provisions of its trust deed or as required by section 154 of the Pensions Act 2004 or by virtue of an order of the Pensions Regulator (or rarely, for the reasons discussed above, under an administration order from the court under Rule 64.2 of the Civil Procedure Rules). This may occur where the English Pension Fund has assets needed to fund benefits at a level at or above the level of the Protected Liabilities, but the English Pension

262

Fund is not able to continue because, for example, the sponsoring employer has gone into liquidation.

We recommend that an additional Event of Default be added to the Schedule to the ISDA Master Agreement providing that the winding up of the English Pension Fund as required pursuant to section 154 of the Pensions Act 2004 will constitute an Event of Default in relation to the Trustee.

In this case, we would expect that the other party would designate an Early Termination Date under the ISDA Master Agreement with the Trustee of the English Pension Fund (where it has such a right), or, if the other party chose not to do that for any reason, we expect that the Trustee, needing to realise assets and crystallise liabilities of the English Pension Fund, would seek to negotiate a termination of the Transactions under that ISDA Master Agreement and the determination of a net balance owing by or to the Trustee of the English Pension Fund after application of any Credit Support Balance or Credit Support Balance (VM) owed by either party under the Transfer Annex.

It is our view that no provision of the Pensions Act 2004 would prevent the other party from exercising its contractual right under Section 6(a) of the ISDA Master Agreement to designate an Early Termination Date as a result of an Event of Default that was triggered by the winding up of the English Pension Fund for any reason.

As discussed above (and see above in this sub-paragraph (e) in respect of section 154 of the Pensions Act 2004), we believe that such an Event of Default should be included in order to permit the other party to operate the close-out netting provisions in the event of a winding up of the English Pension Fund.

(f) Transfer to the PPF Board

At the end of the assessment period, the English Pension Fund may have assets below the level needed to fund benefits at a level equal to or above the level of the Protected Liabilities. In this case, subject to certain conditions specified in the Pensions Act 2004, the PPF Board is required to assume responsibility for the English Pension Fund. It does this by giving the Trustee of the English Pension Fund a notice under section 160 of the Pensions Act 2004 (a Transfer Notice), which has the effect, under section 161 of, and Schedule 6 to, the Pensions Act 2004, upon receipt by the Trustee of the Transfer Notice of automatically transferring the property, rights and liabilities of the English Pension Fund to the PPF Board and discharging the Trustee from its obligations in relation to the English Pension Fund.

This means that the PPF Board, by operation of law, becomes the successor to the rights and liabilities of the Trustee of the English Pension Fund under any ISDA Master Agreement, including any Transactions entered into under the ISDA Master Agreement and related Credit Support Documents.510

This has a couple of consequences that may be of concern to the other party to the ISDA Master Agreement and that such party may therefore wish to protect against by an appropriate provision in the Schedule to the ISDA Master Agreement, as discussed in more detail below. The two principal consequences of potential concern to the other party are:

510 There may, however, be circumstances where only one employer becomes insolvent and only part of the English Pension Fund is taken over by the PPF Board. In these circumstances it is less clear that the PPF Board will, in fact, take over the ISDA Master Agreement as that agreement will be with the Trustee in relation to the English Pension Fund as a whole. The PPF Board has only recently had the first examples of parts of the English Pension Funds being taken over and has thus far taken the view that, in these circumstances, contracts entered into by the Trustee are not taken over by the PPF Board.

263

(i) a loss of priority relative to the beneficiaries of the English Pension Fund; and

(ii) the possibility of the PPF Board exercising a statutory power to modify or disclaim onerous contract terms, resulting in the modification or disclaimer of provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement, including the Credit Support Documents.

We deal with each of these in turn, before considering how these might be addressed in the ISDA Master Agreement.

(g) Loss of priority relative to beneficiaries of the English Pension Fund

Upon the transfer of the assets and liabilities of the English Pension Fund to the PPF Board, the beneficiaries of the English Pension Fund would under the Pensions Act 2004 become creditors of the PPF Board in relation to the Protected Liabilities, ranking pari passu with other creditors of the PPF Board, including the other party in relation to Transactions under an ISDA Master Agreement originally entered into by that party with the Trustee of the English Pension Fund.

To this extent, the priority of the other party to the payment of the liabilities due under the ISDA Master Agreement would change relative to the beneficiaries since, as discussed above, any claim of the party under an ISDA Master Agreement against the Trustee of the English Pension Fund would rank ahead of the beneficiaries of the English Pension Fund on the winding up of the Trustee or of the English Pension Fund.

Balanced against this, the party would be a creditor of the PPF Board as a whole. Its recourse would not be limited to the assets that previously formed part of the assets of the English Pension Fund. Note, however, that the obligations of the PPF Board are not explicitly guaranteed by the UK government.

(h) The PPF Board's statutory power to modify or disclaim "onerous" contract terms

Regulation 2(1) of the Pension Protection Fund (General and Miscellaneous Amendments) Regulations 2006511 (the PPF Regulations) gives the PPF Board the power (the Disclaimer Power) to disapply a term or condition of a contract relating to the property, rights or liabilities of an English Pension Fund (which would include an ISDA Master Agreement and the Credit Support Documents) where the PPF Board considers that term or condition to be onerous. Alternatively, the PPF Board may substitute for such term or condition a term or condition that it considers to be reasonable. It would therefore be open to the PPF Board to disapply or substitute any term of the ISDA Master Agreement or Credit Support Documents that it considered to be onerous.

Please note that there is no authority yet available on the proper interpretation of this power, which gives broad discretion to the PPF Board. It is, therefore, difficult to say how broad this power is or whether any such exercise of this power by the PPF Board would be subject to judicial review. As the law currently stands, it must be assumed, therefore, that the PPF Board, at least potentially, would have the power to modify or disclaim, for example, the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement on the basis that those provisions constitute onerous contract terms for purposes of Regulation 2(1) of the PPF Regulations.512

511 SI 2006/580. 512 However, as a practical matter, we are not aware that the PPF Board has sought to use the Disclaimer Power to date in respect of an ISDA Master Agreement. The PPF Board has also stated in the PPF Guidance (defined below) that it "would not expect to use its power under regulation 2(1) to enable an 'out of the money' derivative to be terminated. Nor would it expect to vary contractual netting terms or credit support agreements", and notes that "to date, the [PPF Board] has not identified any term that it would wish to disapply or vary under Regulation 2(1)". Additionally paragraph 4.4 of the PPF Guidance concludes that

264

(i) Protecting against loss of priority and the Disclaimer Power

The other party to the ISDA Master Agreement may or may not be willing, as a credit risk matter, to accept the loss of priority entailed by the transfer of the English Pension Fund to the PPF Board. This loss of priority would not, of itself, affect the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against the PPF Board.

The Disclaimer Power, however, could adversely affect such documents. For this reason, we are of the view that:

(i) the counterparty should include a provision in the ISDA Master Agreement requiring the Trustee to notify that party when an assessment period commences, so that the party can heighten its monitoring of the English Pension Fund during the assessment period in view of the potential consequences described above; and

(ii) the counterparty must include in the ISDA Master Agreement an appropriate Event of Default or Additional Termination Event permitting the party to designate an Early Termination Date after the commencement of an assessment period and before the PPF Board issues a Transfer Notice. Where an Additional Termination Event is added to the related ISDA Master Agreement, an analogous or linked Specified Condition (in the case of the relevant Non-IM Security Document) or Access Condition (in the case of the relevant IM Security Documents or Clearing System IM Documents) should be added to or specified in the relevant document to allow for enforcement of the security interest in the Collateral in these circumstances.

As noted above, Trustees of English Pension Funds have strongly resisted Events of Default or Additional Termination Events that are triggered merely by the commencement or continuation of an assessment period. Trustees have argued that terminating at the commencement of an assessment period is too soon (given that it is not unusual for assessment periods to last for 2 or 3 years due to the length of time that it can take to prepare all the data that is required to undertake a s143 Valuation, assuming that the PPF Board does not make a s143 Determination rather than undertaking a s143 Valuation – a s143 Determination would be expected to take less time) and, in any event, would have an adverse effect on the financial condition of the English Pension Fund.

On the other hand, an Event of Default or Additional Termination Event triggered by the issue of the Transfer Notice risks occurring too late, since the other party's loss of priority will occur automatically and, more importantly, the Disclaimer Power will become available to the PPF Board at that point.

During the course of 2009 and early 2010, there were considerable discussions in the market between derivatives dealers and Trustees of English Pension Funds, with some background involvement of the PPF Board and of ISDA, as to the appropriate form of Event of Default or Additional Termination Event and, specifically, as to the appropriate trigger for such event.

As noted above, the principal point is to find an appropriate trigger that ensures that the other party has the right to designate an Early Termination Date in good time prior to the end of the assessment period. For this trigger, the market appears to have settled on the approval by the PPF Board under section 144 of the Pensions Act 2004 of a s143 Valuation of the English

"having considered the purposes and scope of the power, the [PPF Board] considers it would not ordinarily seek to disapply or substitute terms in contracts that have been negotiated at arms' length by trustees in the ordinary course of their trustee business, even if it is felt that the trustees negotiated a poor deal. The [PPF Board] has decided that the test it will apply in exercising its power under regulation 2(1) is to disapply or vary contractual terms which are substantially unfair or manifestly prejudicial to those purposes."

265

Pension Fund prepared in accordance with section 143 that shows that the English Pension Fund's assets are less than its Protected Liabilities. Following changes to the Pensions Act 2004 effective from 23 July 2012 this would apply equally to a s143 Determination that states that the English Pension Fund's assets are less than the Protected Liabilities. The approval of the s143 Valuation, or the s143 Determination, do not become binding until a period of at least 28 days has expired (under section 143A and section 145)513. The PPF Board may not issue a Transfer Notice until the s143 Valuation or s143 Determination under section 143 is binding514 and only if the s143 Valuation confirms, or the s143 Determination states, that the assets of the English Pension Fund are less than the Protected Liabilities515, as well as satisfying various other eligibility criteria under the Pensions Act 2004.

This therefore appears to be a satisfactory compromise that is neither too early from the viewpoint of the Trustees (namely, the commencement of the assessment period) nor too late from the viewpoint of derivatives dealers (namely, the issue of the Transfer Notice).

While various formulations of such an Event of Default or Additional Termination Event have been discussed and, individual cases, agreed between Trustees and derivatives dealers, one sticking point in negotiations has been the desire of Trustees to include a proviso stating that the relevant Event of Default or Additional Termination Event does not occur if the PPF Board confirms in some form that it will not use the Disclaimer Power to override the close- out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement. The problem has been finding a form of the proviso that would bind the PPF Board and would therefore provide sufficiently robust assurance to derivatives dealers that the enforceability of the close-out netting provisions would not be overridden by the PPF Board.

On 8 March 2010, the PPF Board issued Guidance in relation to the Disclaimer Power (the PPF Guidance).516 In the PPF Guidance, among other things, the PPF Board sets out a form of Additional Termination Event that would permit a counterparty to an ISDA Master Agreement with the Trustee of an English Pension Fund to designate an Early Termination Date if the PPF Board approves a s143 Valuation that verifies that the Protected Liabilities of the English Pension Fund exceed its assets, subject to a proviso that if, prior to "termination" by the derivatives dealer, the PPF Board gives an irrevocable undertaking to the dealer in the form of a deed that the PPF Board will not exercise the Disclaimer Power in relation to the ISDA Master Agreement, then the Additional Termination Event will not occur (the PPF Standard ATE). The PPF Guidance and PPF Standard ATE were issued before the PPF's power to make a s143 Determination was inserted into the Pensions Act 2004 on 23 July 2012.

The counterparty is not obliged to use the specific form of Additional Termination Event recommended by the PPF Board, but since the issuance of the PPF Guidance it appears to have become a market standard provision in ISDA Master Agreements between the Trustee of an English Pension Fund and derivatives dealers, although there are some market participants who use it unamended and some who use it with various changes we have recommended. We recommend a number of amendments to the PPF Standard ATE to improve the clarity and certainty of the provision, as well as to improve protection for the counterparty – ISDA members are advised to seek further legal advice on specific points of drafting. We advise, however, that, because of the introduction of a new discretion from 23 July 2012 which

513 This period was shortened from two months on 30 April 2013 by the Pension Protection Fund, Occupational and Personal Pension Schemes (Miscellaneous Amendments) Regulations 2013, SI 2013/627. 514 The Pensions Act 2004, s 160. 515 ibid, ss 127(2)(a) and 128(2)(a). 516 A copy of the Guidance can be found on the website of the PPF Board at the following URL: accessed 12 November 2018.

266

allows the PPF Board to make a s143 Determination, which provides for a new route for the scheme to be brought into the PPF by way of the s143 Determination, the PPF Standard ATE should be amended at a minimum to reflect this change. This provision may also be expressed to be an Event of Default rather than an Additional Termination Event, but, of course, it is likely that the Trustee of an English Pension Fund will resist this.

We note that the proviso only applies if the PPF Board issues a deed prior to the other party exercising its right to terminate. The onus will therefore be on the Trustee of the English Pension Fund to cause the PPF Board to issue the deed. If no deed is issued, the other party will have an unrestricted right to "terminate" upon the approval of a s143 Valuation or s143 Determination showing that the Protected Liabilities of the English Pension Fund exceed its assets.517

As mentioned above, where an Additional Termination Event is added to the related ISDA Agreement, an analogous or linked Specified Condition (in the case of the relevant Non-IM Security Document) or Access Condition (in the case of the relevant IM Security Documents or Clearing System IM Documents) should be added to or specified in the relevant document to allow for enforcement of the security interest in the Collateral in these circumstances. In either case, the scope of the proviso mentioned above should be expanded to address the relevant Credit Support Documents such that the right to terminate and to enforce security is only rendered ineffective if the PPF Board's irrevocable undertaking makes clear that the ISDA Master Agreement together with any related Credit Support Documents will not be prejudiced.

The counterparty will need to know that a relevant s143 Valuation or s143 Determination has been approved before it can exercise its rights, and therefore such party should require the Trustee to notify it if such a s143 Valuation or s143 Determination is approved. Given the possibility that the Trustee may, if not prompted by the other party, fail to notify it of the approval of a s143 Valuation or s143 Determination, it would be advisable for such party to monitor the English Pension Fund proactively while it is in an assessment period.

(j) Insolvency of the PPF Board

As the other party to the ISDA Master Agreement with the Trustee could, in certain circumstances (for example, where the PPF Board has given the deed referred to in paragraph (i) above) find itself party to an ISDA Master Agreement with the PPF Board, the party needs to consider the enforceability of the ISDA Master Agreement, including the close-out netting provisions, and the related Credit Support Documents against the PPF Board, including in the event of insolvency proceedings (if possible) in relation to the PPF Board.

As noted above, the PPF Board is a body corporate established by the Pensions Act 2004. As such, it does not otherwise fall within the scope of this memorandum other than as separately confirmed and qualified by this Annex 14.518

The provisions of the Insolvency Act 1986 and related secondary legislation that apply to an English Company would not directly apply to the PPF Board. As discussed at Annex 8, there is good authority for the view that a statutory corporation organised by private Act of Parliament may be wound up as an "unregistered company" under section 221 of the

517 See note 512 above. Also note that paragraph 5.3 of the PPF Guidance states, in respect of the PPF Standard ATE, that "we would strongly encourage trustees and managers to adopt this wording in ISDA contracts which they enter into or which are entered into on their behalf by their fund managers" and notes at paragraph 7.4 that "[w]here a contract contains a termination event in a form materially similar to the wording set out in paragraph 5.2 of this guidance, the [PPF Board] will execute and issue to the counterparty a Deed in the form annexed to this guidance". 518 See note 8.

267

Insolvency Act 1986.519 Obiter comments of Denning LJ in the Court of Appeal decision in Tamlin v Hannaford520, however, provide persuasive support for the view that a statutory corporation established by an Act of Parliament for a public purpose without private shareholders is not liable to be wound up at the suit of any creditor. An earlier case, Re Exmouth Docks Co.521, suggested that a court would be unlikely to make a winding up order in relation to a statutory corporation established for a public purpose without a further Act of Parliament having been passed specifically to provide for the winding up.

The relationship between the decision in Exmouth Docks and the obiter dicta in Tamlin is not entirely clear, but together they appear to exclude the possibility of a court's being able to wind up a statutory corporation such as a local authority without a further Act of Parliament. We are not aware of any relevant authority for the alternative view that a statutory corporation established for a public purpose may be wound up as an "unregistered company" under section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986.

If the PPF Board cannot be compulsorily wound up under section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986, it seems unlikely that there could be a voluntary winding up where the court has no jurisdiction to make a winding up order. In addition, there is no basis on which a statutory corporation would be made subject to an administration, company voluntary arrangement or scheme of arrangement under the Companies Act 2006.

In view of the conclusion that the PPF Board could not be wound up or made subject to any other form of insolvency proceeding under English law as it currently stands (that is, without a further Act of Parliament), the Credit Support Documents would be enforceable against the PPF Board under English law on broadly the same basis as against an English Company as discussed in this memorandum, without further qualification by reference to English insolvency law.

If, contrary to our view, an English court were to determine that the PPF Board is an "unregistered company" for purposes of section 220 of the Insolvency Act 1986 and were to exercise its discretion to wind up the PPF Board as though it were an English Company, then, in our view, the Credit Support Documents would be enforceable against the PPF Board, assuming that the PPF Board had not effectively exercised its power to disapply or substitute those provisions (regarding the circumstances under which the PPF Board might exercise this power, see discussion above), just as they would against a Statutory Corporation wound up under section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986, for the reasons stated in this memorandum in relation to an English Company.

English Pension Fund investment managers

It is common for the Trustee of an English Pension Fund to appoint an investment manager to act as agent for the Trustee for certain purposes. In such a case, a party would enter into an ISDA Master Agreement, a Credit Support Document and each Transaction under that ISDA Master Agreement, with an investment manager acting as agent for the Trustee of the English Pension Fund (rather than directly with the Trustee who may be acting on the advice of an investment manager). The investment manager will have been appointed by the Trustee pursuant to a power to do so in the trust deed for the English Pension Fund, and subject to any applicable requirements of the trust deed. The terms of the investment manager's appointment and the scope of its authority as agent will be

519 See, for example, Re Oriental Bank Corporation (1885) 54 LJ Ch 481, which establishes this principle in relation to earlier insolvency legislation. 520 [1949] 2 All ER 327 (CA). 521 (1873-74) LR 17 Eq 181 (Ch).

268

determined by an investment management agreement between the investment manager and the Trustee.

Provided that the investment manager has been validly appointed and is acting within the scope of its authority in entering into an ISDA Master Agreement, a Credit Support Document and each Transaction with a party, and in performing any obligations of the Trustee on behalf of the English Pension Fund, then the Credit Support Document will form part of a contractual relationship between the party and the Trustee directly. A failure by the investment manager to perform an obligation of the Trustee under a Credit Support Document will constitute a failure to perform by the Trustee in just the same manner as if the Trustee had been dealing directly with the party.

The commencement of insolvency proceedings in relation to the investment manager will normally effect a revocation of its authority to act as agent of the Trustee or to continue to perform the obligations of the Trustee after the effective date of such revocation, but will not otherwise affect the enforceability of a Credit Support Document against the Trustee.

Our analysis of the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against the Trustee of an English Pension Fund is not affected by whether the Trustee has entered into the relevant Credit Support Document directly with the other party or through an investment manager acting as agent. Therefore we do not need to give further consideration to the role of the investment manager in this Annex 14.

1. Security Documents

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 14 and Annex 5 and subject the analysis set out in those Annexes, we are of the view that our analysis relating to the enforceability against a Security Collateral Provider:

(i) of the Non-IM Security Documents in Part III.3 of this memorandum;

(ii) of the IM Security Documents in Parts IV.3, IV.4 and IV.5 of this memorandum; and

(iii) of the Clearing System IM Documents in Parts V.3, V.4 and V.5 of this memorandum,

would apply in circumstances where the Security Collateral Provider is the Trustee of an English Pension Fund.

2. Transfer Annexes

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 14 and Annex 5 and subject to the analysis set out in those Annexes, we are of the view that the conclusions in Part VI.3 of this memorandum would apply to the Trustee of an English Pension Fund.

269

ANNEX 15

ENGLISH INVESTMENT FUND – OPEN-ENDED INVESTMENT COMPANY

In this Annex 15, we set out our views on the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against an Open-Ended Investment Company in the event that insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of the Open-Ended Investment Company.

Subject to the more detailed discussion below, the types of insolvency proceeding that may be commenced in England in respect of an Open-Ended Investment Company are a voluntary or compulsory winding under the Insolvency Act 1986 and a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006.522 As noted in our answer to question 20 in Part III, the Recast Insolvency Regulation does not apply to collective investment schemes.

UCITS authorised schemes, non UCITS retail schemes and qualified investor schemes

An Open-Ended Investment Company is a collective investment scheme for purposes of Part XVII (sections 235 – 284) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000. Under section 262 of the Act, the Treasury was given the power to make the OEIC Regulations. Under regulation 6 of the OEIC Regulations, the FCA has authority to make rules for Open-Ended Investment Companies. This power has been exercised and the relevant rules can be found in the Collective Investment Schemes Sourcebook (COLL). The rules in COLL distinguish between various categories of collective investment scheme. An Open-Ended Investment Company might, therefore, be a UCITS authorised scheme (that is, subject to rules consistent with the UCITS Directive523), a non-UCITS retail scheme or a non-retail scheme (otherwise known as a "qualified investor scheme").

Our conclusions below are not affected by whether the Open-Ended Investment Company is a UCITS authorised scheme, non-UCITS retail scheme or a non-retail scheme (qualified investor scheme).

Authorised corporate director or investment manager for the Open-Ended Investment Company

Regulation 15 of the OEIC Regulations provides, among other things, that an Open-Ended Investment Company must have at least one director and, if it has a single director, the single director must be a body corporate which is an authorised person with permission under Part 4A of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 to carry on the regulated activity of managing a UCITS or, as the case may be, managing an Alternative Investment Fund. This director is known as the authorised corporate director (ACD) of the Open-Ended Investment Company. Under COLL an Open-Ended Investment Company is expected to have at all times an appropriately qualified ACD, even if it has more than one director.524

In practice, a party may enter into an ISDA Master Agreement, a Credit Support Document and each Transaction under that ISDA Master Agreement, with the ACD acting as agent for the Open-Ended Investment Company or with an investment manager appointed by the ACD acting as agent for the Open-Ended Investment Company.

In relation to dealing with the ACD, the same considerations apply as when dealing with the director, officer or other representative of any company, namely, whether the director, officer or other representative has the appropriate authority to act on behalf of the company when entering into an

522 Regulation 21 and COLL 7 provide for an alternative winding up procedure but this is only available to solvent Open-Ended Investment Companies (see COLL 7.3.4(R)(3)). 523 Directive 2009/65/EC on the coordination of laws, regulations and administrative provisions relating to undertakings for collective investment in transferable securities (UCITS). 524 COLL 6.5.3.

270

agreement such as the Credit Support Documents. As discussed in Part I of this memorandum, we have assumed, among other things, that the persons entering into the Credit Support Documents on behalf of each party have the necessary authority. When a party enters into an ISDA Master Agreement, a Credit Support Document and each Transaction under the ISDA Master Agreement with the duly authorised ACD acting on behalf of an Open-Ended Investment Company, then the party is in a direct contractual relationship with the Open-Ended Investment Company.

In relation to dealing with an investment manager, the investment manager will have been appointed by the ACD. The terms of the investment manager's appointment and the scope of its authority as agent will be determined by an investment management agreement.

Provided that the investment manager has been validly appointed and is acting within the scope of its authority in entering into an ISDA Master Agreement, a Credit Support Document and each Transaction with a party, and in performing any obligations of the Open-Ended Investment Company, then the Credit Support Document will form part of a contractual relationship between the party and the Open-Ended Investment Company directly.

A failure by the ACD or investment manager to perform an obligation of the Open-Ended Investment Company under the the Credit Support Document will constitute a failure to perform by the Open- Ended Investment Company in just the same manner as if the Open-Ended Investment Company had been dealing directly with the party.

The commencement of insolvency proceedings in relation to the ACD or investment manager will normally effect a revocation of its authority to act as agent of the Open-Ended Investment Company or to continue to perform the obligations of the Open-Ended Investment Company after the effective date of such revocation, but will not otherwise affect the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against the Open-Ended Investment Company.

Our analysis of the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against an Open-Ended Investment Company is not affected by whether the Open-Ended Investment Company has entered into the Credit Support Documents directly with the other party or through an investment manager acting as agent. Therefore we do not need to give further consideration to the role of the investment manager in this Annex 15.

Insolvency proceedings in respect of an Open-Ended Investment Company (other than an Umbrella Company)

Regulation 31 of the OEIC Regulations provides that an Open-Ended Investment Company may be wound up as an unregistered company under Part V of the Insolvency Act 1986, subject to certain modifications that are not relevant to the issues we are considering in this Annex 15. Whether the winding up of an Open-Ended Investment Company is conducted on a voluntary or compulsory basis, the provisions of the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 relevant to a winding up will apply to the winding up of the Open-Ended Investment Company, including the insolvency set-off provision in Rule 14.25.

An Open-Ended Investment Company may not be made subject to a CVA or to administration proceedings under the Insolvency Act 1986. Each of these regimes is limited to English Companies and certain foreign companies.525

Regulation 70 and Schedule 6 of the OEIC Regulations provide that an Open-Ended Investment Company can be subject to a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006,

525 In relation to CVAs, see the definition of "company" in section 1(4) of the Insolvency Act 1986, and in relation to administration proceedings, see the definition of "company" in paragraph 111(1A) of Schedule B1 to the Insolvency Act 1986.

271

subject to the amendments made to Part 26 by the OEIC Regulations and the provisions of COLL 7.6.526

Open-Ended Investment Companies that are Umbrella Companies

Open-Ended Investment Companies are commonly structured as umbrella funds such that investors invest in separate sub-funds. In the past this was achieved via the contractual segregation of the assets and liabilities of the separate sub-funds.

The Open-Ended Investment Companies (Amendment) Regulations 2011527 (the 2011 Regulations) amended the OEIC Regulations and COLL was also amended to establish a protected cell regime under English law (the PCC Regime). Under the PCC Regime, an Open-Ended Investment Company that is an umbrella company (as defined in the OEIC Regulations) (an Umbrella OEIC) is made up of sub-funds (as defined in the OEIC Regulations). In this memorandum, we do not consider the position with respect to Umbrella OEICs that have not amended their instruments of incorporation to comply with the PCC Regime.

The assets of a sub-fund belong exclusively to the relevant sub-fund and may not be used to discharge the liabilities of or claims against the Umbrella OEIC or any other sub-fund. Similarly any liability incurred on behalf of or attributable to any sub-fund of an Umbrella OEIC may only be discharged from the assets of the relevant sub-fund. The sub-funds do not have legal personality separate from the Umbrella OEIC but the property of the sub-fund is subject to orders of the court as it would have been had the sub-fund been a separate legal person and the Umbrella OEIC may exercise the same rights of set-off in relation to a sub-fund that apply in respect of companies.528 The exception to the general rule is assets that are received or liabilities that are incurred by the Umbrella OEIC on behalf of its sub-funds in order to enable the operation of those sub-funds and which are not attributable to any particular sub-fund may be allocated between the sub-funds in a manner which the umbrella company considers is fair to shareholders.

As discussed above, in respect of Umbrella OEICs, a limitation of the liabilities of a sub-fund is effected by operation of law529. Furthermore, any provision of an agreement or contract entered into by an Umbrella OEIC which is inconsistent with the principle of limited recourse is void as a matter of law530. Therefore, any provision of an ISDA Master Agreement or Credit Support Document that provides that the liabilities of one sub-fund of an Umbrella OEIC may be satisfied from the assets of another sub-fund of the same Umbrella OEIC will be inconsistent with the PCC Regime, and thus void.

Umbrella OEICs have not been permitted to enter into any agreement or contract which is inconsistent with the principle of limited recourse since 21 December 2011.

Umbrella OEICs – Insolvency Proceedings

For the reasons given above, each sub-fund of an Umbrella OEIC may be wound up separately under the insolvency procedure for Open-Ended Investment Companies as set out above subject to certain modifications that are not relevant to the issues we are considering in this Annex 15 and the above conclusions in respect of an Open-Ended Investment Company therefore apply in respect of the winding up of an individual sub-fund.

526 We have not considered any other form of scheme that may be applicable to an Open-Ended Investment Company such as a merger by scheme of arrangement under the Undertakings for Collective Investment in Transferable Securities Regulations 2011, SI 2011/1613. 527 SI 2011/3049. 528 The OEIC Regulations, regs 11A(5) and (6). 529 Regulation 3 of the 2011 Regulations creating inter alia a Regulation 11A in the OEIC Regulations. 530 ibid, reg 11A (3).

272

The provisions of the OEIC Regulations addressing schemes of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006 were not amended when the PCC Regime was introduced and the relevant provisions simply refer to an Open-Ended Investment Company. An Umbrella OEIC is a form of Open-Ended Investment Company and therefore could be subject to a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006.

Section 5 of the ISDA Master Agreement was not drafted with an umbrella structure in mind. We therefore recommend that parties contracting with an Umbrella OEIC clarify that Bankruptcy under Section 5 of the ISDA Master Agreement would be triggered if the events occurred only in respect of the relevant sub-fund and not the Umbrella OEIC as a whole.

1. Security Documents531

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 15 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex, we are of the view that our analysis relating to the enforceability against a Security Collateral Provider:

(i) of the Non-IM Security Documents in Part III.3 of this memorandum;

(ii) of the IM Security Documents in Parts IV.3, IV.4 and IV.5 of this memorandum; and

(iii) of the Clearing System IM Documents in Parts V.3, V.4 and V.5 of this memorandum,

would apply in circumstances where the Security Collateral Provider is an Open-Ended Investment Company, subject to the following:

(a) the Registration Provisions will not apply because an Open-Ended Investment Company is not an English Company;

(b) on the basis that the administration provisions in Part II of the Insolvency Act 1986 are not applicable to an Open-Ended Investment Company, our answers to the questions in Parts III.3, IV.3 and V.3 of this memorandum which relate to administration should be disregarded. The same is true of CVAs (and so, for example, our explanation in the body of this memorandum of the "eligible company" moratorium under the Insolvency Act 2000 is not relevant to an Open-Ended Investment Company); and

(c) in respect of an Umbrella OEIC subject to the requirements that (i) a separate ISDA Master Agreement and related Credit Support Document(s) be entered into in respect of each sub-fund which in each case clearly identifies the relevant sub-fund; and (ii) each Transaction with the Umbrella OEIC is allocated to the ISDA Master Agreement that has been entered into in respect of the relevant sub-fund.

531 Note that COLL 5.5.7(3) provides that none of the scheme property can be mortgaged. However, COLL 5.5.7(4) includes a carve out for lending, depositing, pledging or charging scheme property for margin requirements. As flagged above at Part I.2 of this memorandum, we do not consider regulatory issues relating to dealings with Counterparties considered in this memorandum. However, for completeness, we briefly note here that there is a risk that a Collateral Taker may become a delegate of the depositary of investment funds considered in this memorandum in respect of Collateral (or the proceeds of enforcement thereof) provided by the Collateral Provider pursuant to a Credit Support Document. The relevant analysis will be fact dependent and vary according to the nature of the Credit Support Document and the method for and processes around security enforcement by the Collateral Taker as well as the jurisdictions involved. Accordingly, the Collateral Taker may need to be appropriately authorised and regulated.

273

2. Transfer Annexes

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 15 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 15, we are of the view that our conclusions in Part VI.3 of this memorandum would apply to an Open-Ended Investment Company.

In respect of an Umbrella OEIC, the following analysis is subject to the requirements that (i) a separate ISDA Master Agreement and Transfer Annex be entered into in respect of each sub- fund which in each case clearly identifies the relevant sub-fund and (ii) each Transaction with the Umbrella OEIC is allocated to the ISDA Master Agreement that has been entered into in respect of the relevant sub-fund.

Subject to the above, if an Open-Ended Investment Company or a sub-fund thereof were wound up as an "unregistered company" under section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986, then, in our view, the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against that Open-Ended Investment Company or sub-fund for the reasons we give in Part III.3(3)(a) of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to an English Company on the basis that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement do not involve contractual set-off (other than to the limited extent that it includes Unpaid Amounts owed by either party that became payable prior to the operation of Section 6(c)(ii) of the ISDA Master Agreement, as discussed in the ISDA Netting Opinion) but simply represent an accounting of rights and liabilities under a single agreement following the designation or deemed occurrence of an Early Termination Date (sometimes referred to as the "flawed asset" approach to close-out netting).

If, however, the court were to construe the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement as operating by way of contractual set-off rather than pursuant to the single agreement (or "flawed asset") approach described above, we also consider that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against the Open- Ended Investment Company or sub-fund thereof for the reasons set out in Part III.3(3)(a) of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to an English Company.

In addition to the arguments above, if the Transfer Annex forms part of a financial collateral arrangement under the FCA Regulations as discussed in Part II above, regulation 12 provides that a close-out netting provision shall, subject to paragraph (2), take effect in accordance with its terms notwithstanding that the collateral-provider or collateral-taker under the arrangement is subject to winding-up proceedings or reorganisation measures.

If an Open-Ended Investment Company or a sub-fund thereof were to enter into a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006, the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against the Open-Ended Investment Company on the same basis as the close-out netting provisions would be enforceable against an English Company, as set out in Part III.3(3)(d) of the ISDA Netting Opinion.

Since the Transfer Annexes rely for their effectiveness on the inclusion of the Credit Support Balance or Credit Support Balance (VM), as applicable, within the scope of the close-out netting provisions in Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement, we are of the view that an English court would find the title transfer collateral arrangement constituted by the relevant Transfer Annex is enforceable against an Open-Ended Investment Company in the event of insolvency proceedings in respect of it in England.

274

ANNEX 16

ENGLISH INVESTMENT FUND – TRUSTEE OF AN AUTHORISED UNIT TRUST

In this Annex 16, we set out our views on the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against the Trustee of an Authorised Unit Trust532 in the event that insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of the Trustee or a Trust Insolvency occurs in respect of the Authorised Unit Trust.

Application of general trust law to Authorised Unit Trusts

This Annex 16 should be read together with the analysis of Trustees and English Trusts elsewhere in this memorandum, in particular in Part I.2, Appendix D and Annex 5. That analysis applies to the Trustee of an Authorised Unit Trust, as supplemented by this Annex 16.

At Part I.2, we set out our assumptions regarding the form of Trustee considered in this memorandum. In relation to an Authorised Unit Trust we assume that the Trustee is an English Company, an English Bank or an English Investment Firm. Due to the inclusion of the latter two entity-types, the application of the general trusts analysis contained elsewhere in this memorandum to Authorised Unit Trusts and their Trustees, should also be read in conjunction with the analysis at Annexes 1 and 2 of this memorandum concerning, respectively, English Banks and English Investment Firms, which would also be relevant to an English Bank or English Investment Firm acting as Trustee. In relation to the application of mandatory insolvency set-off pursuant to the additional insolvency proceedings applicable to English Banks and English Investment Firms, the analysis is subject to the issues regarding mutuality discussed in Annex 5.

The application of the SRR in this context is far from clear but we note, in relation to the property transfer powers, that pursuant to section 34(7) of the Banking Act, in circumstances where a property transfer instrument makes provision in respect of property held on trust, it may provide for certain other matters in respect of the trust, including removal or alteration of the terms of the trust. Article 7A of the Partial Property Safeguards Order provides that, in the context of a partial property transfer, these powers may be used only to the extent "necessary or expedient" for the purpose of transferring the interest of the relevant bank in, or the relevant power, rights or obligations of such entity in respect of, the relevant property held on trust. The Banking Act SRR Code of Practice indicates that the Authorities will act consistently with this limitation in the context of a whole property transfer as well. The Banking Act SRR Code of Practice states that the powers under section 34(7) may "only be used to the extent necessary to facilitate the transfer of property held on trust, any trust property held by the bank to the custody of the new trustee, and where relevant, the bank's role as trustee in respect of any property. The authorities will also take steps to ensure, wherever possible that all property held subject to any particular trust will be transferred together."

Moreover, amendments have been made to the Banking Act such that section 34(8) now repeats the Partial Property Safeguards Order limitation. While the scope of what might be considered by the Authorities to be necessary or expedient for the specified purposes is not clear, the restrictions referred to above provide support for the view that the trust modification powers are not intended to be used to deprive relevant trust beneficiaries of vested proprietary rights. We note that the House of Lords' debate in respect of the trust modification powers is consistent with this as such debate suggests that the intention behind the relevant provision of the Banking Act was that it be used to enhance legal certainty and to allow a more refined and proportionate approach. Accordingly, the exercise of the property transfer powers together with the trust modification powers would not

532 By unit trust scheme we mean a single trust created in favour of a single defined pool of beneficiaries rather than a scheme that is an umbrella (as such term is used in COLL).

275

therefore necessarily deprive a counterparty of its indirect right of recourse to the assets of an English Trust.

It remains to be seen, however, how the trust modification powers will be used in practice. In any event, as discussed in Annex 1, the operation of the Credit Support Documents is safeguarded by the Partial Property Safeguards Order in the context of a partial property transfer.

UCITS authorised schemes, non UCITS retail schemes and qualified investor schemes

An Authorised Unit Trust is a collective investment scheme for purposes of Part XVII (sections 235 – 284) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000. Under section 247 of the Act, the FCA has authority to make rules for Authorised Unit Trusts. This power has been exercised and the relevant rules can be found in COLL. The rules in COLL distinguish between various categories of collective investment scheme. An Authorised Unit Trust might, therefore, be a UCITS authorised scheme (that is, subject to rules consistent with the UCITS Directive533), a non-UCITS retail scheme or a non-retail scheme (otherwise known as a "qualified investor scheme").

Our conclusions regarding the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against the Trustee of an Authorised Unit are not affected by whether the Authorised Unit Trust is a UCITS authorised scheme, non-UCITS retail scheme or a non-retail scheme (qualified investor scheme).

Investment manager for the Trustee of an Authorised Unit Trust

In practice, it is likely that a party will enter into an ISDA Master Agreement, a Credit Support Document and each Transaction under that ISDA Master Agreement, with an investment manager acting as agent for the Trustee of an Authorised Unit Trust rather than directly with the Trustee. The investment manager will have been appointed by the Trustee pursuant to a power to do so in the trust deed for the Authorised Unit Trust, and subject to any applicable requirements of the trust deed. The terms of the investment manager's appointment and the scope of its authority as agent will be determined by an investment management agreement between the investment manager and the Trustee.

Provided that the investment manager has been validly appointed and is acting within the scope of its authority in entering into an ISDA Master Agreement, a Credit Support Document and each Transaction with a party, and in performing any obligations of the Trustee on behalf of the Authorised Unit Trust, then the Credit Support Document will form part of a contractual relationship between the party and the Trustee directly. A failure by the investment manager to perform an obligation of the Trustee under the Credit Support Document will constitute a failure to perform by the Trustee in just the same manner as if the Trustee had been dealing directly with the party.

The commencement of insolvency proceedings in relation to the investment manager will normally effect a revocation of its authority to act as agent of the Trustee or to continue to perform the obligations of the Trustee after the effective date of such revocation, but will not otherwise affect the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against the Trustee.

Our analysis of the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against the Trustee of an Authorised Unit Trust is not affected by whether the Trustee has entered into the Credit Support Documents directly with the other party or through an investment manager acting as agent. Therefore we do not need to give further consideration to the role of the investment manager in this Annex 16.

533 Directive 2009/65/EC on the coordination of laws, regulations and administrative provisions relating to undertakings for collective investment in transferable securities (UCITS).

276

Investment Bank Special Administration

The Investment Bank (Amendment of Definition) and Special Administration (Amendment) Regulations 2017, amend the definition of "investment bank" for the purposes of sections 232 to 236 of the Banking Act to include an institution which has permission under Part 4A of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 to carry on the regulated activity specified by article 51ZB of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Regulated Activities) Order 2001 (acting as trustee or depositary of a UCITS) or article 51ZD of that Order (acting as trustee or depositary of an AIF). Accordingly, the Trustee of an Authorised Unit Trust may now be subject to Investment Bank Special Administration in addition to the insolvency proceedings that may be commenced in respect of an English Company as described in Part III.1(4) of the ISDA Netting Opinion (please refer to Annex 2 of this memorandum for details in respect of Investment Bank Special Administration). The discussion of mutuality for insolvency set-off purposes at Annex 5 should be construed mutatis mutandis to apply to Investment Bank Special Administration in the context of the Trustee of an Authorised Unit Trust becoming subject to such insolvency proceeding.

COLL 7.4

For completeness we briefly consider the procedure set out at chapter 7.4 of COLL. COLL 7.4 deals with the circumstances and manner in which an Authorised Unit Trust is to be wound up or a sub- fund of an Authorised Unit Trust is to be terminated. An Authorised Unit Trust may be subject to the procedure at COLL 7.4 in the case of a Trust Insolvency when the Authorised Unit Trust is being wound up, although the trigger for its application will not be the Trust Insolvency directly. In our view, the procedure in COLL 7.4 would be followed when an Authorised Unit Trust is being wound up in a Trust Insolvency.

In order to wind up an Authorised Unit Trust under COLL 7.4, notice is to be given to the FCA and the FCA will approve the winding up. Upon the commencement of a winding up, (i) unitholders must be notified (this can also occur prior to winding up commencing), (ii) normal business must cease, (iii) the Trustee must realise the assets (if any), (iv) all liabilities and costs of the winding up must be paid, (v) the units cancelled and (vi) proceeds distributed to unitholders.534 Within 4 months of the final accounting period the manager or Trustee must send an annual log report to the FCA and make this available to unitholders. Upon completion of the winding up of the Authorised Unit Trust, the Trustee or manager must request the FCA to revoke the authorisation order of the Authorised Unit Trust. There are no mandatory set-off rules that apply if an Authorised Unit Trust is wound up under COLL 7.4.

We are of the view that nothing in COLL 7.4 would affect the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against the Trustee of an Authorised Unit Trust. A winding up of the Authorised Unit Trust under COLL 7.4 would not, however, fall within the Section 5(a)(vii) (Bankruptcy) Event of Default in the ISDA Master Agreement. Accordingly, we recommend that an additional Event of Default be added to the Schedule to the ISDA Master Agreement providing that the commencement of a winding up under COLL 7.4 in relation to the Authorised Unit Trust will constitute an Event of Default in relation to the Trustee.

Security Documents535 and Transfer Annexes

Although Authorised Unit Trusts are heavily regulated, subject to the additional analysis in this Annex 16, the insolvency proceedings in respect of the Trustee of the Authorised Unit Trust or the consequences of a Trust Insolvency are determined by the Trustee's legal form (i.e. an English

534 For an Authorised Unit Trust which is a relevant pension scheme, payments must not be made to unitholders in the Authorised Unit Trust, the realisation proceeds having to be paid by the trustee in accordance with the trust deed. 535 See note 531 above.

277

Company, an English Bank or an English Investment Firm) and the status of the Authorised Unit Trust as an English Trust (although, as noted in our answer to question 20 in Part III, the Recast Insolvency Regulation does not apply to collective investment schemes).

Therefore the special regulatory regime that applies to an Authorised Unit Trust under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 has no material effect on the analysis or conclusions in Annex 5, except that consideration should be given to the application of COLL 7.4 in respect of the Authorised Unit Trust and also the possibility of Investment Bank Special Administration in respect of the Trustee.536 In addition, as we have assumed for the purposes of this Annex 16 that the Trustee may be an English Bank or an English Investment Firm, further analysis is relevant to those entity-types as referred to above.

536 In respect of schemes of arrangement, we have not considered any form of scheme that may be applicable to an Authorised Unit Trust such as a merger by scheme of arrangement under the Undertakings for Collective Investment in Transferable Securities Regulations 2011.

278

ANNEX 17

ENGLISH PARTNERSHIP

In this Annex 17, we set out our views on the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents against an English Partnership in the event that insolvency proceedings are commenced in England in respect of the English Partnership.

An English Partnership contracts through the agency of its partners and, in the case of a Limited Partnership, through its general partner.537 As discussed at Part I.2(c) of this memorandum, we assume that each of the individual partners in the General Partnership and the general and limited partners in the Limited Partnership are English Companies. We also assume that the English Partnership is not an agricultural partnership that has granted an agricultural charge to any creditor. Finally, we assume that legal title to all of the assets of the Limited Partnership vests in the general partner of the Limited Partnership.

Subject to the more detailed discussion below, the types of insolvency proceeding that may be commenced in England in respect of an English Partnership are a winding up538, administration or the entry into of a partnership voluntary arrangement. For the avoidance of doubt, in this Annex, with the exception of the discussion below concerning the effect of concurrent insolvency proceedings, we do not consider insolvency proceedings in relation to one or more partners of the English Partnership. We assume that no petition for an administration order against the English Partnership was presented before 1 July 2005. The reason for this assumption is because the rules described below in this Annex relating to the administration of an English Partnership apply only where the petition for the administration order is presented on or after 1 July 2005. Prior administrations are governed by alternative rules.

English Partnerships and the grant of security

An English Partnership is not a legal entity under English law and cannot own assets in its own name. It is therefore not technically correct to state that the English Partnership (as an entity) grants security. We note that, in general, there is very little English case law or commentary containing an in-depth analysis of how security is granted or enforced over partnership assets and there are conflicting views on the manner in which partnership assets are held.

It is arguable that the individual partners are not the beneficial owners of the English Partnership's assets; they merely have a right to call for an account of their proportionate share of the assets of the English Partnership after liabilities have been met. This means that, while the partnership is continuing, the partners have no immediate proprietary interest in the partnership but merely a future right to their proportionate share.

However, in our opinion, the correct view is that (i) in the case of a General Partnership, a partner, with the authorisation of the other partners, and (ii) in the case of a Limited Partnership, the general partner, with the authorisation of the limited partners, grants security over each partner's beneficial interest in the English Partnership's assets the subject of the security (i.e. the Collateral under the Security Documents). This is consistent with the Australian decision in Bailey v Manos Breeder

537 A limited partner has no power to bind the firm and may not take part in the management of the partnership business and, if he takes part in the management of the partnership business, a limited partner becomes liable as though he were a general partner for as long as such participation continues (Limited Partnership Act 1907, s 6(1)). 538 For the purposes of this Annex, "winding up" is used to denote winding up proceedings in respect of the English Partnership under the Insolvency Act 1986. "Winding up", when used (outside this memorandum) in a non-insolvency context in relation to a partnership, denotes the process whereby the affairs of the partnership are sorted out after the partnership has been dissolved.

279

Farms Pty Ltd.539 For simplicity in this Annex we refer to the grant of security by the English Partnership.

Registration of security interests against an English Partnership

The discussion of the application of the Registration Provisions below is subject to the application of the FCA Regulations as discussed in Part II of this memorandum.

(a) Registration against a General Partnership

In the case of a General Partnership the position with regards the need to register a security interest against such General Partnership has not been definitively settled. However, in the case of a General Partnership comprised entirely of partners that are English Companies, it is common for security to be registered against each individual partner in accordance with the Registration Provisions.540

(b) Registration against a Limited Partnership

On the basis that the Limited Partnership will enter into the relevant Security Document through its general partner as agent, we are of the view that the Registration Provisions should be complied with as the statutory registration regime applicable to such general partner. While it is arguable that the analysis below in relation to failure to register against the limited partners is equally applicable to the general partner, we are of the view that it is more important for the general partner to comply with the Registration Provisions. This is in part because (unlike the limited partners) the general partner holds direct legal title to the Limited Partnership's assets and is the only entity with the legal capacity to enter into the Security Document on behalf of the Limited Partnership.

As discussed above, we are of the view that the partners in a Limited Partnership are the beneficial owners of the Limited Partnership's assets. It follows that security created by a Limited Partnership is security created over each partner's beneficial interest in the Limited Partnership's assets.541 Further to our assumption that each limited partner is an English Company, such security should be registered against each limited partner in accordance with the Registration Provisions.

We note, however, that there is an alternative view that a failure to register (if registration is required) has no adverse consequences for the Collateral Taker. Under the Companies Act 2006, failure to register certain security against a company renders the unregistered security void as against a liquidator, an administrator or the creditors of that company. However, under English insolvency law, the winding up or administration of a partnership is governed by a separate regime to that affecting the partners in the partnership (discussed further below). Generally speaking, that regime requires the assets of the partnership initially to be treated separately to the assets of the partners. The assets of the partnership will be applied in satisfaction of the liabilities of the partnership with secured creditors taking priority over unsecured creditors (after, in the case of floating charges, payment of expenses542 and

539 [1990] ACLC 1119. 540 This is the prudent approach to cover the eventuality that each partner were, for the purposes of the Registration Provisions, regarded as entitled to a direct interest in each partnership asset (see Roderick I'Anson Banks, Lindley & Banks on Partnership (20th edn, Sweet and Maxwell 2017), para 11.15). 541 By virtue of section 5 of the Partnership Act 1890, which states that any partner acting within his authority binds his co-partners, the entry by an individual partner of the General Partnership or a general partner of the Limited Partnership into the Security Document can be said to encumber each partner's interest in the partnership property. 542 Where concurrent proceedings are presented against one or more partners, the assets of the partnership can be used to pay the expenses of the insolvent partner(s)' estate: see section 175 of the Insolvency Act 1986 as amended by the Insolvent Partnerships Order (as defined below).

280

satisfaction of preferential creditors). The fact that the relevant security over those partnership assets has not been so registered against the partners themselves, should not, if this alternative view is followed, render that security void as against a liquidator, an administrator or the creditors of the Limited Partnership.

In any event, we are of the view that the Registration Provisions should be complied with in respect of the limited partners of the Limited Partnership. The merits of the alternative view outlined above are questionable.

Insolvency proceedings in respect of an English Partnership – concurrent insolvency proceedings543

An English Partnership is not a separate legal entity, even though it is treated as such for the purposes of certain insolvency proceedings under the Insolvency Act 1986. The partners themselves may be subject to separate insolvency proceedings and, to the extent the individual partners would be subject to insolvency proceedings in England, as opposed to any other jurisdiction, the corporate insolvency regimes under the Insolvency Act 1986 would (subject to certain amendments under the Insolvent Partnerships Order, defined and discussed further below) apply to the partners upon their insolvency. There are also instances where the insolvency proceedings of the English Partnership and the insolvency proceedings of one or more of its partners may not be treated as isolated insolvency proceedings, but may be conducted concurrently, with, among other things, the creditors of the English Partnership having the right to look to the assets of the partners to meet any shortfall due to them. In certain limited circumstances (referred to below), creditors of the partners may be able to look to the assets of the English Partnership in such concurrent insolvency proceedings to meet any shortfall due to them.

The general rule is that, in the concurrent insolvency proceedings referred to above, the insolvent estates of each of the English Partnership and any of its insolvent partners are treated as separate so that the creditors of the English Partnership (treating it for these purposes as if it were a legal entity) will in the first instance be paid out of the assets of the English Partnership and the creditors of the insolvent partner will be paid out of the assets of the insolvent partner. If there is a shortfall in the assets of the English Partnership, the creditors of the English Partnership may have recourse to the assets of each insolvent partner. In the reverse scenario, if there is a shortfall in the assets of an insolvent partner, the creditors of that partner will only have recourse to the assets of the English Partnership if there is a surplus in the insolvency proceedings in respect of the English Partnership and there is a distribution to partners out of the estate of the English Partnership, having paid the creditors of the English Partnership in full.

In the case of an English Partnership which is a Limited Partnership, it is likely that the Limited Partnership will comprise:

(a) one general partner which is an English Company which is set up solely for the purposes of acting as the general partner of the Limited Partnership and which has no substantial assets; and

(b) one or more limited partners.

The liability of a limited partner to creditors of the Limited Partnership is limited to the capital advanced by the limited partner to the Limited Partnership, which is usually a nominal sum.544 In the

543 The following analysis in relation to concurrent insolvency of the English Partnership and an individual partner of that English Partnership is only relevant to the extent that the individual partner is subject to insolvency proceedings in England. We do not comment for the purpose of this memorandum on any insolvency proceeding in respect of an individual partner which takes place in any jurisdiction other than England. 544 In practice it is common for limited partners to only make nominal capital contributions, with any further investments made by way of interest-free loans or advances, which may be withdrawn without infringing the prohibition on withdrawing capital.

281

case of a private fund limited partnership, each limited partner is under no obligation to contribute any capital or property to the partnership unless otherwise agreed between the partners and is not liable for the debts or obligations of the firm beyond the amount of the partnership property which is available to the general partners to meet such debts and obligations.545 It is therefore likely that, upon concurrent insolvency proceedings in respect of the partners, there would be minimal assets to satisfy any claim which has not been satisfied through the insolvency proceedings in respect of the Limited Partnership.

Insolvency proceedings in respect of an English Partnership – jurisdiction for insolvency proceedings

The Insolvent Partnerships Order 1994546 (as amended, the Insolvent Partnerships Order) applies to any partnership that the courts of England have jurisdiction to wind up.

(a) Winding up or liquidation

Articles 7 to 10 of the Insolvent Partnerships Order deal with the jurisdiction to wind up an English Partnership in England by amending relevant sections of the Insolvency Act 1986 to the extent that those sections apply to a partnership.547 By the applicable provision of the Insolvent Partnerships Order, the relevant provisions of the Insolvency Act 1986 (as amended by the Insolvent Partnerships Order) are subject to the Recast Insolvency Regulation548. We have assumed that the COMI (for the purposes of the Recast Insolvency Regulation) of the English Partnership is in England. Accordingly, the English Partnership may be subject to a compulsory liquidation in England as a main insolvency proceeding under the Recast Insolvency Regulation. Articles 7, 8, 9 and 10 of the Insolvent Partnerships Order provide that the provisions of the Insolvency Act 1986 relating to the winding up of an unregistered company shall apply to an insolvent partnership subject to the modifications made by the Insolvent Partnership Order to the liquidation procedure as it applies to insolvent partnerships.549 An insolvent partnership cannot be wound up in England voluntarily.

Noting our assumption regarding COMI, section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986 (as amended by the Insolvent Partnerships Order) only permits the winding up of an insolvent partnership on a creditor's petition if the firm has, or at any time had, in England and Wales either (a) a principal place of business or (b) a place of business at which business is or has been carried on in the course of which the debt (or part of the debt) arose which forms the basis of the petition for winding up of the partnership. Only the former condition applies in the case of a member's petition. In the case of a creditor's or a member's petition, a firm may not be wound up under the Insolvency Act 1986 if the business of the partnership has not been carried on in England and Wales at any time in the period of 3 years ending with the day on which the winding-up petition is presented.

545 Limited Partnerships Act 1907, s 4(2B). 546 SI 1994/2421. 547 The applicable article of the Insolvent Partnerships Order depends on the identity of the person presenting the relevant winding up petition and whether concurrent petitions are issued against the partnership's members. Article 7 to the Insolvent Partnerships Order sets out the jurisdiction of the courts in England to wind up an insolvent partnership as an unregistered company where the winding up petition is presented by a creditor of the partnership or other third party other than a partner and no concurrent petition is presented. Articles 8, 9 and 10 of the Insolvent Partnerships Order respectively set out the jurisdiction of the courts in England to wind up an insolvent partnership as an unregistered company where the winding up petition is presented by a creditor of the partnership or other third party other than a partner and concurrent petitions are presented against one or more members, where the winding up petition is presented by a member and there is no concurrent petition and where the winding up petition is presented by a member and there are concurrent petitions. Each article gives effect to one or more schedules to the Insolvent Partnerships Order, each of which modifies the relevant provisions of the Insolvency Act 1986 to the extent that those sections apply to a partnership. The basis of the court's jurisdiction is the same in each case, as set out above. 548 We note that the references to the "EC Regulation" in the Insolvent Partnerships Order have not been updated to refer to the Recast Insolvency Regulation. However, such references should, in our view, be interpreted as references to the Recast Insolvency Regulation. 549 The modifications include extending the definition of an "unregistered company" in section 220 of the Insolvency Act 1986 to include any insolvent partnership.

282

If an English Partnership is subject to winding up proceedings in England, the English Partnership will be wound up as an unregistered company under section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986, subject to the modifications of the relevant provisions made by the Insolvent Partnerships Order. Under section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986, an "unregistered company" may be wound up as if (broadly speaking) it were an English Company. Pursuant to Article 18 and Schedule 10 of the Insolvent Partnerships Order, the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 apply "as from time to time in force and with such modifications as the context requires for the purpose of giving effect to the provisions of the [Insolvency Act 1986] … which are applied by this Order". Accordingly, insolvency set-off will be applied where a firm is wound up as an unregistered company, with or without concurrent petitions against one or more partners.550

(b) Administration and partnership voluntary arrangement

Under Article 1(2)(a) and Article 6 of the Insolvent Partnerships Order, an administration order may be made in respect of an insolvent partnership which the courts in England have jurisdiction to wind up (as to which, see the discussion above). Likewise, under Article 1(2)(a) and Article 4 of the Insolvent Partnerships Order, a voluntary arrangement may be entered into by an insolvent partnership which the courts in England have jurisdiction to wind up.

On the assumption that the COMI of the English Partnership is in England, an English Partnership may therefore be subject to administration under Article 3 of the Recast Insolvency Regulation, subject to the modifications made by the Insolvent Partnerships Order to the administration procedure as it applies to insolvent partnerships. On the same assumption, an English Partnership may also be subject to a partnership voluntary arrangement, subject to the modifications made by the Insolvent Partnerships Order to the voluntary arrangement procedure as it applies to insolvent partnerships.

Again, the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 are stated to apply to an administration or voluntary arrangement in respect of an English Partnership by virtue of Article 18 and Schedule 10 of the Insolvent Partnerships Order.

Avoidance of floating charges

English Partnerships are "non-natural persons" and capable of entering into security financial collateral arrangements and, therefore, the FCA Regulations should, in our view, apply to an English Partnership.

Although, regulation 10 of the FCA Regulations makes explicit reference to section 245 of the Insolvency Act 1986 (avoidance of certain floating charges), in our view there are strong arguments that, in the context of an English Partnership, this should be construed as a reference to section 245 as applied by the Insolvent Partnerships Order.

Firstly, section 245 of the Insolvency Act 1986 does apply to English Partnerships; it is simply that it is applied by virtue of the Insolvent Partnerships Order (rather than directly under the Insolvency Act 1986). Secondly, Part 3 of the FCA Regulations (which deals with the modifications to insolvency law and includes regulation 10) includes other provisions which address the effect of insolvency in general terms (rather than by the disapplication of a specific provision of legislation). These provisions are drafted to refer to "winding-up or reorganisation measures" and the term "reorganisation measures" is defined to include the "administration of a partnership within the

550 See I’Anson Banks (n 540), para 27-75.

283

meaning of [the Insolvency Act 1986]".551 It would be odd indeed if, within Part 3 of the FCA Regulations, certain modifications to insolvency law applied to partnerships but others did not. Thirdly, there is no logical reason why regulation 10 should not apply to an English Partnership as it does to an English Company and a purposive approach to interpreting the FCA Regulations would be that any provision disapplying an obligation or procedural requirement in respect of an English Company should be applied mutatis mutandis to an English Partnership in order that the statutory regime in relation to financial collateral is largely the same for both entities.

Accordingly, based on the analysis above, we consider there are strong arguments for concluding that the disapplication of the avoidance provision would apply to an English Partnership.

Stays on security enforcement

Similar arguments apply in relation to the application of regulation 8 of the FCA Regulations, which disapplies, among other things, the administration stay on enforcement of security in relation to a security financial collateral arrangement. The stay is set out at paragraph 43(2) of Schedule B1 of the Insolvency Act 1986, which applies to an English Partnerships by virtue of article 6 of and Schedule 2 to the Insolvent Partnerships Order. Regulation 8 of the FCA Regulations also disapplies the moratorium on enforcement of security in respect of an "eligible company" which proposes to enter into a voluntary arrangement under sub-paragraph 12(1)(g) of Schedule A1 to the Insolvency Act 1986 (as amended by the provisions of the Insolvency Act 2000). A modified version of Schedule A1 to the Insolvency Act 1986 (including the equivalent moratorium) is applied in respect of an English Partnership by article 4(1) of and Schedule 1 to the Insolvent Partnerships Order. Regulation 8(5) of the FCA Regulations expressly disapplies sub-paragraph 12(1)(g) of Schedule A1.

Our analysis as to whether regulation 8 would apply to an English Partnership mirrors our analysis in relation to regulation 10. In addition, in relation to regulation 8, the Explanatory Note to the FCA Regulations states that "Regulations 8 and 9 prevent certain provisions of the Insolvency Act 1986…from applying to financial collateral arrangements. The provisions which are disapplied are those which prevent enforcement of security interests when a company or partnership is in administration proceedings or subject to a voluntary arrangement…" (emphasis added).

1. Security Documents552

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 17 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 17 (including the application of the Registration Provisions to individual partners rather than the English Partnership, as discussed above), we are of the view that our analysis relating to the enforceability against a Security Collateral Provider:

(i) of the Non-IM Security Documents in Part III.3 of this memorandum;

(ii) of the IM Security Documents in Parts IV.3, IV.4 and IV.5 of this memorandum; and

(iii) of the Clearing System IM Documents in Parts V.3, V.4 and V.5 of this memorandum,

would apply in circumstances where the Security Collateral Provider is an English Partnership.

551 An example is regulation 12 of the FCA Regulations in relation to the effectiveness of close-out netting provisions which refers to close-out netting applying notwithstanding "reorganisation measures". 552 See note 531 above.

284

2. Transfer Annexes

On the basis of the assumptions and subject to the qualifications in this memorandum as modified and supplemented by this Annex 17 and subject to the analysis set out in this Annex 17, we are of the view that our conclusions in Part VI.3 of this memorandum of issues relating to the enforceability of the Transfer Annexes would apply to an English Partnership.

If an English Partnership were wound up as an "unregistered company" under section 221 of the Insolvency Act 1986 or subject to administration, then, in our view, the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against that English Partnership for the reasons we give in Part III.3(3)(a) and (b) of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to an English Company on the basis that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement do not involve contractual set off (other than to the limited extent that it includes Unpaid Amounts owed by either party that became payable prior to the operation of Section 6(c)(ii) of the ISDA Master Agreement, as discussed in the ISDA Netting Opinion) but simply represent an accounting of rights and liabilities under a single agreement following the designation or deemed occurrence of an Early Termination Date (sometimes referred to as the "flawed asset" approach to close-out netting).

If, however, the court were to construe the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement as operating by way of contractual set off rather than pursuant to the single agreement (or "flawed asset") approach described above, we also consider that the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against the English Partnership for the reasons set out in Part III.3(3)(a) and (b) of the ISDA Netting Opinion in relation to an English Company.

In addition to the arguments above, if the Transfer Annex forms part of a financial collateral arrangement under the FCA Regulations, as discussed in Part II above, regulation 12 provides that a close-out netting provision shall, subject to paragraph (2), take effect in accordance with its terms notwithstanding that the collateral-provider or collateral-taker under the arrangement is subject to winding-up proceedings or reorganisation measures.

If the English Partnership were to enter into a partnership voluntary arrangement, the close- out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement would be enforceable against the English Partnership on the same basis as the close-out netting provisions would be enforceable against an English Company, as set out in Part III.3(3)(c) of the ISDA Netting Opinion.

Since the Transfer Annexes rely for their effectiveness on the inclusion of the Credit Support Balance or Credit Support Balance (VM), as applicable, within the scope of the close-out netting provisions in Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement, we are of the view that an English court would find the title transfer collateral arrangement constituted by the relevant Transfer Annex is enforceable against an English Partnership in the event of insolvency proceedings in respect of it in England.

285

ANNEX 18

BANK OF ENGLAND

In this Annex 18, we set out our views on the enforceability of the Credit Support Documents, excluding the IM Security Documents and the Clearing System IM Documents, against the Bank of England.

The Bank of England is a Chartered Corporation, having been established by a royal charter granted on 27 July 1694. The charter was supplemented by the Bank of England Act 1694 and has subsequently been amended and updated. The Bank of England acts as the Central Bank of the United Kingdom and therefore was established for and continues to serve a unique and important public purpose.

Although a Chartered Corporation would normally be liable to be wound up as an unregistered company under Part V of the Insolvency Act 1986, there is good authority for the view that a statutory corporation established under a public general Act of Parliament is not liable to be wound up as an unregistered company under the Insolvency Act 1986.553 We believe that this authority would be followed in relation to the Bank of England notwithstanding its status as a Chartered Corporation rather than a statutory corporation established under a public general Act of Parliament.

Accordingly, the conclusions and analysis at Parts III.3 and VI.3 of this memorandum as modified by Annex 9 will apply except that the discussion relating to the analysis of insolvency law will not be relevant.

If we are wrong and an English court would wind up the Bank of England as an unregistered company, then the conclusions and analysis at Parts III.3 and VI.3 of this memorandum as modified by Annex 9 in respect of Chartered Corporations other than the Bank of England will apply.

The Bank of England is a separate legal person from the Crown. It appears that the only express statutory immunity of the Bank of England is set out in the Banking Act. Section 244 of the Banking Act provides immunity to the Bank of England in its capacity as a monetary authority. "Immunity" in this context means immunity from liability in damages in respect of action or inaction, such that (subject to any common law immunity) the Bank of England would not be immune from an action for payment of a debt (including a net claim in respect of the ISDA Master Agreement) or another alternative remedy, such as an injunction.

Whether the Bank of England is entitled to immunity from jurisdiction under the common law is unclear. On a restrictive interpretation, if a central bank takes part in ordinary commercial transactions, as opposed to governmental acts, the central bank does not benefit from sovereign immunity. However, while this common law principle has historically been applied by the English courts in relation to central banks of other jurisdictions, there is no certainty as to whether or how it would be applied in respect of proceedings against the Bank of England. It is unclear whether the Bank of England can waive any immunity from jurisdiction it may have. The further question arises as to whether a judgment against the Bank of England (assuming such a judgment can be obtained) can be enforced against assets of the Bank of England in the United Kingdom. It is unclear whether the Bank of England would be entitled to claim immunity from recognition or enforcement under the common law or, if it could, whether it is able to waive such immunity.

Of course, the above discussion of immunity does not go to whether a party has a valid net claim under the ISDA Master Agreement (including Paragraph 6 of the Transfer Annex) against the Bank of

553 See note 8 and 455.

286

England. Immunity merely regulates the extent to which such party could enforce such a net claim. In relation to the Non-IM Security Documents, a counterparty would similarly not be precluded from enforcing the security granted to it by the Bank of England pursuant to the self-help remedies set out at Paragraph 8(a) of the Non-IM NY Annex or the 1995 Deed, as applicable, as these do not amount to judicial remedies.

Although not strictly speaking a legal issue, given the Bank of England's unique nature as the Central Bank of the United Kingdom, it is fair to point out that there is potentially a degree of political risk in dealing with the Bank of England that may be considered, relatively speaking, higher than in dealing with a private sector English Bank. Broadly the considerations that would be relevant are those discussed in Annex 19 in relation to the United Kingdom acting through Her Majesty's Treasury. As discussed in Annex 19, political risk does not strictly affect the principles outlined above.

287

ANNEX 19

THE UNITED KINGDOM ACTING THROUGH HER MAJESTY'S TREASURY

In this Annex 19, we set out our views on the enforceability of the Transfer Annexes against the United Kingdom (the Crown) acting through Her Majesty's Treasury.

Under section 5 of and Schedule 1 to the Interpretation Act 1978, "[t]he Treasury" means the Commissioners of Her Majesty's Treasury. The Treasury is a department of the government of the United Kingdom without separate legal personality. As such, a Transfer Annex entered into between a counterparty and the Treasury constitutes an agreement between the counterparty and the Crown.

As far as English law is concerned, there is no insolvency regime for the Crown or for the Treasury as a department of the Crown. In other words, it is not possible to institute formal insolvency proceedings against the Crown or against the Treasury in any English court. We are not aware of any jurisdiction that would apply its domestic insolvency regime to its own sovereign or would purport to apply it to a foreign sovereign, but even if there were such a jurisdiction, an English court would not recognise the effect of any foreign insolvency proceedings purportedly instituted against the Crown or the Treasury.

Accordingly, in respect of the Transfer Annexes, the analysis at Part VI.3 of this memorandum will apply except that given the nature of the fact pattern that we have been asked to analyse in this Annex, the discussion relating to (i) the Collateral Directive and the FCA Regulations in Part II and Part VI of this memorandum; and (ii) the analysis of insolvency law will not be relevant.

Without prejudice to the foregoing, an ISDA member contemplating entering into an ISDA Master Agreement and a Transfer Annex with the Crown acting through the Treasury may wish to bear the following additional points in mind:

1. Sovereign immunity

In relation to a Sovereign, the question naturally arises as to whether the Sovereign enjoys immunity from jurisdiction or immunity from execution. The considerations below apply to actions against the Crown in an English court.554

(a) Immunity from jurisdiction

In the United Kingdom, the principle that civil proceedings may be instituted against the Crown was established by the Crown Proceedings Act 1947, and any such proceedings are largely governed by that Act and by Part 66 of the Civil Procedure Rules 1998.

Prior to the Crown Proceedings Act 1947 coming into force, the Crown was recognised as being liable for a debt or for a breach of contract, but claims could only be enforced by a petition of right which needed the consent of the Crown. Section 1 of the Act abolished this requirement. In other words, the normal rules governing contractual liability apply to the Crown, conferring jurisdiction on the English courts in relation to civil proceedings against the Crown. These rules will therefore apply to an ISDA Master Agreement and the Transfer Annex between a party and the Crown acting through the Treasury.

Operating the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement and the default provisions in Paragraph 6 of the Transfer Annex in order to determine a net close out amount

554 The position in relation to a foreign Sovereign would be somewhat different. Foreign Sovereign counterparties do not fall within the scope of this memorandum.

288

under Section 6(e) of the ISDA Master Agreement in relation to the Crown following an Event of Default in relation to the Crown would not require the involvement of a court. However, if an English court were asked to consider the enforceability of this determination against the Crown acting through the Treasury, the English court would find that the determination was enforceable subject to the assumptions and qualifications in this memorandum and the assumptions and qualifications that apply in Part V of the ISDA Netting Opinion.

(b) Immunity from execution

In the case of a close-out amount payable by the Crown (calculated taking into account the Value of the Credit Support Balance or Credit Support Balance (VM) in respect of the Crown), a further question would arise as to whether a judgment against the Crown given by an English court could be enforced against assets of the Crown in the United Kingdom. Under the Crown Proceedings Act 1947, no process of enforcement, including injunctive relief and specific performance,555 can be invoked against the Crown. The waiver of immunity set out in Section 13(d) of the ISDA Master Agreement would therefore not have any effect for the purpose of enforcement. As the duty to comply with a court order is imposed by statute, it has been suggested that, in the unlikely event that the Crown did not honour the order, a mandatory order might be issued to compel the Chancellor of the Exchequer, as the relevant minister, to comply with his duty to pay the damages.556

2. Political risk

Inevitably when dealing with a Sovereign, including the Crown acting through the Treasury, a party will want to consider political risk. This is a large and complex topic, with a number of dimensions, of which the legal dimension is only one. Strictly speaking, political risk does not affect the principles outlined above.

It is, however, of course, possible that the Crown might repudiate its obligations under the ISDA Master Agreement or Transfer Annex in whole or in part. It could not do so lawfully under the current state of the law, but taking effective enforcement action against the Crown in those circumstances could be more difficult for political reasons than in relation to a private sector Counterparty.

Similarly, the Crown could purport to transfer its rights and/or novate its obligations under individual Transactions to other entities, most likely owned or controlled by the UK government, with the effect of disrupting the mutuality of obligations under the ISDA Master Agreement and altering the close-out calculation under Section 6(e) which would also affect the operation of the Transfer Annex.

We are not aware of any specific legislation currently in effect under which the Crown could take any of the above actions lawfully, but the risk always exists that the Crown could implement emergency legislation giving itself such powers. For instance in the aftermath of the collapse of Northern Rock, the Banking (Special Provisions) Act 2008 was passed on an emergency basis which conferred significant property transfer powers (among other powers) on the Treasury in relation to English banks. Similarly, the Crown could pass legislation retrospectively invalidating the ISDA Master Agreement or the Transfer Annex in whole or in part, including the close-out netting provisions of the ISDA Master Agreement which would impact the Transfer Annex.

555 The Crown Proceedings Act, s 21(1). 556 See William Wade and Christopher Forsyth, Administrative Law (11th edn, OUP 2014) 530.

289

These risks exist whenever a party is dealing with a Sovereign, and a party might prudently conclude that, in relation to the United Kingdom, the risk of the Crown taking any such action in relation to an existing agreement, in preference to honouring its obligations under such agreement in full, is remote, given the disastrous effect that any such action would have on its ability to access the financial markets or more generally on its reputation as a stable political democracy and leading industrialised nation. Furthermore, in the case of any legislative action that could be characterised as expropriating a party, the party could have redress against the United Kingdom under the European Convention on Human Rights.

Finally, instead of an act selectively affecting the ISDA Master Agreement or Transfer Annex between a party and the Crown (or a broader class of agreements of which the ISDA Master Agreement and Transfer Annex between that party and the Crown forms part), the Crown could declare a moratorium on repayment of its debt, impose exchange controls or take another general action that might affect its performance of its obligations under the ISDA Master Agreement or Transfer Annex. The legality of any such action would need to be considered in light of the specific action taken and the legislative basis for such action invoked in the particular case, but again these are risks of a political nature that may arise when dealing with a Sovereign or, indeed, with any party within a particular jurisdiction where a Sovereign may take such actions. Accordingly, while these risks may be borne in mind, it seems reasonable to assume that they are remote in relation to the United Kingdom.

290